P8000 Series Cartridge Ribbon Printer Administrator`s

P8000 Series Cartridge Ribbon Printer
Administrator’s Manual
READ THIS SOFTWARE LICENSE AGREEMENT BEFORE USING THIS PRINTER
Software License Agreement
Disclaimer of Warranties and Limitation of Remedies
CAREFULLY READ THE FOLLOWING TERMS AND
CONDITIONS BEFORE USING THIS PRINTER. USING THIS
PRINTER INDICATES YOUR ACCEPTANCE OF THESE
TERMS AND CONDITIONS. IF YOU DO NOT AGREE TO
THESE TERMS AND CONDITIONS, PROMPTLY RETURN
THE PRINTER AND ALL ACCOMPANYING HARDWARE
AND WRITTEN MATERIALS TO THE PLACE YOU
OBTAINED THEM, AND YOUR MONEY WILL BE
REFUNDED.
1.
THE PARTIES AGREE THAT ALL OTHER
WARRANTIES, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING
WARRANTIES OF FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR
PURPOSE AND MERCHANTABILITY ARE EXCLUDED.
Printronix, Inc. does not warrant that the functions
contained in the Software will meet your requirements or
that the operation of the Software will be uninterrupted or
error free. Printronix, Inc. reserves the right to make
changes and/or improvements in the Software without
notice at any time.
2.
To protect the proprietary rights of Printronix, Inc.,
you agree to maintain the Software Product and
other proprietary information concerning the
typefaces in strict confidence.
IN NO EVENT WILL PRINTRONIX, INC. BE LIABLE
FOR LOST PROFITS, LOST DATA, BUSINESS
INTERRUPTIONS, OR ANY OTHER DIRECT,
INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL
DAMAGES ARISING OUT OF THE USE OF OR
INABILITY TO USE THIS PRODUCT, EVEN IF
PRINTRONIX, INC. HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THE
POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES, OR ANY
DAMAGES CAUSED BY THE ABUSE OR
MANIPULATION OF THE SOFTWARE. SOME STATES
DO NOT ALLOW THE EXCLUSION OR LIMITATION OF
LIABILITY FOR CONSEQUENTIAL OR INCIDENTAL
DAMAGES, SO THE ABOVE LIMITATION MAY NOT
APPLY TO YOU.
3.
Printronix, Inc. will not be liable for any loss or damage
caused by delay in furnishing a Software Product or any
other performance under this Agreement.
b.
You agree not to duplicate or copy the Software
Product.
4.
c.
You shall not sublicense, sell, lease, or otherwise
transfer all or any portion of the Software Product
separate from the printer, without the prior written
consent of Printronix, Inc.
d.
You may not modify or prepare derivative works of
the Software Product.
Our entire liability and your exclusive remedies for our
liability of any kind (including liability for negligence
except liability for personal injury caused solely by our
negligence) for the Software Product covered by this
Agreement and all other performance or nonperformance
by us under or related to this Agreement are limited to the
remedies specified by this Agreement.
You may not transmit the Software Product over a
network, by telephone, or electronically using any
means; or reverse engineer, decompile or
disassemble the Software.
5.
California law governs this Agreement.
e.
Definitions.
“Software” shall mean the digitally encoded, machine-readable
data and program. The term “Software Product” includes the
Software resident in the printer and its documentation. The
Software Product is licensed (not sold) to you, and Printronix,
Inc. either owns or licenses from other vendors who own, all
copyright, trade secret, patent and other proprietary rights in
the Software Product.
License.
1.
2.
Authorized Use. You agree to accept a non-exclusive
license to use the Software resident in the printer solely
for your own customary business or personal purposes.
Restrictions.
a.
f.
3.
You agree to keep confidential and use your best
efforts to prevent and protect the contents of the
Software Product from unauthorized disclosure or
use.
Transfer. You may transfer the Software Product with the
printer, but only if the recipient agrees to accept the
terms and conditions of this Agreement. Your license is
automatically terminated if you transfer the Software
Product and printer.
Limited Software Product Warranty
Printronix, Inc. warrants that for ninety (90) days after delivery,
the Software will perform in accordance with specifications
published by Printronix, Inc. Printronix, Inc. does not warrant
that the Software is free from all bugs, errors and omissions.
Remedy
Your exclusive remedy and the sole liability of Printronix, Inc.
in connection with the Software is replacement of defective
software with a copy of the same version and revision level.
Termination of License Agreement
This License shall continue until terminated. This license may
be terminated by agreement between you and Printronix, Inc.
or by Printronix, Inc. If you fail to comply with the terms of this
License and such failure is not corrected within thirty (30) days
after notice. When this License is terminated, you shall return
to the place you obtained them, the printer and all copies of the
Software and documentation.
U.S. Government Restricted Rights
Use, duplication or disclosure by the Government is subject to
restrictions as set forth in the Rights in Technical Data and
Computer Software clause at FAR 242.227-7013, subdivision
(b) (3) (ii) or subparagraph (c) (1) (ii), as appropriate. Further
use, duplication or disclosure is subject to restrictions
applicable to restricted rights software as set forth in FAR
52.227-19 (c) (2).
Acknowledgement of Terms and Conditions
YOU ACKNOWLEDGE THAT YOU HAVE READ THIS
AGREEMENT, UNDERSTAND IT, AND AGREE TO BE
BOUND BY ITS TERMS AND CONDITIONS. NEITHER
PARTY SHALL BE BOUND BY ANY STATEMENT OR
REPRESENTATION NOT CONTAINED IN THIS
AGREEMENT. NO CHANGE IN THIS AGREEMENT IS
EFFECTIVE UNLESS WRITTEN AND SIGNED BY
PROPERLY AUTHORIZED REPRESENTATIVES OF EACH
PARTY. BY USING THIS PRINTER, YOU AGREE TO
ACCEPT THE TERMS AND CONDITIONS OF THIS
AGREEMENT.
Administrator’s Manual
P8000 Series Cartridge Ribbon Printers
This document contains proprietary information protected by copyright. No
part of this document may be reproduced, copied, translated, or incorporated
in any other material in any form or by any means, whether manual, graphic,
electronic, mechanical, or otherwise, without the prior written consent of
Printronix.
Printronix makes no representations or warranties of any kind regarding this
material, including, but not limited to, implied warranties of merchantability
and fitness for a particular purpose. Printronix shall not be held responsible
for errors contained herein or any omissions from this material or for any
damages, whether direct or indirect, incidental or consequential, in connection
with the furnishing, distribution, performance, or use of this material. The
information in this manual is subject to change without notice.
COPYRIGHT 2013 PRINTRONIX, INC.
Trademark Acknowledgements
ANSI is a registered trademark of the American National Standards Institute,
Inc.
Artifex, the Artifex logo
, Ghostscript, and the Ghostscript logo
are registered trademarks of Artifex Software, Inc.
PostScript is a trademark of Adobe Systems Incorporated.
Centronics is a registered trademark of Genicom Corporation.
CSA is a registered certification mark of the Canadian Standards Association.
Dataproducts is a registered trademark of Dataproducts Corporation.
EIA is a registered service mark of the Electronic Industries Association.
Epson is a registered trademark of Seiko Epson Corporation.
Ethernet is a trademark of Xerox Corporation.
IBM, AS/400, and Proprinter are registered trademarks, and Intelligent Printer
Data Stream and IPDS are trademarks of International Business Machines
Corporation.
IEEE is a registered service mark of the Institute of Electrical and Electronics
Engineers, Inc.
Printronix, PGL, LinePrinter Plus, and IGP are registered trademarks, and
P8005, P8010, P8015, P8205, P8210, P8215, P8220, and SureStak are
trademarks of Printronix, Inc.
QMS is a registered trademark, and Code V is a trademark of Quality Micro
Systems, Inc.
TUV is a registered certification mark of TUV Rheinland of North America, Inc.
UL is a registered certification mark of Underwriters Laboratories, Inc.
Table of Contents
1 Introduction........................................................... 11
Printer Overview ..................................................................................... 11
Printronix P8000 Series Cartridge Ribbon Printers (CRP) ............... 11
Consumable Monitoring with PrintNet Enterprise ................................... 14
Protocols and Emulations ....................................................................... 15
Graphics Enhancements ........................................................................ 15
Taking Care of Your Printer .................................................................... 15
Conventions in this Manual..................................................................... 15
Warnings and Special Information.......................................................... 16
Related Documents ................................................................................ 16
Contact Information ................................................................................ 17
Printronix Customer Support Center ................................................ 17
Printronix Supplies Department........................................................ 17
Corporate Offices ............................................................................. 18
2 Setting Up The Printer .......................................... 19
Before You Begin.................................................................................... 19
Power Requirements .............................................................................. 19
Select a Site............................................................................................ 19
Printer Dimensions ................................................................................. 21
Printer Component Locations .................................................................26
3 Operating The Printer ........................................... 27
Powering on the Printer .......................................................................... 27
Operating Modes .................................................................................... 27
The Control Panel................................................................................... 28
Control Panel Keys .......................................................................... 29
Cancel a Print Job ............................................................................ 33
Operational Procedures.......................................................................... 34
Reload Paper ................................................................................... 34
Unload Paper ................................................................................... 45
Integrated Print Management System ....................................................48
Output Darkness .............................................................................. 48
Loading a Used Ribbon Cartridge ....................................................49
Lighter or Darker Print ...................................................................... 49
Changing Ribbon Cartridge.............................................................. 50
Table of Contents
4 The Configuration Menus ..................................... 53
Configuration Overview .......................................................................... 53
Main Menu ....................................................................................... 53
Changing Parameter Settings .......................................................... 54
Saving Parameter Settings .............................................................. 54
Default and Custom Configurations ................................................. 54
Navigating the Menus ...................................................................... 55
Top Level Menu Overview ...................................................................... 56
Changing Parameters Example ....................................................... 58
Auto Save Configuration .................................................................. 62
Saving Your New Configuration ....................................................... 63
Optimizing Print Quality.................................................................... 68
Optimizing Print Speed .................................................................... 69
Dynamic Menu Options .......................................................................... 70
Active Emulations ................................................................................... 71
P8000 Standard Firmware ............................................................... 73
P8000 TN Firmware ......................................................................... 74
P8000 PCL-II Firmware.................................................................... 75
P8000 LG Firmware ......................................................................... 76
P8000 ANSI Firmware ..................................................................... 77
OpenPrint P8000 Standard Postscript/PDF Firmware ..................... 78
OpenPrint P8000 HD Postscript/PDF Firmware .............................. 79
H-Series Firmware.................................................................................. 80
P8000 Indian and Arabic Language Firmware ....................................... 81
QUICK SETUP Menu ............................................................................. 82
CONFIG. CONTROL Menu .................................................................... 91
HOST INTERFACE Menu ...................................................................... 93
Auto Switching Submenu ................................................................. 94
IEEE 1284 Parallel (Bidirectional) Submenu.................................... 96
Centronics (Parallel) Submenu ........................................................ 98
Serial Submenu.............................................................................. 100
NETWORK SETUP Menu .................................................................... 105
Ethernet Address ........................................................................... 105
Ethernet Params ............................................................................ 107
ACTIVE IGP EMUL and ACTIVE EMULATIONS ................................. 109
EMULATION Menu............................................................................... 111
3270 Params .................................................................................. 112
5250 Params .................................................................................. 119
LinePrinter Plus Emulation (ASCII, Indian Language) ................... 124
LinePrinter Plus Emulation (H-Series Hanzi GB) ........................... 126
LinePrinter Plus Emulation (H-Series Kanji) .................................. 128
LinePrinter Plus Emulation (H-Series Hangul) ............................... 132
Table of Contents
P-Series Emulation ........................................................................147
P-Series XQ Emulation ..................................................................153
Serial Matrix Emulation ..................................................................155
Proprinter XL Emulation .................................................................160
Epson FX Emulation ......................................................................163
ANSI Emulation ..............................................................................166
IGP/PGL Emulation ........................................................................173
IGP/PGL Submenu ........................................................................175
IGP/VGL Emulation ........................................................................185
IGP/VGL Submenu ........................................................................186
IPDS Emulation ..............................................................................197
PCL - II Emulation ..........................................................................202
LG Emulation .................................................................................206
Arabic Context Analyzer.................................................................211
OpenPrint POSTSCRIPT/PDF Emulation ......................................216
Postscript/PDF Interpreter..............................................................216
PRINTER CONTROL Menu .................................................................221
ADVANCED USER Menu.....................................................................225
SURE SCAN Submenu ..................................................................227
DIAGNOSTICS Menu ...........................................................................243
Printer Mgmt Menu ...............................................................................247
5 Interfaces............................................................ 249
Overview...............................................................................................249
RS-232 Serial Interface ........................................................................251
USB ......................................................................................................252
Centronics Parallel Interface.................................................................253
Centronics Parallel Interface Signals .............................................254
IEEE 1284 Parallel Interface.................................................................255
Compatibility Mode.........................................................................255
Nibble Mode ...................................................................................255
Byte Mode ......................................................................................255
Signals ...........................................................................................256
Ethernet ................................................................................................258
6 Reprogramming the Security Key....................... 259
Reprogramming the Security Key.........................................................259
How to Program the Security Key ..................................................259
Table of Contents
7 Downloading Firmware ....................................... 261
Firmware File Types (.prg) and (.exe) .................................................. 262
Web Page Download ............................................................................ 263
Windows Driver Download.................................................................... 265
Automatic Download (.exe)................................................................... 266
Manual Two-Key Download Sequence................................................. 268
Manual Three-Key Download Sequence .............................................. 269
Sending Firmware in Download Mode.................................................. 270
Sending Firmware via Ethernet (LPR) ........................................... 270
Sending Firmware via USB ............................................................ 270
Installing a Microsoft Loopback Adapter ........................................ 271
Sending Firmware via Parallel ....................................................... 276
Sending Firmware via Serial .......................................................... 277
Downloading Files to the Main File System.......................................... 278
Filename Extensions Not Shown in Menus .......................................... 278
File Properties Not Shown in Menus .................................................... 279
Web Page Download ............................................................................ 279
PTX_SETUP Download........................................................................ 281
Manual Two-Key Download.................................................................. 281
Downloading Files to the SD Card........................................................ 282
Using TrueType Fonts .......................................................................... 283
Downloading TrueType Fonts ........................................................ 283
Select and Print Downloaded TrueType Fonts .............................. 285
Demo Facility ........................................................................................ 286
8 Troubleshooting .................................................. 289
Cleaning Requirements ........................................................................ 289
Exterior Cleaning............................................................................ 289
Interior Cleaning ............................................................................. 290
Diagnosing Problems............................................................................ 292
Bar Code Verification ..................................................................... 292
Printing a Hex Dump ...................................................................... 293
Most Frequent Problems and Solutions................................................ 295
Diagnostics for EXX, BAD NVM, or ILL NVM Errors ............................ 296
Fault Messages (ASCII in Alphabetical Order) ..................................... 296
Fault Messages (H-Series with Numerical Prefix) ................................ 316
Table of Contents
A Printer Specifications ......................................... 333
Ribbon Cartridge Specifications ...........................................................333
ASCII ..............................................................................................333
HD and H-Series ............................................................................333
Paper Specifications .............................................................................334
Labels ...................................................................................................334
Printer Weight and Dimensions ............................................................335
Environmental Characteristics ..............................................................335
Acoustic Noise Level ............................................................................336
Electrical Characteristics ......................................................................337
Input Voltage (ASCII Models).........................................................337
Input Voltage (H-Series Models) ....................................................338
Interfaces ..............................................................................................338
Printing Speed ......................................................................................339
B ASCII Character Set........................................... 341
C SureStak™ Power Stacker ................................ 343
Introduction ...........................................................................................343
Stacker Operation.................................................................................343
D Zero Tear Pedestal Printer................................. 349
Overview...............................................................................................349
Operation ..............................................................................................350
Position the Paper Input and Adjust the Paper Guides ..................350
Load Paper.....................................................................................352
Position the Paper Out Sensor.......................................................354
Set the Tear Bar Distance ..............................................................355
Set the Top of Form .......................................................................356
ZTP SETTINGS Menu ..........................................................................357
Performance Limitations .......................................................................358
E Quick Change Memory Cartridge (QCMC) ........ 361
Overview...............................................................................................361
Installing the QCMC..............................................................................362
Saving the Printer’s Configuration to the QCMC ..................................363
Copying the QCMC “Snapshot” Image to a Second Printer .................365
Updating the QCMC Image ..................................................................367
Erasing the QCMC Image.....................................................................368
Table of Contents
F PTX_SETUP Commands ................................... 369
Overview............................................................................................... 369
The PTX_SETUP Commands .............................................................. 369
General Commands ....................................................................... 370
Line Matrix Commands .................................................................. 377
G Customer Support .............................................. 379
Printronix Customer Support Center..................................................... 379
Printronix Supplies Department ............................................................ 379
Corporate Offices.................................................................................. 380
H Communication Notices ..................................... 381
Notices.................................................................................................. 381
Communication Statements.................................................................. 384
Software License Agreement................................................................ 389
1
Introduction
Printer Overview
This chapter provides a general overview of your printer and the conventions
used within this manual.
Printronix P8000 Series Cartridge Ribbon Printers
(CRP)
Printronix® has been the global leader in industrial printing solutions for over
30 years, earning a reputation for designing and manufacturing leading edge
products and delivering them to market with unsurpassed service and
support.
The Printronix P8000™ Line Matrix Printing Platform extends the series of
technology innovations that cement Printronix’s leadership position. Line
matrix printing is Printronix’s flagship technology, and it remains the
workhorse solution for supply-chain and back-office printing applications
because of its reliability, lower cost of ownership and flexibility of printing
applications.
•
Most reliable printer ever – provides more up time and lower operating
costs
•
Cartridge ribbons – deliver darker image, last longer, and costs less to
operate than other print technologies
•
Integrated print management system – provides precise control over print
quality, print costs, and job planning
•
Tabletop, cabinet, pedestal, enclosed pedestal, or zero tear pedestal
(ZTP) styles – best user access and forms handling flexibility
•
Unsurpassed ease of use – larger graphics LCD simplifies operation and
enhances productivity
11
Chapter
1
Printer Overview
Table 1. P8000 Series Models and Configurations
Model Number
LMPPLS
(Line Matrix Printer Pedestal Low Speed)
LMPPHS
(Line Matrix Printer Pedestal High Speed)
LMPCLS
(Line Matrix Printer Cabinet Low Speed)
LMPCHS
(Line Matrix Printer Cabinet High Speed)
12
Configuration
Print Speed
(Lines per Minute)
P8003H
300
P8003HZT
300
P8005
500
P8005ZT
500
P8010
1000
P8010ZT
1000
P8006
600
P8006HZT
600
P8000HD
600
P8000HDZT
600
P8203H
300
P8205
500
P8210
1000
P8215
1500
P8220
2000
P8215 (with stacker)
1500
P8220 (with stacker)
2000
P8206H
600
P8208H
800
P8200HD
800
Printronix P8000 Series Cartridge Ribbon Printers (CRP)
Five printer configurations are available:
Tabletop (P80XX or P80XXH)
•
The tabletop models are designed for space constrained environments,
allowing for the printer to be placed on a desk or tabletop for quiet use.
•
Paper guides allow for paper input under the table or as a small stack on
the table.
•
•
Output forms are easily accessible from the front of the printer.
•
Available in the following print speeds:
ASCII – 500 and 1000 line per minute models
H-Series – 300 and 600 line per minute models
Using the top paper exit, this printer is ideal for short print runs and easy
access to output.
Cabinet (P82XX, P8200HD, or P82XXH)
•
The enclosed cabinet models provide for near silent operation, making
these printers perfectly suitable for use in the quietest of office
environments.
•
Provides the best paper handling for large print runs. All paper input and
output is contained inside the cabinet and protected from bumping and
contamination.
•
Highly effective combination of moveable fences and chains allows for
precise stacking all the way up to a full box of paper.
•
For tougher forms that tend not to refold well, a SureStak power stacker
option is available for the 1500, 2000, H-Series, and OpenPrint HD
enclosed cabinet models.
•
Available in the following print speeds:
ASCII – 500, 1000, 1500 and 2000 line per minute models
H-Series – 600 and 800 line per minute models
OpenPrint HD (available only for cabinet models)
Pedestal (P80XX, P8000HD, or P80XXH)
•
The pedestal model has a clamshell design that allows easy access to all
controls providing faster ribbon replacements and easier paper loading.
•
•
Oversized casters are standard making movement easy.
Available in the following print speeds:
ASCII – 500 and 1000 line per minute models
H-Series – 300 and 600 line per minute models
13
Chapter
1
Consumable Monitoring with PrintNet Enterprise
Enclosed Pedestal (P80XX or P80XXH)
•
The enclosed pedestal model has a lower enclosure that holds the input
paper while providing for near silent operation.
•
The paper enclosure can accommodate a full paper box (12” maximum
length forms).
•
•
The paper output area is not enclosed for easy access to printed media.
Available in the following print speeds:
ASCII – 500 and 1000 line per minute models
H-Series – 300 and 600 line per minute models
Zero Tear Pedestal (P80XXZT or P80XXHZT)
•
Special push tractor configuration enables printing from the very first to
the very last line of a form and then tear-off with no forms lost
•
The elimination of wasted forms between jobs can yield significant
savings.
•
•
An ideal solution for supply-chain and back-office applications.
Available in the following print speeds:
ASCII – 500 and 1000 line per minute models
H-Series – 300 and 600 line per minute models
Consumable Monitoring with PrintNet Enterprise
The Integrated Print Management System works with PrintNet Enterprise
(PNE). PNE allows a system administrator to remotely view the current
consumable status of all printers. PNE can be configured to deliver alerts on
all consumable warnings. When a ribbon reaches the low state, PNE notifies
the system administrator remotely via an automated e-mail alert of the low
condition. This allows corrective action to be taken before the ribbon reaches
its end of life. If the ribbon is not changed, an alert will again be initiated once
the ribbon reaches the 0% end point. Refer to your PrintNet Enterprise
Remote Management Software manual for details.
14
Printronix P8000 Series Cartridge Ribbon Printers (CRP)
Protocols and Emulations
A protocol is a set of rules governing the exchange of information between the
printer and its host computer. These rules consist of codes that manipulate
and print data and allow for machine-to-machine communication. A printer
and its host computer must use the same protocol. As used in this manual,
protocol and emulation mean the same thing.
Most impact printers use single ASCII character codes to print text, numbers,
and punctuation marks. Some characters are defined as control codes.
Control codes instruct the printer to perform specific functions, such as
underlining text, printing subscripts, setting page margins, etc. The difference
between most printer protocols is the characters used to create control codes
and the ways in which these characters are formatted.
When the printer executes the character and control codes of a particular
printer protocol, it is emulating that printer.
Graphics Enhancements
The IGP/PGL and IGP/VGL emulations allow you to create and store forms,
generate logos, bar codes, expanded characters, and create other graphics.
Alphanumeric and bar code data are added as the form is printed.
These emulations are available as factory-installed or field-installed options,
except on H-series models. For more information, contact your authorized
service representative.
Taking Care of Your Printer
Your printer will produce high print quality jobs if it is well taken care of.
Periodic cleaning, handling the printer properly, and using the correct printer
supplies such as ribbon and paper ensures optimum performance. Chapter 8
explains how to clean the printer, and printer supplies are listed in
Appendix A.
Conventions in this Manual
Control panel keys and indicators are highlighted in UPPERCASE BOLD
PRINT.
Example: Press the CANCEL key, then press the ONLINE key.
Quotation marks (“ ”) indicate messages on the Liquid Crystal Display (LCD).
Example: Press the ONLINE key. “OFFLINE” appears on the LCD.
The + (plus) symbol represents key combinations.
Example: “Press U + V” means press the U (UP) key and the V (DOWN)
key at the same time.
15
Chapter
1
Warnings and Special Information
Warnings and Special Information
Read and comply with all information highlighted under special headings:
WARNING
A warning notice calls attention to a condition that could harm you.
CAUTION
A caution notice calls attention to a condition that could damage the
printer.
IMPORTANT
Information vital to proper operation of the printer.
NOTE: A note gives you helpful tips about printer operation and
maintenance.
Related Documents
16
•
Quick Reference Guide — Explains how to set up the printer for basic
operation (load ribbon cartridge and media, and clear paper jams).
•
Maintenance Manual — Explains how to maintain and repair the line
matrix printer at the field service level of maintenance.
•
ANSI Programmer's Reference Manual — Provides host control codes
and character sets for the ANSI emulation.
•
PCL®-II/LinePrinter Plus Programmer’s Reference Manual — Provides
host control codes and character sets for the PCL-II emulation.
•
LG Programmer’s Reference Manual — Provides host control codes and
character sets for the LG emulation.
•
Character Sets Reference Manual — Information about and examples of
the character sets available in line matrix printers.
•
IGP/PGL Programmer's Reference Manual — Provides information used
with the optional IGP Printronix emulation enhancement feature.
•
IGP/VGL Programmer's Reference Manual — Provides information used
with the optional Code VTM emulation enhancement feature.
•
PrintNet Ethernet User's Manual — Information about network protocols,
configuration, and operation.
•
IPDS Emulation Programmer's Reference Manual — Provides an
overview of Intelligent Printer Data StreamTM (IPDS) features, commands,
and diagnostics.
•
LinePrinter Plus Programmer's Reference Manual — Covers the host
control codes for the LinePrinter Plus emulation.
•
LQ-1600K Emulation For The P8000 H-Series Of Line Matrix Printers
Programmer’s Reference Manual — Covers the host control codes for the
LQ-1600K emulation.
•
KS Programmer’s Reference Manual — Covers the host control codes for
the KS emulation.
•
KSSM Programmer’s Reference Manual — Covers the host control codes
for the KSSM emulation.
•
Arabic Programmer’s Reference Manual — Covers the host control codes
for the Arabic emulation used within the Arabic Language firmware.
Printronix Customer Support Center
Contact Information
Printronix Customer Support Center
IMPORTANT
Please have the following information available prior to calling the
Printronix Customer Support Center:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Model number
Serial number (located on the back of the printer)
Installed options (i.e., interface and host type if applicable to the problem)
Configuration printout (Press CONFIG on the control panel, then press
ENTER)
Network test page if Ethernet is enabled.
Is the problem with a new install or an existing printer?
Description of the problem (be specific)
Good and bad samples that clearly show the problem (faxing or emailing
of these samples may be required)
Americas
(714) 368-2686
Europe, Middle East, and Africa
(31) 24 6489 311
Asia Pacific
(65) 6548 4114
China
(86) 800-999-6836
http://www.printronix.com/support.aspx
Printronix Supplies Department
Contact the Printronix Supplies Department for genuine Printronix supplies.
Americas
(800) 733-1900
Europe, Middle East, and Africa
(33) 1 46 25 19 07
Asia Pacific
(65) 6548 4116
or (65) 6548 4132
China
(86) 400-886-5598
India
(800) 102-7869
http://www.printronix.com/public/supplies/default.aspx
17
Chapter
1
Contact Information
Corporate Offices
Printronix, Inc.
15345 Barranca Parkway
Irvine, CA 92618
U.S.A.
Phone: (714) 368-2300
Fax: (714) 368-2600
Printronix Inc.
c/o Printronix Nederland BV
Bijsterhuizen 11-38
6546 AS Nijmegen
The Netherlands
Phone: (31) 24 6489489
Fax: (31) 24 6489499
Printronix Schweiz GmbH
42 Changi South Street 1
Changi South Industrial Estate
Singapore 486763
Phone: (65) 6542 0110
Fax: (65) 6546 1588
Printronix Commercial (Shanghai) Co. Ltd
22F, Eton Building East
No.555, Pudong Av.
Shanghai City, 200120, P R China
Phone: (86) 400 886 5598
Fax: (86-21) 5138 0564
Visit the Printronix web site at www.printronix.com
18
2
Setting Up The Printer
Before You Begin
Read this chapter carefully before installing and operating the printer. The
printer is easy to install. However, for your safety and to protect valuable
equipment, perform all the procedures in this chapter in the order presented.
Power Requirements
The printer must be connected to a power supply outlet that supplies 90 to
264 volts AC at its upper and lower limits. These limits take into account
normal voltage sags and surges created on the nominal line voltage by other
AC power loads associated with the AC distribution line. The printer
automatically senses and adjusts itself to conform to the correct voltage
range.
Primary circuit protection is provided by the AC source protection device.
Consult an electrician if printer operation affects local electrical lines.
IMPORTANT
Printer power should be supplied from a separate AC circuit protected
at 20 amperes maximum for 100 - 240 volts at 50 or 60 Hertz.
Select a Site
Select a printer site that meets all of the following requirements:
•
•
Permits complete opening of the printer cover and doors.
•
For pedestal models, DO NOT place the side of the printer (inlet and exit
air vents) against a wall or other object. A minimum of 6 inch spacing is
recommended.
•
Has a standard power outlet that supplies 100-135 Volts AC or
178-240 Volts AC power, at 47 to 63 Hz.
•
•
Is relatively dust-free.
For cabinet models, allows at least three feet of clearance behind the
printer. (This permits air to circulate freely around the printer and provides
access to the paper stacking area.)
Has a temperature range of 10° C to 40° C (50° F to 104° F) and a
relative humidity from 15% to 90% non-condensing.
19
Chapter
2
Select a Site
•
Is located within the maximum allowable cable length to the host
computer. This distance depends on the type of interface you plan to use,
as shown in Table 2.
Table 2. Maximum Interface Connection Cable Length
20
Interface Type
Maximum Cable Length
Centronics Parallel
5 meters (15 feet)
IEEE 1284 Parallel
10 meters (32 feet)
Serial RS-232
15 meters (50 feet)
USB 2.0 Universal Serial Bus
5 meters (15 feet)
Twisted Pair / Type 3
300 meters (985 feet)
Ethernet 10/100Base-T
100 meters (328 feet)
Printer Dimensions
37.73 in
(95.8 cm)
11.36 in
(28.9 cm)
184751c
6.1 in
(15.5 cm)
.75 in
(1.9 cm)
25.92 in
(65.8 cm)
19.1 in
(73.9 cm)
Figure 1. Tabletop Model
21
Chapter
2
Printer Dimensions
184819a
57.5 in
(146.1 cm)
41.0 in
(104 cm)
27.0 in
(68.6 cm)
29.0 in
(73.7 cm)
27.0 in
(68.6 cm)
27.0 in
(68.6 cm)
83.0 in
(210.8 cm)
Figure 2. Cabinet Model
184820a
42.5 in
(107.8 cm)
27.0 in
(68.6 cm)
83.0 in
(210.8 cm)
32.5 in
(82.6 cm)
27.0 in
(68.6 cm)
27.0 in
(68.6 cm)
Figure 3. Cabinet Model with Paper Stacker
22
32.0 in
(81.3 cm)
59.0 in
(149.9 cm)
29.5 in.
(74.93 cm)
11.36 in.
(28.9 cm.)
54.0 in.
(137.2 cm)
184564b
25.92 in.
(65.8 cm)
19.1 in.
(48.5 cm)
29.1 in.
(73.9 cm.)
184564 REV B
Figure 4. Pedestal Model
23
Chapter
2
Printer Dimensions
54.0 in.
(137.2 cm)
35.9 in.
(91.2 cm)
6.5 in.
(16.5 cm)
184750b
25.92 in.
(65.8 cm)
19.1 in.
(48.5 cm)
38.9 in.
(98.8 cm)
Figure 5. Enclosed Pedestal
24
60.1 in.
(152.7 cm)
42.0 in.
(106.7 cm)
184821b
25.92 in.
(65.8 cm)
19.1 in.
(43.8 cm)
31.95 in.
(81.2 cm)
38.9 in.
(98.8 cm)
Figure 6. Zero Tear Pedestal Model
25
Chapter
2
Printer Component Locations
Printer Component Locations
Ribbon
Ribbon
Cartridge
Tab (2)
Ribbon
Tension Knob
Tractor (2)
Blue Tractor
Lock (2)
Splined Shaft
Hammer Bank
Cover and
Ribbon Mask
Paper Support (2)
Tab Slot (2)
Vertical
Position Knob
184555b
Platen Lever
Platen Stop
Ribbon Cartridge
Interface
Air Shroud
Assembly
Figure 7. Printer Component Locations
26
3
Operating The Printer
Powering on the Printer
When you power on the printer, it executes a self-test. The default power-up
state is online. When the self-test completes and the software has initialized
successfully, the status indicator light turns on, indicating the printer is online.
The default value of the type of emulation you have installed appears in the
LCD display. The ribbon life remaining is shown on the bottom of the LCD
display.
If there is a fault during the self-test, the status indicator flashes and a specific
fault message appears on the display (such as “LOAD PAPER”). The alarm
also sounds if it is configured to do so. See “ LCD Message Troubleshooting
Table” on page 297 for information on fault messages and solutions.
Operating Modes
Online. In online mode, the printer can receive and print data sent from the
host. Pressing the ONLINE key toggles the printer from online to offline mode.
The status indicator is lit in online mode.
Offline. In offline mode, you can perform operator functions, such as loading
paper and setting top-of-form. Pressing the ONLINE key toggles the printer
from offline to online mode. The status indicator is off in offline mode.
Menu. In offline mode, pressing ENTER moves the printer into Menu mode.
In this mode, you can navigate through all menus and change the printer
configuration. To return to offline mode, press the ONLINE key.
Fault. In fault mode, a condition exists which must be cleared before printing
can continue. The status indicator flashes, the alarm beeps (if configured to
sound), and a descriptive fault message displays.
The current operating mode can be selected via control panel keys or can
result from routine operations such as powering on the printer.
27
Chapter
3
The Control Panel
The Control Panel
Figure 8 shows the keys, displays, and indicators as they appear on the
control panel. The following section provides the descriptions, and functions
of the control panel keys.
Key combinations are indicated with the plus (+) sign. For example, “Press U
+ V” means to press the U key and the V key at the same time.
Cabinet Model
Enter
TOF
CONFIG
VIEW
SELECT
ADVANCE
CANCEL
ONLINE
184554a
Pedestal Model
Legend:
TOF = Set TOF (Top of Form)
VIEW = View/Eject
ADVANCE = Paper Advance
CONFIG = Print Config
SELECT = Load Config/Print Mode1
ADVANCE
VIEW
CANCEL = Cancel Job
TOF
ONLINE = Online/Clear
Enter
CANCEL
SELECT
CONFIG
NOTE:
1
Print Mode only available for H-Series
printers.
184732a
ONLINE
Figure 8. Control Panel
28
Control Panel Keys
Control Panel Keys
ONLINE
Toggles the printer between online and offline modes. The key performs the
following in Online, Offline, Fault, and Menu modes:
•
•
•
Online Mode – sets the printer to Offline Mode.
•
Menu Mode – sets the printer to Offline Mode.
Offline Mode – sets the printer to Online Mode.
Fault Mode – causes the printer to recheck the faults; if the faults are
cleared, the printer toggles to Offline Mode. If the fault condition is not
corrected before pressing the ONLINE key, the fault message reappears.
NOTE: When changing to Online Mode, if the user has changed menu items
without saving the changes in a configuration, the user will be
prompted to save the changes.
ADVANCE
Performs advance to top-of-form, as defined by the current active form length.
The key works both online and offline.
•
If online with data in the printer buffer, the data will print and then the
paper will move to the next top-of-form.
•
In the fault state, pressing ADVANCE will advance the paper. The first
press moves to the top of the next available form. All subsequent presses
advances one forms length as defined by the current active forms length.
VIEW
When the printer is online or offline, pressing this key executes the view or
eject function, depending on the setting of the menu View Function.
If online with data in the printer buffer, the data prints and the key functions as
described below.
If in a fault state, this key will be ignored.
•
View Function — When the View Function menu is set to Enable,
pressing the VIEW key for a short time (less than 1/2 second) moves the
last data printed to the tractor area for viewing. While in the view state, the
message "Printer in View" displays, pressing the UP or DOWN arrow
keys moves the paper up or down in 1/72 inch increments. This is done to
align the image within a pre-printed form, for example. Refer to the UP
and DOWN key functions for additional details on the microstep feature.
Pressing VIEW a second time moves the paper back to the adjusted print
position.
29
Chapter
3
The Control Panel
•
Eject Function — When the VIEW key is pressed and the View Function
menu is set to Disable, or when the View Function menu is set to Enable
and the VIEW key is pressed for a long time (more than 1/2 second), the
bottom of the last printed form will move to the tear bar position as set by
the Tear Bar Dist. menu value. The message "READY TO TEAR/EJECT
To Return" displays. While in this position, pressing the UP or DOWN
arrow keys moves the paper up or down in 1/72 inch increments. Refer to
the Up and Down key functions for additional details on the microstep
feature. When the VIEW key is pressed a second time, the printer will
move the paper either forward or backward to enable printing on the next
available form.
CANCEL
In offline mode, this key cancels all data in the print buffer, if enabled in the
“ADVANCED USER Menu” (see page 225). The print buffer is cleared without
printing any of the data and the current paper position is set as the top-ofform. If this function is disabled, the CANCEL key will be ignored.
NOTE: 1. Use of this key will cause loss of data.
2. For OpenPrint products, pressing the CANCEL key advances the
paper to the next TOF.
TOF
Sets the top-of-form on the printer. This key is active only when the printer is
offline and will not operate if the printer is in a fault condition. The paper
moves down to the print position and aligns to the top-of-form. Refer to the
User’s Setup Guide for complete instructions on how to set the top-of-form.
NOTE: If there is any data in the buffer, the paper will move to the last print
position.
CONFIG
In offline mode, CONFIG prints the current short configuration. This key
requires a confirmation with the ENTER key; pressing any other key will exit
from this function. See “The Configuration Menus” on page 53 for an
explanation of configuration menus.
SELECT
In offline mode, this key allows for fast selection of any of the previously
stored configurations. Pressing this key causes the printer to cycle through
the following configuration load options: Factory, Cfg 1, Cfg 2, Cfg 3,..., Cfg 8.
For H-Series models, this key can be alternatively configured to select Print
Mode.
30
Control Panel Keys
ENTER ( ↵ )
When navigating the configuration menus, the Enter key (referenced by the
symbol ↵ ) selects the currently displayed option value as the active value. An
asterisk (*) appears next to the active value on the display. Enter is also used
for starting and stopping printer tests and generating a configuration printout.
NOTE: The Enter key must be unlocked to execute the select function.
See UP + DOWN, later in this section.
The ENTER key lock and unlock function can be configured to be a
key combination other than U + V (see page 240).
•
In Offline mode, pressing the Enter key places the printer in Menu mode.
This will bring up a set of icons to select.
•
In Menu mode (at the icon menu level), pressing the Enter key moves
down into the menu tree of the highlighted icon.
•
Within a menu tree: if the highlighted menu contains submenus instead of
a selectable parameter, pressing the Enter key will go into the submenu.
If the highlighted menu is a display only menu, then pressing the Enter
key performs no function. If the highlighted menu has selectable
parameters, pressing the unlocked Enter key will select the displayed
parameter. An asterisk (*) displays next to the selected parameter.
•
If the highlighted menu is an executable menu, pressing the unlocked
Enter key will cause the function associated with the executable menu to
run. If the ENTER key is locked, pressing the Enter key for highlighted
menus that are executable or contain selectable parameters will cause
the message, THE ↵ KEY IS LOCKED, to display momentarily.
NOTE: Press the UP and Down keys at the same time to lock/unlock
the ↵ key.
For special Network Address menus or String menus, pressing the Enter key
will move down into a special multiple segment setting menu. Exit this menu
by pressing Enter again to save changes or Cancel to exit without saving
changes. This key is inactive in all other modes.
UP or DOWN (U or V)
Moves up or down between levels in the configuration menus and makes
vertical forms adjustment. After pressing VIEW, press U or V to adjust the
paper up or down in 1/72 inch increments for fine vertical forms alignment.
When the printer is in offline mode, press U or V to move through levels in
the configuration menus.
UP + DOWN (U + V)
Locks and unlocks the ENTER key.
NOTE: The ENTER key lock and unlock function can be configured to be a
key combination other than U + V (see page 240).
31
Chapter
3
The Control Panel
PREV or NEXT (Y or Z)
Moves between the options on the current level of configuration menu. In the
configuration menu, press Y to scroll backward or press Z to scroll forward
through the menu selections on the same level.
PREV + NEXT ( Y + Z)
When both keys are pressed simultaneously, the printer will reset to the
power-up configuration and reset its internal state (in offline mode).
U + ONLINE (IPDS Emulation only)
In offline mode, press U + ONLINE. If there is data in the printer buffer, the
printer will be placed in online mode, print one page, and return to the offline
mode. This action can be repeated until the end of a print job. Only one page
prints each time you press U + ONLINE. If there is no data in the printer
buffer, the printer is placed in online mode.
In the fault state, U + ONLINE does not work.
U + ADVANCE (IPDS Emulation only)
In offline mode, press U + ADVANCE. The printer will perform a reverse
linefeed. If you hold down the U + ADVANCE keys for longer than
1/2 second, the printer moves to the previous top-of-form position. If there is
data in the printer buffer, the data does not print.
In the fault state, U + ADVANCE does not work.
U + VIEW (IPDS Emulation only)
In offline mode, press U + VIEW. If there is data in the IPDS printer buffer, the
printer will be placed in online mode, print one line, and return to offline mode.
This action can be repeated until the end of the job. This function prints only
one line of text. If the data is not text, only 1/6 inch prints. If there is no data in
the printer buffer, the printer is placed in online mode for one second and then
returns to offline mode.
In the fault state, U + VIEW does not work.
Ribbon Life Indicator
The bottom of the LCD displays the remaining life of the currently installed
ribbon. The default settings for this feature should match the requirements for
most applications; no special user setup is needed. If your particular
application requires darker printing or can tolerate lighter printing, the ribbon
end point can be adjusted as appropriate. Please refer “Ribbon End Point” on
page 90.
32
Cancel a Print Job
Cancel a Print Job
The procedure to cancel a print job depends on the printer emulation and your
application software. Contact your system administrator for additional
information.
1. If the printer is online, press ONLINE to place the printer in offline mode.
2. From the host system, stop the print job.
NOTE: If the print job is not stopped from the host system before pressing
CANCEL, the print job continues with data missing when the printer
returns to online mode. Exercise caution to prevent unwanted data
loss occurrences, as this function deletes unprinted data in the
printer. This function is active only in offline mode; the purpose of this
function is to eliminate the necessity of printing unwanted data when
print jobs are canceled.
3. Press CANCEL.
NOTE: You may need to enable the Cancel option on the front panel.
See “ADVANCED USER Menu” on page 225 for details.
4. Set the top-of-form. Refer to the Quick Reference Guide.
33
Chapter
3
Operational Procedures
Operational Procedures
This section contains routine printer operating procedures on how to:
•
•
reload paper
unload paper
Reload Paper
Do this procedure when “LOAD PAPER” displays. (This message occurs
when the last sheet of paper passes through the paper slot.) This procedure
reloads paper without removing the last sheet of the old paper supply, while
retaining the current top-of-form setting.
184738b
Metal Paper Guide
(2000 lpm only)
184737a
Paper Slot
Paper Slot
Tabletop Model
Cabinet Model
184737 REV A
Wire
Guide (2)
Paper
Slot
Wire
Guide (2)
Paper Slot
184558b
184739b
Pedestal Model
Enclosed Pedestal Model
Figure 9. Paper Slot Location
34
Reload Paper
Upper Paper Guide
Wire Guide (2)
Paper Slot
184936a
Zero Tear Pedestal Model
Figure 9. Paper Slot Location (continued)
1. Raise the printer cover. Raise the platen lever as far as it will go.
(See Figure 7 on page 26 for the location of the lever.)
NOTE: Do not open tractor doors or remove the existing paper.
2. Tabletop models: place the paper supply on the table underneath the
printer, centered under the paper slot. See Figure 9 on 34.
Cabinet models: open the front door and align the paper supply with the
label on the floor.
Pedestal models: place the paper supply on the floor of the printer,
centered under the paper slot.
Enclosed pedestal and Zero Tear Pedestal models: open the front
door and place the paper supply inside the printer, on the floor of the
cabinet.
3. Ensure the paper pulls freely.
4. Feed the paper up through the paper slot (see Figure 9). It may be easier
to feed one corner of the new paper up through the slot first. When this
corner can be grasped from the top, rotate the paper back to the normal
position.
NOTE: If you are using thick, multi-part forms and are unable to load the new
paper over the existing paper, go to step 15.
5. Hold the paper to prevent it from slipping down and through the paper
slot.
35
Chapter
3
Operational Procedures
New Paper
Existing Paper
184565a
Figure 10. Loading New Paper into the Printer
6. Pull the new paper above and behind the ribbon mask, but in front of the
existing paper. See Figure 7 on page 26 for the ribbon mask location.
If necessary, gently press the existing paper back.
7. Align the top edge of the new paper with the top perforation of the existing
paper.
8. Load the new paper over the existing paper. Open and load the tractors
one at a time to prevent the paper from slipping.
NOTE: Make sure that the top edge of the new paper lines up with the top
horizontal perforation of the last page.
36
Reload Paper
Vertical Position
Knob
Paper Thickness
Indicator
A
183445b
A
183444b
183446b
Platen
Stop
Platen Lever
Platen Stop
Knob
Figure 11. Setting the Platen Lever
9. Turn the platen stop knob clockwise or counterclockwise to match the
paper thickness. (The A-B-C scale corresponds approximately to 1-, 3-,
and 6-part paper thickness).
NOTE: If you are using the same thickness of paper, there is no need to
readjust.
10. Lower the platen lever until it stops.
11. Press ONLINE to remove the “LOAD PAPER” fault message from the
display.
12. Press ADVANCE several times to make sure the paper feeds properly
beyond the tractors and over the lower paper guide. Feed sufficient paper
to ensure the paper stacks correctly.
13. Close the printer top cover. Close the cabinet front door.
14. Press ONLINE to place the printer in online mode and resume printing.
37
Chapter
3
Operational Procedures
NOTE: Perform steps 15 to 31 only if you are unable to load the new paper
over the existing paper.
15. Open both tractor doors.
16. Remove the old paper from the tractors. Allow the paper to fall into the
paper supply area.
17. Feed the new paper up through the paper slot. Hold the paper to prevent
it from slipping down through the paper slot (see Figure 9 on page 34).
Left Tractor Door
Paper
Left Tractor Lock
TO
F
TO
F
183441b
Figure 12. Loading Paper on the Left Tractor
18. Pull the paper above and behind the ribbon mask. See Figure 7 on
page 26 for the ribbon mask location.
19. Load the paper on the left tractor.
20. Close the tractor door.
38
Reload Paper
Tractor
Paper
Tractor
Splined Shaft
183442b
Tractor Lock
Paper Scale
Figure 13. Positioning the Left Tractor to Avoid Damage
CAUTION
To avoid damage to the printer caused by printing on the platen, always
position the left tractor unit directly to the left of the “1” mark on the
paper scale.
21. Normally, you should not need to adjust the position of the left tractor.
If adjustment is necessary, unlock the left tractor by placing the tractor
lock in the middle position. Slide the tractor until it is directly to the left of
the number “1” on the paper scale and lock it. (You can also use the
paper scale to count columns.)
39
Chapter
3
Operational Procedures
Tractor Door
TO
F
TO
F
TO
F
TO
F
183443b
Tractor Lock
Figure 14. Loading Paper onto the Sprockets
22. Unlock the right tractor.
23. Load the paper onto the sprockets and close the tractor door.
If necessary, slide the right tractor to remove paper slack or to adjust for
various paper widths. Then, lock the tractor.
40
Reload Paper
Upper Paper
Guide
Upper Paper
Guide
184738b
Metal Paper Guide
(2000 lpm only)
184737a
Paper Slot
Paper Slot
Tabletop Model
Cabinet Model
184737 REV A
Upper Paper
Guide
Upper Paper
Guide
Wire
Guide (2)
Wire
Guide (2)
Paper
Slot
Paper Slot
184739b
184558b
Pedestal Model
Enclosed Pedestal Model
184558 REV B
Figure 15. Using the Paper Guide to Orient the Paper
41
Chapter
3
Operational Procedures
Upper Paper Guide
Wire Guide (2)
Paper Slot
184936a
Zero Tear Pedestal Model
Figure 15. Using the Paper Guide to Orient the Paper (continued)
24. Tabletop, Pedestal, or Zero Tear Pedestal models:
Using the vertical position knob to move the paper up, guide the paper
over the upper paper guide and through the slot to the rear of the top
cover.
25. Press ADVANCE several times to make sure the paper feeds properly
beyond the tractors and over the lower paper guide. Feed sufficient paper
to ensure the paper stacks correctly.
26. Cabinet models:
Open the cabinet rear door. Make sure the paper is aligned with the label
in the output area (inside the cabinet). Close the front and rear doors.
42
Reload Paper
TOF Indicator
Perforation
TO
F
TO
F
Vertical
Position
Knob
TO
F
TO
F
184752a
Figure 16. Aligning the Perforation with the TOF Indicator
27. Align the top of the first print line with the TOF indicator on the tractor by
rotating the vertical position knob. For best print quality, it is
recommended that the top-of-form be set at least one print line or more
below the perforation.
NOTE: For exact positioning, press the VIEW key to move the last data
printed to the tractor area for viewing. While in View mode “Printer in
View” displays. Press the Up or Down Arrow keys to move the paper
vertically in small increments. Pressing the VIEW key a second time
moves the paper back to the adjusted print position. The key works
both online and offline provided that the printer is in View mode. (This
procedure is applicable for both the cabinet and pedestal models.)
43
Chapter
3
Operational Procedures
Vertical Position
Knob
A
183445b
Paper Thickness
Indicator
A
183444b
183446b
Platen
Stop
Platen Lever
Platen Stop
Knob
183444 REV B
Figure 17. Adjusting the Platen Lever
28. Turn the platen stop knob clockwise or counterclockwise to match the
paper thickness. (The A-B-C scale corresponds approximately to 1-, 3-,
and 6-part paper thickness. Adjust until you have the desired print
quality).
NOTE: The platen stop allows you to set an optimum and consistent
thickness that is not affected when opening and closing the platen
lever.
29. Lower the platen lever until it stops.
30. Press ONLINE to clear any fault messages (such as “LOAD PAPER”)
from the LCD.
31. Press TOF. The top-of-form you have set moves down to the print
position. If there is data in the buffer, the paper moves forward to the last
print position on the next page.
32. Press ONLINE and close the printer cover.
44
Unload Paper
Unload Paper
1. Press ONLINE to place the printer in offline mode and open the printer
cover.
2. For cabinet models, open the cabinet rear door. For models with the
power stacker installed, press the STACKER UP key on the rear control
panel.
Paper
Perforation
TO
F
TO
F
TO
F
TO
F
183477b
Figure 18. Unloading the Paper from the Printer
3. Tear off the paper at the perforation.
4. Allow the paper to fall to the back of the printer and into the paper
stacking area.
5. For pedestal models, remove the stacked paper from the paper tray.
45
Chapter
3
Operational Procedures
183478b
Paper
Power Stacker
Figure 19. Removing Stacked Paper from the Printer
6. For cabinet models, remove the stacked paper from the rear cabinet floor.
For cabinet models with the power stacker installed, remove the paper
from the wire paper tent and press the STACKER DOWN key to lower the
stacker mechanism.
7. Close the cabinet rear door.
46
Unload Paper
Tractor Door
TO
F
TO
F
184571a
Platen Lever
Figure 20. Completely Removing the Paper
8. To completely remove the paper from the printer:
a. Raise the platen lever as far as it will go and open both tractor doors.
CAUTION
Be careful when pulling any paper backward through the paper path,
especially when using a label stock. If you are not careful, labels can
detach and adhere to the printer within the paper path, where only an
authorized service representative can remove them.
b. Open the cabinet front door.
c.
Gently pull the paper down through the paper slot. Allow the paper to
fall into the paper supply area.
d. Remove the paper from the paper supply area.
47
Chapter
3
Integrated Print Management System
Integrated Print Management System
The P8000 has a feature that automatically monitors and communicates the
status of the ribbon life to help the operator know when to change ribbons.
Using an ink delivery system called the Cartridge Ribbon System (CRS), the
printer can automatically detect when a new or used ribbon is loaded, and all
ribbon properties. The ribbon is contained in a plastic box (the cartridge) and
feeds only in one direction. The CRS contains an interface board that allows
communication between the printer and the cartridge. Using the CRS, the
P8000 automatically detects when a new or used ribbon is installed and
determines the ribbon’s length, ink color, and expected yield. The ribbon life,
starting from 100% when new and decreasing to 0% when depleted, is always
displayed on the control panel. See Figure 8 on page 28.
When the ribbon life reaches 2%, a warning message “RIBBON UNDER 2%/
Change RBN soon” appears on the control panel display. The control panel
status indicator lamp flashes. The printer will continue printing in this condition
until the ribbon life reaches 0% at which time, printing will stop. The ribbon
may be changed at any time while the printer is in the “CARTRIDGE AT END
POINT/Change Cart” condition without losing data in the printer’s buffer. If a
new ribbon is loaded, the system automatically detects the change, clears the
condition when the platen is closed, and restarts the life at 100%. If a partially
used ribbon is loaded, the system continues the life at the percentage
indicated for the used ribbon.
You may also resume printing for approximately two more minutes without
changing the ribbon by pressing the ONLINE key twice. This may be done as
many times as needed to complete the job in progress.
Ribbon usage information is calculated by maintaining a count of impressions
(dots) that is stored on the ribbon cartridge and updated periodically so that
the cartridge can be used on a different printer with the information intact. This
allows the system administrator to have precise control over print quality and
consumable costs. The accurate presentation of available ribbon life allows
for efficient planning of print jobs. For example, if the displayed ribbon life
were low, you can install a new ribbon before printing a large print job.
Output Darkness
By default the system is configured to meet most user requirements.
However, some applications require that the output remains darker than the
nominal set point while some applications are less critical and could tolerate a
lighter final image. The system can easily adjust to this variability. A setting
under the Printer Control menu is available that allows the user to adjust the
final output. The range is as follows:
Normal (Default)
Darker +1 through +6
Lighter -1 through -10
The ribbon life indicator always cycles between 100% and 0%, but if a darker
setting is selected, zero will be reached more quickly. If a lighter setting is
selected, the system will extend the amount of printing it takes to reach zero.
48
Loading a Used Ribbon Cartridge
Loading a Used Ribbon Cartridge
You can take the ribbon cartridge off the printer and reload it at a later time.
The ribbon life gauge automatically updates to reflect the correct remaining
capacity.
NOTE: Since the ribbon usage information is stored on the ribbon cartridge,
you can reload a partially used cartridge onto a different printer.
Lighter or Darker Print
The ribbon life value as determined by the Integrated Print Management
System is factory set so that the image quality at the end of the ribbon life is
as good as it was when the ribbon was new. You may adjust the ribbon end
point for a lighter or darker image as required for your printing needs.
See “PRINTER CONTROL Menu” on page 221.
49
Chapter
3
Integrated Print Management System
Changing Ribbon Cartridge
Before changing the ribbon cartridge, determine whether at the end of ribbon
life if you want to make the print lighter (extend the ribbon life) or darker
(shorten the ribbon life). If you want to make the print lighter or darker, go to
“Ribbon End Point” on page 90 and follow the procedures for adjusting the
image density. If you are satisfied with the print darkness, continue with the
following steps.
NOTE: Ribbon cartridge instructions and illustrations shown in the following
section are for the pedestal model. Follow the same procedures for
the cabinet model.
TO
F
TO
F
Blue Tractor
Door (2)
184559a
Platen Lever
Figure 21. Preparing to Load the Ribbon
1. Open the printer cover.
2. Raise the platen lever as far as it will go.
3. Close the tractor doors.
4. Remove the old ribbon cartridge and discard properly.
50
Changing Ribbon Cartridge
Ribbon
Ribbon
Cartridge
Tab (2)
Tab Slot (2)
Ribbon
Tension Knob
184555b
Air Shroud
Assembly
Figure 22. Installing the Ribbon Cartridge
5. Remove the ribbon slack on the new ribbon cartridge by turning the
ribbon tension knob clockwise.
CAUTION
Do not turn the ribbon tension knob counterclockwise. This could
damage the ribbon cartridge.
6. Hold the cartridge at an angle, so that the rear side nearest you is lower
than the side with the ribbon. Find the two tabs on the outside of the
cartridge and place them into the corresponding slots on the air shroud
assembly (see Figure 22).
51
Chapter
3
Integrated Print Management System
Ribbon
Cartridge
A
Ribbon Mask
184556b
Hammerbank
Cover
A
Ribbon
184557a
Ribbon Tension Knob
Ribbon Cartridge
Figure 23. The Ribbon Cartridge Snapped in Place
7. Rock the cartridge downward, making sure that the ribbon goes between
the guide and the mask (see Figure 23). You will feel it snap into place.
CAUTION
Make sure that the ribbon does not twist or fold over.
8. Turn the ribbon tension knob clockwise a few times to make sure the
ribbon tracks correctly in the ribbon path.
9. Close the platen lever.
10. Close the printer top cover.
11. Press the ONLINE key twice to return the printer to operation.
52
4
The Configuration Menus
Configuration Overview
To print data, the printer must respond correctly to signals and commands
received from the host computer. Configuration is the process of matching the
printer's operating characteristics to those of the host computer and to
specific tasks, such as printing labels or printing on different sizes of paper.
The characteristics which define the printer's response to signals and
commands received from the host computer are called configuration
parameters.
You can configure the printer using the configuration menus and the control
panel or by sending control codes in the data stream from a host computer
attached to the printer. This chapter provides an introduction to configuring
the printer and includes the configuration menus available (depending on
which emulation you have installed in the printer).
IMPORTANT
Configuration directly affects printer operation. Do not change the
configuration of your printer until you are thoroughly familiar with the
procedures in this chapter.
Main Menu
The Main Menu is organized based on the following firmware types:
1. P8000 Standard Firmware (IPDS/PGL/VGL/LP+)
2. P8000 TN Firmware (TN/PGL/VGL/LP+)
3. P8000 PCL-II Firmware (PCL-II/PGL/VGL/LP+)
4. P8000 LG Firmware (LG/PGL/VGL/LP+)
5. P8000 ANSI Firmware (ANSI/PGL/VGL/LP+)
6. OpenPrint P8000 Standard Postscript/PDF Firmware (PS/PGL/VGL/LP+)
7. OpenPrint P8000 HD Postscript/PDF Firmware (PS)
8. H-Series Firmware (LP+)
9. Indian Language Firmware (LP+)
10. Arabic Language Firmware (LP+/ANALYZER)
53
Chapter
4
Configuration Overview
Changing Parameter Settings
You may change a printer parameter setting, such as line spacing or forms
length, either by pressing keys on the control panel or by sending emulation
control codes in the data stream from a host attached to the printer. The
control panel allows you to configure the printer’s resident set of configuration
menus. An example procedure for using the control panel to change
parameter settings begins on page 58.
When control codes are sent from a host attached to the printer, they override
control panel settings. For example, if you set the line spacing to 6 lpi with the
control panel, and application software later changes this to 8 lpi with a control
code, the control code overrides the control panel setting.
Saving Parameter Settings
The parameter settings that you have changed can be permanently stored in
the printer’s memory as a configuration. See “Auto Save Configuration” on
page 62 and “Saving Your New Configuration” on page 63.
You may also save your new configurations using the PTX_SETUP command
host control code. See your IGP/PGL Programmer's Reference Manual for
details.
Default and Custom Configurations
A configuration consists of a group of parameter settings, such as line
spacing, forms length, etc. Your printer provides a fixed default configuration
and allows you to define several custom configurations for use with particular
print jobs. The factory default configuration can be loaded, but it cannot be
altered.
Eight configurations can be modified for unique print job requirements. The
“Save Config.” option allows you to save eight groups of parameter settings in
memory as custom configurations numbered from 1 through 8. An
explanation on how to save a set of parameter values as a custom
configuration using the “Save Config.” menu option begins on page 63.
54
Navigating the Menus
Navigating the Menus
To manipulate configurations review the following instructions about
navigating through the menus.
You must be Menu mode to navigate the menus.
ONLINE
Press to toggle between ONLINE and OFFLINE.
Press ENTER to enter Menu mode. Menus are
accessed only in Menu mode.
Scroll up, down, left, or right through the icons to
highlight the area of interest.
Press to enter the area of interest. This will take you
into that section and list three menu selections, with
the middle selection highlighted.
NOTE: For display languages in Korean, Simplified
Chinese, or Traditional Chinese, only one
menu selection is shown at a time.
Press to move up or down through the menu
selections. The highlighted menu is the active
selection.
OR
OR
ENTER
+
Press to scroll through the available choices for the
highlighted menu. If the highlighted menu contains
submenus, these buttons have no effect and the
message “↵ for Submenu” will display.
Press to confirm selection. For normal menus, this will
change or execute the menu. If the selection has
submenus, the submenu will be entered.
Press to lock and unlock the ENTER key. The ENTER
key is locked by default to prevent you from
accidentally changing the printer configuration. The
lock and unlock function can be configured to be other
than U + V (See “Set Lock Key” on page 240.)
55
Chapter
4
Top Level Menu Overview
Press to return to the previous menu level.
CANCEL
Press to return to Offline mode. If changes were made,
the user will be prompted to save or discard the
configuration.
ONLINE
To experiment with navigating the menus, use the example on the next page
as a tutorial.
Top Level Menu Overview
When entering Menu mode, the user will see top level menus represented as
icons as shown below. Use the navigation buttons up, down, right, and left to
highlight the desired icon. As the user navigates, the name of the top level
menu displays on the top line of the LCD.
Table 3 provides brief descriptions of first level configuration menu options:
Table 3. Icon Level Menus
Menu Icon
56
Menu
Description
QUICK SETUP
These options allow quick access to the most
frequently changed or inputted parameters during the
installation of the printer.
PRINTER
CONTROL
This menu allows you to select parameters common to
a general user, such as display language and Barcode
quality.
ADVANCED USER
This menu allows you to select several advanced
operating parameters for the printer, such as the speed
at which paper will advance when slewing. The SURE
SCAN menu for OpenPrint models is under this menu.
CONFIG. CONTROL
These options allow you to save, print, load, delete,
name, and reset entire sets of configuration
parameters.
Top Navigating
Level Menuthe
Overview
Menus
Table 3. Icon Level Menus
Menu Icon
Menu
Description
HOST INTERFACE
These options allow you to select either the Serial
RS-232, Centronics® parallel, Ethernet™, IEEE® 1284
parallel, or Auto Switching interface for the printer. This
menu also allows you to configure several parameters
for each interface.
NETWORK SETUP
This option allows you to select from Ethernet Address
options and Ethernet Parameters options.
EMULATION
This menu allows you to configure the options which
are available for the current operating (active)
emulation. For example, if LinePrinter+ is the active
emulation, then the LinePrinter+ emulation options can
be configured using this menu. The ACTIVE IGP
EMUL and ACTIVE EMULATION menus are under
this menu.
DIAGNOSTICS
This menu includes the diagnostic tests, system
memory, software build part number, Feature File
(if one exists), the shuttle type, and statistics of the
printer. The Printer Mgmt menu is under this menu.
57
Chapter
4
Top Level Menu Overview
Changing Parameters Example
OFFLINE
* = Factory Default
QUICK
SETUP
CONFIG.
CONTROL
...
Save
Config.
Load
Config.
Factory*
Cfg 1 - Cfg 8
Power-Up
Config.
Factory*
Cfg 1 - Cfg 8
Protect
Configs.
Disable*
Enable
Cfg 1*
Cfg 2 - Cfg 8
Name
Configs
(see Example 2
on page 66)
Print
Config.
Delete
Config.
Current Short*
Current Full
Factory
Power-Up
All
Cfg 1 - Cfg 8
Reset Cfg
Names
Cfg 1*
Cfg 2 - Cfg 8
All
All*
Cfg 1 - Cfg 8
Auto
Save
Enable*
Disable
A configuration consists of several parameters. The default factory
configuration has a starting set of parameters. In the configuration menu
above, and in all the configuration menus in this chapter, the factory default
values are indicated by an asterisk (*).
Your print jobs may require parameter values which vary from the default
settings. This section provides an example procedure for changing individual
parameter values.
58
Changing Parameters Example
The following procedure shows how to change and save the settings for the
Barcode Quality and Panel Display options. Use these guidelines to navigate
the configuration menus and change other parameters.
Step
Press
1.
Make sure the printer is on.
LCD
Notes
2.
ONLINE
3.
ENTER
4.
Shows the top level icons.
Allows you to make configuration changes.
+
5.
UNTIL
6.
ENTER
59
Chapter
Step
4
Top Level Menu Overview
Press
LCD
Notes
7.
8.
UNTIL
9.
UNTIL
10.
ENTER
The * indicates this choice is active.
11.
UNTIL
12.
UNTIL
13.
60
ENTER
The * indicates this choice is active.
Changing Parameters Example
Step
Press
14.
LCD
Notes
Locks the ENTER key.
+
15.
Press ENTER to go back into the menus or
press ONLINE again to go ONLINE.
ONLINE
16.
ONLINE
17A.
ENTER
17B.
18.
Configuration changes were detected and
you are prompted to save the configuration
permanently or temporarily, to cancel
changes, or restore the Factory
Configuration.
Saves the Configuration as Config 1 then
returns the printer ONLINE.
Places the printer online after permanently
saving the configuration changes as
Config 1.
The printer is ready for operation
61
Chapter
4
Top Level Menu Overview
Auto Save Configuration
If the user makes a menu change and attempts to place the printer online
without saving the changes to a configuration, the following prompt displays:
The active option is highlighted. Use the Up and Down keys to scroll through
the different options; the keys will loop at the top and bottom options. The ↵
(Enter) key selects the highlighted option. After performing the selected
option, the printer will go to Online mode.
NOTE: Only the Up, Down, and Enter keys work at the Menu Changes
Detected prompt.
•
Save Permanently (factory default). This option causes the printer to
save the configuration to the active configuration and make the active
configuration the Power-Up default configuration. If the active
configuration is the Factory Configuration, the printer will save the
configuration to an open configuration and make that open configuration
the Power-Up default configuration.
If no open configuration is available, the user must decide which
configuration to overwrite. In this case the printer will display the Save
Configuration menu, otherwise, the printer will go Online.
•
Save Temporarily. Menu changes will be implemented, but will not be
saved once the printer is powered off.
•
Cancel Changes. This option causes the printer to reload the Active
Configuration, then go Online.
•
Restore Factory. This option will cause the printer to reload the Factory
Configuration, then go Online.
NOTE: A printer fault during the Auto Save process causes the printer to
Save Temporarily.
62
Saving Your New Configuration
Saving Your New Configuration
The Save Config. option allows you to save up to eight custom configurations
to meet different print job requirements. Once you have changed all of the
necessary parameters, you may save them as a numbered configuration
(Example 1 on page 64) or a named configuration (Example 2 on page 66)
that can be stored and loaded later for future use. If you do not save your
configuration using the Auto Save, or this option, all of your parameter
changes will be erased when you power off the printer.
Once you have saved a custom configuration using this option, it will not be
lost if you power off the printer. You can load a configuration for a specific
print job (see “Load Config.” on page 91). You can also modify and resave it.
You may want to print your configurations (see “Print Config.” on page 91)
and store them in a safe place, such as inside the printer cabinet. If the
Protect Configs. parameter is enabled and you try to resave an existing
configuration, the new configuration will not be saved until the existing
configuration has been deleted (see “Delete Config.” on page 92).
NOTE: Once you change active emulations, any changes to the previously
selected emulation will be gone unless they have been saved.
63
Chapter
4
Top Level Menu Overview
Example 1
This example shows how to save a configuration as a numbered
configuration, then later print it.
Step
Press
1.
Make sure the printer is on.
LCD
Notes
2.
ONLINE
3.
ENTER
4.
Allows you to make configuration changes.
+
5.
UNTIL
6.
64
ENTER
Saving Your New Configuration
Step
Press
LCD
Notes
7.
8.
UNTIL
9.
NOTE:
ENTER
The * indicates this choice is active.
We recommend that you print the configuration. To print the configuration go to Step 10. To skip this
procedure and resume printer operation, go to Step 13.
10.
11.
UNTIL
12.
ENTER
13.
Locks the ENTER key.
+
65
Chapter
Step
4
Top Level Menu Overview
Press
LCD
14.
Notes
Press ENTER to go back into the menus or
press ONLINE again to go ONLINE.
ONLINE
15.
Places the printer ONLINE.
ONLINE
16.
If you printed the configuration, store it in a safe place. The printer is ready for operation.
Example 2
This example shows how to save a configuration as a named configuration.
Step
Press
1.
Make sure the printer is on.
2.
Follow Steps 2-6 from
Example 1 (page 64).
3.
UNTIL
4.
5.
66
ENTER
LCD
Notes
Saving Your New Configuration
Step
6.
Press
LCD
Notes
ENTER
7.
Press the left or right key to choose the
character that is highlighted.
or
8.
Press the up key to select the next character
in the string. Press the down key to go back
to the previous character and continue
editing as necessary.
or
9.
ENTER
Configuration 2 is renamed TEST.
10.
CANCEL
11.
UNTIL
12.
UNTIL
67
Chapter
Step
13.
4
Top Level Menu Overview
Press
LCD
ENTER
14.
Notes
Your configuration is saved as TEST.
Locks the ENTER key.
+
15.
Press ENTER to go back into the menus or
press ONLINE again to go ONLINE.
ONLINE
16.
Places the printer ONLINE.
ONLINE
Now you have the saved configuration for later use if needed.
Optimizing Print Quality
LP+, IGP/PGL, and IGP/VGL Emulations
You can optimize print quality for darker and sharper barcodes and
characters. Doing so, however, will decrease the printer speed.
To optimize print quality, you can change the values of the following
configuration parameters:
68
•
Bar Code Quality (Printer Control menu): Select “Dark” or “Draft.”
Dark prints the darkest images, but at the slowest speed. Draft prints at a
faster speed than Dark, but the characters are not as dark. (See page 222
for a written description of Bar Code Quality.)
•
Print Quality (IGP/PGL emulation): Select “Best” or “High.” Best prints
the darkest images, but at the slowest speed. High prints at a faster
speed than Best, but the characters are not as dark. (See page 175 for
the IGP/PGL Configuration Menu, and page 182 for a written description
of Print Quality.)
•
Print Quality (IGP/VGL emulation): Select “High.” (See page 186 for the
IGP/VGL Configuration Menu, and page 190 for a written description of
Print Quality.)
Optimizing Print Speed
OpenPrint Postscript/PDF Emulations
You can optimize print quality for darker and sharper text and barcodes by
using the following configuration parameters:
•
Unidirectional (Printer Control menu): Select “Enable” for best quality
but reduced throughput (half speed).
•
Resolution (Postscript/PDF menu): Select higher values (horizontal by
vertical DPI) to get better print quality.
H-Series Emulations
Print quality varies based on the typeface selected. Both text and barcodes
will print using the resolution of the selected typeface.
Optimizing Print Speed
LP+, IGP/PGL, and IGP/VGL Emulations
The printer has been configured at the factory for optimal print speed. To
optimize print quality instead, you can change values for specific configuration
parameters such as Barcode Quality and Print Quality. Doing so, however,
will decrease the printer speed.
If you have optimized the printer for print quality, you can change it to optimize
the speed by selecting the values as follows:
•
Bar Code Quality (Printer Control menu): Select Draft.
(See page 221 for the Printer Control Menu, and see page 222 for a
written description of Bar Code Quality.)
•
Print Quality (IGP/PGL emulation): Select Dataprocessing.
(See page 175 for the IGP/PGL Configuration Menu, and see page 182
for a written description of Print Quality.)
•
Print Quality (IGP/VGL emulation): Select Dataprocessing.
(See page 186 for the IGP/VGL Configuration Menu, and see page 190
for a written description of Print Quality.)
OpenPrint Postscript/PDF Emulations
The printer has been configured at the Factory for optimal print quality
through the Resolution configuration parameter (Postscript/PDF menu).
However, users can reduce the horizontal, vertical, or both DPI values of this
menu to increase printer speed. The downside of using a lower DPI value is
as follows:
•
•
Print quality is reduced and it can be difficult to read small characters.
Barcodes may not get detected and optimized (barcodes are not
searched for DPI values less than 120).
Users are encouraged to use the Resolution menu to find the right
combination of Print Quality, Barcode Optimization, and Print Speed.
69
Chapter
4
Dynamic Menu Options
H-Series Emulations
The print speed varies based on the typeface selected.
Dynamic Menu Options
The main menus for each of the different firmware types have several
footnotes based on the possible options installed with the printer. This
includes HOST IO connectivity, various hardware/mechanical options, and
software emulations and features. The P8000 products dynamically detect
options installed and only include relevant menus for the user to configure.
The following is a description of the types of installation options and their
effect on the main menu:
70
•
HOST INTERFACE: Ethernet related menus are only present when the
hardware is installed/enabled.
•
NETWORK SETUP: The NETWORK SETUP menu is only present when
Ethernet is installed.
•
Centronics and IEEE 1284: Options are only selectable or configurable
when the optional parallel interface card is present.
•
SureStak Power Stacker: The power stacker and auto elevator options
are available for configuration when the SureStak power stacker is
installed.
•
QUICK SETUP: This menu is a collection of popular menus to help users
quickly configure the printer. It is also affected by the installed options.
Active Print
Emulations
Optimizing
Speed
Active Emulations
The emulations present in the printer are based on the firmware installed and
the emulation options included. Both are configured from the Factory and do
not require any action from the user.
IMPORTANT
Be sure to know which type of firmware and options are purchased
(see Table 4) to understand the ACTIVE IGP EMUL, ACTIVE
EMULATION, and EMULATION main menus. H-Series and Indian
Language products only have the LinePrinter+ emulation.
Table 4. Available Firmware Types and Options
Firmware Type
P8000 Standard
P8000 TN
P8000 PCL-II
Optional
Emulations
Available
ACTIVE IGP
EMUL 1
ACTIVE
EMULATION 2
EMULATION 3
IGP/PGL*
N/A
IPDS
IGP/PGL
LinePrinter+
IGP/VGL
N/A
IPDS
IGP/VGL
LinePrinter+
IGP/PGL*
N/A
IGP/PGL
LinePrinter+
IGP/VGL
N/A
IGP/VGL
LinePrinter+
PCL-II*
PCL-II
IGP/PGL &
LP+
IGP/PGL
LinePrinter+
IGP/VGL &
LP+
IGP/VGL
LinePrinter+
IPDS
PGL/VGL
PGL/VGL
PGL/VGL
N/A
NOTE:
* = Default Selection
1
The Active IGP EMULATION menu is only available when the PGL/VGL option is installed.
2
The ACTIVE EMULATION menu shows the options “IGP/PGL & LP+” and
“IGP/VGL & LP+” when the PGL/VGL option is installed. Otherwise, “LinePrinter+” replaces
the options.
3
The selections under the EMULATION menu is based on the ACTIVE IGP EMULATION or
ACTIVE EMULATION settings with all Optional Emulations installed.
71
Chapter
4
Active Emulations
Table 4. Available Firmware Types and Options
Firmware Type
P8000 LG
P8000 ANSI
OpenPrint P8000
Standard 4
Optional
Emulations
Available
PGL/VGL
PGL/VGL
PGL/VGL
ACTIVE IGP
EMUL 1
N/A
N/A
N/A
ACTIVE
EMULATION 2
EMULATION 3
LG*
LG
IGP/PGL &
LP+
IGP/PGL
LinePrinter+
IGP/VGL &
LP+
IGP/VGL
LinePrinter+
44/48XXANSI*
44/48XX-ANSI
IGP/PGL &
LP+
IGP/PGL
LinePrinter+
IGP/VGL &
LP+
IGP/VGL
LinePrinter+
Postscript/
PDF*
Postscript/PDF
IGP/PGL &
LP+
IGP/PGL
LinePrinter+
IGP/VGL &
LP+
IGP/VGL
LinePrinter+
OpenPrint P8000 HD 4
N/A
N/A
N/A
Postscript/PDF
H-Series
N/A
NA
N/A
LinePrinter+
Indian Language
N/A
NA
N/A
LinePrinter+
Arabic Language
N/A
N/A
N/A
LinePrinter+
ANALYZER
NOTE:
* = Default Selection
1
The Active IGP EMULATION menu is only available when the PGL/VGL option is installed.
2
The ACTIVE EMULATION menu shows the options “IGP/PGL & LP+” and
“IGP/VGL & LP+” when the PGL/VGL option is installed. Otherwise, “LinePrinter+” replaces
the options.
3
The selections under the EMULATION menu is based on the ACTIVE IGP EMULATION or
ACTIVE EMULATION settings with all Optional Emulations installed.
4 The
Postscript emulation cannot process color documents. All documents sent to the
OpenPrint printer must be either gray scale or black and white.
72
P8000 Standard Firmware
P8000 Standard Firmware
OFFLINE
QUICK
SETUP
page 82
Active Host
ZTP DataTime 4
ZTP WaitTime 4
ZTP TearDist 4
ACTIVE IGP EMUL 1
PGL SFCC 3
VGL SFCC 2
Active Protocol
Form Length
Form Width
Select CPI
Select LPI
P-Series SFCC
Ribbon End Point
Save Config.
Power-Up Config.
Open Platen @ BOF
Slow Paper Slew
PRINTER
CONTROL
page 221
ZTP SETTINGS 4
Ribbon End Point
Open Platen @ BOF
Bar Code Quality
Tear Bar Dist. 5
View Function
Unidirectional
Display Language
Panel Display
Accented Chars.
CONFIG.
CONTROL
page 91
Load Config.
Save Config.
Print Config.
Delete Config.
Power-Up Config.
Protect Configs.
Name Configs
Reset Cfg Names
Auto Save
HOST
INTERFACE
page 93
Active Host
Auto Switching
Centronics 1
Serial
IEEE 1284 1
USB
ADVANCED
USER
page 225
PTX_SETUP Option
Hex Dump Mode
Power-up State
Downloaded Fonts
PMD Fault
Power Stacker 1
Auto Elevator 1
Auto Locking
Main File System
SD File System 1
Set Sharing
Shuttle Timeout
Slow Paper Slew
Alarm
Power Saver Time
Pwr Save Control
Cancel Key
Rcv. Status Port
Ret. Status Port
Set Lock Key
RBN Low Warn@
RBN Low Action
RBN End Action
Print Energy 7
Disp. Intensity
NETWORK
SETUP 1
page 105
Ethernet Address 1
Ethernet Params 1
EMULATION
page 111
ACTIVE IGP EMUL
IPDS 2
LinePrinter+
IGP/PGL 3
IGP/VGL 2
DIAGNOSTICS
page 243
Printer Tests
Test Width
Phase Value
Paper Out Dots
System Memory
Print Statistics
Software Build
Feature File 6
Shuttle Type
Auto Dump
Printer Mgmt
1If
installed.
If VGL is selected from the ACTIVE IGP EMUL menu.
3
If PGL is selected from the ACTIVE IGP EMUL menu.
4
Available for Zero Tear Pedestal printers only.
5
Available for pedestal printers only.
6
If a Feature File has been downloaded.
7
Available for 1000 lpm printers only.
2
73
Chapter
4
Active Emulations
P8000 TN Firmware
OFFLINE
QUICK
SETUP
page 82
Active Host
ZTP DataTime 4
ZTP WaitTime 4
ZTP TearDist 4
ACTIVE IGP EMUL 1
PGL SFCC 2
VGL SFCC 3
Active Protocol
Form Length
Form Width
Select CPI
Select LPI
P-Series SFCC
Ribbon End Point
Save Config.
Power-Up Config.
Open Platen @ BOF
Slow Paper Slew
PRINTER
CONTROL
page 221
ZTP SETTINGS 4
Ribbon End Point
Open Platen @ BOF
Bar Code Quality
Tear Bar Dist. 5
View Function
Unidirectional
Display Language
Panel Display
Accented Chars.
74
CONFIG.
CONTROL
page 91
Load Config.
Save Config.
Print Config.
Delete Config.
Power-Up Config.
Protect Configs.
Name Configs
Reset Cfg Names
Auto Save
ADVANCED
USER
page 225
PTX_SETUP Option
Hex Dump Mode
Power-up State
Downloaded Fonts
PMD Fault
Power Stacker 1
Auto Elevator 1
Auto Locking
Main File System
SD File System 1
Set Sharing
Shuttle Timeout
Slow Paper Slew
Alarm
Power Saver Time
Pwr Save Control
Cancel Key
Rcv. Status Port
Ret. Status Port
Set Lock Key
RBN Low Warn@
RBN Low Action
RBN End Action
Print Energy 7
Disp. Intensity
HOST
INTERFACE
page 93
Active Host
Auto Switching
Centronics 1
Serial
IEEE 1284 1
USB
NETWORK
SETUP 1
page 105
Ethernet Address 1
Ethernet Params 1
EMULATION
page 111
ACTIVE IGP EMUL
3270 Params
5250 Params
LinePrinter+
IGP/PGL 2
IGP/VGL 3
DIAGNOSTICS
page 243
Printer Tests
Test Width
Phase Value
Paper Out Dots
System Memory
Print Statistics
Software Build
Feature File 6
Shuttle Type
Auto Dump
Printer Mgmt
1
If installed.
If PGL is selected from the ACTIVE IGP EMUL menu.
3
If VGL is selected from the ACTIVE IGP EMUL menu.
4
Available for Zero Tear Pedestal printers only.
5 Available for pedestal printers only.
6
If a Feature File has been downloaded.
7
Available for 1000 lpm printers only.
2
P8000 PCL-II Firmware
P8000 PCL-II Firmware
OFFLINE
QUICK
SETUP
page 82
Active Host
ZTP DataTime 6
ZTP WaitTime 6
ZTP TearDist 6
ACTIVE EMULATION
PGL SFCC 2
VGL SFCC 3
Active Protocol 4
Form Length 4
Form Width 4
Select CPI 4
Select LPI 4
P-Series SFCC 4
Page Length Rep. 5
Max Line Width 5
LPI Adjust 5
Ribbon End Point
Save Config.
Power-Up Config.
Open Platen @ BOF
Slow Paper Slew
PRINTER
CONTROL
page 221
ZTP SETTINGS 6
Ribbon End Point
Open Platen @ BOF
Bar Code Quality
Tear Bar Dist. 7
View Function
Unidirectional
Display Language
Panel Display
CONFIG.
CONTROL
page 91
Load Config.
Save Config.
Print Config.
Delete Config.
Power-Up Config.
Protect Configs.
Name Configs
Reset Cfg Names
Auto Save
ADVANCED
USER
page 225
Hex Dump Mode
Power-up State
PMD Fault
Power Stacker 1
Auto Elevator 1
Auto Locking
Main File System
SD File System 1
Shuttle Timeout
Slow Paper Slew
Alarm
Power Saver Time
Pwr Save Control
Cancel Key
Rcv. Status Port
Ret. Status Port
Set Lock Key
RBN Low Warn@
RBN Low Action
RBN End Action
Print Energy 9
Disp. Intensity
HOST
INTERFACE
page 93
Active Host
Auto Switching
Centronics 1
Serial
IEEE 1284 1
USB
NETWORK
SETUP 1
page 105
Ethernet Address 1
Ethernet Params 1
EMULATION
page 111
ACTIVE EMULATION
LinePrinter+ 4
IGP/PGL 2
IGP/VGL 3
PCL-II 5
DIAGNOSTICS
page 243
Printer Tests
Test Width
Phase Value
Paper Out Dots
System Memory
Print Statistics
Software Build
Feature File 8
Shuttle Type
Auto Dump
Printer Mgmt
1If
installed.
If PGL is selected from the ACTIVE EMULATION menu.
3 If VGL is selected from the ACTIVE EMULATION menu.
4 If LP+ is selected from the ACTIVE EMULATION menu.
5
If PCL-II is selected from the ACTIVE EMULATION menu.
6 Available for Zero Tear Pedestal printers only.
7 Available for pedestal printers only.
8
If a Feature File has been downloaded.
9 Available for 1000 lpm printers only.
2
75
Chapter
4
Active Emulations
P8000 LG Firmware
OFFLINE
QUICK
SETUP
page 82
Active Host
ZTP DataTime 6
ZTP WaitTime 6
ZTP TearDist 6
ACTIVE EMULATION
PGL SFCC 2
VGL SFCC 3
Active Protocol 4
Form Length 4
Form Width 4
Select CPI 4
Select LPI 4
P-Series SFCC 4
Vert Forms 5
Horiz Forms 5
Ribbon End Point
Save Config.
Power-Up Config.
Open Platen @ BOF
Slow Paper Slew
PRINTER
CONTROL
page 221
ZTP SETTINGS 6
Ribbon End Point
Open Platen @ BOF
Bar Code Quality
Tear Bar Dist. 7
View Function
Unidirectional
Panel Display
Display Language
76
CONFIG.
CONTROL
page 91
Load Config.
Save Config.
Print Config.
Delete Config.
Power-Up Config.
Protect Configs.
Name Configs
Reset Cfg Names
Auto Save
ADVANCED
USER
page 225
Hex Dump Mode
Power-up State
PMD Fault
Power Stacker 1
Auto Elevator 1
Auto Locking
Main File System
SD File System 1
Shuttle Timeout
Slow Paper Slew
Alarm
Power Saver Time
Pwr Save Control
Cancel Key
Rcv. Status Port
Ret. Status Port
Set Lock Key
RBN Low Warn@
RBN Low Action
RBN End Action
Print Energy 9
Disp. Intensity
HOST
INTERFACE
page 93
Active Host
Auto Switching
Parallel Type 1
IEEE 1284 1
Serial
USB
NETWORK
SETUP 1
page 105
Ethernet Address 1
Ethernet Params 1
EMULATION
page 111
ACTIVE EMULATION
LinePrinter+ 4
IGP/PGL 2
IGP/VGL 3
LG 5
DIAGNOSTICS
page 243
Printer Tests
Test Width
Phase Value
Paper Out Dots
System Memory
Print Statistics
Software Build
Feature File 8
Shuttle Type
Auto Dump
Printer Mgmt
1
If installed.
If PGL is selected from the ACTIVE EMULATION menu.
3
If VGL is selected from the ACTIVE EMULATION menu.
4
If LP+ is selected from the ACTIVE EMULATION menu.
5
If LG is selected from the ACTIVE EMULATION menu.
6
Available for Zero Tear Pedestal printers only.
7
Available for pedestal printers only.
8
If a Feature File has been downloaded.
9
Available for 1000 lpm printers only.
2
P8000 ANSI Firmware
P8000 ANSI Firmware
OFFLINE
QUICK
SETUP
page 82
Active Host
ZTP DataTime 6
ZTP WaitTime 6
ZTP TearDist 6
ACTIVE EMULATION
PGL SFCC 2
VGL SFCC 3
Margins 5
Active Protocol 4
Form Length
Form Width
Select CPI
Select LPI
P-Series SFCC 4
Ribbon End Point
Save Config.
Power-Up Config.
Open Platen @ BOF
Slow Paper Slew
PRINTER
CONTROL
page 221
ZTP SETTINGS 6
Ribbon End Point
Open Platen @ BOF
Bar Code Quality
Tear Bar Dist. 7
View Function
Unidirectional
Display Language
Panel Display
Accented Chars.
CONFIG.
CONTROL
page 91
HOST
INTERFACE
page 93
Load Config.
Save Config.
Print Config.
Delete Config.
Power-Up Config.
Protect Configs.
Name Configs
Reset Cfg Names
Auto Save
Active Host
Auto Switching
Centronics 1
Serial
IEEE 1284 1
USB
ADVANCED
USER
page 225
DIAGNOSTICS
PTX_SETUP Option
Hex Dump Mode
Power-up State
Downloaded Fonts
PMD Fault
Power Stacker 1
Auto Elevator 1
Auto Locking
Main File System
SD File System 1
Set Sharing
Shuttle Timeout
Slow Paper Slew
Alarm
Power Saver Time
Pwr Save Control
Cancel Key
Rcv. Status Port
Ret. Status Port
Set Lock Key
RBN Low Warn@
RBN Low Action
RBN End Action
Print Energy 9
Disp. Intensity
NETWORK
SETUP 1
page 105
Ethernet Address 1
Ethernet Params 1
EMULATION
page 111
ACTIVE EMULATION
LinePrinter+ 4
44/48XX-ANSI 5
IGP/PGL 2
IGP/VGL 3
page 243
Printer Tests
Test Width
Phase Value
Paper Out Dots
System Memory
Print Statistics
Software Build
Feature File 8
Shuttle Type
Auto Dump
Printer Mgmt
1
If installed
If PGL is selected from the ACTIVE EMULATION menu.
3 If VGL is selected from the ACTIVE EMULATION menu.
4
If LP+ is selected from the ACTIVE EMULATION menu.
5
If ANSI is selected from the ACTIVE EMULATION menu.
6 Available for Zero Tear Pedestal printers only.
7
Available for pedestal printers only.
8 If a Feature File has been downloaded.
9
Available for 1000 lpm printers only.
2
77
Chapter
4
Active Emulations
OpenPrint P8000 Standard Postscript/PDF Firmware
OFFLINE
QUICK
SETUP
page 82
Active Host
ZTP DataTime 6
ZTP WaitTime 6
ZTP TearDist 6
ACTIVE EMULATION
Resolution 5
Paper Size 5
PGL SFCC 2
VGL SFCC 3
Active Protocol 4
Form Length 4
Form Width 4
Select CPI 4
Select LPI 4
P-Series SFCC 4
Ribbon End Point
Save Config.
Power-Up Config.
Open Platen @ BOF
Slow Paper Slew
PRINTER
CONTROL
page 221
ZTP SETTINGS 6
Ribbon End Point
Open Platen @ BOF
Bar Code Quality 4
Tear Bar Dist. 7
View Function
Unidirectional
Display Language
Panel Display
Accented Chars.
78
CONFIG.
CONTROL
page 91
HOST
INTERFACE
page 93
Active Host
Auto Switching
Centronics 1
Serial
IEEE 1284 1
USB
Load Config.
Save Config.
Print Config.
Delete Config.
Power-Up Config.
Protect Configs.
Name Configs
Reset Cfg Names
Auto Save
ADVANCED
USER
page 225
SURE SCAN 5
PTX_SETUP Option
Hex Dump Mode
Power-up State
Downloaded Fonts
PMD Fault
Power Stacker 1
Auto Elevator 1
Auto Locking
Main File System
SD File System 1
Set Sharing
Shuttle Timeout
Slow Paper Slew
Alarm
Power Saver Time
Pwr Save Control
Cancel Key
Rcv. Status Port
Ret. Status Port
Set Lock Key
RBN Low Warn@
RBN Low Action
RBN End Action
Print Energy 9
Disp. Intensity
NETWORK
SETUP 1
page 105
Ethernet Address 1
Ethernet Params 1
EMULATION
page 111
ACTIVE EMULATION
LinePrinter+ 4
IGP/PGL 2
IGP/VGL 3
Postscript/PDF 5
DIAGNOSTICS
page 243
Printer Tests
Test Width
Phase Value
Paper Out Dots
System Memory
Print Statistics
Software Build
Feature File 8
Shuttle Type
Auto Dump
Printer Mgmt
1
If installed
If PGL is selected from the ACTIVE EMULATION menu.
3 If VGL is selected from the ACTIVE EMULATION menu.
4
If LP+ is selected from the ACTIVE EMULATION menu.
5
If Postscript/PDF is selected from the ACTIVE EMULATION menu.
6 Available for Zero Tear Pedestal printers only.
7
Available for pedestal printers only.
8
If a Feature File has been downloaded.
9 Available for 1000 lpm printers only.
2
OpenPrint P8000 HD Postscript/PDF Firmware
OpenPrint P8000 HD Postscript/PDF Firmware
OFFLINE
QUICK
SETUP
page 82
Active Host
ZTP Data Time 2
ZTP Wait Time 2
ZTP Tear Dist 2
Resolution
Paper Size
Ribbon End Point
Load Config.
Save Config.
Power-Up Config.
Open Platen @ BOF
Slow Paper Slew
PRINTER
CONTROL
page 221
ZTP SETTINGS 2
Ribbon end Point
Open Platen @ BOF
Tear Bar Dist.
Unidirectional
Display Language
Panel Display
CONFIG.
CONTROL
page 91
Load Config.
Save Config.
Print Config.
Delete Config.
Power-Up Config.
Protect Configs.
Name Configs
Reset Cfg Names
Auto Save
ADVANCED
USER
page 225
SURE SCAN
PTX_SETUP Option
Hex Dump Mode
Power-Up State
PMD Fault
Auto Locking
Main File System
SD File System 1
Set Sharing
Shuttle Timeout
Slow Paper Slew
Alarm
Power Saver Time
Pwr Save Control
Cancel Key
Rcv. Status Port
Ret. Status Port
Set Lock Key
RBN Low Warn@
RBN Low Action
RBN End Action
Print Energy 4
Disp. Intensity
HOST
INTERFACE
page 93
Active Host
Auto Switching
Centronics 1
Serial
IEEE 1284 1
USB
NETWORK
SETUP 1
page 105
Ethernet Address 1
Ethernet Params 1
EMULATION
page 216
Postscript/PDF
DIAGNOSTICS
page 243
Printer Tests
Test Width
Phase Value
Paper Out Dots
System Memory
Print Statistics
Software Build
Feature File 3
Shuttle Type
Auto Dump
Printer Mgmt
1
If installed.
Available for Zero Tear Pedestal printers only.
3
If a Feature File has been downloaded.
4 Available for 1000 lpm printers only.
2
79
Chapter
4
H-Series Firmware
H-Series Firmware
OFFLINE
QUICK
SETUP
page 82
Active Host
ZTP Data Time 5
ZTP Wait Time 5
ZTP TearDistance 5
Graphic Spd Up
Typeface
DBCS CPI
Select LPI
DBCS ASCII Style
DBCS.ASCII Mode 2
Ribbon End Point
Reset Cmd CFG Ld
Load Config.
Save Config.
Power-Up Config.
Open Platen @ BOF
Slow Paper Slew
PRINTER
CONTROL
page 221
ZTP SETTINGS 5
Ribbon End Point
Open Platen @ BOF
Tear Bar Dist. 6
View Function
Unidirectional
Display Language
Panel Display
Accented Chars.
80
CONFIG.
CONTROL
page 91
Load Config.
Save Config.
Print Config.
Delete Config.
Power-Up Config.
Protect Configs.
Name Configs
Reset Cfg Names
Auto Save
ADVANCED
USER
page 225
PTX_SETUP Option
Hex Dump Mode
Power-Up State
Downloaded Fonts
PMD Fault
Power Stacker 1
Auto Elevator 1
Auto Locking
Main File System
SD File System 1
Set Sharing
Shuttle Timeout
Slow Paper Slew
Alarm
Power Saver Time
Pwr Save Control
Cancel Key
Rcv. Status Port
Ret. Status Port
Job Set/Typeface
Print Hist. Log
RBN Low Warn@
RBN Low Action
RBN End Action
Print Energy 8
Disp. Intensity
HOST
INTERFACE
page 93
Active Host
Auto Switching
Centronics 1
Serial
IEEE 1284 1
USB
NETWORK
SETUP 1
page 105
Ethernet Address 1
Ethernet Params 1
EMULATION
page 111
LinePrinter+
Printer Protocol
LQ 1600K 2
OKI 4
KS 3
KSSM 3
DIAGNOSTICS
page 243
Printer Tests
Test Width
Phase Value
Paper Out Dots
System Memory
Print Statistics
Software Build
Feature File 7
Shuttle Type
Auto Dump
Printer Mgmt
1
If installed.
Availalbe for Hanzi and Kanji LP+ Printers only.
3 Available for Hangul LP+ Printers only.
4 Available only when the OKI emulation is enabled. If necessary,
refer to the N7000 User's Manual.
5 Available for Zero Tear Pedestal printers only.
6
Available for pedestal printers only.
7
If a Feature File has been downloaded.
8 Available for 1000 lpm printers only.
2
P8000 Indian
andHD
Arabic
Language Firmware
OpenPrint
P8000
Postscript/PDF
P8000 Indian and Arabic Language Firmware
OFFLINE
QUICK
SETUP
page 82
Active Host
ZTP DataTime 2
ZTP WaitTime 2
ZTP TearDist 2
Active Protocol
Form Length
Form Width
Select CPI
Select LPI
P-Series SFCC
Indian Option6
Ribbon End Point
Save Config.
Power-Up Config.
Open Plat @ BOF
Slow Paper Slew
PRINTER
CONTROL
page 221
ZTP SETTINGS 2
Ribbon End Point
Open Platen @ BOF
Bar Code Quality
Tear Bar Dist. 3
View Function
Unidirectional
Display Language
Panel Display
Accented Chars.
CONFIG.
CONTROL
page 91
Load Config.
Save Config.
Print Config.
Delete Config.
Power-Up Config.
Protect Configs.
Name Configs
Reset Cfg Names
Auto Save
ADVANCED
USER
page 225
PTX_SETUP Option
Hex Dump Mode
Power-Up State
Downloaded Fonts
PMD Fault
Power Stacker 1
Auto Elevator 1
Auto Locking
Main File System
SD File System 1
Set Sharing
Shuttle Timeout
Slow Paper Slew
Alarm
Power Saver Time
Pwr Save Control
Cancel Key
Rcv. Status Port
Ret. Status Port
Set Lock Key
RBN Low Warn@
RBN Low Action
RBN End Action
Print Energy 5
Disp. Intensity
HOST
INTERFACE
page 93
Active Host
Auto Switching
Centronics 1
Serial
IEEE 1284 1
USB
NETWORK
SETUP 1
page 105
Ethernet Address 1
Ethernet Params 1
EMULATION
page 111
LinePrinter+
ANALYZER 7
DIAGNOSTICS
page 243
Printer Tests
Test Width
Phase Value
Paper Out Dots
System Memory
Print Statistics
Software Build
Feature File 4
Shuttle Type
Auto Dump
Printer Mgmt
1
If installed.
for Zero Tear Pedestal printers only.
3
Available for pedestal printers only.
4
If a Feature File has been downloaded.
5 Available for 1000 lpm printers only.
6 Available for Indian Firmware only.
7 Available for Arabic Firmware only.
2 Available
81
Chapter
4
QUICK SETUP Menu
QUICK SETUP Menu
When the printer is in offline mode, QUICK SETUP is the first Main Menu
option that appears on the control panel. The QUICK SETUP menu offers
basic menu items required to configure your printer. This section describes
the options within the QUICK SETUP menu.
NOTE: The options in your menu will vary depending on the firmware, host
IO, emulations selected, and other features available with your
printer.
Active Host
The Active Host menu enables you to select and configure interfaces between
the printer and your host computer. The Auto Switching option (factory
default) allows all ports to be active at the same time.
ZTP DataTime
This option sets the pause time in the data stream that the ZTP requires
before moving the form to the tear bar once a print job is completed. The
values range from .5 to 5 seconds. The default is .5 seconds.
ZTP WaitTime
This option sets the minimum amount of time that the form stays at the tear
bar. This allows you time to remove the form before the form is retracted to
print the next form. The adjustable values range from 500 to 5000
milliseconds in increments of 500 milliseconds. The default value is 2
seconds.
ZTP TearDist
This option sets the tear off distance from the current print position to the tear
bar. Adjustable values in increments of 1/144th of an inch range from 200 to
2880. The up and down arrows adjust the display value. When you press the
ENTER key, the selected value is stored and a scale is printed to indicate the
current tear off position. The default value is 1060.
NOTE: When a new value is selected, the printer will lose the current print
position. You must reset the top of form to automatically save the new
value.
DBCS CPI (H-Series)
Defines the default values for horizontal character spacing in DBCS mode.
For the Hanzi and Kanji LP+ printer, select from 5.0, 6.0, 6.7, 7.5, and Others
CPI. For the Hangul LP+ printer, selected from 5.0, 6.0, 6.7, 7.5, 8.5, 10, and
others CPI.
The factory default for the Hanzi LP+ printer is 6.7 cpi. The factory default for
the Hangul LP+ printer is 6.0 cpi. The factory default for the Kanji LP+ printer
is 7.5 cpi.
82
QUICK SETUP
Menu
OpenPrint P8000 HD Postscript/PDF
Firmware
DBCS/ASCII Mode (H-Series)
This option specifies the operating mode of the Hanzi printer. If set to DBCS
mode, the printer can print double-byte characters and a limited number of
single-byte characters. Otherwise, the printer can only print single-byte
characters.
Available for the Hanzi and Kanji LP+ printers only.
DBCS ASCII Style (H-Series)
This option specifies the appearance of the single-byte numeric characters.
For the Hanzi and Kanji LP+ printer, select from Normal, Oversize and OCRB.
For the Hangul LP+ printer, select from Normal, and OCRB.
If set to Oversize, the numeric characters will appear larger than other
single-byte characters. For example, the appearance of character "8" will be
changed to "8". If set to OCRB, the numeric characters will print in OCRB
style.
Graphics Spd-Up (H-Series)
This menu is used to increase (speed up) graphic printing speed by turning on
Enhanced/Turbo mode.
•
Normal (factory default). The printer prints at the given input graphics
resolution.
•
Enhanced. The printer provides first-level speed up, which means the
speed is faster than Normal mode.
•
Turbo. The printer provides second-level speed up, which means the
printer is faster than Enhanced mode.
•
Match Typeface. The input 180 x 180 dpi graphics resolution will dropdot to the resolution matching the typeface selected.
Typeface (H-Series)
Sets the typeface of the printer. This key requires confirmation with the
ENTER key.
The factory default for the Hanzi GB and Kanji SJIS LP+ is Near LQ.
The factory default for the Hangul and Hanzi Big5 LP+ is LQ.
Active Emulation
The Active Emulation menu enables you to select a combination of
emulations as described in Table 4 on page 71.
Active IGP Emulation
The Active IGP Emulation menu enables you to activate either the PGL or
VGL emulation. This menu is only available with the P8000 Standard and TN
firmware as described in Table 4 on page 71.
83
Chapter
4
QUICK SETUP Menu
PGL SFCC
You can specify which hex code (1-FF) will be used as the Special Function
Control Character (SFCC). The SFCC denotes that the following data is an
IGP command.
•
•
7E (factory default)
1 – FF
VGL SFCC
You can specify which hex code (1-FF) will be used as the Special Function
Control Character (SFCC). The SFCC denotes that the following data is an
IGP command.
•
•
5E (factory default)
1 – FF
Active Protocol
Select the LinePrinter+ protocol you wish to use. Refer to the LinePrinter Plus
Programmer's Reference Manual for more information.
Form Length
Form length is the number of lines that can be printed on a page. You can set
the form length in inches, millimeters (mm), or as a function of the current lpi
(lines per inch).
Form Width
The form width can be specified in inches, millimeters, or as a function of the
current cpi (characters per inch). The forms width set should not exceed the
actual paper width.
Select CPI
This parameter allows you to specify the characters per inch (cpi) values.
The options are 10.0, 12.0, 13.3, 15.0, 17.1, and 20.0. The factory default is
10.0 CPI. Also, 6.0 CPI is available for Indian Language firmware.
Select LPI
This parameter allows you to specify the lines per inch (lpi) values.
84
•
ASCII: The options are 6.0, 8.0, 9.0 and 10.3 LPI. The factory default is
6.0 LPI.
•
Indian Language: All ASCII options are available with additional options
3.0, 4.0, 4.5, and 5.0 LPI.
•
H-Series: The options are 6.0 or 8.0 LPI. The factory default for the Hanzi
and Hangul LP+ is 6.0. The factory default for Kanji LP+ is 8.0.
QUICK SETUP
Menu
OpenPrint P8000 HD Postscript/PDF
Firmware
P-Series SFCC
This parameter allows you to select which ASCII codes will function as the
Special Function Control Code (SFCC) command delimiter.
P-Series codes can use hex 00 through hex 7F. Options include the following:
•
•
•
•
•
SOH (hex 01) (factory default)
ESC (hex 1B)
ETX (hex 03)
CIRCUMFLEX (hex 5E) – also called caret (^)
TILDE (hex 7E) – (~)
NOTE: SOH, ETX, and ESC are non-printables. The characters (^) and (~)
are printable; however, do not use them as printables in the host data
stream if either is chosen as a delimiter because print errors will
occur.
Margins
•
Left Margin. Set in columns. Column zero is defined as the far left edge
of the page, and column numbering increments from left to right.
•
Right Margin. Set in columns. Column zero is defined as the far right
edge of the page, and column numbering increments from right to left.
•
Top Margin. Defined in lines, starting from line zero at the top of the page
and incrementing from the top down.
•
Bottom Margin. Defined in lines, starting from line zero at the bottom of
the page and incrementing from the bottom up.
Form Length
Form length is the number of lines that can be printed on a page. You can set
the form length in inches, millimeters (mm), or as a function of the current lpi
(lines per inch).
Form Width
The form width can be specified in inches, millimeters, or as a function of the
current cpi (characters per inch). The forms width set should not exceed the
actual paper width.
85
Chapter
4
QUICK SETUP Menu
Vert Forms (LG)
•
Bot Frm 66/6 (factory default). This option sets the bottom margin for the
forms. You must specify the bottom margin in lines (at 6 lines per inch),
ranging from 0 to 198 lines (33 inches). The default setting is 66. Press
the right arrow to increase the value, left arrow to decrease the value, and
ENTER to change units. Selecting a value for this option resets the top
margin to 0, so the top margin must be redefined after this option is
selected.
•
Top Mrg 6/0 This option sets the top margin for the forms. You must
specify the top margin in lines (at 6 lines per inch), ranging from 0 to 198
lines (33 inches). The default setting is 0. Press the right arrow to
increase the value, left arrow to decrease the value, and ENTER to
change units. The margins will automatically adjust so that the top and
bottom margins do not cross each other.
Horiz Forms (LG)
•
Left Mgr 0.00 (factory default). This sets the left margin for the forms.
You must specify the left margin in 1/10 inch increments, from 0 to 13.1
inches. The default value is 0. Press the right arrow to increase the value,
left arrow to decrease the value, and ENTER to change units. The
margins will automatically adjust so that the left and right margins do not
cross each other.
•
Right Mrg 13.2. This sets the right margin for the forms. You must specify
the right margin in 1/10 inch increments, from 0.1 to 13.2 inches. The
default value is 13.2. Press NEXT to increase the value, PREV to
decrease the value, and ENTER to change units. The margins will
automatically adjust so that the left and right margins do not cross each
other.
Page Length Rep (PCL-II)
•
Inches/Page (factory default). Allows the user to set the page length in
inches.
•
Lines/Page. Allows the user to set the page length in number of lines.
Max Line Width (PCL-II)
Set the maximum line width at either 13.2 inches or the maximum width of the
printer.
LPI Adjust (PCL-II)
Set the lines per inch value for the PCL-II emulation.
86
QUICK SETUP
Menu
OpenPrint P8000 HD Postscript/PDF
Firmware
Resolution (OpenPrint)
This parameter defines the default print resolution. This selection is used
when either the print resolution is not defined by the data stream or if the print
resolution defined by the data stream is not supported.
The following resolutions are available on OpenPrint P8000 Standard:
•
•
120x144 DPI (factory default)
90 x 96 DPI
The following resolutions are available on OpenPrint P8000 HD:
•
•
•
•
•
180x180 DPI (factory default)
180x90 DPI
90x180 DPI
120x120 DPI
90x90 DPI
Paper Size (OpenPrint)
This parameter allows selection of available paper sizes. Available options
include:
•
Custom. Sets a user-defined paper size.
•
Width. Defines the paper width. The range is 1” to 15” in 0.1 inch
increments. The default is 13.6 inches.
•
Length. Defines the paper length. The default is 11 inches. Three
length options are available:
Inches. Defines the length in inches. The range is 1” to 24” in 0.1
inch increments.
1/6 Inch Lines. Defines the length in 1/6 inch lines. The range is 6
to 144 lines.
1/8 Inch Lines. Defines the length in 1/8 inch lines. The range is 8
to 192 lines.
To set a custom length, use the appropriate menu that allows for selection of
the exact paper length to avoid loss of top-of-form (i.e., if using a 12” paper,
select either the “Inches” menu set to 12” or the “1/6 Inch Lines” menu set to
72. However, if using a 11 2/3 inch paper length, the “1/6 Inch Lines” menu
must be used (set to 70) since that is exactly 11 2/3 inches. If the “Inches”
menu is used, the closest values would be 11.6 or 11.7 inches which are not
exact.
The printer will indicate which of the three length menus was used by showing
that submenu first when entering the “Length” menu. The configuration
printout will also show the length menu used.
87
Chapter
4
QUICK SETUP Menu
•
See Table 5 for paper size options and actual sizes.
Table 5. Paper Size Options and Actual Size
Paper Size
Actual Size
US Fanfold
13.6 x 11 in
Letter
8.5 x 11 in
Legal
8.5 x 14 in
Executive
7.3 x 10.5 in
A3
11.7 x 16.5 in
A4
8.3 x 11 2/3 in
A5
5.8 x 8.3 in
A6
4.1 x 5.8 in
Fanfold 10x14in
10 x 14 in
Tabloid 11x17in
11 x 17 in
Fanfold 12x12in
12 x 12 in
JIS B5
7.2 x 10.1 in
US Folio
8.5 x 13 in
No. 10 Envelope
4.1 x 9.5 in
DL Envelope
4.3 x 8.7 in
C5 Envelope
6.4 x 9 in
C6 Envelope
4.5 x 6.4 in
ISO B5
6.9 x 9.8 in
Indian Option (Indian Language)
•
Indian Formatter. The available options include Disable, Script Page,
and Data Page.
•
Disable (factory default). The Indian characters will print without
composing.
•
Script Page. Allows printing of Indian characters with composing for
non-table format.
•
Data Page. Allows Indian character printing with composing for tableformatted data. Data Page does not support ESC sequence commands
nor other single byte commands except for CR, LF, FF, BEL, DC1, and
DC3.
88
QUICK SETUP
Menu
OpenPrint P8000 HD Postscript/PDF
Firmware
•
Tall ASCII Font. The available options include enable and disable.
•
Disable (factory default).
•
Enable. When enabling the Tall ASCII Font setting, the ASCII
characters will print as tall fonts. This setting is available only for 10, 12,
and 13.3 CPI for DP and NLQ settings. It is recommended to print the Tall
ASCII font with 4 LPI setting or lower to avoid overlapping.
•
Space Width Adj. The values range from 1 to 30. The default value is 12.
This option allows spacing adjustment between the words in Indian
character printing. This feature works only with Indian code pages and not
with Standard code pages. The Space Width Adj value affects the
character width of the space character (0x20) and the dash character
(0x2D). The Space Width Adjust value is applicable to both script page
and data page selections. Table 6 shows the space width adjustment
value according to its typeface and CPI setting.
Table 6. Typeface, CPI, and Space Width Values on
Indian Language Printers
Typeface
Data Processing
CPI
Space Width
6
20
10
12
12
10
13.3
9
15
8
17.1
7
20
6
6
30
10
18
12
15
13.3
13
15
12
17.1
10
Near Letter Quality
•
Hindi Numeral. Allows you to specify whether to print numbers as Hindi
numerals.
•
Disable (factory default)
•
Enable. When enabled, numbers will print as Hindi numerals.
89
Chapter
4
QUICK SETUP Menu
Ribbon End Point
This parameter adjusts the point at which the system will declare the ribbon
as being expended. The life count will always be from 100% to 0%, but if a
darker setting is selected 0% will be reached more quickly. If a lighter setting
is selected, the system will extend the time it takes to reach 0%.
Load Config.
The printer can store numerous configurations in memory. This parameter
allows you to select and load a specific configuration.
Save Config
This option allows you to save up to eight configurations to meet different print
job requirements. This eliminates the need to change the parameter settings
for each new job. The configurations are stored in memory and will not be lost
if you turn off the printer. If the Protect Configs. parameter is enabled, the new
configuration will not be saved unless the existing configuration has been
deleted first. The factory default configuration cannot be changed. See
“Saving Your New Configuration” on page 63 for details.
Power Up Config
This option allows you to specify which of the nine configurations (Factory or
1-8) will be the power-up configuration.
Open Platen @ BOF
Some special forms have perforation areas that are too thick to pass through
the print station. This parameter, when enabled, opens and closes the platen
when the perforations move across the platen. When enabling this parameter,
you must set the forms length to match the physical distance between
perforations
Slow Paper Slew
90
•
Disable (factory default). The paper will slew and stack paper at
maximum speed.
•
Enable. Causes the paper to stack at a slower rate. This ensures that
certain forms will stack neatly.
CONTROL
Menu
OpenPrint P8000 HDCONFIG.
Postscript/PDF
Firmware
CONFIG. CONTROL Menu
The CONFIG. CONTROL menu allows you to control your printer’s
configurations according to the specifications necessary for your print jobs.
CONFIG.
CONTROL
* = Factory Default
(from page 73,
74, 75, 76, 77,
78, and 79)
Load
Config.
Factory*
Cfg 1 - Cfg 8
Name
Configs
(see Example
2 on page 66)
Print
Config.
Save
Config.
Cfg 1*
Cfg 2 - Cfg 8
Current Short*
Current Full
Factory
Power-Up
All
Cfg 1 - Cfg 8
Reset Cfg
Names
Cfg 1*
Cfg 2 - Cfg 8
All
Delete
Config.
All*
Cfg 1 - Cfg 8
Power-Up
Config.
Factory*
Cfg 1 - Cfg 8
Protect
Configs.
Disable*
Enable
Auto Save
Enable*
Disable
Load Config.
The printer can store numerous configurations in memory. This parameter
allows you to select and load a specific configuration.
Save Config.
This option allows you to save up to eight configurations to meet different print
job requirements. This eliminates the need to change the parameter settings
for each new job. The configurations are stored in memory and will not be lost
if you turn off the printer. If the Protect Configs. parameter is enabled, the new
configuration will not be saved unless the existing configuration has been
deleted first. The factory default configuration cannot be changed. See
“Saving Your New Configuration” on page 63 for details.
Print Config.
This option is used to print a listing of various stored printer configurations.
Store printouts of your configurations in a safe place for quick referral.
91
Chapter
4
CONFIG. CONTROL Menu
Delete Config.
You can delete one or all of your eight customized configurations. The factory
default configuration cannot be deleted.
Power-Up Config.
You can specify which of the nine configurations (Factory or 1-8) will be the
power-up configuration.
Protect Configs.
You can specify whether or not a new configuration should overwrite an
existing configuration when you activate the Save Configs. parameter. When
disabled (factory default), the new configuration will overwrite the existing
configuration. When enabled, the new configuration will not overwrite the
existing configuration, and the message “CONFIG. EXISTS / Delete First”
displays.
Name Configs
This option allows you to rename any of the eight different configurations.
You may specify a 15-character name which can be used to refer to a
configuration. The name you enter for a configuration will be used in the Load
Config., Save Config., Print Config., Delete Config., and Power-Up Config.
menus. The name can only be cleared by using the Reset Cfg Names menu.
See example 2 on page 66 on how to name configurations.
Reset Cfg Names
You can reset specific configuration names back to the default value of the
configuration number.
Auto Save
•
Enable (factory default). When a change has been made to a Config.
menu, this option automatically prompts the user to save or not save the
change to a Config #.
If you are currently in the Factory Config. menus and make a change,
pressing ENTER saves to Config 1 or the next available Config. and
becomes the Power-Up Config. If the Current Config is Config 1 and a
menu change is made, pressing ENTER will save the change to Config 1.
•
92
Disable. The printer will not prompt you to save any changes made.
HOST INTERFACE
Menu
OpenPrint P8000 HD Postscript/PDF
Firmware
HOST INTERFACE Menu
HOST
INTERFACE
* = Factory Default
1 If installed.
2
Used by LG firmware instead of Centronics and IEEE 1284.
3 Default for Indian Language firmware.
(from page 73,
74, 75, 76, 77,
78, and 79)
Active
Host
Auto
Switching
Auto Switching
Centronics 1
Serial
IEEE 1284 1
Ethernet 3
USB
Parallel 2
(see page 94)
Parallel
Type 2
Centronics 1
Centronics*
IEEE 1284
(see page 98)
Serial
IEEE 1284 1
(see page 100) (see page 96)
USB
(see page 100)
The Host Interface Menu enables you to select and configure one of many
types of interfaces between the printer and your host computer. The currently
selected interface is indicated with an asterisk on the control panel message
display. Each interface has its own submenu with a set of interface
parameters which can be configured.
IMPORTANT
When set to Auto Switching, the printer will load the power-up
configuration and the new interface parameters. Any settings made and
not saved before selecting these interfaces will be lost.
93
Chapter
4
HOST INTERFACE Menu
Auto Switching Submenu
* = Factory Default
1
If Installed.
Auto Switching
(from page 93)
Parallel
Hotport 1
Port Type
Centronics
(see page 98 for options)
IEEE 1284*
(see page 96 for options)
Disable
Trickle Time
1/4 sec*
1/2 sec
1 sec
2 sec
4 sec
8 sec
16 sec
Off
Timeout
10 sec.*
(10-60)
Report Status
Disable*
Enable
Serial
Hotport
Trickle Time
1/4 sec*
1/2 sec
1 sec
2 sec
4 sec
8 sec
16 sec
Off
Timeout
10 sec.*
(10-60)
Report Status
Disable*
Enable
USB
Hotport
Timeout
10 sec.*
10 - 60 sec
Ethernet
Hotport1
Timeout
10 sec.*
(10-60)
Switch Out On
Data Timeout
Session Close
Auto Switching gives the printer the ability to handle multiple data streams
sequentially. With Auto Switching, the printer can service hosts attached to
the serial, parallel, USB, and Ethernet ports as if they were the only interface
connected.
For example, if the host computer sends one print job to the RS-232 serial
port and a separate print job to the IEEE 1284 parallel port, the printer's Auto
Switching is able to handle both jobs, in the order they were received. The
user does not have to reconfigure the selected interface between jobs.
Port Type
Select the parallel interface type connected to the printer. For example, if your
printer is attached to one host with a Centronics connection, you would select
Centronics under the Parallel Hotport menu.
94
Auto Switching Submenu
Trickle Time
When the printer is printing data from a host and a second job is received by
the printer from a different host, Trickle Time prevents the second host from
timing out while it is waiting for its data to be printed. In order to support this
feature, the port has to be able to accept data from the host and store it for
future use.
For example, if the printer is printing a job from the serial port, and then
receives a second print job from the parallel or USB port, the data from the
parallel or USB port will “trickle” bit by bit into the printer buffer to prevent a
timeout error from being sent back to the host connected to the parallel port.
The selected value is the time that the printer waits before getting the next
byte of data from the host. The Trickle Time value should be less than the
host time out value, but not too much shorter or else the printer fills up its
buffer too fast.
Timeout
This is the value used by the printer to time out from the current port and
check the other selected port types for data to print. When the printer has not
received data from the host after a certain period of time, it needs to timeout in
order to service the other ports.
Report Status
•
Disable (factory default). When a fault occurs on the printer, only the
active port reports the fault to the host.
•
Enable. The port will report any fault even when it is not the current active
port.
Switch Out On
NOTE: This option is only available under Ethernet Hotport.
•
Data Timeout (factory default). Allows Autoswitching when no data has
been received for the selected Time Out period.
•
Session Close. Allows Autoswitching only when the Network Socket is
closed. If the Ethernet option is not installed the Network Socket is always
reported as closed and this menu option is ignored.
95
Chapter
4
HOST INTERFACE Menu
IEEE 1284 Parallel (Bidirectional) Submenu
* = Factory Default
1 OpenPrint HD and H-Series products have an extended
range to 256 with a default of 64.
IEEE 1284
(from page 93)
2
Prime
Signal
Buffer Size
in K 1
TOF
Action
Enable*
Disable
Reset*
Do Nothing
16*
1-16
Not available on LG or PCL-2 products.
Auto
Trickle
Disable*
Enable
Trickle
Time
1/4 sec*
1/2 sec
1 sec
2 sec
4 sec
8 sec
16 sec
Off
Offline
Process 2
Disable*
Enable
The IEEE 1284 interface is faster and more versatile than Centronics and
supports bidirectional communication. Configuration of this interface is
controlled from the host. Refer to “IEEE 1284 Parallel Interface” on page 255
for more details about the available modes (Compatibility, Nibble, and Byte).
Prime Signal
•
Enable (factory default). The parallel port will perform a warm start
(reboot) if the host asserts the prime signal.
•
Disable. The parallel port will not perform a warm start (reboot) if the host
asserts the prime signal.
TOF Action
•
Reset (factory default). A form feed is performed before a warm start
when the prime signal is asserted from the host. This setting is used only
if the prime signal parameter is enabled.
•
Do Nothing. Nothing occurs before a warm start when the prime signal is
asserted from the host.
Buffer Size in K
This option configures the amount of memory allocated for the IEEE 1284
parallel port buffer. You can specify between 1 and 16 Kbytes, in 1-Kbyte
increments. The default is 16K.
NOTE: H-Series and OpenPrint HD products have a range of 1 to 256 and a
default of 64K.
96
IEEE 1284 Parallel (Bidirectional) Submenu
Auto Trickle
Auto Trickle is used to prevent a host computer from timing out because the
parallel interface was busy for too long. When Auto Trickle is enabled and the
printer's buffers are almost full, the printer will begin to trickle data in (at the
rate set in the Trickle Time menu) until the buffers start to empty.
Trickle Time
When the printer is printing data from a host and a second job is received by
the printer from a different host, Trickle Time prevents the second host from
timing out while it is waiting for its data to be printed. In order to support this
feature, the port has to be able to accept data from the host and store it for
future use.
For example, if the printer is printing a job from the serial port, and then
receives a second print job from the parallel port, the data from the parallel
port will “trickle” bit by bit into the printer buffer to prevent a timeout error from
being sent back to the host connected to the parallel port.
The selected value is the time that the printer waits before getting the next
byte of data from the host. The Trickle Time value should be less than the
host time out value, but not too much shorter or else the printer fills up its
buffer too fast.
Offline Process
•
Disable (factory default). When set to disable, the printer does not
process parallel data while offline.
•
Enable. When set to enable, the printer continues to process (but not
print) the current parallel job while the printer is offline until the printer's
buffer is full.
97
Chapter
4
HOST INTERFACE Menu
Centronics (Parallel) Submenu
* = Factory Default
1
OpenPrint HD and H-Series products have an extended
range to 256 with a default of 64.
Centronics
(from page 93)
Data Bit 8
PI Ignored
Enable*
Disable
Enable*
Disable
Prime
Signal
TOF Action
Enable*
Disable
Reset*
Do Nothing
Data
Polarity
Standard*
Inverted
Buffer Size
in K 1
16*
(1-16)
Resp.
Polarity
Standard*
Inverted
Auto
Trickle
Disable*
Enable
Busy On
Strobe
Enable*
Disable
Latch
Data On
Leading*
Trailing
Trickle
Time
1/4 sec*
1/2 sec
1 sec
2 sec
4 sec
8 sec
16 sec
Off
Data Bit 8
•
Enable (factory default). Allows access to the extended ASCII character
set.
•
Disable. The printer interprets bit 8 of each incoming data character as a
zero, regardless of its actual setting.
PI Ignored
The PI (Paper Instruction) signal is used to control vertical paper motion.
•
Enable (factory default). Ignores the PI signal and treats the data as
characters or control codes.
•
Disable. Causes the printer to interpret the eight data lines as VFU
commands when the PI signal is true.
Data Polarity
The Data Polarity parameter must be set to match the data polarity of your
host computer.
98
•
Standard (factory default). Does not expect the host computer to invert
the data.
•
Inverted. Expects the data received on the data lines from the host
computer to be inverted. Ones become zeros, and vice versa.
Centronics (Parallel) Submenu
Resp. Polarity
The Resp. Polarity parameter must be set to match the response polarity of
your host computer.
•
•
Standard (factory default). Does not invert the response signal.
Inverted. Inverts the response signal sent to the host computer.
Busy On Strobe
•
Enable (factory default). Asserts a busy signal after each character is
received.
•
Disable. Asserts a busy signal only when the print buffers are full.
Latch Data On
Specifies whether the data is read on the leading or trailing edge of the data
strobe signal. The default is leading.
Prime Signal
•
Enable (factory default). The parallel port will perform a warm start
(reboot) if the host asserts the prime signal.
•
Disable. The parallel port will not perform a warm start (reboot) if the host
asserts the prime signal.
TOF Action
•
Reset (factory default). A form feed is performed before a warm start
when the prime signal is asserted from the host. This setting is used only
if the prime signal parameter is enabled.
•
Do Nothing. Nothing occurs before a warm start when the prime signal is
asserted from the host.
Buffer Size in K
Configures the amount of memory allocated for the Centronics parallel port
buffer. You can specify between 1 and 16 Kbytes, in 1-Kbyte increments.
The default is 16K.
NOTE: H-Series and OpenPrint HD products have a range of 1 to 256 and a
default of 64K.
Auto Trickle
Auto Trickle is used to prevent a host computer from timing out because the
parallel interface was busy for too long. When Auto Trickle is enabled and the
printer's buffers are almost full, the printer will begin to trickle data in (at the
rate set in the Trickle Time menu) until the buffers start to empty out.
99
Chapter
4
HOST INTERFACE Menu
Trickle Time
When the printer is printing data from a host and a second job is received by
the printer from a different host, Trickle Time prevents the second host from
timing out while it is waiting for its data to be printed. In order to support this
feature, the port has to be able to accept data from the host and store it for
future use.
For example, if the printer is printing a job from the serial port, and then
receives a second print job from the parallel or USB port, the data from the
parallel or USB port will “trickle” bit by bit into the printer buffer to prevent a
timeout error from being sent back to the host connected to the parallel port.
The selected value is the time that the printer waits before getting the next
byte of data from the host. The Trickle Time value should be less than the
host time out value, but not too much shorter or else the printer fills up its
buffer too fast.
Serial Submenu
* = Factory Default
1 OpenPrint HD products have an extended range to 256.
H-Series and OpenPrint HD products have an extended
range to 256 with a default setting of 64.
Serial
(from page 93)
Data
Protocol
Baud
Rate
XON/XOFF*
ETX/ACK
ACK/NAK
Series1 1 Char
Series1 2 Char
ENQ/ACK
DTR
600 Baud
1200 Baud
2400 Baud
4800 Baud
9600 Baud*
19200 Baud
38400 Baud
57600 Baud
115200 Baud
Request to
Send
Buffer Size
in K 1
On-Line and BNF*
Off-Line or BF
On-Line
False
True
One Char
Enquiry
Disable*
Enable
100
Word
Length 8
8*
7
1*
2
Poll
Character
16*
1-16
00 Hex*
(00-FF Hex)
Framing
Errors
Offline
Process
Disable
Enable*
Disable*
Enable
Parity
Stop
Bits 1
None*
Odd
Even
Mark
Sense
Poll
Response
0 ms*
(0-30 ms)
Data Term
Ready
True*
On-Line and BNF
Off-Line or BF
On-Line
False
Idle
Response
Disable*
Enable
Serial Submenu
Data Protocol
You can select one of the following serial interface protocols to meet the host
interface requirements.
•
XON / XOFF (factory default). The printer controls the flow of
communication from the host by turning the transmission on and off. In
some situations, such as when the buffer is full or the timing of signals is
too slow or too fast, the printer will tell the host to stop transmission by
sending an XOFF character. An XOFF character is sent when the number
of empty bytes in the buffer is less than or equal to 25 percent of the
buffer size. If the host keeps sending data after an XOFF is sent, the
printer firmware will continue to send an XOFF for every 16 characters
received. When cleared, the printer will resume receiving data (XON).
The data does not have any End of Text codes; XON / XOFF is a nonblock protocol.
•
ETX / ACK. End of Text / Acknowledge. The host controls the flow of
communication to the printer by sending a block of data and ending the
block with an End of Text (ETX) signal. When the printer receives the ETX
signal, it will acknowledge the ETX, thereby acknowledging it has
received the entire block of data.
•
ACK / NAK. ACK means acknowledge; the device acknowledges it has
accepted a transmission. NAK means negative acknowledge; the device
did not receive the transmission.
•
SERIES1 1 CHAR. The printer controls the flow of communication from
the host by turning the transmission on and off using response characters
sent to the host. If the number of valid bytes in the buffer reaches 75
percent of the buffer size, the online or offline and buffer full response
character is sent. If the buffer is completely full, an online or offline buffer
full response is sent every time a character is sent from the host.
Whenever the printer state changes to online or offline, the appropriate
response character is sent. If the idle response option is enabled, the
printer will send a response character every two seconds while the
number of valid bytes in the buffer is less than 75 percent of the buffer
size. If a poll character is received (configurable from the Poll Character
xx Hex option on the front panel from hex 0 through FF), the printer will
send a response character n milliseconds later (configurable from the Poll
Character xx MS on the front panel from 0 through 30). This n
milliseconds is called the poll delay. The poll character will be removed
from the input data stream and will not be processed. This may cause
problems with the transmission of binary data (e.g., control codes, bit
image, etc.). If a poll delay is started due to the receipt of a poll character
and another poll character is received, the second poll character has no
effect and is removed from the input data stream. If a transition (from
buffer full to empty or online to offline) occurs during a poll delay, the new
printer state will be sent at the end of the poll delay.
101
Chapter
4
HOST INTERFACE Menu
The response characters are described in Table 7.
Table 7. Series1 1 Char Response Characters
Printer State
Online and Buffer Empty
•
Response
CR
Online and Buffer Full
3
Offline and Buffer Empty
0
Offline and Buffer Full
2
SERIES1 2 CHAR. This protocol behaves exactly the same as the
Series1 Char except there is a two-character response to the host. The
response characters are described in Table 8.
Table 8. Series1 2 Char Response Characters
Printer State
Response
Online and Buffer Empty
1 CR
Online and Buffer Full
3 CR
Offline and Buffer Empty
0 CR
Offline and Buffer Full
2 CR
•
ENQ/ACK. Enquiry/Acknowledge. The host controls the flow of data by
sending an ENQ (Enquiry, decimal 5, Control-E) approximately every 80
characters. When the printer is ready for more data, it replies with an ACK
(Acknowledge, decimal 6, Control-F).
•
DTR. The printer controls the data flow by sending this hardware signal to
the host. If there is enough room in the printer buffer, the printer will send
a high signal; if the buffer is full, the printer will send a low signal. DTR
tells the host if it is safe to send more data. (If the host sends data during
an unsafe condition, data will be lost.)
Baud Rate
Sets the baud rate of the serial interface in the printer. Baud rate is the speed
at which serial data is transferred between the host computer and the printer.
The choices for the RS-232 interface are 600, 1200, 2400, 4800, 9600,
19200, 38400, 57600, and 115200 Baud. The default is 9600 Baud.
NOTE: If you select a baud rate that is greater than 19200, you may also
want to increase the Buffer Size in K parameter to improve
performance.
102
Serial Submenu
Word Length
Sets the length of the serial data word. The length of the data word can be set
to 7 or 8 bits, and must match the corresponding data bits setting in the host
computer.
Stop Bits 1
Sets the number of stop bits in the serial data word. Either one or two stop bits
can be selected. The setting must match the corresponding stop bit setting in
the host computer.
Parity
Set for odd parity, even parity, mark, sense, or no parity. The setting must
match the corresponding parity setting in the host computer.
Data Term Ready
This configuration is part of hardware flow control and determines when the
Data Terminal Ready (DTR) signal is generated. This signal indicates if the
printer is ready to receive data.
•
•
True (factory default). Continuously asserts the DTR signal.
•
Off Line or BF (buffer full). Asserts the DTR signal when the printer is
offline or the internal serial buffer is full.
•
•
On Line. Asserts the DTR signal when the printer is online.
On Line and BNF (buffer not full). Asserts the DTR signal when the
printer is online and the internal serial buffer is not full.
False. Never asserts the DTR signal.
Request To Send
This configuration is part of hardware flow control and determines when the
Request to Send (RTS) signal is generated. This signal indicates whether or
not the printer is ready to receive data.
•
On Line and BNF (factory default). Asserts the RTS signal when the
printer is online and the internal serial buffer is not full.
•
Off Line or BF. Asserts the RTS signal when the printer is offline or the
internal serial buffer is full.
•
•
•
On Line. Asserts the RTS signal when the printer is online.
False. Never asserts the RTS signal.
True. Continuously asserts the RTS signal.
103
Chapter
4
HOST INTERFACE Menu
Buffer Size in K
This option configures the amount of memory allocated for the serial port
buffer. You may specify between 1 and 16 Kbytes, in 1-Kbyte increments.
The default is 16K.
NOTE: 1. If you select a baud rate that is 19200 or greater, you may want to
increase the Buffer Size in K parameter to improve performance.
2. H-Series and OpenPrint HD products have a range of 1 to 256 and
a default of 64K.
Poll Character
This option is for the Series1 protocol. Whenever the printer receives this
character, it sends a response to the host indicating the current state of the
printer (see Series1 protocol). It may be configured from 0 through FF
hexadecimal.
Poll Response
This option is for the Series1 protocol. After receiving a poll character, the
printer will wait the poll response time in milliseconds before sending the
response. It may be configured from 0 through 30.
Idle Response
This option is for the Series1 protocol.
•
•
Disable (factory default)
Enable. The printer will send a response character every two seconds
while the number of valid bytes in the buffer is less than 75 percent of the
buffer size.
One Char Enquiry
The One Char Enquiry mode uses the Poll Character to detect a request from
the host and sends a response back to the host. This option also allows you to
turn on and off this feature.
Table 9. One Char Enquiry Response Characters
Printer State
Response (hex)
Online and Buffer Not Full
22
Online and Buffer Full
23
Offline and Buffer Not Full
20
Offline and Buffer Full
21
The Poll Character is removed from the data stream. If the Data Protocol is
set to ETX/ACK, ACK/NAK, or Series 1, One Char Enquiry is automatically
disabled.
104
NETWORK
SETUP
Menu
Ethernet
Address
Framing Errors
Possible errors that can occur when the printer’s serial interface settings do
not match those of the host computer.
•
Enable (factory default). If a framing error occurs, a fault message will
display on the control panel.
•
Disable. If a framing error occurs, a fault message will not display on the
control panel.
Offline Process
•
Disable (factory default). When set to disable, the printer does not
process serial data while in offline mode.
•
Enable. When set to enable, the printer continues to process without
printing the current serial job while the printer is offline until the printer’s
buffer is full.
NETWORK SETUP Menu
NETWORK
SETUP
(from page 73
to 80)
Ethernet
Address 1
1 Only
if the Integrated Ethernet feature is installed.
Ethernet
Params 1
See section below. See page 107.
Ethernet Address
* = Factory Default
Ethernet
Address
(from page 105)
IP Address
Subnet
Mask
xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx
xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx
Gateway
Address
xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx
MAC
Address
hhhhhhhhhhhh
IP
Assignment
DHCP
Disable
Enable*
BootP
Disable*
Enable
105
Chapter
4
NETWORK SETUP Menu
IP Address
A numeric address such as 123.45.61.23 which identifies a printer or server in
a LAN or WAN.
Subnet Mask
A binary value used to divide IP networks into smaller subnetworks or
subnets. This mask is used to help determine whether IP packets need to be
forwarded to other subnets.
Gateway Address
A gateway address is the IP address of a hardware device (gateway) that
translates data between two incompatible networks, which can include
protocol translation.
MAC Address
This menu item is the Manufacturer’s Assigned Number, and is unique for
each printer. It is read-only.
IP Assignment
This menu provides two options to control IP Assignment: DHCP and BootP.
106
•
DHCP. You can enable/disable the DHCP protocol using this option, but
consult your administrator for the appropriate setting. Options include
Disable and Enable (factory default).
•
BootP. You can enable/disable the BootP protocol using this option, but
consult your administrator for the appropriate setting. Options include
Disable (factory default) and Enable.
Ethernet Params
Ethernet Params
* = Factory Default
1
If installed.
Ethernet
Params
(from page 105)
ASCII
Data Port
9100*
1025 - 65535
IPDS Data
Port 1
Keep Alive
Timer
5001*
1025 - 65535
3 Minutes*
0- 10 Minutes
Ethernet
Speed
Job Control
Auto Select*
10 Half Duplex
10 Full Duplex
100 Half Duplex
100 Full Duplex
Standard*
Enhanced
Fast Standard
Off
Offline
Process
Disable*
Enable
The Ethernet Params menu helps your printer communicate on a network.
For information on assigning the IP Address, Gateway Address, Subnet
Mask, and MAC Address, refer to the Network Interface Card User's Manual.
ASCII Data Port
This option sets the port number for ASCII print jobs. The data port number
needs to match your host system setting.
•
•
9100 (factory default)
1025 - 65535
IPDS Data Port
This option allows you to set the port number for IPDS print jobs only if the
IPDS option is installed.
•
•
5001 (factory default)
1025 - 65535
Keep Alive Timer
This is the time that the Keep Alive Timer will run. With the Keep Alive Timer
on, the tcp connection will stay connected even after the print job has
terminated.
•
•
3 Minutes (factory default)
0 - 10 Minutes
107
Chapter
4
NETWORK SETUP Menu
Ethernet Speed
This menu option only appears if a 10/100Base-T network interface card
(NIC) is installed. The Ethernet Speed menu allows compatibility with different
systems and networks. The factory default is Auto Select.
•
Auto Select. (factory default) This setting tells the 10/100Base-T NIC to
perform an auto detection scheme and configure itself to be 10 Half
Duplex, 10 Full Duplex, 100 Half Duplex, or 100 Full Duplex.
•
10 Half Duplex. Tells the 10/100Base-T NIC to communicate at 10
Megabits per second using half duplex.
•
10 Full Duplex. Tells the 10/100Base-T NIC to communicate at 10
Megabits per second using full duplex.
•
100 Half Duplex. Tells the 10/100Base-T NIC to communicate at 100
Megabits per second using half duplex.
•
100 Full Duplex. Tells the 10/100Base-T NIC to communicate at 100
Megabits per second using full duplex.
Job Control
The job control mode has four options:
•
Standard (factory default). The NIC waits for the printer to finish receiving
the current job before sending another job. The status line shows “done”
when the job is completely received by the NIC.
•
Enhanced. The NIC waits for the printer to finish receiving the current job
before sending another job. The status line shows “done” when the job is
fully printed.
•
•
Off. No job synchronization between the NIC and the printer.
Fast Standard. The EOJ (End of Job) packet is acknowledged
immediately. Use this selection if the job is timed out due to a delay in the
acknowledgement of the EOJ packet because of the amount of data
being printed.
NOTE: It is recommended to set this option to Enhanced if the emulation is
Postscript.
Offline Process
108
•
Disable (factory default). When set to disable, the printer does not
network data while in offline mode.
•
Enable. When set to enable, the printer continues to process without
printing the current network job while the printer is offline until the printer’s
buffer is full.
ACTIVE IGP EMUL and ACTIVE
EMULATIONS
Ethernet
Params
ACTIVE IGP EMUL and ACTIVE EMULATIONS
The emulation types present in the printer are based on the firmware installed
and the emulation options included. Both are configured from the Factory and
do not require any action from the user.
IMPORTANT
Be sure to know which type of firmware and options are purchased
(see Table 4) to understand the ACTIVE IGP EMUL, ACTIVE
EMULATION, and EMULATION main menus. The H-Series and Indian
Language printers only have the LinePrinter+ emulation.
This ACTIVE IGP EMUL and ACTIVE EMULATION function allows you to
activate the desired emulation. There are two methods for selecting the
desired emulation. The first is by selecting the emulation directly from the
printer menu. The second is by sending a host command which will switch the
emulation automatically (see the appropriate Programmer's Reference
Manual for details).
When changing from one emulation to the other, the printer will load the
power-up configuration and the new emulation parameters. Any configuration
settings performed before selecting these emulations that are not saved in
NVRAM will be lost.
Table 10. Available Firmware Types and Options
Firmware Type
ACTIVE IGP
EMUL 1
ACTIVE
EMULATION 2
EMULATION 3
IGP/PGL*
N/A
IPDS
IPG/PGL
LinePrinter+
IGP/VGL
N/A
IPDS
IGP/VGL
LinePrinter+
IGP/PGL*
N/A
IGP/PGL
LinePrinter+
IGP/VGL
N/A
IGP/VGL
LinePrinter+
P8000 Standard
P8000 TN
NOTE:
* = Default Selection
1
The Active IGP EMULATION menu is only available when the PGL/VGL option is installed.
2
The ACTIVE EMULATION menu shows the options “IGP/PGL & LP+” and “IGP/VGL &
LP+” when the PGL/VGL option is installed. Otherwise, “LinePrinter+” replaces the options.
3 The
selections under the EMULATION menu is based on the ACTIVE IGP EMULATION or
ACTIVE EMULATION settings with all Optional Emulations installed.
109
Chapter
4
ACTIVE IGP EMUL and ACTIVE EMULATIONS
Table 10. Available Firmware Types and Options
Firmware Type
P8000 PCL-II
P8000 LG
P8000 ANSI
ACTIVE IGP
EMUL 1
ACTIVE
EMULATION 2
EMULATION 3
PCL-II*
PCL-II
IGP/PGL & LP+
IGP/PGL
LinePrinter+
IGP/VGL & LP+
IGP/VGL
LinePrinter+
LG*
LG
IGP/PGL & LP+
IGP/PGL
LinePrinter+
IGP/VGL & LP+
IGP/VGL
LinePrinter+
44/48XX-ANSI*
44/48XX-ANSI
IGP/PGL & LP+
IGP/PGL
LinePrinter+
IGP/VGL & LP+
IGP/VGL
LinePrinter+
Postscript/PDF*
Postscript/PDF
IGP/PGL & LP+
IGP/PGL
LinePrinter+
IGP/VGL & LP+
IGP/VGL
LinePrinter+
N/A
N/A
N/A
OpenPrint P8000
Standard
N/A
OpenPrint P8000 HD
N/A
N/A
Postscript/PDF
H-Series
N/A
N/A
LinePrinter+
Indian Language
N/A
N/A
LinePrinter+
Arabic Language
N/A
N/A
LinePrinter+
ANALYZER
NOTE:
* = Default Selection
1
The Active IGP EMULATION menu is only available when the PGL/VGL option is installed.
2
The ACTIVE EMULATION menu shows the options “IGP/PGL & LP+” and “IGP/VGL &
LP+” when the PGL/VGL option is installed. Otherwise, “LinePrinter+” replaces the options.
3
The selections under the EMULATION menu is based on the ACTIVE IGP EMULATION or
ACTIVE EMULATION settings with all Optional Emulations installed.
110
EMULATION
Menu
Ethernet Params
EMULATION Menu
The EMULATION menu allows you to configure the emulation used with your
printer. The Proprinter XL, Epson FX, P-Series, P-Series XQ, and Serial
Matrix emulations are all part of ASCII LinePrinter+. The H-Series
LinePrinter+ has a unique set of emulations such as LQ1600K, KS, and
KSSM depending on the firmware type. You can configure options for the
active emulation via the EMULATION menu. Emulation options are further
described in their corresponding Programmer's Reference Manual.
The menus shown for the ASCII LinePrinter+, IGP/PGL, and IGP/VGL are
specific to the Standard, ANSI, and TN firmware. These emulations may be
structured differently for the PCL-II and LG Firmware. For PCL-II and
LG Firmware, some of the character sets or options may not be available.
* = Factory Default
1 Optional Emulation
2
OpenPrint firmware only.
EMULATION
(from page 73,
74, 75, 76, 77,
78, and 79)
3270
Params 1
5250
Params 1
LinePrinter+
44/48XXANSI1
IGP/PGL1
IGP/VGL1
page 112
page 119
page 124
page 166
page 173
page 185
IPDS1
PCL-II 1
LG 1
Postscript/
PDF 2
page 197
page 202
page 206
page 216
111
Chapter
4
EMULATION Menu
3270 Params
* = Factory Default
This menu appears only if the TN3270 option is installed.
1
3270
Params 1
(from page 74)
Char Set
Select
Translation
Tbl
Secondary Sets*
Primary Sets
(see page 113)
Change
Case
Dual Case*
Mono Case
Max. Print
Width
13.2 inches*
Printer Width
112
Active Char
Set
Set Text
Orientn
Left to Right*
Right to Left
Intervention
Req
Send To Host*
Do Not Send
Prt Partial
Line
Enable*
Disable
Early Print
Cmpl
Disable*
Enable
Compatibility
Op
CR At MPP + 1
On*
Off
NL At MPP + 1
On*
Off
Position Aft FF
On
Off*
Last Char = FF
On*
Off
Null Suppression
Off*
On
FF Validity
Off*
On
Auto Skip At End
Off*
On
FF After Job
Off*
On
CR, EM, & NL
On*
Off
Host
Override
Disable*
Enable
PTX
Transparent
Lead-in Chars
Set 1 <%>*
Set 2 ¬¬$
Set 3 _%_
User Defined
Usr Defined HTRN
Start Code 1*
Start Code 2
Stop Code
Alt. Set 80-9F
Printable*
Control Code
Format
Control
Disable*
Enable
3270 Params
3270
Params
* = Factory Default
Char Set Select
(from page 112)
Primary Sets
0037 English US*
0037 Eng Nether
0285 English UK
0273 Austr/Germ
0274 Belg. Old
0275 Brazilian
0260 Canad Fren
0277 Danish
0287 Danish Alt
0278 Finnish
0288 Finn. Alt
0297 French
0500 Internat 5
0280 Italian
0281 Japan. Eng
0282 Portuguese
0284 Span Speak
0289 Span. Alt
0500 Swiss Bil
0500 Belg. New
0803 Hebrew Old
0424 Hebrew
0892 ORC A
0893 ORC B
0420 Arabic
0880 Cyril. Old
0423 Greek Old
0875 Gr New Euro
0871 Icelandic
0290 Japan Katak
0870 Latin 2
0838 Thai
1026 Turkish
0890 Yugos. Old
1097 Farsi
1025 Cyrillic
0905 Turk. Old
0256 Intern. 1
0924 Euro Lat-9
1140 Euro Eng.
1141 Euro Aust.
1142 Euro Dan.
1143 Euro Finn.
1144 Euro Ital.
1145 Euro Span.
1146 Euro UK
1147 Euro Fren.
1148 Euro Swiss
1149 Euro Ice.
Secondary Sets
English US*
English UK
Austrian/German
German (Alt)
Belgian
Brazilian
Canadian French
Danish/Norweg.
Danish (Alt)
Finnish/Swedish
Finnish (Alt)
French
International
Italian
Japanese Eng.
Japanese Katak.
Portuguese
Portug. (Alt)
Spanish
Spanish (Alt)
Spanish Speak.
Swiss Fren/Ger
Old Hebrew
Hebrew
Farsi/Latin
Greek Old
Greek New
Arabic
Turkish
Turkish Old
Latin 2/ROECE
Yugoslavian
113
Chapter
4
EMULATION Menu
Translation Tbl
Prints out a table of the Coax interface’s current character set. This operation
is valid only when the TN3270 interface is the current interface.
Active Char Set
Specifies which character language set will be the active set.
•
•
Secondary Sets (factory default)
Primary Sets
Prt Partial Line
•
Enable (factory default). When this option is enabled, it forces the printer
to print if a partial line is in the printer (i.e. line not ending with a LF).
•
Disable. When disabled, the last partial line of data will not be printed.
Early Print Cmpl
Early Print Complete allows the printer to send Print Complete status to the
host before the printer is actually done printing all data. Early Print Complete
is only available if the IPDS feature is installed.
•
Disable (factory default). Means the printer will suppress the Early Print
Complete response until all printing is complete.
•
Enable. Means the printer will send an acknowledgement to the host
when it is able to accept more data.
NOTE: When an Early Print Complete is enabled and an error occurs, the
data in the printer will remain in the buffer (regardless of the setting of
the Cancel Buffer option). It is recommended that local procedures be
followed to recover from the error.
Do not select Early Print Complete while a print job is in progress. If
this is done you will need to restart the printer.
PTX Transparent
Lead-in Chars
You can enable additional printer features which are not accessible through
standard TN3270 emulations. To access these features, send text commands
in the data stream. The commands must have a start and end code. Four sets
are available:
114
•
Set 1. start code: <% (factory default)
stop code: >
•
Set 2. start code:¬¬
stop code: $
•
Set 3. start code: _%
stop code: _
•
User Defined.
3270 Params
Usr Defined HTRN
This option is used to set user defined lead-in characters. The range is ASCII
character. This option allows users to define their own lead-in characters for
the Printronix Specific commands. Select a hex value for the following codes
for the User Defined option:
•
•
•
Start Code 1 5F (factory default)
Start Code 2 5F
Stop Code 5B
Alt. Set 80-9F
•
Printable (factory default). Prints data in the range of hex 80 through hex
9F.
•
Control Code. Interprets data in the range of hex 80 through hex 9F as a
control code.
Change Case
Specifies the font as Mono or Dual case. This option is available only in nonSCS mode. The host will be notified of the change when the printer is placed
online. Mono Case prints the same as Dual Case if the character set is one of
the following “right to left” sets: Katak., Hebrew, Old Hebrew, and Farsi.
SCS (System Network Architecture Character String) mode is controlled by
the host computer.
•
•
Dual Case (factory default)
Mono Case
Set Text Orientn
Specifies the direction in which characters are printed on the page. This
allows the printer to print languages which are printed right to left instead of
left to right.
•
•
Left to Right (factory default).
Right to Left. When a right to left language is selected, the host will be
notified of print direction changes when the printer is put online.
Intervention Req
Select from the following:
•
•
Send To Host (factory default). The printer sends a signal to the host
computer when any of the following occur:
•
Printer faults occur.
•
Hold mode time–out occurs.
Not Send To Host
If not selected, the printer will only send the signal on printer faults that cause
data loss (paper jam, ribbon stall, online platen open, etc.).
115
Chapter
4
EMULATION Menu
Compatibility Op
The Compatibility Options allow you to select special printer functions in the
non-SCS mode based on the capabilities of the printer emulated.
CR At MPP+1
MPP is Maximum Print Position, which is also known as line length. This
option controls a carriage return at the end of a print line and at MPP+1.
•
On (factory default). Produces a carriage return to the first print position of
the next line.
•
Off. Produces a carriage return to the first print position of the current line.
NL At MPP+1
Controls how many lines are skipped when the carriage returns to a new line.
•
On (factory default). Moves to the first print position two lines down from
the current position.
•
Off. Moves to the first print position of the next print line.
Position Aft FF (4234 only)
Allows you to select the location of the print position after a form feed
command is sent.
•
On. Sets the printer to print at print position 1 of the first print line on the
next form.
•
Off (factory default). Sets the printer to print at print position 2 of the first
print line on the next form.
Last Char = FF
Determines the print line position when a form feed command is the last code
encountered in the print buffer.
•
On (factory default). Moves to the first print position on the second line of
the next form.
•
Off. Moves to the first print position on the first line of the next form.
NOTE: This option is ignored if Auto Skip At End is on.
If configured as a 3287, and a form feed occurs in the middle of a print buffer,
the printer defaults to the first print position on the second line of the next form
regardless of the setting of this option.
Null Suppression
•
•
116
Off (factory default). Ignores nulls. The print position does not move.
On. Treats nulls as blank spaces.
3270 Params
FF Validity
Determines if the position of a form feed command affects its execution.
•
Off (factory default). Performs a form feed only if it occurs at the first print
position in a line or at Maximum Print Position +1. A form feed command
at any other position is recognized as a space.
•
On. Allows the printer to perform a form feed command anywhere in the
data stream.
Auto Skip At End
Specifies whether or not to perform an automatic form feed at the end of a
print buffer. If form feed is the last character in the print order, the form feed
function is supplied by the Auto Skip At End option.
•
Off (factory default). Sets the printer to print at print position 1 of the next
line.
•
On. Sets the printer to print at print position 1 of the first line of the next
form.
FF After Job
Determines the print position after an operator-initiated local copy (print
screen function).
•
Off (factory default). Performs an automatic new line command after
completing a print buffer (unless a new line, form feed, or carriage return
command was the last one executed). The printer is set to print at print
position 1 of the next line.
•
On. Performs an automatic form feed command unless a form feed was
the last one executed. The printer is set to print at print position 1 of the
first line on the next form.
CR, EM, and NL (3287 only)
CR (Carriage Return), EM (Error Message), and NL (New Line) specify that
the printer treat the CR, EM, and NL control codes either as spaces or as
control codes.
•
On (factory default). Treats the CR, EM, and NL commands as control
codes.
•
Off. Treats the CR, EM, and NL commands as spaces.
117
Chapter
4
EMULATION Menu
Host Override
Determines whether the printer accepts certain commands sent by the host,
or continues to use the current operator panel settings.
•
Disable (factory default). Allows these host commands to override
operator panel settings: line length, forms length, lines per inch (LPI),
characters per inch (CPI), print quality, and text orientation. Note the
information appearing on the message display may not match the data
stream setting. No values will change upon initial selection of the disable
option.
•
Enable. The operator panel settings override the host commands.
Format Control
Enables the printer to reflect the same spacing as CTPC model printers after
absolute and relative move commands are executed.
•
Disable (factory default). Reflects distance, generated by the VGL
feature, PGL feature, and Hex Transparent control code sequence, in the
new position (after horizontal and vertical tabs are executed).
•
Enable.
Max. Print Width
Set the maximum print width the printer will print when using a C/T host
interface. Set for 13.2 inches when printing files larger than the width of the
printer. All data exceeding the width of the maximum Printer Width will be
truncated.
•
•
118
13.2 inches (factory default)
Printer Width (the maximum width of the printer)
5250 Params
5250 Params
* = Factory Default
1
This menu appears only if the TN5250 option is installed.
5250
Params 1
(from page 74)
Char Set
Select
Translation
Tbl
Secondary Set*
Primary Set
(see page 120)
Graphic
Chek Cod
60*
40-FE
Active Char
Set
Set Text
Orientn
Left to Right*
Right to Left
Host
Override
Disable*
Enable
Prt Partial
Line
Enable*
Disable
Format
Control
Disable*
Enable
PTX
Transparent
Lead-in Chars
Set 1 <%>*
Set 2 ¬¬$
Set 3 _%_
User Defined
Usr Defined HTRN
Start Code 1*
Start Code 2
Stop Code
Alt. Set 80-9F
Printable*
Control Code
Graphic
Chek Err
Enable*
Disable
Max. Print
Width
13.2 inches*
Printer Width
119
Chapter
4
EMULATION Menu
* = Factory Default
5250
Params
Char Set Select
(from page 119)
Primary Sets
0037 English US*
0037 Eng Nether
0500 Swiss Bil
0500 Belg. New
0273 Austr/Germ
0274 Belg. Old
0275 Brazilian
0260 Canad Fren
0277 Danish
0278 Finnish
0297 French
0280 Italian
0281 Japan. Eng
0282 Portuguese
0284 Span Speak
0285 English UK
0892 OCR A
0893 OCR B
0424 Hebrew
0803 Hebrew Old
0420 Arabic
0880 Cyril. Old
0423 Greek Old
0875 Gr New Euro
0871 Icelandic
0290 Japan Kata
0870 Latin 2
0838 Thai
1026 Turkish
0890 Yugos. Old
1097 Farsi
1025 Cyrillic
0256 Intern. 1
1112 Balt Mult
0924 Euro Lat-9
1122 Estonian
1140 Euro Eng.
1141 Euro Aust.
1142 Euro Dan.
1143 Euro Finn.
1144 Euro Ital.
1145 Euro Span.
1146 Euro UK
1147 Euro Fren.
1148 Euro Swiss
1149 Euro Ice.
0500 Internat 5
120
Secondary Sets
English US*
Austrian/German
Belgian
Brazilian
Canadian French
Danish/Norweg.
Finnish/Swedish
French
Italian
Japanese Eng.
Japanese Katak.
Portuguese
Spanish
Spanish Speak.
English UK
Old Hebrew
Hebrew
Farsi/Latin
Greek Old
Greek New
Arabic
Turkish
Latin 2/ROECE
Yugoslavian
Multinational
5250 Params
Translation Tbl
Prints out a table of the TN5250 interface’s current character set. This
operation is valid only when the TN5250 interface is the current interface.
Active Char Set
Selects which group of character sets (Primary or Secondary) will be active.
•
•
Secondary Set (factory default)
Primary Set
Prt Partial Line
•
Enable (factory default). When this option is enabled, it forces the printer
to print if a partial line is in the printer (i.e. line not ending with a LF).
•
Disable. When disabled, the last partial line of data will not be printed.
PTX Transparent
Lead-in Chars
You can enable additional printer features which are not accessible through
standard TN5250 emulations. To access these features, send text commands
in the data stream. The commands must have a start and end code. Four sets
are available:
•
Set 1. start code: <% (factory default)
stop code: >
•
Set 2. start code:¬¬
stop code: $
•
Set 3. start code: _%
stop code: _
•
User Defined.
Usr Defined HTRN
This option is used to set user defined lead-in characters. The range is ASCII
character. This option allows users to define their own lead-in characters for
the Printronix Specific commands. Select a hex value for the following codes
for the User Defined option:
•
•
•
Start Code 1 5F (factory default)
Start Code 2 5F
Stop Code 5B
Alt. Set 80-9F
•
Printable (factory default). Prints data in the range of hex 80 through hex
9F.
•
Control Code. Interprets data in the range of hex 80 through hex 9F as a
control code.
121
Chapter
4
EMULATION Menu
Graphic Chek Err
Allows overriding of the host setting for the SGEA (Set Graphic Error Action)
command.
•
Enable (factory default). The host setting for the SGEA used by the
printer. If the SGEA command is requested to stop on graphic errors, the
printer will stop when a graphic error is detected.
•
Disable. Ignores the SGEA command from the host. The printer does not
stop when an error is detected; instead, it substitutes the character
selected in the Graphic Chek Code parameter.
Graphic Chek Cod
Specifies the replacement character to print in place of any unprintable
character that is received from the host. Choose a hex character from 40
through FE. The character becomes the printer default when:
•
•
•
The printer is powered off and then powered on.
An SGEA command specifies to use the operator panel default.
The Graphic Chek Err parameter is disabled.
The value can be the following:
•
•
60 (factory default)
40 – F4
Set Text Orientn
Specifies the direction in which characters are printed on the page. This
allows the printer to print languages which are printed right to left instead of
left to right.
•
•
Left to Right (factory default)
Right to Left. When a right to left language is selected, the host will be
notified of print direction changes when the printer is put online.
Host Override
Determines whether the printer accepts certain commands sent by the host,
or continues to use the current operator panel settings.
122
•
Disable (factory default). Allows these host commands to override
operator panel settings: line length, forms length, lines per inch (LPI),
characters per inch (CPI), print quality, and text orientation. Note the
information appearing on the message display may not match the data
stream setting. No values will change upon initial selection of the disable
option.
•
Enable. The operator panel settings override the host commands.
5250 Params
Format Control
Enables the printer to reflect the same spacing as earlier generation line
matrix printers after absolute and relative move commands are executed.
•
Disable (factory default). Reflects distance, generated by the VGL
feature, PGL feature, and Hex Transparent control code sequence, in the
new position (after horizontal and vertical tabs are executed).
•
Enable.
Max. Print Width
Set the maximum print width the printer will print when using an IBM host
interface. Set for 13.2 inches when printing files larger than the width of the
printer. All data exceeding the width of the maximum Printer Width will be
truncated.
•
•
13.2 Inches (factory default)
Printer Width (the maximum width of the printer)
123
Chapter
4
EMULATION Menu
LinePrinter Plus Emulation (ASCII, Indian Language)
* = Factory Default
Indian Language Firmware
1
EMULATION
(from page 111)
LinePrinter+
Printer
Protocol
CPI/LPI
Select
(see page 125)
Select CPI
6.0 CPI 1
10.0 CPI*
12.0 CPI
13.3 CPI
15.0 CPI
17.1 CPI
20.0 CPI
Select LPI
3.0 LPI 1
4.0 LPI 1
4.5 LPI 1
5.0 LPI 1
6.0 LPI*
8.0 LPI
9.0 LPI
10.3 LPI
P/S Mode CPI
Changed*
Unchanged
Indian
Option 1
Indian Formatter
Tall ASCII Font
Space Width Adjust
Hindi Numeral
124
Host
Command
Enable*
Ignore All
Ignore CPI
Ignore LPI
Ignore Unidir.
Reset Cmd
CFG Ld
Disable*
Power up config
Current config
Factory config
Font
Attributes
Page
Format
(see page 125)
(see page 125)
Set
Substitution
Inactive*
Active
Barcode
x-offset
Disable*
Enable
Print Char.
Set
Barcode
Height
Disable*
Enable
LinePrinter Plus Emulation (ASCII, Indian Language)
* = Factory Default
1
Hidden when IPDS is active.
Indian Language Firmware
3
Arabic Language Firmware
2
Printer
Protocol
(from page 124)
Active
Protocol
P-Series*
P-Series XQ
Serial Matrix
Proprinter XL
Epson FX
P-Series
P-Series
XQ
Serial
Matrix
Proprinter
XL
Epson
FX
(see page 147) (see page 153) (see page 155) (see page 160) (see page 163)
Font Attributes
(from page 124)
Typeface
Data Processing*
NLQ
OCR-A
OCR-B
High Speed
NLQ Sans Serif
High Speed 100
NLQ 200
DP 200
High Speed 64
BARCODE 145
BARCODE 160
DP 144
High Speed 144
NLQ Naskhi bold 3
NLQ Kofi 3
NLQ Kofi bold 3
NLQ Hadeeth 3
NLQ Req’a 3
NLQ Haydar 3
NLQ Asri 3
Prop.
Spacing
Disable*
Enable
Bold Print
Disable*
Enable
Italic Print
Slashed
Zero
Disable*
Disable*
Forward Slant Enable
Backward Slant
Text
Position
Top of Line*
Bottom of Line
ASCII
Compatible 2
Disable*
Enable
Page Format
(from page 124)
Form
Length
Abs. Length IN 1
11.0* inches
(0.1-24)
Abs. Length MM 1
279.4* mm
(0.1-609.6)
Funct. of Lines
66* lines
(1-192)
Form
Width
Abs. Width IN 1
13.6* inches
(0.1-13.6)
Abs. Width MM 1
345.4* mm
(0.1-345.4)
Function of CPI
136* characters
(1-272)
Margins
Left Margin 1
0* columns
(0-369)
Right Margin 1
0* columns
(0-369)
Bottom Margin
0* lines
(0-451)
Perforation
Skip 1
Disable*
1/2 Inch
2/3 Inch
5/6 Inch
1 inch
125
Chapter
4
EMULATION Menu
LinePrinter Plus Emulation (H-Series Hanzi GB)
* = Factory Default
EMULATION
(from page 111)
LinePrinter+
CPI/LPI
Select
Printer
Protocol
LQ-1600K
See page 129.
126
Select CPI
10.0 CPI*
12.0 CPI
13.3 CPI
15.0 CPI
17.1 CPI
20.0 CPI
Select LPI
6.0 LPI*
8.0 LPI
DBCS CPI
5.0 CPI
6.0 CPI
6.7 CPI*
7.5 CPI
Others CPI
Graphics
Spd Up
Page
Format
Normal*
Enhanced
Turbo
Match Typeface
See page 137.
Font
Attributes
Host
Command
Enable
Ignore All
Ignore CPI
Ignore LPI
Ignore Unidir*
Typeface
LQ
Near LQ*
Normal
Hi-Speed
Super Hi-Speed
Ultra Hi-Speed
Styling Type
SONG*
High Density
Disable*
Enable
Prop. Spacing
Disable*/Enable
Bold Print
Disable*/Enable
Italic Print
Disable*
Forward Slant
Backward Slant
Slashed Zero
Disable*/Enable
DBCS/ASCII Mode
DBCS Mode*
ASCII Mode
Reset Cmd
CFG Ld
Disable*
Power up Config.
Current Config.
Factory Config.
Error
Handling
Illegal Code Pt.
Normal*
As Space
DBCS ASCII Style
Normal*
Oversize
OCRB
Text Position
Bottom of Line*
Top of Line
Compressed Mode
Disable*
Enable
DBCS Compressed
Disable*
Enable
Font Scale
Standard*
16 x 24
Encoding
Address Table*
UTF-8
Taller 15 CPI
Disable*
Enable
Horizontal Expnd
24* pt size
(24 - 72) pt size
Vertical Expnd
24* pt size
(24 - 72) pt size
LinePrinter Plus Emulation (H-Series Hanzi Big5)
LinePrinter Plus Emulation (H-Series Hanzi Big5)
* = Factory Default
EMULATION
(from page 111)
LinePrinter+
CPI/LPI
Select
Printer
Protocol
LQ-1600K
See page 129.
Select CPI
10.0 CPI*
12.0 CPI
13.3 CPI
15.0 CPI
17.1 CPI
20.0 CPI
Select LPI
6.0 LPI*
8.0 LPI
DBCS CPI
5.0 CPI
6.0 CPI
6.7 CPI*
7.5 CPI
Others CPI
Graphics
Spd Up
Normal
Enhanced
Turbo
Match Typeface*
Page
Format
See page 137.
Font
Attributes
Host
Command
Enable
Ignore All
Ignore CPI
Ignore LPI
Ignore Unidir*
Typeface
LQ*
Near LQ
Normal
Hi-Speed
Super Hi-Speed
Ultra Hi-Speed
Styling Type
MING*
High Density
Disable*
Enable
Prop. Spacing
Disable*/Enable
Bold Print
Disable*/Enable
Italic Print
Disable*
Forward Slant
Backward Slant
Slashed Zero
Disable*/Enable
DBCS/ASCII Mode
DBCS Mode*
ASCII Mode
Reset Cmd
CFG Ld
Disable
Power up Config.
Current Config.*
Factory Config.
DBCS ASCII Style
Normal*
Oversize
OCRB
Text Position
Bottom of Line*
Top of Line
Compressed Mode
Disable*
Enable
DBCS Compressed
Disable*
Enable
Encoding
Address Table*
UTF-8
Taller 15 CPI
Disable*
Enable
Horizontal Expnd
24* pt size
(24 - 72) pt size
Vertical Expnd
24* pt size
(24 - 72) pt size
Error
Handling
Illegal Code Pt.
Normal
As Space*
As Square
127
Chapter
4
EMULATION Menu
LinePrinter Plus Emulation (H-Series Kanji)
* = Factory Default
EMULATION
(from page 111)
LinePrinter+
Printer
Protocol
CPI/LPI
Select
Select CPI
10.0 CPI
12.0 CPI
13.3 CPI
See page 129.
15.0 CPI*
17.1 CPI
20.0 CPI
Select LPI
6.0 LPI
8.0 LPI*
DBCS CPI
5.0 CPI
6.0 CPI
6.7 CPI
7.5 CPI*
Others CPI
LQ-1600K
128
Graphics
Spd Up
Page
Format
Normal*
Enhanced
Turbo
Match Typeface
See page 137.
Font
Attributes
Host
Command
Enable
Ignore All
Ignore CPI
Ignore LPI
Ignore Unidir*
Typeface
LQ
Near LQ*
Normal
Hi-Speed
Super Hi-Speed
Ultra Hi-Speed
Styling Type
Mincho*
High Density
Disable*
Enable
Prop. Spacing
Disable*/Enable
Bold Print
Disable*/Enable
Italic Print
Disable*
Forward Slant
Backward Slant
Slashed Zero
Disable*/Enable
DBCS/ASCII Mode
DBCS Mode*
ASCII Mode
Reset Cmd
CFG Ld
Disable*
Power up Config.
Current Config.
Factory Config.
Error
Handling
Illegal Code Pt.
Normal*
As Space
DBCS ASCII Style
Normal*
Oversize
OCRB
Text Position
Bottom of Line*
Top of Line
Compressed Mode
Disable*
Enable
DBCS Compressed
Disable*
Enable
Encoding
Address Table*
UTF-8
Taller 15 CPI
Disable*
Enable
Horizontal Expnd
24* pt size
(24 - 72) pt size
Vertical Expnd
24* pt size
(24 - 72) pt size
LQ-1600K Emulation
LQ-1600K Emulation
Printer
Protocol
* = Factory Default
For Hanzi GB and Kanji SJIS only
1
LQ-1600K
(from pages
126, 127, 128)
Define CR
Code
Autowrap
Define LF
Code
CR = CR*
CR = CR + LF
With LF+CR*
With CR
Disable
LF = CR + LF*
LF = LF
20 CPI
Condensed
Enable*
Disable
Alt Set 80-9F
Printable*
Control Code
Currency
Sign 1
RMB Select*
$ Select
Printer
Select
Disable*
Enable
Character Set
Standard Sets*
Epson Set*
ASCII (USA*)
French
German
English
Danish I
Swedish
Italian
Spanish I
Japanese
Norwegian
Danish II
Spanish II
Latin Am I
French Canadian
Latin Am II
IBM PC
AR3240
Compat.1
Disable*
Enable
129
Chapter
4
EMULATION Menu
Define CR Code
The Define CR Code option controls the action of the printer when it receives
a Carriage Return code (hex 0D) from the host computer. If this feature is
enabled, each time the printer receives a Carriage Return, it inserts an
additional Line Feed code (hex 0A) into the data stream. Do not use this
feature if the host computer sends Line Feeds to the printer.
•
CR = CR (factory default). Does not insert an extra Line Feed after each
Carriage Return.
•
CR = CR + LF. Inserts an extra Line Feed after each Carriage Return.
Autowrap
This option defines the printer actions when print data is received past the
forms width setting.
•
With LF+CR (factory default). Performs an automatic carriage return and
line feed when data is received past the forms width.
•
With CR. Performs an automatic carriage return (without line feed) when
data is received past the forms width.
•
Disable. Discards any data past the forms width.
Define LF Code
The Define LF Code option controls the action of the printer when it receives a
Line Feed code (hex 0A) from the host computer. If this feature is enabled,
each time the printer receives a Line Feed, it inserts an additional Carriage
Return code (hex 0D) into the data stream. This feature can be used in most
installations, but it is required if the host computer does not send Carriage
Returns to the printer.
•
LF = CR + LF (factory default). Adds an extra Carriage Return with each
Line Feed.
•
LF = LF. Does not add a Carriage Return with a Line Feed.
Printer Select
•
•
Disable (factory default). Ignores the ASCII DC1 and DC3 control codes.
Enable. Disables the printer when a DC1 control code is received, and
enables the printer when a DC3 control code is received.
Character Set
This parameter selects a character set for the Epson® emulation.
130
LQ-1600K Emulation
20 CPI Condensed
Compressed print characters are narrower than the normal character set.
This is helpful for applications for which you need to print the maximum
amount of information on a page.
•
Enable (factory default). Prints about 60 percent of the width of normal
characters when compressed print is chosen by the host computer. For
example, a 12 CPI Draft font will compress to 20 CPI.
•
Disable. Does not compress print widths, even if condensed print is
chosen by the host.
Alt. Set 80-9F
•
Control Code (factory default). Interprets data in the range of hex 80
through hex 9F as a control code.
•
Printable. Prints data in the range of hex 80 through hex 9F.
Currency Sign (for GB and Kanji)
•
RMB Select (factory default). The ASCII code hex 24 is printed as a RMB
“¥” character in DBCS mode. Default for GB.
•
$ Select. The ASCII code hex 24 is printed as a dollar “$” character in
DBCS mode. Default for Kanji.
AR3240 (for GB and Kanji)
•
•
Disable (factory default). AR3240 emulation does not take effect. Default.
Enable. AR3240 takes effect, SUB (0x1A) is used as another SFCC. The
listed commands will take effect and turn the extending table character
on.
131
Chapter
4
EMULATION Menu
LinePrinter Plus Emulation (H-Series Hangul)
* = Factory Default
1
Hangul KSSM only.
EMULATION
(from page 111)
LinePrinter+
Printer
Protocol
CPI/LPI
Select
Select CPI1
KS*
(see page 133.)
10.0 CPI*
KSSM
12.0 CPI
(see page 135)
13.3 CPI
15.0 CPI
17.1 CPI
20.0 CPI
Select LPI
6.0 LPI*
8.0 LPI
DBCS CPI
5.0 CPI
6.0 CPI*
6.7 CPI
7.5 CPI
8.5 CPI
9.0 CPI
10.0 CPI
Others CPI
132
Graphics
Spd Up
Page
Format
Normal*
Enhanced
Turbo
Match Typeface
See page 137.
Font
Attributes
Host
Command
Enable*
Ignore All
Ignore CPI
Ignore LPI
Ignore Unidir
Ignore Pg. Fmt
Typeface
LQ*
Near LQ
Normal
Hi-Speed
Super Hi-Speed
Ultra Hi-Speed
Styling Type
Myungjo*
Gothic
High Density
Disable*
Enable
Bold Print
Disable*/Enable
Italic Print
Disable*
Forward Slant
Backward Slant
Slashed Zero
Disable*/Enable
DBCS/ASCII Mode1
DBCS Mode*
ASCII Mode
Reset Cmd
CFG Ld
Disable*
Power up Config.
Current Config.
Factory Config.
Error
Handling
Illegal Code Pt.
Normal*
As Space
DBCS ASCII Style
Normal*
OCRB
Normal Thin
Text Position
Bottom of Line*
Top of Line
Encoding
Address Table*
UTF-8
Taller 15 CPI 1
Disable*
Enable
Horizontal Expnd
24* pt size
(24 - 72) pt size
Vertical Expnd
24* pt size
(24 - 72) pt size
KS Emulation
KS Emulation
Printer
Protocol
KS
(from page 132)
Define CR
Code
CR = CR*
CR = CR + LF
CR Bold Select
Enable*
Disable
Alt Set 80-9F
Control Code*
Printable
Define LF
Code
Autowrap
With LF+CR*
With CR
Disable
LF = CR + LF*
LF = LF
Printer Select
Disable*
Enable
Emulation
Extend
Disable*
Enable
Define CR Code
The Define CR code option controls the action of the printer when it receives
a Carriage Return code (hex 0D) from the host computer. If this feature is
enabled, each time the printer receives a Carriage Return, it inserts an
additional Line Feed code (hex 0A) into the data stream. Do not use this
feature if the host computer sends Line Feeds to the printer.
•
CR = CR (factory default). Does not insert an extra Line Feed after each
Carriage Return.
•
CR = CR + LF. Inserts an extra Line Feed after each Carriage Return.
CR Bold Select
This option determines whether CR (0x0D) will turn on the bold attribute.
•
Enable (factory default). The text after CR will be printed as bold together
with the text before CR.
•
Disable. Normal CR function.
133
Chapter
4
EMULATION Menu
Autowrap
This option defines the printer actions when print data is received past the
forms width setting.
•
With LF+CR (factory default). Performs an automatic carriage return and
line feed when data is received past the forms width.
•
With CR. Performs an automatic carriage return (without line feed) when
data is received past the forms width.
•
Disable. Discards any data past the forms width.
Define LF Code
The Define LF code option controls the action of the printer when it receives a
Line Feed code (hex 0A) from the host computer. If this feature is enabled,
each time the printer receives a Line Feed, it inserts an additional Carriage
Return code (hex 0D) into the data stream. This feature can be used in most
installations, but it is required if the host computer does not send Carriage
Returns to the printer.
•
LF = CR + LF (factory default). Adds an extra Carriage Return with each
Line Feed.
•
LF = LF. Does not add a Carriage Return with a Line Feed.
Printer Select
•
•
Disable (factory default). Ignores the ASCII DC1 and DC3 control codes.
Enable. Disables the printer when a DC1 control code is received, and
enables the printer when a DC3 control code is received.
Alt. Set 80-9F
•
Control Code (factory default). Interprets data in the range of hex 80
through hex 9F as a control code.
•
Printable. Prints data in the range of hex 80 through hex 9F.
Emulation Extend
•
•
134
Disable (factory default). Does not select the extension command.
Enable. Selects the extension command (ESC 4/ESC 5 to select/cancel
Italic Printing and ESC SP to select Intercharacter Spacing).
KSSM Emulation
KSSM Emulation
Printer
Protocol
KSSM
(from page 132)
Character
Sets
Define CR
Code
Standard Sets*
IBM PC*
Epson Set
CR = CR*
CR = CR + LF
20 CPI
Condensed
Enable*
Disable
CR Bold
Select
Enable*
Disable
Autowrap
Define LF
Code
With LF+CR*
With CR
Disable
LF = CR + LF*
LF = LF
Printer Select
Disable*
Enable
Alt. Set 80-9F
Control Code*
Printable
Character Sets
This parameter selects a character set for the KSSM emulation.
CR Bold Select
This option determines whether CR (0x0D) will turn on the bold attribute.
•
Enable (factory default). The text after CR will be printed as bold together
with the text before CR.
•
Disable. Normal CR function.
Define CR Code
The Define CR code option controls the action of the printer when it receives
a Carriage Return code (hex 0D) from the host computer. If this feature is
enabled, each time the printer receives a Carriage Return, it inserts an
additional Line Feed code (hex 0A) into the data stream. Do not use this
feature if the host computer sends Line Feeds to the printer.
•
CR = CR (factory default). Does not insert an extra Line Feed after each
Carriage Return.
•
CR = CR + LF. Inserts an extra Line Feed after each Carriage Return.
135
Chapter
4
EMULATION Menu
Autowrap
This option defines the printer actions when print data is received past the
forms width setting.
•
With LF+CR (factory default). Performs an automatic carriage return and
line feed when data is received past the forms width.
•
With CR. Performs an automatic carriage return (without line feed) when
data is received past the forms width.
•
Disable. Discards any data past the forms width.
Define LF Code
The Define LF code option controls the action of the printer when it receives a
Line Feed code (hex 0A) from the host computer. If this feature is enabled,
each time the printer receives a Line Feed, it inserts an additional Carriage
Return code (hex 0D) into the data stream. This feature can be used in most
installations, but it is required if the host computer does not send Carriage
Returns to the printer.
•
LF = CR + LF (factory default). Adds an extra Carriage Return with each
Line Feed.
•
LF = LF. Does not add a Carriage Return with a Line Feed.
Printer Select
•
•
Disable (factory default). Ignores the ASCII DC1 and DC3 control codes.
Enable. Disables the printer when a DC1 control code is received, and
enables the printer when a DC3 control code is received.
20 CPI Condensed
Compressed print characters are narrower than the normal character set.
This is helpful for applications for which you need to print the maximum
amount of information on a page.
•
Enable (factory default). Prints about 60 percent of the width of normal
characters when compressed print is chosen by the host computer. For
example, a 12 cpi font will compress to 20 cpi.
•
Disable. Does not compress print widths, even if condensed print is
chosen by the host.
Alt. Set 80-9F
136
•
Control Code (factory default). Interprets data in the range of hex 80
through hex 9F as a control code.
•
Printable. Prints data in the range of hex 80 through hex 9F.
Page Format Submenu (H-Series)
Page Format Submenu (H-Series)
* = Factory Default for Hanzi and Hangul printer
** = Factory Default for Kanji printer
Page Format
(from page 126,
127, 128, 132)
Form
Length
Abs. Length IN
11.0* inches
08.5** inches
(0.1-24)
Abs. Length MM
279.4* mm
215.9** mm
(0.1-609.6)
Funct. of Lines
66* Lines
68** Lines
(1-192)
Form
Width
Abs. Width IN
13.6* inches
(0.1-13.6)
Abs. Width MM
345.4* mm
(0.1-345.5)
Funct. of CPI
136* Characters
204** Characters
(1-272)
Margins
Left Margin
0* columns
(0-369)
Right Margin
0* columns
(0-369)
Bottom Margin
0* lines
(0-451)
Perforation
Skip
Disable*
1/2 inch
2/3 inch
5/6 inch
1 inch
Printer Protocol
Select the LinePrinter+ protocol you wish to use. Refer to the LinePrinter Plus
Programmer's Reference Manual for more information with ASCII products.
For H-Series Hanzi GB, Hanzi Big5, or Kanji LP+ printers, refer to the
LQ-1600K Programmer’s Reference Manual for details. For the H-Series
Hangul LP+ printer, refer to the KS or KSSM Programmer’s Reference
Manual for details.
CPI/LPI Select
This parameter lets you specify the characters per inch (cpi) and lines per
inch (lpi) values.
Host Command
This parameter allows you to block certain host commands from being
acknowledged by the printer.
•
Enable (factory default). All host commands are acknowledged by the
printer.
•
•
Ignore All. All host commands are ignored by the printer.
•
•
Ignore LPI. All LPI commands sent by the host are ignored by the printer.
•
Ignore Pg. Fmt. All page format commands sent by the host are ignored
by the printer. This is applicable for H-Series Hangul LP+ printers only.
Ignore CPI. All CPI commands sent by the host are ignored by the
printer.
Ignore Unidir. All Unidirectional commands sent by the host are ignored
by the printer.
137
Chapter
4
EMULATION Menu
Font Attributes
Typeface (ASCII)
NOTE: Not all firmware types have the entire list of typefaces.
•
Data Processing (factory default). A general purpose font printing out at
120 dpi horizontally and 72 dpi vertically. The width of the font will vary
with each cpi. For Indian Language firmware, the Indian character sets
must be selected for Indian characters to print.
•
NLQ. A high quality font printing at 180 dpi horizontally and 96 dpi
vertically. This font has serifs and the width of the font varies with the cpi.
For Indian Language firmware, the Indian character sets must be selected
for Indian characters to print.
•
OCR-A / OCR-B. Optical character recognition fonts printing at 120 dpi
horizontally and 144 dpi vertically. Both fonts print only at 10 cpi.
•
High Speed. A draft quality font printing at 120 dpi horizontally and 48 dpi
vertically. The width of the font varies with the cpi.
•
NLQ Sans Serif. A high quality font printing at 180 dpi horizontally and 96
dpi vertically. This font prints without serifs. The width of the font varies
with the cpi.
•
High Speed 100. A draft quality font printing at 100 dpi horizontally and
48 dpi vertically. When chosen from the front panel, it defaults to 10 cpi.
The cpi can then be varied, but the width will not change.
•
NLQ 200. This NLQ font prints at 200 dpi horizontally and 96 vertically.
When chosen from the front panel, it defaults to 12 cpi. The cpi can then
be varied, but the width will not change.
•
DP 200. This Data Processing font prints at 200 dpi horizontally and 72
vertically. When chosen from the front panel, it defaults to 12 cpi. The cpi
can then be varied, but the width will not change.
•
High Speed 64. This font prints at 120 dpi horizontally and 64 vertically.
When chosen from the front panel, it defaults to
10 cpi. The cpi can then be varied, but the width will not change.
•
BARCODE 145. This Data Processing font prints at 145 dpi horizontally
and 72 vertically. When chosen from the front panel, it defaults to 12 cpi.
The cpi can then be varied, but the width will not change.
•
BARCODE 160. This Data Processing font prints at 160 dpi horizontally
and 72 vertically. When chosen from the front panel, it defaults to 13 cpi.
The cpi can then be varied, but the width will not change.
Typeface (Arabic Language)
NOTE: These Arabic typefaces appear at the end of the list above for the
Arabic Language firmware only. They are only used when the Arabic
Analyzer is enabled.
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
138
NLQ Naskhi bold
NLQ Kofi
NLQ Kofi bold
NLQ Hadeeth
NLQ Req’a
NLQ Haydar
NLQ Asri
Page Format Submenu (H-Series)
Typeface (H-Series)
This parameter allows you to select the typeface for printing in the emulation.
•
•
•
•
•
•
LQ. Default value for Hanzi Big5/Hangul.
Near LQ. Default value for Hanzi GB/Kanji printer.
Normal
Hi-Speed
Super Hi-Speed
Ultra Hi-Speed
Styling Typeface (H-Series)
•
•
•
•
SONG. Only for Hanzi GB printer.
MING. Only for Hanzi Big5 printer.
Mincho. Only for Kanji printer.
Myungjo, Gothic. Only for Hangul printer. Myungjo is the default value.
Prop. Spacing (Proportional Spacing)
Each printed character is contained inside a character cell. The width of the
character cell includes the character and the space around the character. This
menu only works in ASCII mode and is not available for the H-Series Hangul
product.
•
Disable (factory default). Each character cell is printed with the same
width. Each column in the printed text will line up.
•
Enable. The width of each character cell varies with the width of the
character. For example, [i] takes less space to print than [m]. Using
proportional fonts generally increases the readability of printed
documents, which gives text a typeset appearance.
Bold Print
•
•
Disable (factory default). Text is printed normally.
Enable. Text is printed with a heavy line thickness.
139
Chapter
4
EMULATION Menu
Italic Print
•
•
•
Disable (factory default). Text is printed normally.
Forward Slant. Text is printed with a forward slant.
Backward Slant. Text is printed with a backward slant.
Slashed Zero
This parameter allows you to print the numeral “0” with or without the slash.
This option applies to all character sets except OCR-A and OCR-B.
•
•
Disable (factory default). Zero is printed without a slash.
Enable. Zero is printed with a slash.
DBCS/ASCII Mode (H-Series)
•
DBCS Mode (factory default). The printer is in DBCS mode. It can print
double-byte characters as well as a limited number of single-byte
characters.
•
ASCII Mode. The printer is in ASCII mode. It can only print single-byte
characters.
DBCS ASCII Style (H-Series)
This parameter allows you to specify the appearance of the single-byte
alphanumeric characters in DBCS mode.
•
•
140
Normal (factory default).
Oversize. The alphanumeric characters will appear larger than normal
single-byte characters. For example, the appearance of character “8” will
be changed to “8”.
•
OCRB. The alphanumeric characters will print in OCRB style. It only
takes effect on LQ typeface for Hanzi/Kanji printer.
•
Normal Thin. The alphanumeric characters will be slightly thinner
compared with Normal style. This is only applicable for Hangul printer.
Page Format Submenu (H-Series)
Text Position
Specifies where the text will be positioned in the line space. When set to
Top-of-Line, text will be positioned at the top of the line space. When set to
Bottom-of-Line, the text will be positioned as if it were at the bottom of a 6 lpi
line space. The following example shows both Top-of-Line and Bottom-of-Line
text positions:
Dot
Row
Top of Linespace 1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Bottom of 8 LPI Linespace 9
10
11
Bottom of 6 LPI Linespace 12
1
Text
Position
Text Position
Top-of-Line
Top of Line
Text Position
Text Position
Bottom-of-Line
Bottom
of Line
ASCII Compatible
Allows you to specify ASCII characters print position alignment. This option
affects device font characters only, and does not affect graphics or barcodes.
•
Disable (factory default). The ASCII characters print position aligns
(horizontally) with Indian characters.
•
Enable. The ASCII characters print position shifts up to align
(horizontally) with standard ASCII characters.
If Indian character sets, such as Hindi, Kannada, Gujarati or Tamil are
selected, the menu will automatically switch to Disable. Enable will not be
available for selection until non-Indian character sets are selected.
If the “Tall ASCII Font” option is available, the menu automatically switches to
Disable. Enable will not be available for selection until the Tall ASCII Font is
disabled.
Compressed Mode (H-Series)
This parameter allows you to specify the appearance of ASCII/DBCS
characters in ASCII mode. It is not applicable for the H-Series Hangul printer.
•
•
Disable (factory default)
Enable. Prints out ASCII mode ASCII characters and half-width DBCS
characters.
141
Chapter
4
EMULATION Menu
DBCS Compressed (H-Series)
This parameter allows you to specify the appearance of ASCII/DBCS
characters in DBCS mode. It is not applicable for the H-Series Hangul printer.
•
•
Disable (factory default)
Enable. Both the DBCS and ASCII characters will be printed as half-width
of their original size.
Font Scale (H-Series)
This parameter allows you to specify the appearance of the font size. It is
applicable for the H-Series GB printer.
•
•
Standard (factory default). The character prints as 24 x 24 cell size.
16 x 24. The character prints as 16 x 24 cell size.
Encoding (H-Series)
•
Address Table (factory default). Specifies the address table supported.
GB18030 is for Hanzi GB printer.
BIG5 (factory default), CNS, TCA, ETEN, IBM5550, TELETEXT,
BIG5+, BIG5E, and HKSCS are for Hanzi Big5 printer.
KSC5601 is for Hangul printer.
Shift-JIS is for Kanji printer.
•
UTF-8. The printer takes in UTF-8 data stream and prints out according to
Unicode format.
Taller 15 CPI (H-Series)
This parameter allows you to specify the appearance of ASCII characters as
15 CPI in ASCII mode.
•
Disable (factory default). The characters in 15 CPI appear shorter than
other CPIs such as 10 CPI.
•
Enable. The height of 15 CPI characters is the same as other CPIs such
as 10 CPI.
Horizontal Expnd (H-Series)
This parameter allows you to specify dot character horizontal expansion for
both ASCII and DBCS characters in DBCS mode.
Vertical Expnd (H-Series)
This parameter allows you to specify dot character vertical expansion for both
ASCII and DBCS characters in DBCS mode.
142
Page Format Submenu (H-Series)
Graphics Spd Up (H-Series)
This menu is used to increase (speed up) graphic printing speed by turning on
the Enhanced/Turbo mode.
•
Normal (factory default). The printer prints at the given input graphics
resolution.
•
Enhanced. The printer provides first-level speed up, which means the
speed is faster than Normal mode.
•
Turbo. The printer provides second-level speed up, which means the
speed is faster than Enhanced mode.
•
Match Typeface. The input 180x180 dpi graphics resolution will drop-dot
to the resolution which matches the typeface selected.
Page Format
Form Length
Forms length is the number of lines that can be printed on a page. You can set
the form length in inches, millimeters (mm), or as a function of the current lpi
(lines per inch).
NOTE: When IPDS is active, the form length only displays as a function of
lines.
Form Width
The form width can be specified in inches, millimeters, or as a function of the
current cpi (characters per inch). The forms width set should not exceed the
actual paper width.
NOTE: When IPDS is active, the form width only displays as a function of
characters.
Margins
•
Left Margin. Set in columns. Column zero is defined as the far left edge
of the page, and column numbering increments from left to right.
•
Right Margin. Set in columns. Column zero is defined as the far right
edge of the page, and column numbering increments from right to left.
•
Bottom Margin. Defined in lines, starting from line zero at the bottom of
the page and incrementing from the bottom up.
Perforation Skip
•
•
Disable (factory default). Allows printing on page perforation.
1/2 inch, 2/3 inch, 5/6 inch, 1 inch. You may set up a skip-over margin of
1/2 inch, 2/3 inch, 5/6 inch, or 1 inch. For example, a skip-over margin of
1 inch allows a 1 inch margin at the bottom of the page.
143
Chapter
4
EMULATION Menu
Print Char. Set
When this selection is displayed and the ENTER key is pressed, the current
character set is printed.
Indian Option
•
Indian Formatter. The available options include Disable, Script Page,
and Data Page.
•
Disable (factory default). The Indian characters will print without
composing.
•
Script Page. Allows printing of Indian characters with composing for
non-table format.
•
Data Page. Allows Indian character printing with composing for tableformatted data. Data Page does not support ESC sequence commands
nor other single byte commands except for CR, LF, FF, BEL, DC1, and
DC3.
•
Tall ASCII Font. The available options include Enable and Disable.
•
Disable (factory default)
•
Enable. When enabling the Tall ASCII Font setting, the ASCII
characters will print as tall fonts. This setting is available only for 10, 12,
and 13.3 CPI for DP and NLQ settings. It is recommended to print the Tall
ASCII font with 4 LPI setting or lower to avoid overlapping.
•
144
Space Width Adj. The values range from 1 to 30. The default value is 12.
This option allows spacing adjustment between the words in Indian
character printing. This feature works only with Indian code pages and not
with Standard code pages. The Space Width Adj value affects the
character width of the space character (0x20) and the dash character
(0x2D). The Space Width Adjust value is applicable to both script page
and data page selections. Table 11 on page 145 shows the space width
adjustment value according to its typeface and CPI setting.
Page Format Submenu (H-Series)
Table 11. Typeface, CPI, and Space Width Values on
Indian Language Printers
Typeface
Data Processing
CPI
Space Width
6
20
10
12
12
10
13.3
9
15
8
17.1
7
20
6
6
30
10
18
12
15
13.3
13
15
12
17.1
10
Near Letter Quality
•
Hindi Numeral. Allows you to specify whether to print numbers as Hindi
numerals.
•
Disable (factory default)
•
Enable. When enabled, numbers will print as Hindi numerals.
Reset Cmd CFG Ld
When the printer receives a host data stream reset command
(ESC @ or ESC[K) in addition to resetting printer variables, the selected
configuration is loaded.
•
Disable (factory default). The active emulation parameters are loaded
when the reset command is executed.
•
Power-Up Config. The power-up configuration is loaded when the reset
command is executed.
•
Current Config. The currently selected configuration is loaded when the
reset command is executed.
•
Factory Config. The factory installed configuration is loaded when the
reset command is executed.
145
Chapter
4
EMULATION Menu
Set Substitution
When this option is activated, the character set overlay in RAM is activated.
This can also be accomplished through a host command of SFCC RX. In
either case, a flag is set indicating that the substitution table is active. If the
power-up configuration has Ld Set at Pwrup and Set Substitution both
enabled, the character set overlay is automatically activated at power-up or
during a soft reset. See the LinePrinter Plus Programmer's Reference Manual
for more information.
Barcode x-offset
•
•
Disable (factory default)
Enable. Allows text to print next to a barcode when xxxx and yyyy are not
set to the origin.
Barcode Height
•
•
Disable (factory default)
Enable. If Barcode x-offset is enabled, the barcode height follows P5000
legacy barcode behavior.
Error Handling (H-Series)
This command determines the way illegal DBCS characters are processed:
146
•
•
Normal (factory default). Will ignore illegal DBCS characters.
•
As Square. Will insert a black square (0xAIBD) when the data stream
contains the illegal DBCS character. This is applicable for the Hanzi Big5
build only.
As Space. Will insert two space characters (0X20, 0X20) when the data
stream contains the illegal DBCS character.
P-Series Emulation
P-Series Emulation
* = Factory Default
Printer
Protocol
(from page 125)
P-Series
Control Code
06
8.0 LPI*
10.3 LPI
6.0 LPI
P-Series
SFCC
1*
(0-7F hex)
Control Code
08
Elongated*
Backspace
VFU Select
Define CR
Code
Autowrap
CR = CR*
CR = CR + LF
Wrap LF+CR*
Wrap CR
Disable
Alt. Set
80-9F
Character
Set
Control Code*
Printable
EVFU*
DVFU
CVFU
Disable
Overstrike
Enable*
Disable
SFCC d
Command
(see page 150) Even dot plot*
Double high
Define LF
Code
LF = CR + LF*
LF = LF
PSeries Dbl
High
FF valid
at TOF
Enable*
Normal*
P3/4/6/9 Compat Disable
Control Code 06
Control Code 06 defines the function of ASCII code hex 06 (ACK). You can
select an alternate line spacing of 6, 8, or 10.3 LPI.
Control Code 08
Control Code 08 defines the function of ASCII code hex 08 (BS). You can
define the code to output the following character:
•
•
Elongated (factory default).
Backspace.
Define CR Code
This option controls the action of the printer when it receives a Carriage
Return code (hex 0D) from the host computer. If this feature is enabled, each
time the printer receives a carriage return, it inserts an additional Line Feed
code (hex 0A) into the data stream. Do not use this feature if the host
computer sends Line feeds to the printer.
•
CR = CR (factory default). Does not insert an extra line feed after each
carriage return.
•
CR = CR + LF. Inserts an extra line feed after each carriage return. The
next print position will be print position 1 of the next line.
147
Chapter
4
EMULATION Menu
Autowrap
This option defines the printer action when print data is received past the
forms width setting.
•
With LF+CR (factory default). Performs an automatic carriage return and
line feed when data is received past the forms width, causing the excess
text to print on the next line.
•
With CR. Performs an automatic carriage return (without line feed) when
data is received past the forms width.
•
Disable. Discards any data past the forms width.
Overstrike
This option enables you to print bold characters.
•
Enable (factory default). Turns on bold print. When enabled, overstrike
printing slows down the printer.
•
Disable. Turns off bold print.
Define LF Code
•
LF = CR + LF (factory default). Forces an automatic carriage return with
each line feed command. The next print position is print position 1 of the
next line.
•
LF = LF. Does not perform an automatic carriage return. The next print
position will be the current print position of the next line.
P-Series SFCC
This parameter allows you to select which ASCII codes will function as the
Special Function Control Code (SFCC) command delimiter.
P-Series codes can use hex 00 through hex 7F. Options include the following:
•
•
•
•
•
ESC (hex 1B)
SOH (hex 01)
ETX (hex 03)
CIRCUMFLEX (hex 5E)—also called caret (^)
TILDE (hex 7E)—(~)
NOTE: SOH, ETX, and ESC are non-printables. The characters (^) and (~)
are printable; however, do not use them as printables in the host data
stream if either is chosen as a delimiter because print errors will
occur.
148
P-Series Emulation
VFU Select
Controls how the printer handles vertical formatting.
•
EVFU (factory default). Enables the VFU and selects P-Series compatible
Electronic Vertical Format Unit (EVFU).
•
DVFU. Enables the VFU and selects the Dataproducts compatible Direct
Access Vertical Format Unit (DVFU).
•
CVFU. Enables the VFU and selects the Centronics compatible Direct
Access Vertical Format Unit (CVFU).
•
Disable. Disables all VFU processing.
Alt. Set 80-9F
Determines whether the printer processes ASCII codes hex 80 through hex
9F as control codes or as printable characters. The options include:
•
•
Control Code (factory default)
Printable.
Character Set
Specifies a character set as shown in the “P-Series Character Set Menu” on
page 150. To use one of these sets, choose the desired group heading (such
as European Sets) and press ENTER. Then choose the desired set within
that group (such as Roman 8) and press ENTER. Both the group and the
desired set will be starred to indicate your selection. The UTF-8 selection
allows printing of UTF-8 encoded Unicode ™. Character sets are shown in
detail in the Character Sets Reference Manual.
SFCC d Command
•
Even dot plot (factory default). This option interprets SFCC d Command
as even dot plot.
•
Double High. This option interprets SFCC d Command as double high.
Select this option for backward compatibility.
PSeries Dbl High
Allows printing compatibility between current and older model printers.
•
Normal (factory default). This is normal, double-high printing for current
model printers.
•
P3/4/6/9 Compat. Where older printers print two dot rows higher, this
option allows for compatibility by raising the print two dot rows to match
the current models dot row value (two dot rows lower).
FF Valid at TOF
•
Enable (factory default). Performs a form feed when the host sends a
Form Feed command and the printer is at the top of form.
•
Disable. Will not perform a form feed when the host sends a Form Feed
command and the printer is at the top of form.
149
Chapter
4
EMULATION Menu
P-Series Character Set Menu
* = Factory Default
Character Set
(from page 147)
Active Char
Set
Standard
Sets
Arabic
Sets
Cyrillic
Sets
European
Sets
Standard Sets*
Arabic Sets
Cyrillic Sets
European Sets
Greek Sets
Hebrew Sets
Turkish Sets
Misc. Sets
UTF-8
See page 152.
ASMO 449*
ASMO 449+
ASMO 708
ASMO 708+
MS DOS CP710
MS DOS CP720
Sakr CP714
Aptec CP715
CP 786
Arabic CP 864
Arabic CP 1046
Arabic Lam 1
Arabic Lam 2
Win. CP 1256
Farsi 1
Farsi 2
1098 Farsi 1285
Cyrillic 866*
Cyrillic CP 437
Cyrillic 113
Cyrillic 8859-5
ISO 915
Code Page 855
7-bit Cyrillic
Ukrainian
Bulgarian
Win. CP 1251
Latvian 866
CP 1048
Latin 2 8859-2*
Latin 2 852
Mazovia
Kamenicky
Roman 8
PC-437 Slavic
Slavic 1250
Code Page 865
Code Page 860
Latin 1 8859-1
Latin 5 8859-9
Latin 9 8859-15
Polish POL1
Win. CP 1250
Win. CP 1252
Win. CP 1257
CP 858 EURO
Lith. CP 773
Serbo Croatic 1
Serbo Croatic 2
CP 774
CP 775
ISO 8859-4
Turkish
Sets
Misc.
Sets
Greek
Sets
DEC 256 Greek*
ELOT 928 Greek
Greek 3
ABY Greek
ABG Greek
ELOT 927 Greek
Greek 851
Greek 437
Greek 8859-7
Win. CP 1253
Greek 813 EURO
Greek 869 EURO
150
Hebrew
Sets
Hebrew Old*
Hebrew New
Hebrew DEC
Latin-1 Hebrew
Win. CP 1255
Data Gen. Turk.*
DEC Turkish
IBM Turkish
Siemens Turkish
PTT Turkish
IBC Turkish
Bull Turkish
AS400 Turkish
Unisys Turkish
NCR Turkish
PST Turkish
UNIS-1 Turkish
Code Page 853
INFO Turkish
Win. CP 1254
Code Page 857
Azeri
Block-set 10cpi*
Italics Set
Scanblock 10cpi
PGL Thai Set
P-Series Emulation
Indian Language Character Set Menu
* = Factory Default
Indian Language firmware
Character Set
(from page 147)
1
Active Char
Set
Standard
Sets
Arabic
Sets
Cyrillic
Sets
European
Sets
Standard Sets*
Arabic Sets
Cyrillic Sets
European Sets
Greek Sets
Hebrew Sets
Turkish Sets
Misc. Sets
Hindi Sets 1
Tamil Sets 1
Gujarati Sets 1
Kannada Sets 1
UTF-8
See page 152.
ASMO 449*
ASMO 449+
ASMO 708
ASMO 708+
MS DOS CP710
MS DOS CP720
Sakr CP714
Aptec CP715
CP 786
Arabic CP 864
Arabic CP 1046
Arabic Lam 1
Arabic Lam 2
Win. CP 1256
Farsi 1
Farsi 2
1098 Farsi 1285
Cyrillic 866*
Cyrillic CP 437
Cyrillic 113
Cyrillic 8859-5
ISO 915
Code Page 855
7-bit Cyrillic
Ukrainian
Bulgarian
Win. CP 1251
Latvian 866
CP 1048
Latin 2 8859-2*
Latin 2 852
Mazovia
Kamenicky
Roman 8
PC-437 Slavic
Slavic 1250
Code Page 865
Code Page 860
Latin 1 8859-1
Latin 5 8859-9
Latin 9 8859-15
Polish POL1
Win. CP 1250
Win. CP 1252
Win. CP 1257
CP 858 EURO
Lith. CP 773
Serbo Croatic 1
Serbo Croatic 2
CP 774
CP 775
ISO 8859-4
Greek
Sets
DEC 256 Greek*
ELOT 928 Greek
Greek 3
ABY Greek
ABG Greek
ELOT 927 Greek
Greek 851
Greek 437
Greek 8859-7
Win. CP 1253
Greek 813 EURO
Greek 869 EURO
Hebrew
Sets
Hebrew Old*
Hebrew New
Hebrew DEC
Latin-1 Hebrew
Win. CP 1255
Turkish
Sets
Data Gen. Turk.*
DEC Turkish
IBM Turkish
Siemens Turkish
PTT Turkish
IBC Turkish
Bull Turkish
AS400 Turkish
Unisys Turkish
NCR Turkish
PST Turkish
UNIS-1 Turkish
Code Page 853
INFO Turkish
Win. CP 1254
Code Page 857
Azeri
Misc.
Sets
Block-set 10cpi*
Italics Set
Scanblock 10cpi
PGL Thai Set
Gujarati
Sets1
ISCII*
PC-ISCII
EA-ISCII
Hindi
Sets1
ISCII*
PC-ISCII
EA-ISCII
Tamil
Sets1
ISCII*
PC-ISCII
EA-ISCII
TAM_Tamil’99
TAB_Tamil’00
Kannada
Sets1
ISCII*
PC-ISCII
EA-ISCII
NOTE: The Indian Language Character Set Menu applies to P-Series and all
LinePrinter+ protocols.
151
Chapter
4
EMULATION Menu
Character Set
(P-Series)
(from page 147)
Standard
Sets
Active
Std Sets
IBM PC*
Multinational
EMCA Latin 1
DEC Multi.
CP 858 EURO
152
IBM PC
Multinational
Primary Subset
ASCII (USA)*
ASCII (USA)* EBCDIC
French
German
English
Danish
Swedish
Italian
Spanish
Japanese
French Canadian
Latin American
Norwegian
Danish II
Spanish II
Latin Am II
Extended Subset
Code Page 437*
Code Page 850
ECMA Latin 1
Primary Subset
ASCII (USA)*
German
Swedish
Danish
Norwegian
Finnish
English
Dutch
French
Spanish
Italian
Turkish
Japanese
Extended Subset
Multinational*
Barcode 10 CPI
Mult. DP 10 CPI
Mult. DP 12 CPI
Mult. LQ 10 CPI
Greek DP 10 CPI
Greek DP 12 CPI
Greek LQ 10 CPI
Grap. DP 10 CPI
Grap. LQ 10 CPI
Sci. DP 10 CPI
Sci. DP 12 CPI
Sci. LQ 10 CPI
DEC Mult.
ASCII (USA)*
French
German
English
Norw./Danish
Swedish
Italian
Spanish
Japanese
French
Canadian
Dutch
Finnish
Swiss
CP 858
EURO
P-Series XQ Emulation
P-Series XQ Emulation
* = Factory Default
Printer
Protocol
(from page 125)
P-Series
XQ
Control Code
06
8.0 LPI*
10.3 LPI
6.0 LPI
HS Print
char 02 STX*
char 03 ETX
char 09 HT
Define CR
Code
Autowrap
CR = CR*
CR = CR + LF
With LF+CR*
With CR
Disable
VFU Select
Upr. Case
Select
EVFU*
DVFU
CVFU
Disable
Disable*
Enable
Define LF
Code
Compressed
Print
LF = CR + LF*
LF = LF
char 01 SOH*
char 03 ETX
char 09 HT
Elong/Alt.
Font
Elng=BS Font=SO*
Elng=SO Font=BS
Slew
Relative
1 to 15 lines*
1 to 16 lines
Control Code 06
Control Code 06 defines the function of ASCII code hex 06 (ACK). You can
select an alternate line spacing of 6, 8, or 10.3 LPI.
Define CR Code
This option controls the action of the printer when it receives a Carriage
Return code (hex 0D) from the host computer. If this feature is enabled, each
time the printer receives a Carriage Return, it inserts an additional Line Feed
code (hex 0A) into the data stream. Do not use this feature if the host
computer sends line feeds to the printer.
•
CR = CR (factory default). Does not insert an extra line feed after each
carriage return.
•
CR = CR + LF. Inserts an extra line feed after each carriage return. The
next print position will be print position 1 of the next line.
Autowrap
This option defines the printer action when print data is received past the
forms width setting.
•
With LF+CR (factory default). Performs an automatic carriage return and
line feed when data is received past the forms width.
•
With CR. Performs an automatic carriage return (without line feed) when
data is received past the forms width.
•
Disable. Discards any data past the forms width.
153
Chapter
4
EMULATION Menu
Define LF Code
•
LF = CR + LF (factory default). Forces an automatic carriage return with
each line feed command received. The next print position is print position
1 of the next line.
•
LF = LF. Does not perform an automatic carriage return when a line feed
command is received. The next print position will be the current print
position of the next line.
Compressed Print
Controls which host command sets compressed printing.
•
•
•
Char 01 SOH (factory default)
Char 03 ETX
Char 09 HT
Elong/Alt. Font
Controls which host command sets elongated (double high) fonts and
extended character set.
•
•
Elng=BS Font=SO (factory default)
Elng=SO Font=BS
HS Print (High Speed Print)
Controls which host command sets high speed printing.
•
•
•
Char 02 STX (factory default)
Char 03 ETX
Char 09 HT
VFU Select
Controls how the printer handles vertical formatting. The choices are:
154
•
EVFU (factory default). Enables the VFU and selects P-Series compatible
Electronic Vertical Format Unit (EVFU).
•
DVFU. Enables the VFU and selects the Dataproducts compatible Direct
Access Vertical Format Unit (DVFU).
•
CVFU. Enables the VFU and selects the Centronics compatible Direct
Access Vertical Format Unit (CVFU).
•
Disable. Disables all VFU processing.
Serial Matrix Emulation
Upr. Case Select
Controls how the printer handles lowercase characters it receives from the
host computer. When enabled, all characters will be printed in uppercase.
•
Disable (factory default). Prints lowercase characters received from the
host computer as lowercase, and prints uppercase characters received
from the computer as uppercase.
•
Enable. Prints lowercase characters received from the host computer as
their corresponding uppercase equivalents; uppercase characters
received from the computer print as uppercase.
Slew Relative
“Slewing” is rapid vertical paper movement. This parameter determines the
number of lines slewed (either 1-15 lines or 1-16 lines) when an EVFU Slew
Relative command is received. The options include:
•
•
1-15 Lines
1-16 Lines (factory default)
Serial Matrix Emulation
* = Factory Default
Printer
Protocol
(from page 125)
Serial
Matrix
Control Code
06
8.0 LPI*
10.3 LPI
6.0 LPI
Alt. Set
80-9F
Control Code*
Printable
Define CR
Code
Autowrap
CR = CR*
CR = CR + LF
With LF+CR*
With CR
Disable
Character
Set
ESC d
command
Overstrike
Enable*
Disable
Define LF
Code
LF = LF*
LF = CR + LF
Printer
Select
Disable*
Enable
(see page 158) Even dot plot*
Double high
155
Chapter
4
EMULATION Menu
Control Code 06
Control Code 06 defines the function of ASCII code hex 06 (ACK). You can
select an alternate line spacing of 6, 8, or 10.3 LPI.
Define CR Code
This option controls the action of the printer when it receives a Carriage
Return code (hex 0D) from the host computer. If this feature is enabled, each
time the printer receives a Carriage Return, it inserts an additional Line Feed
code (hex 0A) into the data stream. Do not use this feature if the host
computer sends line feeds to the printer.
•
CR = CR (factory default). Does not insert an extra line feed after each
carriage return.
•
CR = CR + LF. Inserts an extra line feed after each carriage return. The
next print position will be print position 1 of the next line.
Autowrap
This option defines the printer action when print data is received past the
forms width setting.
•
With LF+CR (factory default). Performs an automatic carriage return and
line feed when data is received past the forms width.
•
With CR. Performs an automatic carriage return (without line feed) when
data is received past the forms width.
•
Disable. Discards any data past the forms width.
Overstrike
This option enables you to print bold characters.
•
Enable (factory default). Turns on bold print. When enabled, overstrike
printing slows down the printer.
•
Disable. Turns off bold print.
Define LF Code
•
LF = LF (factory default). Does not perform an automatic carriage return
when a line feed command is received. The next print position will be the
current print position of the next line.
•
LF = CR + LF. Forces an automatic carriage return with each line feed
command received. The next print position is print position 1 of the next
line.
Printer Select
•
•
156
Disable (factory default). Ignores the ASCII DC1 and DC3 control codes.
Enable. Disables the printer when a DC1 control code is received, and
enables the printer when a DC3 control code is received.
Serial Matrix Emulation
Alt. Set 80-9F
•
Control Code (factory default). Interprets data in the range of hex 80
through hex 9F as a control code.
•
Printable. Prints data in the range of hex 80 through hex 9F.
Character Set
Specifies a character set as shown in the “Serial Matrix Character Set Menu”
on page 158. To use one of these sets, choose the desired group heading
(such as European Sets) and press ENTER. Then choose the desired set
within that group (such as Roman 8) and press ENTER. Both the group and
the desired set will be starred to indicate your selection. Character sets are
shown in detail in the Character Sets Reference Manual.
ESC d command
•
Even dot plot (factory default). Interprets the ESC d command as even
dot plot.
•
Double high. Interprets the ESC d Command as double high. Select this
option for backward compatibility.
157
Chapter
4
EMULATION Menu
Serial Matrix Character Set Menu
* = Factory Default
Character Set
(from page 155)
Active Char
Set
Standard
Sets
Arabic
Sets
Cyrillic
Sets
European
Sets
Standard Sets*
Arabic Sets
Cyrillic Sets
European Sets
Greek Sets
Hebrew Sets
Turkish Sets
Misc. Sets
UTF-8
(see page 159)
ASMO 449*
ASMO 449+
ASMO 708
ASMO 708+
MS DOS CP710
MS DOS CP720
Sakr CP714
Aptec CP715
CP 786
Arabic CP 864
Arabic CP 1046
Arabic Lam 1
Arabic Lam 2
Win. CP 1256
Farsi 1
Farsi 2
1098 Farsi 1285
Cyrillic 866*
Cyrillic CP 437
Cyrillic 113
Cyrillic 8859-5
ISO 915
Code Page 855
7-bit Cyrillic
Ukrainian
Bulgarian
Win. CP 1251
Latvian 866
CP 1048
Latin 2 8859-2*
Latin 2 852
Mazovia
Kamenicky
Roman 8
PC-437 Slavic
Slavic 1250
Code Page 865
Code Page 860
Latin 1 8859-1
Latin 5 8859-9
Latin 9 8859-15
Polish POL1
Win. CP 1250
Win. CP 1252
Win. CP 1257
CP 858 EURO
Lith. CP 773
Serbo Croatic 1
Serbo Croatic 2
CP 774
CP 775
ISO 8859-4
Greek
Sets
DEC 256 Greek*
ELOT 928 Greek
Greek 3
ABY Greek
ABG Greek
ELOT 927 Greek
Greek 851
Greek 437
Greek 8859-7
Win. CP 1253
Greek 813 EURO
Greek 869 EURO
158
Note: Indian Language Character sets are shown on page 151.
Hebrew
Sets
Hebrew Old*
Hebrew New
Hebrew DEC
Latin-1 Hebrew
Win. CP 1255
Turkish
Sets
Data Gen. Turk.*
DEC Turkish
IBM Turkish
Siemens Turkish
PTT Turkish
IBC Turkish
Bull Turkish
AS400 Turkish
Unisys Turkish
NCR Turkish
PST Turkish
UNIS-1 Turkish
Code Page 853
INFO Turkish
Win. CP 1254
Code Page 857
Azeri
Misc.
Sets
Block-set 10cpi*
Italics Set
Scanblock 10cpi
PGL Thai Set
Serial Matrix Emulation
Character Set
(Serial)
(from page 158)
Standard
Sets*
IBM PC*
Multinational
Primary Subset
ASCII (USA)*
ASCII (USA)* EBCDIC
French
German
English
Danish
Swedish
Italian
Spanish
Japanese
French Canadian
Latin American
Norwegian
Danish II
Spanish II
Latin Am II
Extended Subset
Code Page 437*
Code Page 850
ECMA Latin 1
Primary Subset
ASCII (USA)*
German
Swedish
Danish
Norwegian
Finnish
English
Dutch
French
Spanish
Italian
Turkish
Japanese
Extended Subset
Multinational*
Barcode 10 CPI
Mult. DP 10 CPI
Mult. DP 12 CPI
Mult. LQ 10 CPI
Greek DP 10 CPI
Greek DP 12 CPI
Greek LQ 10 CPI
Grap. DP 10 CPI
Grap. LQ 10 CPI
Sci. DP 10 CPI
Sci. DP 12 CPI
Sci. LQ 10 CPI
DEC Mult.
CP 858
EURO
ASCII (USA)*
French
German
English
Norw./Danish
Swedish
Italian
Spanish
Japanese
French
Canadian
Dutch
Finnish
Swiss
159
Chapter
4
EMULATION Menu
Proprinter XL Emulation
* = Factory Default
Printer
Protocol
(from page 125)
Proprinter
XL
Define CR
Code
CR = CR*
CR = CR + LF
Autowrap
With LF+CR*
With CR
Disable
Define LF
Code
LF = LF*
LF = CR + LF
FF valid at
TOF
Enable*
Disable
Character
Set
Alt. Char
Set
(see page 162) Set 1*
Set 2
20 CPI
Condensed
Enable*
Disable
Define CR Code
This option controls the action of the printer when it receives a Carriage
Return code (hex 0D) from the host computer. If this feature is enabled, each
time the printer receives a Carriage Return, it inserts an additional Line Feed
code (hex 0A) into the data stream. Do not use this feature if the host
computer sends line feeds to the printer.
•
CR = CR (factory default). Does not insert an extra line feed after each
carriage return.
•
CR = CR + LF. Inserts an extra line feed after each carriage return.
Autowrap LF
This option defines the printer action when print data is received past the
forms width setting.
•
With LF+CR (factory default). Performs an automatic carriage return and
line feed when data is received past the forms width.
•
With CR. Performs an automatic carriage return (without line feed) when
data is received past the forms width.
•
Disable. Discards any data past the forms width.
Define LF Code
160
•
LF = LF (factory default). Does not perform an automatic carriage return
when a Line Feed command is received. The next print position will be
the current print position of the next line.
•
LF = CR + LF. Forces an automatic carriage return with each Line Feed
command received. The next print position is print position 1 of the next
line.
Proprinter XL Emulation
FF Valid at TOF
•
Enable (factory default). Performs a form feed when the host sends a
Form Feed command and the printer is at the top of form.
•
Disable. Will not perform a form feed when the host sends a Form Feed
command and the printer is at the top of form.
Character Set
Specifies a character set as shown in “Proprinter XL Character Sets Menu” on
page 162. To use one of these sets, choose the desired group heading (such
as European Sets) and press ENTER. Then choose the desired set within
that group (such as Roman 8) and press ENTER. Both the group and the
desired set will be starred to indicate your selection. The UTF-8 selection
allows printing of UTF-8 encoded Unicode ™. Character sets are shown in
detail in the Character Sets Reference Manual.
Alt. Char Set
This option determines if data in the range of hex 80 through hex 9F should
be interpreted as a control code or as a printable character.
•
Set 1 (factory default). Interprets data in the range of hex 80 through hex
9F as a control code.
•
Set 2. Prints data for the characters at hex locations 03, 04, 05, 06, 15,
and 80 through 9F.
20 CPI Condensed
Compressed print characters are narrower than the normal character set.
This is helpful for applications where you need to print the maximum amount
of information on a page.
•
Enable (factory default). Prints characters about 60 percent the width of
normal characters when compressed print is chosen by the host
computer.
•
Disable. Does not compress print widths, even if condensed print is
chosen by the host.
161
Chapter
4
EMULATION Menu
Proprinter XL Character Sets Menu
* = Factory Default
Character Set
(from page 160)
Active Char
Set
Standard Sets*
Arabic Sets
Cyrillic Sets
European Sets
Greek Sets
Hebrew Sets
Turkish Sets
Misc. Sets
UTF-8
Greek
Sets
DEC 256 Greek*
ELOT 928 Greek
Greek 3
ABY Greek
ABG Greek
ELOT 927 Greek
Greek 851
Greek 437
Greek 8859-7
Win. CP 1253
Greek 813 EURO
Greek 869 EURO
162
Note: Indian Language Character sets are shown on page 151.
Standard
Sets
Active Std Sets
Code Page 437*
Code Page 850
OCR-A
OCR-B
Multinational
CP 858 EURO
Multinational
ASCII (USA)*
EBCDIC
Hebrew
Sets
Hebrew Old*
Hebrew New
Hebrew DEC
Latin-1 Hebrew
Win. CP 1255
Arabic
Sets
Cyrillic
Sets
European
Sets
ASMO 449*
ASMO 449+
ASMO 708
ASMO 708+
MS DOS CP710
MS DOS CP720
Sakr CP714
Aptec CP715
CP 786
Arabic CP 864
Arabic CP 1046
Arabic Lam 1
Arabic Lam 2
Win. CP 1256
Farsi 1
Farsi 2
1098 Farsi 1285
Cyrillic 866*
Cyrillic CP 437
Cyrillic 113
Cyrillic 8859-5
ISO 915
Code Page 855
7-bit Cyrillic
Ukrainian
Bulgarian
Win. CP 1251
Latvian 866
CP 1048
Latin 2 8859-2*
Latin 2 852
Mazovia
Kamenicky
Roman 8
PC-437 Slavic
Slavic 1250
Code Page 865
Code Page 860
Latin 1 8859-1
Latin 5 8859-9
Latin 9 8859-15
Polish POL1
Win. CP 1250
Win. CP 1252
Win. CP 1257
CP 858 EURO
Lith. CP 773
Serbo Croatic 1
Serbo Croatic 2
CP 774
CP 775
ISO 8859-4
Turkish
Sets
Data Gen. Turk.*
DEC Turkish
IBM Turkish
Siemens Turkish
PTT Turkish
IBC Turkish
Bull Turkish
AS400 Turkish
Unisys Turkish
NCR Turkish
PST Turkish
UNIS-1 Turkish
Code Page 853
INFO Turkish
Win. CP 1254
Code Page 857
Azeri
Misc.
Sets
Block-set 10cpi*
Italics Set
Scanblock 10cpi
PGL Thai Set
Epson FX Emulation
Epson FX Emulation
* = Factory Default
Printer
Protocol
(from page 125)
Epson FX
Define CR
Code
CR = CR*
CR = CR + LF
Autowrap
With LF+CR*
With CR
Disable
Define LF
Code
LF = LF*
LF = CR + LF
Printer
Select
Disable*
Enable
Character
Set
20 CPI
Condensed
(see page 165) Enable*
Disable
Alt. Set
80-9F
Control Code*
Printable
Define CR Code
The Define CR Code option controls the action of the printer when it receives
a Carriage Return code (hex 0D) from the host computer. If this feature is
enabled, each time the printer receives a carriage return, it inserts an
additional Line Feed code (hex 0A) into the data stream. Do not use this
feature if the host computer sends line feeds to the printer.
•
CR = CR (factory default). Does not insert an extra line feed after each
carriage return.
•
CR = CR + LF. Inserts an extra line feed after each carriage return.
Autowrap
This option defines the printer actions when print data is received past the
forms width setting.
•
With LF+CR (factory default). Performs an automatic carriage return and
line feed when data is received past the forms width.
•
With CR. Performs an automatic carriage return (without line feed) when
data is received past the forms width.
•
Disable. Discards any data past the forms width.
Define LF Code
The Define LF Code option controls the action of the printer when it receives a
Line Feed code (hex 0A) from the host computer. If this feature is enabled,
each time the printer receives a Line Feed, it inserts an additional Carriage
Return code (hex 0D) into the data stream. This feature is required if the host
computer does not send carriage returns to the printer.
•
•
LF = LF (factory default). Does not add a carriage return with a line feed.
LF = CR + LF. Adds an extra carriage return with each line feed.
163
Chapter
4
EMULATION Menu
Printer Select
•
•
Disable (factory default). Ignores the ASCII DC1 and DC3 control codes.
Enable. Disables the printer when a DC1 control code is received, and
enables the printer when a DC3 control code is received.
Character Set
This parameter selects a character set for the Epson emulation, as shown in
“Epson FX Character Set Menu” on page 165.
NOTE: When OCR-A or OCR-B is selected as the print language, the Font
Attribute Typeface option under the LinePrinter Plus menu (page 124)
is changed to OCR-A or OCR-B, respectively.
To use one of these sets, choose the desired group heading (such as
European Sets) and press ENTER. Then choose the desired set within that
group (such as Roman 8) and press ENTER. Both the group and the desired
set will be starred to indicate your selection. The UTF-8 selection allows
printing of UTF-8 encoded Unicode ™. Character sets are shown in detail in
the Character Sets Reference Manual.
20 CPI Condensed
Compressed print characters are narrower than the normal character set.
This is helpful for applications where you need to print the maximum amount
of information on a page.
•
Enable (factory default). Prints about 60 percent of the width of normal
characters when compressed print is chosen by the host computer. For
example, a 12 CPI Draft font will compress to 20 CPI.
•
Disable. Does not compress print widths, even if condensed print is
chosen by the host.
Alt. Set 80-9F
164
•
Control Code (factory default). Interprets data in the range of hex 80
through hex 9F as a control code.
•
Printable. Prints data in the range of hex 80 through hex 9F.
Epson FX Emulation
Epson FX Character Set Menu
* = Factory Default
Character Set
(from page 163)
Active Char
Set
Standard Sets*
Arabic Sets
Cyrillic Sets
European Sets
Greek Sets
Hebrew Sets
Turkish Sets
Misc. Sets
UTF-8
Hebrew
Sets
Hebrew Old*
Hebrew New
Hebrew DEC
Latin-1 Hebrew
Win. CP 1255
Note: Indian Language Character sets are shown on page 151.
Standard
Sets
Active Std Sets
Epson Set *
OCR-A
OCR-B
Multinational
Code Page 850
CP 850 EURO
IBM PC
Epson Set
ASCII (USA)*
French
German
English
Danish I
Swedish
Italian
Spanish I
Japanese
Norwegian
Danish II
Spanish II
Latin Am I
French Canadian
Latin Am II
Multinational
ASCII (USA)*
EBCDIC
Turkish
Sets
Data Gen. Turk.*
DEC Turkish
IBM Turkish
Siemens Turkish
PTT Turkish
IBC Turkish
Bull Turkish
AS400 Turkish
Unisys Turkish
NCR Turkish
PST Turkish
UNIS-1 Turkish
Code Page 853
INFO Turkish
Win. CP 1254
Code Page 857
Azeri
Arabic
Sets
Cyrillic
Sets
European
Sets
ASMO 449*
ASMO 449+
ASMO 708
ASMO 708+
MS DOS CP710
MS DOS CP720
Sakr CP714
Aptec CP715
CP 786
Arabic CP 864
Arabic CP 1046
Arabic Lam 1
Arabic Lam 2
Win. CP 1256
Farsi 1
Farsi 2
1098 Farsi 1285
Cyrillic 866*
Cyrillic CP 437
Cyrillic 113
Cyrillic 8859-5
ISO 915
Code Page 855
7-bit Cyrillic
Ukrainian
Bulgarian
Win. CP 1251
Latvian 866
CP 1048
Latin 2 8859-2*
Latin 2 852
Mazovia
Kamenicky
Roman 8
PC-437 Slavic
Slavic 1250
Code Page 865
Code Page 860
Latin 1 8859-1
Latin 5 8859-9
Latin 9 8859-15
Polish POL1
Win. CP 1250
Win. CP 1252
Win. CP 1257
CP 858 EURO
Lith. CP 773
Serbo Croatic 1
Serbo Croatic 2
CP 774
CP 775
ISO 8859-4
Greek
Sets
DEC 256 Greek*
ELOT 928 Greek
Greek 3
ABY Greek
ABG Greek
ELOT 927 Greek
Greek 851
Greek 437
Greek 8859-7
Win. CP 1253
Greek 813 EURO
Greek 869 EURO
Misc.
Sets
Block-set 10cpi*
Italics Set
Scanblock 10cpi
PGL Thai Set
165
Chapter
4
EMULATION Menu
ANSI Emulation
* Factory Default
EMULATION
(from page 111)
44/48XXANSI
CPI/LPI
Select
Select CPI
10.0* CPI
12.0 CPI
13.3. CPI
15.0 CPI
16.7 CPI
17.1 CPI
Select LPI
6.0* LPI
8.0 LPI
3.0 LPI
4.0 LPI
Character
Set
(see page 167)
Private
Mode
Set 2*
Set 1
ETX/ACK
Disable*
Immediate
After Print
166
Font
Attributes
Page
Format
Define CR
Code
(see page 167)
(see page 167)
CR = CR*
CR = CR + LF
Printer
Select
ESC c
Sequence
ON=DC1/OFF=DC3*
Disable
Pos. on
BC/OvrSz
Set to top*
Set to bottom
Enable*
Disable
BC Check
Digit
by host*
by printer
Autowrap
Disable*
Power up config
Current config
Factory config
Enable*
Disable
LF = CR + LF*
LF = LF
With LF+CR*
With CR
Disable
Reset Cmd
CFG Ld
Barcode
darkmode
Define LF
Code
Received
CR
Observe*
Ignore
PUM
Default
Decipoints*
Lines/columns
Received
DEL
Observe*
Ignore
Truncate PI
Slew
Truncate at TOF*
Disable
ANSI Emulation
* = Factory Default
Font Attributes
(from page 166)
Typeface
Prop.
Spacing
Data Processing* Disable*
Gothic NLQ
Enable
Char. Graphics
High Speed
Italics NLQ
Courier NLQ
OCR-A
OCR-B
Bold Print
Disable*
Enable
Slashed
Zero
Disable*
Enable
Character Set
(from page 166)
Page Format
(from page 166)
Margins
Form
Length
Left Margin
0 columns*
(0-369)
Right Margin
0 columns*
(0-369)
Top Margin
0 lines*
(0-451)
Bottom Margin
0 lines*
(0-451)
Funct. of lines
66 lines*
(1-192)
Form Width
Function of CPI
136 Characters*
(1-272)
Latin 1 8859-1*
Cyrillic 8859-5
IBM PC-2 CP 437
IBM PC-2 CP 850
Slavic CP 852
Cyrillic CP 855
Fr. Can. CP 863
Russian CP 866
Greek CP 851
Turkish CP 853
Portug. CP 860
Arabic CP 864
Nordic CP 865
Latin 2 8859-2
Latin 3 8859-3
Latin 4 8859-4
Lat. Ara. 8859-6
Lat. Gre. 8859-7
Lat. Heb. 8859-8
Latin 5 8859-9
Turkish2 CP 867
Pol. Maz. CP 8576
Turkish CP 8577
Greek CP 8573
Italian CP 23
Spanish CP 24
Latin 9 8859-15
DEC 256 Greek
Turkish CP 857
USA
German
French A
French B
French Canadian
Dutch Netherlds
Italian
United Kingdom
Spanish
Danish/Norw. A
Danish/Norw. B
Danish/Norw. C
Danish/Norw. D
Swed./Finnish A
Swed./Finnish B
Swed./Finnish C
Swed./Finnish D
Swiss
USA
Yugoslavian
United Kingdm A
Turkish
Greek
DEC Mult.
Roman 8
167
Chapter
4
EMULATION Menu
CPI/LPI Select
Defines the default values for the horizontal and vertical character spacing.
The number of characters per inch can range from 10.0 through 17.1. The
number of lines per inch can range from 3.0 through 8.0.
Font Attributes
Typeface
Choose a typeface from the available options.
Prop. Spacing (Proportional Spacing)
Each printed character is contained inside a character cell. The width of the
character cell includes the character and the space around the character.
•
Disable (factory default). Each character cell is printed with the same
width. Each column in the printed text will line up.
•
Enable. The width of each character cell varies with the width of the
character. For example, [i] takes less space to print than [m]. Using
proportional fonts generally increases the readability of printed
documents, giving text a typeset appearance.
Bold Print
•
•
Disable (factory default). Text is printed normally.
Enable. Text is printed with a heavy line thickness.
Slashed Zero
This parameter allows you to print the numeral “0” with or without the slash.
This option applies to all character sets except OCR-A and OCR-B.
•
•
168
Disable (factory default). Zero is printed without a slash.
Enable. Zero is printed with a slash.
ANSI Emulation
Page Format
Margins
•
Left Margin. Defines where the first print column is located. The left
margin is specified as the number of characters from the left edge of the
form.
•
Right Margin. Defines where the last print column is located. The right
margin is specified as the number of characters from the right edge of the
form.
•
Top Margin. Defines the location of the first print line on the page. The
top margin is specified as the number of lines from the top of the form's
position.
•
Bottom Margin. Defines the location of the last print line on the page.
The bottom margin is specified as the number of lines from the bottom of
the form's position.
Form Length
Specifies the form length in lines. The maximum form length in lines depends
on the current LPI setting; it is equal to the maximum form length in inches
multiplied by the current LPI setting. For example, at 6 LPI the maximum form
length is 6 LPI x 24 inches = 144 lines.
Only valid form length values will be accepted. If you select a length that is
larger than the maximum length for the current LPI, the maximum length will
be used. If you need a longer page length, you must first change the LPI.
IMPORTANT
If the form length is set in lines and you change the LPI, the effective
page length changes to the form length in characters divided by the new
LPI.
NOTE: Receipt of a data stream control code which changes the form length
overrides the form length previously specified via the operator panel.
Form Width
Allows you to input the form width in characters from 1 through 272. The
maximum form width in characters depends on the current CPI setting; it is
equal to the maximum form width in inches multiplied by the current CPI
setting.
Only valid form width values will be accepted. If a width is selected that is
larger than the maximum width for the current CPI, then the maximum width
will be used. If a larger width value is desired, then the CPI value must be
changed first.
169
Chapter
4
EMULATION Menu
Table 12 lists the maximum number of characters that can be printed for a
given Characters Per Inch (CPI) setting.
IMPORTANT
If the form width is set in characters and the CPI is changed, the
effective page width is changed to be equal to the form width in
characters divided by the new CPI.
Table 12. Form Width
CPI Setting
Maximum Form Width
(in characters)
10.0
136
12.0
163
13.3
181
15.0
204
16.7
227
17.1
272
Define CR Code
The Define CR Code option controls the action of the printer when it receives
a Carriage Return code (hex 0D) from the host computer. If this feature is
enabled, each time the printer receives a carriage return, it inserts an
additional Line Feed code (hex 0A) into the data stream. Do not use this
feature if the host computer sends line feeds to the printer.
•
•
CR = CR (factory default). No extra line feeds are inserted.
CR = CR + LF. Inserts an extra line feed after each carriage return.
Autowrap
Defines the printer actions when print data is received past the form width
setting.
170
•
With LF+CR (factory default). Performs an automatic carriage return and
line feed when data is received past the form width.
•
With CR. Performs an automatic carriage return (without line feed) when
data is received past the forms width.
•
Disable . Discards any data past the form width.
ANSI Emulation
Define LF Code
Controls the action of the printer when it receives a Line Feed code (hex 0A)
from the host computer. If this feature is enabled, each time the printer
receives a line feed, it inserts an additional carriage return code (hex 0D) into
the data stream. This feature can be used in most installations, but it is
required if the host computer does not send carriage returns to the printer.
•
LF = CR + LF (factory default). Adds an extra carriage return with each
line feed.
•
LF = LF. Does not add a carriage return with a line feed.
Character Set
This parameter selects a character set for the ANSI emulation. Note that
when 0876 OCR-A or 0877 OCR-B is selected as the print language, the Font
Attributes Typeface parameter is changed to OCR-A or OCR-B, respectively.
Character sets are shown in detail in the Character Sets Reference Manual.
Printer Select
•
ON = DC1/OFF = DC3 (factory default). Disables the printer when a DC1
control code is received, and enables the printer when a DC3 control
code is received.
•
Disable. Ignores the DC1 and DC3 control codes.
ESC c Sequence
•
Enable (factory default). An ESC c code received from the host resets the
printer parameters to the factory defaults.
•
Disable. An ESC c code received from the host is ignored.
Reset Cmd CFG Ld
When the printer receives a host data stream reset command
(ESC @ or ESC[K) in addition to resetting printer variables, the selected
configuration will be loaded.
•
Disable (factory default). The active emulation parameters are loaded
when the reset command is executed.
•
Power-Up Config. The power-up configuration is loaded when the reset
command is executed.
•
Current Config. The currently selected configuration is loaded when the
reset command is executed.
•
Factory Config. The factory installed configuration is loaded when the
reset command is executed.
Received CR
•
Observe (factory default). A CR code received from the host is handled
as a carriage return.
•
Ignore. A CR code received from the host is ignored.
171
Chapter
4
EMULATION Menu
Received DEL
•
Observe (factory default). A DEL code received from the host is handled
as a Delete command.
•
Ignore. A DEL code received from the host is ignored.
Private Mode
Determines the default type of character set (Set 1 or Set 2). This can also be
set by ESC sequences ESC [>5h and ESC [>5l. Refer to these descriptions in
the ANSI Programmer's Reference Manual for further details.
Pos. on BC/OvrSz
•
Set to top (factory default). The paper is fed back to the top of barcodes
or oversized characters after they are printed. This allows printing on the
same line.
•
Set to bottom. The printer will continue printing without backing up.
BC Check Digit
•
By host (factory default). The host calculates the barcode check digit and
sends it along with the barcode. The check digit is not verified by the
printer but printed as it was received.
•
By printer. The barcode is sent without the check digit, and the printer
calculates and adds it in.
Barcode Darkmode
•
•
Enable (factory default). The barcodes are printed at a higher resolution.
Disable. The barcodes are printed at lower resolution but at a higher
speed.
PUM Default
This is the Unit of Measure (UOM) as it is used within the ANSI emulation.
Coordinates received in ESC sequences can be sent in two UOMs:
•
•
Decipoints (factory default). A unit of 1/720 inch
Lines or columns. Uses the current LPI and CPI values.
The UOM used is determined by this configuration setting.
Truncate PI Slew
172
•
Truncate at TOF (factory default). The slew is terminated when the next
Top-of-Form is reached. (This function applies to the ANSI EVFU only.)
•
Disable. PI slews will be completed independent of their length.
IGP/PGL Emulation
ETX/ACK
End of Text/Acknowledge. The host controls the flow of communication to the
printer by sending a block of data and ending the block with an End of Text
(ETX) signal. When the printer receives the ETX signal, it acknowledges the
ETX, thereby acknowledging it has received the entire block of data.
•
•
•
Disable (factory default)
Immediate
Afterprint
IGP/PGL Emulation
The PGL emulation is the software based Intelligent Graphics Processor
(IGP) for the line matrix family of printers. It is based upon, and is compatible
with, the IGP-100/200/400 board using the PGL. The IGP graphics
processing features are detailed below.
Features
On-Line Form and Label Generation makes it easy to create forms or labels
with a “preprinted” look for each application. IGP programs control all graphic
functions, dramatically reducing host computer programming and processing
time.
Graphic capabilities include boxes, vertical and horizontal lines with userselectable thickness, logos, and special alphanumeric print features. Forms
and graphic designs can be duplicated horizontally and vertically.
Alphanumeric data can appear as prepositioned “fixed” information (entered
when the form is created), be overlaid onto the form (positioned in a specific
location after the form is created), or can be dynamically merged with the
form.
Selectable Barcodes provide you with the appropriate barcode for your
application using standard wide-to-narrow ratios. A wide selection of
barcodes is available: Code 39, Interleaved 2 of 5, 4-state USPS Intelligent
Mail, UPC-A, UPC-E, MSI A through D, Code 128 Subset A, B, and C, EAN/
UCC-128, EAN 8, EAN 13, POSTNET, PostBar, Royal Mail, Datamatrix, and
PDF417. UPC and EAN barcodes can specify add-on data.
Expanded and Compressed Character Print attract attention where
needed. Alphanumeric height and width are controlled independently for a
wide range of character sizes up to 113 times the standard character size (up
to 11.3 inches wide and tall). Compressed print sizes of 10, 12, 13, 15, 17,
and 20 characters per inch (cpi) are available.
Logos are created using alphanumeric commands and add many print and
shading features for a “customized” appearance to forms, reports, and labels.
Rotated Alphanumerics permit new concepts in form design. Normal,
expanded, and compressed character strings can be rotated 90 degrees
clockwise or counterclockwise, or they can be printed upside down.
Reversed Print permits highlighting and contrasting by printing white
characters on a dark background.
173
Chapter
4
EMULATION Menu
Automatic Increment/Decrement Capability allows batch form processing.
Individual alphabetic, numeric, and barcode data fields can be identified and
automatically incremented or decremented by any amount, beginning from a
specified reference point.
Scaling Capability permits graphic elements, such as corners or boxes, to
retain their physical shapes and sizes when printed in a horizontal and vertical
density other than the base density of 60 x 72 dpi.
Multinational Character Sets provide many international character sets,
each 96 characters in length. This feature also allows you to create your own
character sets using characters defined and stored in memory.
Extended Character Sets provide 33 extended character sets, also
containing 96 characters in length. These are also stored in memory.
Configuring the Emulation with the Control Panel
You can select PGL default parameters directly from the control panel or by
control codes as explained in the IGP/PGL Programmer's Reference Manual.
The PGL parameters are described on the following pages. Parameters
marked with an asterisk (*) indicate the default value. The printer must be
offline to enter the configuration structure.
Pressing an invalid key to enter a parameter value may move you to another
level in the configuration or exit the configuration menu completely. Configure
the IGP/PGL according to your specific requirements.
IMPORTANT
174
BEFORE you reconfigure the IGP/PGL, print a configuration sheet to see
all of the current settings.
IGP/PGL Submenu
IGP/PGL Submenu
* = Factory Default
EMULATION
(from page 111)
IGP/PGL
Define CR
Code
CR = CR*
CR = CR + LF
Slash 0
Disable*
Enable
Barcode
Options
Define LF
Code
LF = LF*
LF = CR + LF
Disable*
Enable
Select LPI
Auto
Uppercase
6.0*
8.0
9.0
10.0
Host Form
Length
(see page 178) Disable*
Enable
Compatbl.
Mode
None*
MVP
L150
P3000
P6000
P9000
Power-on
S-Mode
0*
(0 - 5)
Autowrap
Expanded
Font
Scalable*
Block
Alt Block 1
Alt Block 2
Trunc Dyn
Data
Disable*
Enable
Disable*
Enable
PGL
SFCC
PI Slew
Range
7E*
1-FF
16*
15
Skip Cmd
Prefix
Enable*
Disable
Var Form
Adjust
00.0 inches*
(00.0 – 03.0 inches)
Scalable
Size
Normal*
Block
CR Edit
Disable*
Enable
Forms
Handling
Disable*
Auto Eject
Auto TOF
Var Form
Type
Add Nothing*
Add; 0
Add; X
True Form
Slew
Enable*
Disable
Select
Font
Power On
IGP/PGL
Disable*
Light Font
Dark Font
Enable*
Disable
Ext Execute
Copy
Disable*
Enable
Enable*
Disable
Compressed
CPI
Printer PI
Line
(see page 184)
Ignore
Char
Ignore Mode
Disable*
Enable
Select Char
0*
(0-255)
Print
Quality
Data Processing*
High
Best
Error
Report
On*
Debug Mode
Fault
Host
Off
175
Chapter
4
EMULATION Menu
Define CR (Carriage Return) Code
This parameter forces the printer to insert an automatic Line Feed code into
the data stream whenever a Carriage Return code occurs. This is to be used
only if the host computer does not send line feeds to the printer.
•
CR = CR (factory default). Does not perform a line feed. The next print
position will be print position 1 of the current line.
•
CR = CR + LF. Performs an automatic line feed. The next print position
will be print position 1 of the next line.
Define LF (Line Feed) Code
This parameter forces the printer to insert an automatic Carriage Return code
into the data stream whenever a Line Feed code occurs. This can be used in
most installations, but it is required if the host computer does not send
carriage returns to the printer.
•
LF = LF (factory default). Does not perform an automatic carriage return.
The next print position will be the current print position of the next line.
•
LF = CR + LF. Performs an automatic carriage return. The next print
position will be print position 1 of the next line.
Autowrap
This parameter determines if text will wrap to the next line when the line of
text exceeds the right margin.
•
Disable (factory default). Truncates the text beyond the right margin until
a CR or CR + LF is received.
•
Enable. Automatically inserts a CR + LF after a full print line.
PGL SFCC
You can specify which hex code (1-255) will be used as the Special Function
Control Code (SFCC). The factory default setting is 126. The SFCC denotes
that the following data is a PGL command.
PI Slew Range
You can specify how many lines the paper will feed.
•
•
16 (factory default). A paper slew of 0-15 will move 1-16 lines.
15. A paper slew of 1-15 will move 1-15 lines. A paper slew of 0 will move
1 line.
CR Edit
This parameter determines if a carriage return will be followed by a line feed.
176
•
Disable (factory default). The printer ignores all carriage returns that are
not followed by line feeds.
•
Enable. The printer processes all carriage returns, even for those that are
not followed by line feeds.
IGP/PGL Submenu
Select Font
Select Font specifies which language is currently selected for use with the
PGL. Refer to “IGP/PGL Font Set Menu” on page 184. for available
selections.
Slash 0
This parameter allows you to print the numeral “0” with or without the slash.
This option applies to all character sets except OCR A and OCR B.
•
•
Disable (factory default). Zero is printed without a slash.
Enable. Zero is printed with a slash.
Select LPI
This is the number of lines to be printed per inch. For example, at 6 lpi there is
1/6 inch from the top of one print line to the top of the next print line. The
options are:
•
•
•
•
6.0 (factory default)
8.0
9.0
10.0
Auto Uppercase
This parameter enables the printer to print text in all uppercase when using
the ALPHA command.
•
Disable (factory default). The printer will print text in upper and
lowercase.
•
Enable. The printer will print text in uppercase only.
Skip Cmd Prefix
This parameter determines if the printer will print any data before a PGL
command is received.
•
Enable (factory default). The printer ignores all data on the current line
before an IGP command.
•
Disable. The printer will print all data on the current line before an IGP
command.
Forms Handling
This submenu allows the user to handle the form in the following ways:
•
•
Disable (factory default). No effect.
•
Auto TOF. Automatically does a form feed (FF) at the end of each form to
the next top of form.
Auto Eject. Automatically ejects a page at the end of the job to spill out
the last page.
177
Chapter
4
EMULATION Menu
Power On IGP/PGL
You can set the IGP feature so that it is enabled or disabled when the printer
is powered on.
•
Enable (factory default). The PGL is enabled when the printer is powered
on. (The PGL feature is initialized in the Normal mode.)
•
Disable. The PGL is disabled when the printer is powered on. (The PGL
feature is initialized to the Quiet mode.)
Ext Execute Copy
•
Disable (factory default). Dynamic data and overlay data are not allowed
if the optional Form Count parameter (number of forms to print) is
specified as part of the Execute command. (This setting is IGP-100
compatible.)
•
Enable. Only dynamic data is allowed within a form in which the Form
Count parameter is specified in the Execute command. In this case, the
exact same form (with identical dynamic data, etc.) is printed for the Form
Count. However, incremental data is not incremented since the page that
is printing is exactly the same. Also, each form is printed on a separate
page.
* = Factory Default
Barcode
Options
(from page 175)
UPC
Descenders
Always*
Never
Only with PDF
Optimized
Ratio
Disable*
Enable
AI 00
Spaces
I-2/5
Selection
Leading Zero*
Trailing Space
X2 DPD
Modulo 7 CD
Disable*
Enable
Select SO
Char
14*
(0-255)
User-Def
Ratio
Enable*
Disable
C39
Compatbl.
Disable*
Enable
Barcode Options
The following sub-options help define specific options regarding barcode
printing.
UPC Descenders
This parameter allows you to print barcode descenders when human
readable data is not present in the UPC/EAN barcodes.
178
•
Always (factory default). UPC/EAN barcodes are printed with
descenders, even if there is no human readable data.
•
Never. UPC/EAN barcodes are printed without descenders if there is no
human readable data.
•
Only with PDF. UPC/EAN barcodes are printed with descenders only
when the PDF command is present.
IGP/PGL Submenu
Optimized Ratio
This option selects different barcode ratios for certain barcodes including
Code 39 and I-2/5. It is included for compatibility with the IGP-X00 printers.
•
•
Disable (factory default). Use standard barcode ratios.
Enable. Select the alternate barcode ratios.
I-2/5 Selection
This option is added to be compatible with a special IGP-X00 customization.
Usually, if I-2/5 barcodes have an odd number of digits, a leading zero is
inserted in front of the data. However, this special IGP-X00 customization
gives you the option of adding a space character at the end of the barcode
instead.
•
Leading Zero (factory default). A leading zero is inserted in front of the
printable data field.
•
Trailing Space. A space is inserted at the end of the printable data field
and a zero is encoded with the corresponding space in the end of the
barcode.
•
X2 DPD. When selected, an I-2/5 barcode with an X2 magnification will
use the specially configured ratios 3:3:6:5 rather than 3:6:9:12 for
compatibility issues.
•
Modulo 7 CD. The I-2/5 barcode uses a modulo 7 check digit instead of
the default modulo 10 check digit.
AI 00 Spaces
This option is designated for EAN/UCC-128 barcodes whose application
identifier (AI) is 00.
•
Disable (factory default). The printable data field is printed with the AI
enclosed in parentheses. This is the standard EAN/UCC-128 format.
•
Enable. The printable data field is printed with the UCC fields separated
by spaces. This option is IGP-X00 compatible.
Select SO Char
Allows you to specify a decimal code from 0 through 255 to be used in place
of SO (Shift Out) as the control code. This allows access for the alternate set
of control function characters. See the description of the Code 128 barcodes
in the IGP/PGL Programmer's Reference Manual for details.
User-Def Ratio
•
•
Enable (factory default). User-defined ratios are accepted for barcodes.
Disable. User-defined ratios are ignored and the magnification X1 is used
in its place.
179
Chapter
4
EMULATION Menu
C39 Compatbl.
This menu makes the old method of decoding C39 alternative character set
compatible with the new.
•
•
Disable (factory default) Uses the current way of decoding.
Enable. Matches the old method of decoding.
Host Form Length
Determines whether the form length specified in the CREATE command
changes the form length designated in the LP+ menu (see “LinePrinter Plus
Emulation (ASCII, Indian Language)” on page 124) when the form is printed
by the EXECUTE command.
•
Disable (factory default). The LP+ form length is unaffected by the form
being printed.
•
Enable. The LP+ form length changes to match the length of the PGL
form being printed.
Var Form Adjust
(Ranges from 0 - 30). Default is 0. This menu value is tenths of inches. The
value of this menu specifies the amount of distance to add to PGL forms that
have variable form lengths. Variable length forms are forms that are defined
by using a “;0” in the CREATE statement: ~CREATE;FORM;0. Variable form
lengths are defined by the contents within the form - the form is only as long
as necessary to print the form. Changing this menu value adds additional
lengths to the form (in tenths of inches). Again, this only applies to forms that
use the “;0” variable length forms.
Var Form Type
This menu option applies only to the host command, CREATE;NAME or
CREATE;NAME;DISK. The host command CREATE;NAME followed by ;0, ;X
or a form length number will always override the menu option.
•
•
Add Nothing (factory default). No action.
•
Add; X. When selected, the form length is the same as the physical page
length.
Add; 0. When selected, the form length ends at the longest printed
element. Same as CREATE;NAME;0.
Compressed CPI
This parameter allows you to choose a compressed character (60% shorter)
for 17 or 20 cpi instead of the normal height character.
180
•
Disable (factory default). The PGL does not use compressed 17 or 20 cpi
font.
•
•
Light Font. Uses the standard compressed 17 or 20 cpi font.
Dark Font. Uses a darker compressed 17 or 20 cpi font compatible with
the IGP-X00 printers.
IGP/PGL Submenu
Ignore Char
•
Ignore Mode
This parameter instructs the PGL to ignore the character selected under
the Select Character menu.
•
Disable (factory default). The PGL does not ignore any characters.
•
Enable. The PGL ignores the characters specified in the Select
Character menu.
•
Select Char
Instructs the PGL which decimal character (0-255) to ignore from the
host.
Compatbl. Mode
This option instructs the PGL to behave similarly to older versions of the IGP
with respect to certain commands.
All new users with new applications should select the “None” option. Selecting
this mode insures the printer will behave as described in this manual.
When replacing an older product operating with an existing application,
especially those using the PMODE and SMODE commands, you may need to
select a compatibility mode. In this case, select the printer model number
option that most closely matches the printer being replaced. The Compatibility
Mode options include:
•
•
•
•
•
•
None (factory default)
MVP
L150
P3000
P6000
P9000
Expanded Font
This option defines the type of expanded characters the PGL will select:
•
Scalable (factory default). These expanded characters have rounded
edges.
•
Block. These are block characters compatible with the
IGP-X00 printers.
•
Alt Block 1 / Alt Block 2. Reserved block sets used only for compatibility
purposes.
Scalable Size
•
Normal (factory default). Controls the size of scalable characters to be
either normal size (as set by the user) or adjusted to match the size of
block fonts.
•
Block. Adjusts the size of scalable characters to exactly match its block
font alternative.
181
Chapter
4
EMULATION Menu
True Form Slew
This option is related to slewing within forms when using the PMODE
command. Customers with new applications are advised to keep this option
enabled.
•
Enable (factory default). Form length is accurate according to the form
length parameter in the CREATE command.
•
Disable. Form length is IGP-X00 compatible when using PMODE.
Printer PI Line
This option enables the IGP to send PI instructions to the printer to slew the
form.
•
Enable (factory default). Send the PI instructions to the printer
(LinePrinter Plus) during form slew. This is IGP-X00 compatible.
•
Disable. Do not send PI instructions to the printer. LFs are sent instead.
Print Quality
•
Data Processing (factory default). The emulation prints at 60 x 72 dpi
and lets you choose between normal alphanumerics and barcodes and
dark mode alphanumerics and barcodes. This mode should be set if you
want the highest speed.
•
High. The emulation prints at 120 x 72 dpi, but all alphanumerics and
barcodes are automatically printed in dark mode.
•
Best. The emulation prints at 120 x 144 dpi and dark mode, which
produces a higher resolution, better-looking print image.
Power-on S-Mode
This option instructs the PGL to behave similarly to older versions of the IGP
with respect to certain commands.
All new users with new applications should select “0,” the default option.
Selecting this mode insures the printer will behave as described in this
manual.
Power on S-Mode sets the printer in an SMODE compatibility state at powerup. The default is 0 (disabled, no power-on mode). To use this feature, select
a mode from 1 through 5, which puts IGP/PGL in an SMODE state according
to the compatibility mode set. If the compatibility mode set is None, then MVP
is assumed by default.
For more information, see the IGP/PGL Programmer’s Reference Manual.
182
IGP/PGL Submenu
Trunc Dyn Data
This submenu allows the user to truncate the dynamic data up to the
maximum data length specified in Create Mode.
•
Disable (factory default). If the dynamic data exceeds the maximum data
length, an error will report.
•
Enable. If the dynamic data exceeds the maximum data length, the data
truncates.
Error Report
Sets the error reporting capability for IGP/PGL forms.
•
On (factory default). Form boundary error checking reported. Any
element which falls off the current page is reported as an error.
•
Debug Mode. The printer is put in debug mode whenever a form is
defined in Create Form mode. Each line of the Create Form is printed
along with an error if one occurred. This is the same functionality as if
there were a slash (/) entered before the Create Form Name.
•
Fault. When an error occurs, the error is printed and the message “IGP/
PGL ERROR” appears on the printer front panel. The printer then stops
printing and goes offline. The error must be cleared before the printer can
resume normal operation.
•
•
Host. When an error occurs, the error message is sent back to the host.
Off. No form boundary checking. Graphic elements appear clipped if they
are beyond the page boundaries.
Select Font
Allows you to choose from various character sets, including IGP/PGL
Standard sets, 256 character multinational sets, and UTF-8 encoded
Unicode™.
183
Chapter
4
EMULATION Menu
IGP/PGL Font Set Menu
* = Factory Default
Select Font
(from page 175)
Active Font
Standard Sets*
Arabic Sets
Cyrillic Sets
European Sets
Greek Sets
Hebrew Sets
Turkish Sets
Misc. Sets
UTF-8
Greek
Sets
DEC 256 Greek*
ELOT 928 Greek
Greek 3
ABY Greek
ABG Greek
ELOT 927 Greek
Greek 851
Greek 437
Greek 8859-7
Win. CP 1253
Greek 813 EURO
Greek 869 EURO
184
Standard
Sets
0) ASCII*
1) German
2) Swedish
3) Danish
4) Norwegian
5) Finnish
6) English
7) Dutch
8) French
9) Spanish
10) Italian
11) Turkish
12) CP 437
13) CP 850
14-15) Reserved
16-23) Dwn Overlay
24-31) User Def.
Hebrew
Sets
Hebrew Old*
Hebrew New
Hebrew DEC
Latin-1 Hebrew
Win. CP 1255
Arabic
Sets
ASMO 449*
ASMO 449+
ASMO 708
ASMO 708+
MS DOS CP710
MS DOS CP720
Sakr CP714
Aptec CP715
CP 786
Arabic CP 864
Arabic CP 1046
Arabic Lam 1
Arabic Lam 2
Win. CP 1256
Farsi 1
Farsi 2
1098 Farsi 1285
Turkish
Sets
Data Gen. Turk.*
DEC Turkish
IBM Turkish
Siemens Turkish
PTT Turkish
IBC Turkish
Bull Turkish
AS400 Turkish
Unisys Turkish
NCR Turkish
PST Turkish
UNIS-1 Turkish
Code Page 853
INFO Turkish
Win. CP 1254
Code Page 857
Azeri
Cyrillic
Sets
Code Page 866*
Cyrillic CP 437
Cyrillic 113
Cyrillic 8859-5
ISO 915
Code Page 855
7-bit Cyrillic
Ukrainian
Bulgarian
Win. CP 1251
Latvian 866
CP 1048
Misc.
Sets
Block-set 10cpi*
Italics Set
Scanblock 10cpi
PGL Thai Set
European
Sets
Latin 2 8859-2*
Latin 2 852
Mazovia
Kamenicky
Roman 8
PC-437 Slavic
Slavic 1250
Code Page 865
Code Page 860
Latin 1 8859-1
Latin 5 8859-9
Latin 9 8859-15
Polish POL1
Win. CP 1250
Win. CP 1252
Win. CP 1257
CP 858 EURO
Lith. CP 773
Serbo Croatic 1
Serbo Croatic 2
CP 774
CP 775
ISO 8859-4
IGP/VGL Emulation
IGP/VGL Emulation
Code V Graphics language (VGL) is an Intelligent Graphics Printing (IGP)
software emulation designed for your Line Matrix printer. The IGP Code V
emulation of the QMS® Code V Version II programming language produces
online forms, barcodes, and alphanumeric text-generation. The graphics
processing features are detailed below.
Features
OnLine Form and Label Generation makes it easy to create forms or labels
with the “preprinted” look for each application. VGL programs control all
graphics functions, dramatically reducing host computer programming and
processing time. Graphics capabilities include boxes, vertical and horizontal,
solid and dashed lines with a variety of thickness, logos, and special
alphanumeric print features.
Variable Barcodes allow the barcode for your application to print with
standard or user-defined ratios in vertical or horizontal orientations. Available
barcodes are Codabar, Code 39, Code 93, Code 128 with Subsets A, B, and
C, and Code EAN/UCC 128, EAN 8, EAN 13, Interleaved 2 of 5, 4-state
USPS Intelligent Mail, MSI, UPC-A, UPC-E, POSTNET, PostBar, Royal Mail,
and UPC Shipping. POSTNET is available only in the horizontal direction. A
dark print mode is included for darker, high-contrast barcodes. The IBARC
barcode command prints barcodes in four orientations: horizontal, rotated 90,
rotated 180, or rotated 270 degrees.
Expanded and Compressed Print draws attention where needed.
Alphanumeric height and width are controlled independently for a tremendous
range of character sizes up to 9.9 inches wide and tall. Several compressed
print sizes are available: 12, 13.33, 15, 17.65, and 20 (cpi), permitting up to
170 columns in an 8.5 inch printed area (20 cpi).
Rotated Alphanumerics permit new concepts in form design. Normal,
expanded, and compressed character strings can be rotated 90 degrees
clockwise, counterclockwise, or printed upside down.
Logos are easily created using alphanumeric commands and a variety of
print and shading features, which provides a “customized” appearance for
forms, reports, and labels. The registered trademark, copyright, TUV®, GSMark, UL®, and CSA® symbols are provided as standard designs on the VGL,
and you can also define custom symbols.
Reverse and Shaded Print permit highlighting and contrasting by printing
white characters on a dark background or white characters on a gray, shaded
background. Various levels or patterns of gray shading and reverse printing
may combine with the many other print features to create distinctive designs.
Automatic Increment/Decrement Capability allows batch form processing.
Individual alphabetic, numeric, and barcode data fields can be identified and
automatically incremented or decremented by any amount, beginning from a
specified reference point.
Standard Character Sets provide you with many different character sets.
Based on the Multinational Character Set, you can create your own character
sets using characters defined and stored in flash memory.
185
Chapter
4
EMULATION Menu
Configuring the Emulation with the Control Panel
You can select VGL default parameters directly from the control panel or by
control codes as explained in the IGP/VGL Programmer's Reference Manual.
The VGL parameters are described on the following pages. Parameters
marked with an asterisk (*) indicate the default value. The printer must be
offline to enter the configuration structure.
IMPORTANT
BEFORE you reconfigure the IGP/VGL, print a configuration sheet to see
all of the current settings.
Pressing an invalid key to enter a parameter value may move you to another
level in the configuration menu or exit the menu completely.
IGP/VGL Submenu
* = Factory Default
EMULATION
(from page 111)
IGP/VGL
SFCC &
Pwrup
VGL SFCC
5E*
(11-FF hex)
Power-up ^X
Disable*
Enable
Power-up ^F
Disable*
Enable
Power-up ^PY
Disable*
Enable
Font Set
(see page 196)
186
LPI
6*
7
8
9
10
PI Control
Printer PI
Disable*
Enable
Host PI
Disable*
Enable
Max PI 16
Enable*
Disable
Graphics
Options
Error
Handling
(see page 187)
Error Msgs
Enable*
Disable
Error Markers
Enable*
Disable
Offpage Errors
Disable*
Enable
Barcode Errors
Enable*
Disable
Prt to
Emulate
Disable*
MVP/MVP 150B
L150
P3040
P6000
P9000
Ignore/DB8
Setup
Ignore Chars
Disable*
Char 1
Char 2
Char 1&2
Ignore Ch#1
0* (0-255)
Ignore Ch#2
0* (0-255)
Data Bit 8
Enable*
Disable
IGP/VGL Submenu
IGP/VGL Graphics Options Submenu
* = Factory Default
Graphics
Options
(from page 186)
Slash 0
Disable*
Enable
UPC
Descenders
Enable*
Disable
LP+ Font
Disable*
Enable
IGP110
Compatbl.
Disable*
Enable
Ignore Dots
Disable*
Enable
Rot. Char
Size
Adjusted*
Not Adjusted
MSI Check
Digit
Print*
Don’t Print
Auto FF
at ^PN
Disable*
Enable
Append
Rotated
Disable*
Enable
Ignore
Spaces
Disable*
Enable
I25
Selection
Truncate
Alpha
Enable*
Disable
Midline PY
Disable*
Enable
AI 00
Spaces
I25 Odd Data* Disable*
Leading Zero Enable
Check Digit
Convert Alpha
Disable*
Enable
PDF Size
Comp.
Disable*
Enable
C128 Mode
Comp
Disable*
Enable
True Vert
1/10
Disable*
Enable
Print
Quality
Absorb After
^PY
Absorb Motion*
Absorb All
Disable
Expanded
Font
Data Processing* Scalable*
High
Block
Width Limit
Disable*
Enable
C39
Compatbl.
Disable*
Enable
Absorb After
^PN
Disable*
Enable
Ignore ^Lxx
Cmd.
Disable*
Enable
SFCC & Pwrup
This option has several sub-options which define the SFCC and power-up
configuration used with VGL.
VGL SFCC
This option selects the Special Function Control Code. The default value 5E.
Run a configuration printout to determine the currently selected VGL SFCC.
187
Chapter
4
EMULATION Menu
Power Up ^X
•
•
Disable (factory default).
Enable. Selects the ignore mode as the power-up default and selects the
graphics mode ^PY as the power-up default. All characters are ignored
until a ^A command is received.
Power Up ^F
•
•
Disable (factory default).
Enable. Selects free format mode as the power-up default and selects the
graphics mode ^PY as the power-up default. Free format causes the VGL
to ignore carriage returns, line feeds, and all characters below hex 20
sent from the host.
Power Up ^PY
•
•
Disable (factory default).
Enable. Selects the graphics mode ^PY as the power-up default.
LPI
The number of lines to be printed per inch. For example, at 6 lpi there is 1/6
inch from the top of one print line to the top of the next print line.
Graphics Options
The following are several options which configure printing output.
Slash 0
This parameter allows you to print the numeral “0” with or without the slash.
This option applies to all character sets except OCR-A and OCR-B.
•
•
Disable (factory default). Zero is printed without a slash.
Enable. Zero is printed with a slash.
Ignore Dots
•
•
Disable (factory default).
Enable. Causes the VGL to expect position values to be specified in only
1/10ths of an inch. If the dot position is also given, it is treated as text.
Append Rotated
188
•
Disable (factory default). Logos and alphanumeric strings are treated as
separate elements.
•
Enable. Appends logos to an alphanumeric string rotated in a clockwise,
counterclockwise, or inverted orientation.
IGP/VGL Submenu
Truncate Alpha
When enabled, this parameter prevents the printing of Error 48 (Element Off
Page Error) if alphanumeric data, including spaces, extends beyond the right
side of the form. The options include:
•
•
Enable (factory default)
Disable
True Vert 1/10
•
Disable (factory default). A vertical 1/10 of an inch parameter is used as
7/72 of an inch. The absolute move is slightly smaller than expected. For
example, a one-inch move would be 70/72 of an inch. Vertical moves that
have the same value are identical in length.
•
Enable. A vertical 1/10 inch parameter is used as 1/10 inch. Rounding
occurs to the nearest 1/72 inch. This can cause vertical moves that have
the same value to differ by ± 1/72 inch.
Absorb After ^PY
•
Absorb Motion (factory default). The first paper motion following a ^PY
command is ignored.
•
Absorb All. The system ignores all the data and terminator until a host
generated motion terminator is detected.
•
Disable. System terminators following a graphics command are sent to
the printer and result in paper motion.
UPC Descenders
•
Enable (factory default). UPC/EAN barcodes are printed with
descenders, even if there is no human readable data.
•
Disable. UPC/EAN barcodes are printed without descenders if there is no
human readable data.
Rot. Char Size
•
Adjusted (factory default). Rotated (clockwise/counterclockwise),
expanded characters have a different size than an unrotated character
with the same size parameters.
•
Not Adjusted. Rotated, expanded characters are the same size as
unrotated characters with the same size parameters.
Ignore Spaces
•
Disable (factory default). Trailing spaces are not deleted from the last
alphanumeric element in a graphics pass.
•
Enable. Trailing spaces are deleted from the last alphanumeric element
in a graphics pass.
189
Chapter
4
EMULATION Menu
Midline PY (includes ^PN)
•
Disable (factory default). The Graphics mode Enable command, ^PY,
must be the first three characters of a line.
•
Enable. The ^PY or ^PN can occur anywhere in a line.
Print Quality
•
Data Processing (factory default). ALPHA text and barcodes are printed
in normal mode at 60 x 72 dpi. This mode should be set if the highest
speed is desired.
•
High. ALPHA text and barcodes are printed in dark mode at
120 x 72 dpi.
Expanded Font
•
Scalable (factory default). These expanded characters have rounded
edges.
•
Block. These are block characters compatible with IGP-X10 printers.
LP+ Font
•
Disable (factory default). The IGP/VGL uses its default half-dot font,
which is slightly different from the standard bitmap font used by LP+ at 12,
13, 15 and 17 cpi.
•
Enable. The IGP/VGL uses the same font as used by LP+ at all cpi.
MSI Check Digit
•
Print (factory default). The check digit is appended at the end of the
printable data field for MSI barcodes.
•
Don't Print. The check digit for MSI barcodes does not print.
I25 Selection
•
I25 Odd Data (factory default). When an odd number of data is provided,
the default setting, Leading Zero, will add a zero to the beginning of the
bar code data. The setting, Check Digit, will add a check digit to the end
of the bar code data so that the results add up to an even number of data.
•
Convert Alpha. Disable is the default. When enabled, each non-digit I25
bar code character will convert to “0.”
NOTE: If you use an Interleaved 2/5 barcode that automatically adds the
check digit (type code k or l, IBARC type code INT2/5CD or INT2/
5CDA), the check digit is added regardless of how this parameter is
set.
190
IGP/VGL Submenu
AI 00 Spaces
This option is designated for EAN/UCC-128 barcodes whose application
identifier (AI) is 00.
•
Disable (factory default). The printable data field is printed with the AI
enclosed in parentheses. This is the standard EAN/UCC-128 format.
•
Enable. The printable data field is printed with the UCC fields separated
by spaces. This option is IGP-X00 compatible.
Width Limit
•
•
Disable (factory default).
Enable. The system will limit the length and width for expanded
characters to a limit shown in Table 13, which displays the maximum
width allowed for a specific height in the range of 00 through 40 (0.0
through 4.0 inches).
Table 13. Width Limit Table
Height Param.
Max. Width
Allowed
Height Param.
Max. Width
Allowed
00
99
21
51
01
99
22
53
02
3
23
56
03
6
24
58
04
8
25
61
05
11
26
63
06
13
27
66
07
16
28
68
08
18
29
71
09
21
30
73
10
23
31
76
11
26
32
78
12
28
33
81
13
31
34
83
14
33
35
86
15
36
36
88
16
38
37
91
17
41
38
93
18
43
39
96
19
46
40
98
20
48
Absorb After ^PN
•
Disable (factory default). All line terminators that follow the ^PN
command are sent to the printer and processed.
•
Enable. The first motion line terminator that follows the ^PN command is
ignored.
191
Chapter
4
EMULATION Menu
IGP110 Compatbl.
This option instructs the VGL to behave similarly to the IGP-10 with respect to
certain commands. All new users with new applications should select the
“Disable” option. Selecting this mode insures the printer will behave as
described in this manual.
•
•
Disable (factory default). The IGP does not emulate the IGP-10 mode.
Enable. The IGP emulates the IGP-10 version.
Auto FF at ^PN
•
Disable (factory default). A form feed will not be generated automatically
when the ^PN command is encountered.
•
Enable. A form feed will be generated automatically to slew to the top of
the next form when the ^PN command is encountered and when the
current vertical position is not at top of form.
PDF Size Comp.
This option is for compatibility of the font size of the barcode printable data
field on the old build.
•
•
Disable (factory default). Uses the normal font size.
Enable. Matches the font size of the old build.
C128 Mode Comp
The menu is for compatibility of the old build in auto mode switch.
•
•
Disable (factory default). Uses auto mode switch.
Enable. Matches the old build on the auto mode switch.
C39 Compatbl.
This menu makes the old method of decoding C39 alternative character set
compatible with the new.
•
•
Disable (disable). Uses the current way of decoding.
Enable. Matches the old method of decoding.
Ignore ^Lxx Cmd.
•
•
192
Disable (factory default).
Enable. The ^Lxx command will always be ignored.
IGP/VGL Submenu
Error Handling
Following are several options which define how errors are reported.
Error Msgs
•
Enable (factory default). Command syntax is checked and error
messages printed when command parameters are incorrect.
•
Disable. Error checking and error messages are suppressed.
Error Markers
•
Enable (factory default). Prints the following error markers for those
elements that print beyond the page boundaries:
>> for elements that begin off the right side of the page;
<< for elements that begin at the indicated position but end off the page;
♦ for elements where the starting position of the command contains an
error other than an off-page error.
Offpage Errors
•
Disable (factory default). Does not report errors for elements that start or
end beyond the right edge of the page.
•
Enable. Reports errors for elements that start or end beyond the right
edge of the page.
Barcode Errors
•
Enable (factory default). An error message will print when invalid barcode
data is encountered.
•
Disable. VGL will not print an error for illegal barcode data; the barcode
will be skipped.
NOTE: When the Barcode Errors option is disabled, the VGL emulation will
try to make the best use of invalid data by either truncating extra
digits or adding zeros to the end of barcode data to meet minimum
data length requirements for some barcodes. Not all errors will be
corrected.
Ignore / DB8 Setup
Following are several options which define character filtering and Data Bit 8.
Ignore Chars
•
•
Disable (factory default). Character filtering is not enabled.
•
Char 2. Character 2 will be filtered. Select the option “Ignore CH#2” to
specify character 2.
•
Char 1 & 2. Characters 1 & 2 will be filtered. Select the options “Ignore
CH#1” and “Ignore CH#2” to specify values for these characters.
Char 1. Character 1 will be filtered. Select the option “Ignore CH#1” to
specify character 1.
193
Chapter
4
EMULATION Menu
Ignore CH#1
Specifies character 1 for the character filtering option. Valid decimal values
are from 0 through 255.
Ignore CH#2
Specifies character 2 for the character filtering option. Valid decimal values
are from 0 through 255.
Data Bit 8
•
Enable (factory default). The PI line is not passed directly from host to
printer; all 8 bits are used for data bits, and characters in the hex 80-FF
range can be accessed.
•
Disable. When the host PI line is enabled, Data Bit 8 internally indicates
PI line status. To use the PI line, disable Data Bit 8, and enable the Host
PI configuration option (under the PI Control option, below).
NOTE: Data Bit 8 is interpreted as either Data Bit 8 or PI signal, but never
both. When enabled as Data Bit 8, Data Bit 8 has priority over the PI
signal, and all data above hex 7F is used to access character data
and not to interpret PI line data.
Conversely, when Data Bit 8 is disabled and the PI signal is used,
Data Bit 8 of the data is reserved for use as the PI function, and you
cannot access characters in the hex 80-FF range. Therefore, to
access characters in the hex 80-FF range, Data Bit 8 must be
enabled.
Font Set
The Font Set specifies which language is currently selected for use with the
VGL. Refer to “IGP/VGL Font Set Menu” on page 196 for available selections.
PI Control
Printer PI
•
Disable (factory default). The ASCII emulation is configured with the PI
line disabled.
•
Enable. The ASCII emulation is configured with the PI line enabled.
Host PI
•
•
194
Disable (factory default). The host does not send PI signals.
Enable. The host sends PI signals. The Data Bit 8 configuration option
must be disabled to transmit the PI line to the printer.
IGP/VGL Submenu
Max PI 16
•
•
Enable (factory default). A paper slew of 0-15 will move 1-16 lines.
Disable. A paper slew of 1-15 will move 1-15 lines. A paper slew of 0 will
always move 1 line.
Prt To Emulate
This option allows you to select an earlier model printer/IGP board
combination to emulate. When a printer emulation is selected, the scaling
command causes the printer to generate a graphic image in the same density
as the printer emulation chosen. Five types of printers can be emulated: MVP
or MVP 150B, L150, P3040, P6000, and P9000. Once a printer emulation is
selected, it remains active until the printer is turned off or another printer
emulation is selected. All new users with new applications should select the
“Disable” option, which insures the printer behaves as described in this
manual. The other compatibility modes are required to emulate the behaviors
of older printers which may be inconsistent with the documented VGL
functionality. Proper use of this feature requires the printer to be equipped
with high resolution hammer bank tips (12 mil).
195
Chapter
4
EMULATION Menu
IGP/VGL Font Set Menu
* = Factory Default
Font Set
(from page 186)
Active Font
Set
Standard Sets*
Arabic Sets
Cyrillic Sets
European Sets
Greek Sets
Hebrew Sets
Turkish Sets
Misc. Sets
UTF-8
Greek
Sets
DEC 256 Greek*
ELOT 928 Greek
Greek 3
ABY Greek
ABG Greek
ELOT 927 Greek
Greek 851
Greek 437
Greek 8859-7
Win. CP 1253
Greek 813 EURO
Greek 869 EURO
196
Standard
Sets
0) ASCII*
1) German
2) Swedish
3) Danish
4) Norwegian
5) Finnish
6) English
7) Dutch
8) French
9) Spanish
10) Italian
11) Turkish
12) CP 437
13) CP 850
Hebrew
Sets
Hebrew Old*
Hebrew New
Hebrew DEC
Latin-1 Hebrew
Win. CP 1255
Arabic
Sets
ASMO 449*
ASMO 449+
ASMO 708
ASMO 708+
MS DOS CP710
MS DOS CP720
Sakr CP 714
Aptec CP715
CP 786
Arabic CP 864
Arabic CP 1046
Arabic Lam 1
Arabic Lam 2
Win. CP 1256
Farsi 1
Farsi 2
1098 Farsi 1285
Turkish
Sets
Data Gen. Turk.*
DEC Turkish
IBM Turkish
Siemens Turkish
PTT Turkish
IBC Turkish
Bull Turkish
AS400 Turkish
Unisys Turkish
NCR Turkish
PST Turkish
UNIS-1 Turkish
Code Page 853
INFO Turkish
Win. CP 1254
Code Page 857
Azeri
European
Sets
Cyrillic
Sets
Code Page 866*
Cyrillic CP 437
Cyrillic 113
Cyrillic 8859-5
ISO 915
Code Page 855
7-bit Cyrillic
Ukrainian
Bulgarian
Win. CP 1251
Latvian 866
CP 1048
Latin 2 8859-2*
Latin 2 852
Mazovia
Kamenicky
Roman 8
PC-437 Slavic
Slavic 1250
Code Page 865
Code Page 860
Latin 1 8859-1
Latin 5 8859-9
Latin 9 8859-15
Polish POL1
Win. CP 1250
Win. CP 1252
Win. CP 1257
CP 858 EURO
Lith. CP 773
Serbo Croatic 1
Serbo Croatic 2
CP 774
CP 775
ISO 8859-4
Misc.
Sets
Block-set 10cpi*
Italics Set
Scanblock 10cpi
PGL Thai Set
IPDS Emulation
IPDS Emulation
* Factory Default
EMULATION
(from page 111)
IPDS
Font Size
Print Quality
Graphics
Quality
Barcode
Quality
Barcode
Speed
Select By Host*
Standard
Compressed
Select By Host*
Default Font
High*
Select By Host
Low
High*
Select By Host
Low
High*
Select By Host
Low
Early Print
Comp
Off*
On
Graphics
Scaling
Rounded*
Exact
I2/5
Checksum
Standard (1/3)*
Special (4/9)
Default Code
Page
Internat. Set 5*
English/USA/Can
Austrian/German
Belgian Old
Brazilian
Canadian/French
Danish/Norw.
Finnish/Swedish
French Azerty
Italian
Japanese Eng.
Katakana
Portuguese
Spanish
Spanish Speak.
English (UK)
Arabic
Greek
Icelandic
Turkish Latin 5
Latin 2/ROECE
Cyrillic Old
Thai
Hebrew
Farsi
Yugoslavian
Latin 9
Euro US/Can.
Euro Aust/Germ.
Euro Dan/Norw.
Euro Fin/Swed.
Euro Italian
Euro Spanish
Euro UK/Ireland
Euro French
Euro Internat.
Euro Icelandic
Euro Latin 2
Internat. Set 1
Dan/Norw. (ALT)
Fin/Swed (ALT)
Spanish (ALT)
Greek Old
Hebrew Old
OCR A
OCR B
Turkish Old
Cyrillic
Baltic Mult
Estonian
OCR B Katakana
197
Chapter
4
EMULATION Menu
* Factory Default
Code Page
Subset
Default
Font
Thai
Version 0*
Version 1
Version 2
DRAFT 10*
DRAFT 12
DRAFT 13
DRAFT 15
DRAFT 17
DRAFT 18
DP 10
DP 12
DP 13
DP 15
DP 17
DP 18
NLQ 10
NLQ 12
NLQ 13
NLQ 15
NLQ 17
NLQ 18
OCRA
OCRB
PSM
VPA Check
Enable*
Disable
Hexdump
Mode
Print IPDS
Fonts
Disable*
Enable
Undef Char
Subst
0x60*
0x40 - 0xFE
Emulation
Mode
None*
4234
67xx
64xx/65xx
4224
A general discussion about starting and stopping IPDS can be found in the
IBM 4234 Product and Programming Reference Manual (GC31-3879).
Sending a non-IPDS data stream to an IPDS printer and vise versa will result
in a hung spool file or writer.
Font Size
This parameter chooses the font size which will be used by IPDS.
•
Select By Host (factory default). The font ID is only affected by host
commands.
•
•
Standard. The font ID is converted to a decompressed font ID.
Compressed. The font ID is converted to a compressed font ID.
Print Quality
This parameter chooses the print quality.
•
•
198
Select By Host (factory default). The application decides the print quality.
Default Font. The default font the printer uses.
IPDS Emulation
Graphics Quality
This parameter chooses the print quality of graphics.
•
•
•
High (factory default). Graphics are printed at 144 dot rows per inch.
Select By Host. The application decides the quality of the graphics.
Low. Graphics are printed at 72 dot rows per inch.
Barcode Quality
This parameter chooses the horizontal print quality of barcode labels.
•
•
•
High (factory default). Label is printed at 144 dots per inch.
Select By Host. The application decides the quality of the labels.
Low. Label is printed at 72 dots per inch.
Barcode Speed
This parameter chooses the vertical print quality of barcode labels.
•
High (factory default). Barcodes are printed with less vertical dots,
increasing printing speed, but decreasing print quality.
•
•
Select By Host. The application decides the quality of the labels.
Low. Barcodes are printed with more vertical dots, decreasing printing
speed, but increasing print quality.
Early Print Comp (Complete)
This parameter chooses when to send a Print Comp to the controller.
•
•
Off (factory default). Print Comp is sent if page is printed completely.
On. Print Comp is sent immediately. The next page will be created. This
improves the print performance when starting the next page.
NOTE: When Early Print Comp is enabled and an error occurs, you may lose
data.
Graphics Scaling
This parameter chooses the scaling factor for graphics when the Mapping
Control option of the IPDS Write Graphics Control command is SCALE TO
FIT:
•
Rounded (factory default). Calculations are rounded up in the desired
output resolution.
•
Exact. Graphics will be scaled as accurately as possible.
199
Chapter
4
EMULATION Menu
I2/5 Checksum
This parameter defines the printer checksum calculation method for
Interleaved 2 of 5 barcodes.
•
Standard (1/3) (factory default). The odd numbers will be multiplied by 3
and the even numbers by 1 for calculation of the checksum.
•
Special (4/9). The odd numbers will be multiplied by 4 and the even
numbers by 9 for calculation of the checksum.
NOTE: “Odd” refers to the 1st, 3rd, 5th... character in the barcode, while
“even” refers to the 2nd, 4th, 6th... character in the barcode.
Default Code Page
Choose which code page to use with the IPDS emulation.
Code Page Subset
When the Thai code page is selected as the default, either from the front
panel or by a host command, you may choose from three different versions.
Default Font
Choose a font quality and size from the available selections. All fonts in the
Default Font menu are available in standard and compressed vertical
resolution (see page 197).
VPA Check
•
Enable (factory default). The printer checks for dots that fall outside the
intersection of the logical and physical pages. If dots fall outside the area,
the printer reports an error to the host if the IPDS Exception Handling
Control command setting requires error reporting.
•
Disable. The printer does not report dots outside the valid printable area.
Hexdump Mode
A hex code printout (or hex dump) translates all incoming data to hexadecimal
equivalents. A hex dump lists each ASCII data character received from the
host computer, together with its corresponding two-digit hexadecimal code.
Hex dumps can be used to troubleshoot some types of printer data reception
problems.
Print IPDS Fonts
This feature allows you to print a list of all resident fonts currently available in
the active IPDS emulation
200
IPDS Emulation
Undef Char Subst
Specifies the replacement character to print in place of any unprintable
character that is received by the host.
•
•
0x60 (Factory default)
0x40 - 0xFE
Emulation Mode
Specifies the printer model to emulate.
•
None (Factory default) Use this option when a legacy configuration is
loaded with PNE.
•
•
•
•
4234 IBM 4234
67xx Decision Data 67xx
64xx/65xx IBM 6400 / 6500 Series
4224 IBM 4224
201
Chapter
4
EMULATION Menu
PCL - II Emulation
* = Factory Default
EMULATION
(from page 111)
PCL-II
Primary Char.
Set
Second Char.
Set
ID
ID
0* - 109
Symbol Set
See page 203
Pitch
10.00*, 12.00,
13.30, 15.00,
16.67, 20.00
Density
Data Processing*
NLQ
OCR-A
OCR-B
High Speed
Graphics
Density
60 DPI*
70 DPI
Page Length
Rep.
Max. Line
Width
Inches/Page*
0* - 109
Lines/Page
Symbol Set
See page 203
Pitch
10*, 12, 13.3
15, 16.67, 20
Density
Data Processing*
NLQ
OCR-A
OCR-B
High Speed
13.2 inches*
13.6 inches
Perforation
Skip
Disable*
Enable
Display
Functns
Disable*
Enable
Page L./Lines
Page L./Inches
11.0 Inches *
2.0 – 16.0 Inches
11.0 Inches *
2.0 – 16.0 Inches
202
Config. Print
Face CPI
Delay
Disable*
Enable
Enable*
Disable
Line
Terminator
LF After CR
Disable*
Enable
CR After LF
Disable*
Enable
CR After FF
Disable*
Enable
CR After VT
Disable
Enable*
Symbol Set
Delay
PTX
Linefeed
Disable*
Enable
Symbol Set
Print
LPI Adjust
6 LPI*
8 LPI
Reset Cmd
CFG Ld
Current Config*
Factory Config
Disable
Power Up Config
PCL - II Emulation
Primary
Char. set
(from page 202)
Secondary
Char. Set
(from page 202)
Symbol Set
Symbol Set
Roman-8[8U]*
Turkish-8[8T]
Arab-8[8V]
Cyrillic[8R]
PC858 MtLi[13U]
MC Text[12J]
Roman-9[4U]
Latin-9[9N]
Win3.0Lat-1[9U]
Hebrew Old
Japan Postnet
Katakana Post
ASCII[0U]
Math Sym[0A/0M]
LineDraw[0B/0L]
IS0 Den/Nor[0D]
Roman Ext.[0E]
IS0 UK[1E]
IS0 France[0F]
IS0 German[0G]
Hebrew[0H]
Japan ASCII[0K]
Katakana[1K]
Block Char[1L]
OCR-A[0O]
OCR-B[1O]
ISO Swe/Fin[0S]
ISO Spain[1S]
ISO Italian[0I]
ISO Portugu[4S]
Latin-1[0N]
Latin-2[2N]
Latin-5[5N]
Latin-6[6N]
Baltic[19L]
PC8 DanNor[11U]
PC8 Cd437[10U]
PC850 MtLi[12U]
PC851 LtGk[12G]
PC852 Lat2[17U]
PC Turkish[9T]
PC Hebrew[15H]
PC Lat/Ara[10V]
PC Cyrillic[3R]
Win3.1Lat1[19U]
Win3.1Lat-2[9E]
Win3.1Lat-5[5T]
Math-8[8M]
PS Math[5M]
Greek-7[12N]
Postnet4[15Y]
Postnet11.25
Greek-8[8G]
Hebrew-8[8H]
Katakana-8[8K]
DEC 256 Greek
ELOT 928 Greek
Greek 3
ABY Greek
ABG Greek
ELOT 927 Greek
Greek 437
Greek 8859-7
(same as Primary
Character Set)
203
Chapter
4
EMULATION Menu
Primary Char. Set
You can select one of 92 pre-defined character sets by ID (although character
sets range from 0 - 109, not all sets are available on the LJ500 printer), or you
can select pitch, symbol set, and typeface individually. If the combination you
choose matches one of the 92 predefined sets, the ID submenu will reflect
that selection. If not, the ID menu will display xx to indicate that the current
character set does not match a pre-defined set. Set 0 is the default, and its
attributes are 10 cpi, Data Processing typeface, and Roman 8 symbol set.
Second Char. Set
Your printer can store an additional character set. To toggle between them,
send the Shift In (Decimal 15, to select the Primary character set) or Shift Out
(Decimal 14, to select the Secondary character set).
Page Length Rep.
•
Inches/Page (factory default). All page length calculations are based on
the inches displayed on the panel.
•
Lines/Page. All changes in LPI or density will be changed accordingly.
The length of the page is the number of lines per inch, or lpi.
For example, if the form in use is 82 lines at 6 lpi, the page is physically
13.67 inches. Since 13.67 inches is not selectable from the Length in
Inches menu, change the representation to lines, then set the number of
lines to 82. The inches menu will display 13.6 inches although the printer
internally keeps the exact form length of 13.67 inches.
Max Line Width
Set the maximum line width at 13.2 inches (factory default) or 13.6 inches.
Face CPI Delay
Allows the combination of different font densities on the same line.
•
Enable (factory default). Different font densities can be used on the same
line.
•
Disable. Only the same font densities are allowed on the same line.
Graphics Density
Graphics can be printed in 60 DPI (factory default) or 70 DPI.
Perforation Skip
•
•
204
Disable (factory default). Allows printing on page perforation.
Enable. You may set up a skip-over margin. For example, a skip-over
margin of one inch creates a one inch margin at the bottom of the page.
PCL - II Emulation
Display Functions
•
•
Disable (factory default). Control characters are not printed.
Enable. Control characters are printed before they get executed. This is a
useful debugging tool.
Line Terminator
You can define the action of the line. Four options are available: LF after CR,
CR after LF, CR after FF, and CR after VT. Each of these options may be
enabled or disabled independent of one another.
PTX Linefeed
•
Disable (factory default). Linefeed is to be performed as calculated from
the bottom of the graphics or barcode, thereby disrupting the vertical text
alignment.
•
Enable. The Linefeed moves to the next line as calculated from the Top
of Form position, thereby retaining vertical text alignment. When printing
graphics or bar codes, you may want to set the PTX Linefeed parameter
to Enable to maintain text alignment.
PTX Linefeed Enabled
LINE 1
LINE 1
LINE 2
PTX Linefeed Disabled
Linefeed
LINE 2
Linefeed
LINE 3
LINE 3
LPI Adjust
This parameter lets you specify the lines per inch (lpi) values: 6 LPI (factory
default) or 8 LPI.
Page L./Lines
This parameter lets you set physical page length in lines from 12 to 96 at 6 lpi,
or 16 to 128 at 8 cpi. The default is 66 lines at 6 lpi.
NOTE: If 6 lpi is selected, you will be able to scroll the menu to 128 (an
invalid length). However, when you press ENTER to select this value,
the menu will return with the maximum lines for 6 lpi (i.e., 96 lines).
Similarly, selecting too few lines for 8 lpi will cause the menu to return
with 16 lines.
Page L./Inches
This parameter allows you to set physical page length from 2 to 16 inches, in
increments of half an inch. The default is 11 inches.
205
Chapter
4
EMULATION Menu
Config Print
This option prints the emulation's parameters and the currently selected
values.
Symbol Set Print
This option prints a list of all the available sets. The character set number
prints to the left of the character set sample.
Reset Cmd CFG Ld
When the printer receives a host data stream reset command in addition to
resetting printer variables, the selected configuration will be loaded.
•
Current Config (factory default). If you have preset and presaved
multiple configurations, then the currently selected presaved
configuration is loaded when the reset command is received.
•
Factory Config. The factory installed configuration is loaded when the
reset command is received.
•
Disable. The printer ignores the reset command when it is received and
continues to use the currently loaded configuration.
•
Power-Up Config. The power-up configuration is loaded when the reset
command is received.
LG Emulation
* = Factory Default
EMULATION
(from page 111)
LG
Font
(see page 207)
FF
= FF*
= CR + FF
206
Vert. Forms
Bot Frm 66/6
Top Mrg 0/6
Bot Mrg 66/6
Unsolicited
Rpt
No*
Small
Big
Horiz Forms
Left Mrg 00.0*
Right Mrg 13.2
Print Mode
Opt
Enable*
Disable
CR
Autowrap
No*
Yes
Plot Mode
Opt
Enable*
Disable
= CR*
= CR + LF
I-2/5 Guard
Bars
Enable*
Disable
LF
= LF*
= CR + LF
LG Emulation
Font
(from page 206)
Style
DP 10 6*
DP 10 8
DP 12 6
DP 12 8
DP 15 6
DP 15 8
DP 15 10
HS 10 6
CORESPON 5 6
CORESPON 5 8
CORESPON 6 6
CORESPON 6 8
CORESPON 10 6
CORESPON 10 8
CORESPON 12 6
CORESPON 12 8
CORESPON 15 6
CORESPON 15 8
CORESPON 15 10
OCR A
OCR B
COMPRESS 6 6
COMPRESS 6 8
COMPRESS 8 6
COMPRESS 8 8
COMPRESS 13 6
COMPRESS 13 8
COMPRESS 13 10
COMPRESS 16 6
COMPRESS 16 8
COMPRESS 16 10
DP 5 6
DP 5 8
DP 6 6
DP 6 8
Character Set
GL Char Set
U.S. ASCII*
DEC Finnish
French
DEC Fr. Can.
German
Italian
JIS Roman
DEC Nor./Dan.
Spanish
DEC Swedish
DEC Great Brit.
ISO Nor./Dan.
DEC Dutch
DEC Swiss
DEC Portuguese
VT100 Graphics
DEC Suppl.
DEC Technical
ISO Katakana
7-Bit Hebrew
7-Bit Turkish
Greek Suppl.
Hebrew Suppl.
Turkish Suppl.
GR Char Set
DEC Suppl.*
DEC Technical
VT100 Graphics
ISO Katakana
ISO Latin 1
ISO Latin 2
ISO Latin 5
ISO Latin 9
ISO Cyrillic
ISO Greek
ISO Hebrew
Hebrew Suppl.
Turkish Suppl.
207
Chapter
4
EMULATION Menu
Font
Select a default font style and character set for the LG emulation, as follows:
•
Style. This option allows you to specify a print quality that includes a
characters per inch (cpi) and lines per inch (lpi) setting, in the format Type
cpi lpi. The default setting is DP 10 6 (Data Processing, 10 cpi, 6 lpi). The
print quality types you may choose from are as follows:
DP = Data Processing (standard quality)
CORESPON = Correspondence (near letter quality)
COMPRESS = Compressed (vertically compressed for printing
long graphs and charts)
OCR A & OCR B = Optical Character Recognition, sets A
and B
HS = High Speed (Draft quality for high speed printing)
•
Character Set. This option allows you to select a character set. The
character set you select can be any of the Digital Multinational sets, which
include the U.S. ASCII set and several foreign language and special
character sets.
Vert Forms
208
•
Bot Frm 66/6 (factory default). This option sets the bottom margin for the
forms. You must specify the bottom margin in lines (at 6 lines per inch),
ranging from 0 to 198 lines (33 inches). The default setting is 66. Press
the right arrow to increase the value, left arrow to decrease the value, and
ENTER to change units. Selecting a value for this option resets the top
margin to 0, so the top margin must be redefined after this option is
selected.
•
Top Mrg 6/0.This option sets the top margin for the forms. You must
specify the top margin in lines (at 6 lines per inch), ranging from 0 to 198
lines (33 inches). The default setting is 0. Press the right arrow to
increase the value, left arrow to decrease the value, and ENTER to
change units. The margins will automatically adjust so that the top and
bottom margins do not cross each other.
•
Bot Mrg 66/6. This option sets the bottom margin for the forms. You must
specify the bottom margin in lines (at 6 lines per inch), ranging from 0 to
198 lines (33 inches). The default setting is 66. Press the right arrow to
increase the value, left arrow to decrease the value, and ENTER to
change units. Selecting a value for this option resets the top margin to 0,
so the top margin must be redefined after this option is selected.
LG Emulation
Horiz Forms
•
Left Mgr 0.00 (factory default). This sets the left margin for the forms.
You must specify the left margin in 1/10 inch increments, from 0 to 13.1
inches. The default value is 0. Press the right arrow to increase the value,
left arrow to decrease the value, and ENTER to change units. The
margins will automatically adjust so that the left and right margins do not
cross each other.
•
Right Mrg 13.2. This sets the right margin for the forms. You must specify
the right margin in 1/10 inch increments, from 0.1 to 13.2 inches. The
default value is 13.2. Press the right arrow to increase the value, left
arrow to decrease the value, and ENTER to change units. The margins
will automatically adjust so that the left and right margins do not cross
each other.
Autowrap
This parameter determines if text will wrap to the next line when the line of
text exceeds the right margin.
•
No (factory default). Any print data received past the forms width setting
is discarded.
•
Yes. An automatic carriage return and line feed is performed when data is
received past the forms width setting.
CR
This option controls the action of the printer when it receives a Carriage
Return code (hex 0D) from the host computer. If this feature is enabled, each
time the printer receives a Carriage Return, it inserts an additional Line Feed
code (hex 0A) into the data stream. Do not use this feature if the host
computer sends line feeds to the printer.
•
= CR (factory default). Does not insert an extra line feed after each
carriage return.
•
= CR + LF. If this feature is enabled, each time the printer receives a
Carriage Return, it inserts an additional Line Feed code (hex 0A) into the
data stream. (Do not use this feature if the host computer sends Line
Feeds to the printer with each Carriage Return.)
LF
This parameter forces the printer to insert an automatic Carriage Return code
into the data stream whenever a Line Feed code occurs. This can be used in
most installations, but it is required if the host computer does not send
carriage returns to the printer.
•
= LF (factory default). Does not perform an automatic carriage return. The
next print position will be the current print position of the next line.
•
= CR + LF. Each time the printer receives a Line Feed, it inserts an
additional Carriage Return code (hex 0D) into the data stream. This
feature can be used in most installations, but it is required if the host
computer does not send Carriage Returns to the printer.
209
Chapter
4
EMULATION Menu
FF
This parameter forces the printer to insert an automatic Carriage Return code
into the data stream whenever a Form Feed code occurs. This can be used in
most installations, but it is required if the host computer does not send
carriage returns to the printer.
•
= FF (factory default). Does not perform an automatic carriage return. The
next print position will be the current print position of the next form.
•
= CR + FF. Performs an automatic carriage return. The next print position
will be print position 1 of the next form.
Unsolicited Rpt
This option enables or disables Printer Device Status Reports to be sent to
the host when a reportable status or error condition has occurred.
•
No (factory default). Disables all unsolicited status reports from the
printer.
•
Small. Enables brief unsolicited status reports and sends an extended
status report to the host.
•
Big. Enables extended, unsolicited status reports and sends an extended
status report to the host.
Print Mode Opt
When enabled, this option affects the SPI, SHS, and DECSHORP
commands. The printer will no longer be forced into these commands and
print speed improves significantly when in portrait orientation. For SHS and
DECSHORP, the character size will change with the selected pitch. In
addition, SGR attributes such as bold, crossed-out, and italics, will be done in
print mode with greater efficiency.
•
•
Enable (factory default). Enables the print mode option.
Disable. Disables the print mode option. This provides compatibility with
older LG printer products.
Plot Mode Opt
When enabled, this option will plot with greater efficiency, particularly with
respect to the Postnet barcode. Postnet is printed in the same density as the
current print mode font so that reverse motion will be inhibited when possible.
•
•
Enable (factory default). Enables the print mode option.
Disable. Disables the print mode option. This provides compatibility with
older LG printer products.
I-2/5 Guard Bars
210
•
Enable (factory default). Horizontal guard bars are printed above and
below each Interleaved 2/5 bar code. This option only applies to
Interleaved 2/5 bar codes.
•
Disable. Interleaved 2/5 bar codes are printed normally, with no guard
bars.
Arabic Context Analyzer
Arabic Context Analyzer
The Arabic firmware offers outstanding performance in terms of Arabization features
and is intended for applications requiring Arabic and Latin high print quality under
different Arabization platforms. It supports many Arabization mechanisms and many
Arabic and Latin code sets.
Theory of Operation
The Arabic printer is equipped with a built-in front end analyzer that preprocesses all
incoming data from a host before it is sent to the LinePrinter Plus emulation. This
front-end analyzer has two functions:
1. Cross-emulation: Translates all incoming commands from the host to the
LinePrinter Plus emulation.
2. Arabization: Processes all incoming printable characters from the host and
Arabizes them line by line.
This figure shows the printer shows where the Front End Analyzer resides in the data
stream. Data is pre-processed by the Analyzer before it is handed over to the
LinePrinter Plus printer emulation.
Front-end Analyzer Features
• Multi emulation support: ANSI, Epson FX, Epson LQ, HP, C.Itoh, and IBM.
• Multi font support (Naskh, Kofi, Reqa'a,...).
• Multi Arabization Mechanisms: 7-bit with switching codes, 7-bit with escape
sequences, 8-bit Pure, 8-bit neutrals, 8-bit with switching codes, and 8-bit with
escape sequences.
• 17 Latin code sets.
• 48 Arabic code sets.
• Many configurable Arabization parameters to suit almost any Arabic application
available in the market.
211
Chapter
4
EMULATION Menu
Analyzer Activate
When the analyzer is deactivated all incoming data from the host is passed
directly through the Analyzer to the LinePrinter Plus printer emulation without
any processing. The Analyzer only responds to the command: activate
analyzer.
•
•
Yes (factory default). The emulations under the Analyzer menu are active.
No. The data is passed down to the LinePrinter Plus printer emulation
without any modification.
Input Emulation
Set the input emulation according to the application you are using.
•
•
Epson FX (factory default). The Epson-FX emulation.
Epson LQ, Proprinter XL, HP, ANSI, CITOH. Other available
emulations.
Automatic Carriage Return
When Auto CR is enabled, the analyzer sends the printer a Carriage Return
each time it receives a Line Feed. The default is Disabled.
NOTE: You have to use this item to enable the Auto Carriage Return instead
of the menu under the LinePrinter Plus menu as long as the analyzer
is active.
212
Arabic Context
Context Analyzer
Analyzer
Arabic
Automatic Line Feed
When Auto LF is enabled, the analyzer sends the printer a Line Feed each
time it receives a Carriage Return. The default is Disabled.
NOTE: When you want to enable the Auto Line Feed (Auto LF), use the item
under the analyzer menu not the one under the LinePrinter Plus
menu as long as the analyzer is active.
PUM (Position Unit Mode)
This menu only has an effect when the Analyzer emulation is set to ANSI. It
has two different possible values:
•
Decipoints (factory default). The printer interprets ANSI escape
sequence parameters as decipoint values.
•
Lines/Columns. The printer interprets ANSI escape sequence
parameters as line or column counts.
Default Data Processing
Your printer has two “Data Process” typefaces: Normal & Enhanced. This
menu item is effective when using the Arabic Windows Driver:
•
•
Data Processing. The normal typeface used for Data Processing.
Enhanced DP (factory default). This version of Data Processing typeface is
printed at a lower speed than the normal “Data Process” typeface.
However, the “Enhanced DP” is a better quality than the normal “Data
Process” typeface.
NOTE: When using SEDCO Windows printer driver, all menu items under the
analyzer are ignored except for this menu item. If the “Printer Font
Name” in the driver properties under “Device Settings” is set to “Data
Process”, then the value of “Default DP” menu item selects between
the “Data Processing” and “DP Enhanced” typefaces.
Wrap Around
When the user sends a long line (longer than what the printer expects) to the
printer, the remaining characters will be printed on the next line if the Wrap
Around menu item is enabled. If this item is disabled the printer will not print
the rest of the line. The default is Disabled.
Form Feed Absorb
When Form Feed Absorb is enabled and a form feed character (0C hex) is
received, it will not have an effect. If Form Feed Absorb is disabled, then a
form feed character will advance the paper to the next top of form, and move
the logical print position to the first character column. The default is Disabled.
Custom Settings
This menu item should be set to zero for normal behavior. To use UTF-8 as
your Right Code Set, set the “Custom Settings” to three. The default is Zero.
213
Chapter
4
EMULATION Menu
214
Arabization Menus
Arabization Menus
The menus in the Arabization section are equivalent to ESC commands and their options as described in
the Arabic Programmer’s Reference Manual.
215
Chapter
4
EMULATION Menu
OpenPrint POSTSCRIPT/PDF Emulation
EMULATION
* = Factory Default
1 Values for standard printers.
2
Values for HD printers.
(from page 79)
Postscript/PDF
Resolution
120x144 DPI* 1
90x96 DPI 1
180x180 DPI* 2
180x90 DPI 2
90x180 DPI 2
120x120 DPI 2
90x90 DPI 2
Paper Size
Custom
Width
Length
US Fanfold*
Letter
Legal
Executive
A3
A4
A5
A6
10x14 Inch
12x12 Inch
13.6x12 Inch
Tabloid 11x17in
JIS B5
US Folio
No. 10 Envelope
DL Envelope
C5 Envelope
C6 Envelope
ISO B5
Paper Size
Fault
Ignore*
Fault
Clip Page
Enable*
Disable
Move to TOF
Disable
At End of Job
At End of Page*
Gray Adjust
0*
-10 to 10
Postscript/PDF Interpreter
The Postscript/PDF data is handled by Ghostscript by Artifex, an interpreter
compatible with the following:
216
•
Portable Document Format (“PDF”) 1.0, 1.1, 1.2, 1.4, 1.5, and 1.6 as
defined in the Portable Document Format Reference Manual, distributed
by Adobe Systems Incorporated.
•
PostScript (TM) Language Level 3, as defined in the PostScript Language
Reference Third Edition (ISBN 0-201-37922-8), published by AddisonWesley in mid-1999.
Postscript/PDF Interpreter
Ghostscript includes a set of 35 scalable outline fonts in PostScript Type 1
format, compatible in appearance and metrics with the fonts commonly
distributed under the following names:
•
•
•
•
Bookman (demi, demi italic, light, light italic)
•
•
•
•
•
•
Palatino (roman, italic, bold, bold italic)
Courier ((plain, oblique, bold, bold oblique)
Avant Garde (book, book oblique, demi, demi oblique)
Helvetica (plain, oblique, bold, bld oblique narrow, narrow oblique, narrow
bold, narrow bold oblique)
New Century Schoolbook (roman, italic, bold, bold italic)
Times (roman, italic, bold, bold italic)
Symbol
Zapf Chancery (medium italic)
Zapf Dingbats
The Ghostscript version used in the P8000 is 8.71.
Resolution
This parameter defines the default print resolution. This selection is used
when either the print resolution is not defined by the data stream or if the print
resolution defined by the data stream is not supported.
The following resolutions are available on OpenPrint P8000 Standard
products:
•
•
120x144 DPI (factory default)
90x96 DPI
The following resolutions are available on OpenPrint P8000 HD products:
•
•
•
•
•
180x180 DPI (factory default)
180x90 DPI
90x180 DPI
120x120 DPI
90x90 DPI
217
Chapter
4
EMULATION Menu
Paper Size
This parameter allows selection of available paper sizes. This parameter
should be set according to the dimensions of the physical paper installed in
the printer. This parameter will be used to determine the TOF and is expected
to change when new media is installed. Available options include:
•
Custom. Sets a user-defined paper size.
•
Width. Defines the paper width. The range is 1” to 15” in 0.1 inch
increments. The default is 13.6 inches.
•
Length. Defines the paper length. The default is 11 inches. Three
length options are available:
Inches. Defines the length in inches. The range is 1” to 24” in 0.1
inch increments.
1/6 Inch Lines. Defines the length in 1/6 inch lines. The range is 6
to 144 lines.
1/8 Inch Lines. Defines the length in 1/8 inch lines. The range is 8
to 192 lines.
To set a custom length, use the appropriate menu that allows for selection of
the exact paper length to avoid loss of top-of-form (i.e., if using a 12” paper,
select either the “Inches” menu set to 12” or the “1/6 Inch Lines” menu set to
72. However, if using a 11 2/3 inch paper length, the “1/6 Inch Lines” menu
must be used (set to 70) since that is exactly 11 2/3 inches. If the “Inches”
menu is used, the closest values would be 11.6 or 11.7 inches which are not
exact.
The printer will indicate which of the three length menus was used by showing
that submenu first when entering the “Length” menu. The configuration
printout will also show the length menu used.
•
See Table 5 for paper size options and actual sizes.
Table 14. Paper Size Options and Actual Size
Paper Size
218
Actual Size
US Fanfold
13.6 x 11 in
Letter
8.5 x 11 in
Legal
8.5 x 14 in
Executive
7.3 x 10.5 in
A3
11.7 x 16.5 in
A4
8.3 x 11 2/3 in
A5
5.8 x 8.3 in
A6
4.1 x 5.8 in
10x14 Inch
10 x 14 in
Postscript/PDF Interpreter
Table 14. Paper Size Options and Actual Size
Paper Size
12x12 Inch
13.6x12 Inch
Tabloid 11x17in
JIS B5
Actual Size
12 x 12 in
13.6 x 12 in
11 x 17 in
7.2 x 10.1 in
US Folio
8.5 x 13 in
No. 10 Envelope
4.1 x 9.5 in
DL Envelope
4.3 x 8.7 in
C5 Envelope
6.4 x 9 in
C6 Envelope
4.5 x 6.4 in
ISO B5
6.9 x 9.8 in
NOTE: When host jobs have page sizes that do not match the Paper Size
parameter, the printer will behave based on the Paper Size Fault, Clip
Page, and Move to TOF parameters.
Paper Size Fault
If a page is sent to the printer with dimensions that do not match the printer,
then the following will happen based on the Paper Size Fault menu selected.
•
Ignore (factory default). The page will print and the paper size length will
be ignored. However, the width will be clipped according to the front panel
width setting.
•
Fault. The printer enters a fault state and goes offline. The user will need
to either clear the fault and continue, or load new media and change the
Paper Size menu selection. Once the printer is back online, printing will
resume.
Clip Page
This menu defines the action when a page is sent to the printer with a length
that is longer than the selected paper size length.
•
Enable (factory default). The page will be clipped at the paper size length.
In cases where the sent page is longer than the paper size length, the
“Move to TOF” menu setting has no effect since the page is clipped at the
TOF position.
•
Disable. The page will not be clipped and printing continues on the next
page. The action taken by the printer when printing of the page completes
is determined by the Move to TOF menu.
NOTE: Page clipping at paper size width is always enabled to protect against
printing on the platen.
219
Chapter
4
EMULATION Menu
Move to TOF
When the page length given does not match the printer, the printer driver will
have to determine how the TOF is kept relative to each page printed. The
following menu options are available through the front panel and the driver:
•
•
•
Disable. Only when the FF key is pressed.
At End of Job. After the Current Job.
At End of Page (factory default). After each Page Printed.
Gray Adjust
This menu adjusts the darkness of the gray elements on the page by
gradually reducing or increasing the amount of dots that are placed in the
halftone patterns. Pure white and black colors are not affected by setting.
The menu ranges from -10 to +10. The default value is 0.
-10
All
White
-9
220
-8
-7
-6
-5
-4
-3
-2
-1
0
Default
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
All
Black
PRINTER
CONTROL
Menu
Postscript/PDF
Interpreter
PRINTER CONTROL Menu
* Factory Default
1 Not available in LG or PCL-II
2
Available for Pedestal printers only.
3 Not available when Postscript/PDF is active.
4 Available for Zero Tear Pedestal printers only.
5
Availability based on Firmware type.
PRINTER
CONTROL
(from page 73,
74, 75, 75, 76,
77, 78, 79)
ZTP
SETTINGS 4
ZTP Function
ZTP TearDistance
ZTP Data Time
ZTP Wait Time
ZTP Platen Open
Unidirectional
Disable*
Enable
Ribbon End
Point
Darker +6
Darker +5
Darker +4
Darker +3
Darker +2
Darker +1
Normal*
Lighter -1
Lighter -2
Lighter -3
Lighter -4
Lighter -5
Lighter -6
Lighter -7
Lighter -8
Lighter -9
Lighter -10
Display
Language
English*
German
French
Italian
Spanish
Portuguese 1
Simp. Chinese 5
Trad. Chinese 5
Korean 5
Open Platen
@BOF
Disable*
Enable
Panel
Display
Ribbon Life*
Configuration
IP Address
Bar Code
Quality 3
Dark*
Draft
Tear Bar
Dist. 2
7.15 inches*
(4.5 – 15.5)
View
Function
Disable*
Enable
Accented
Char 1
Standard*
Tall
221
Chapter
4
PRINTER CONTROL Menu
ZTP SETTINGS
Refer to the “ZTP SETTINGS” menu section in Appendix D, page 357. This
menu only appears for Zero Tear Pedestal printers.
Ribbon End Point
This parameter adjusts the point at which the system will declare the ribbon
as being expended. The life count will always be from 100% to 0%, but if a
darker setting is selected 0% will be reached more quickly. If a lighter setting
is selected, the system will extend the time it takes to reach 0%. The range of
values are as follows:
•
•
•
Normal (factory default)
Darker +1 through Darker +6
Lighter -1 through Lighter -10
NOTE: This value can be adjusted at any time and the display will
automatically adjust to show the correct percentage relative to the
new end point.
Open Platen @ BOF (Bottom of Form)
Some special forms have perforation areas that are too thick to pass through
the print station. This parameter, when enabled, opens and closes the platen
when the perforations move across the platen. When enabling this parameter,
you must set the forms length to match the physical distance between
perforations.
Bar Code Quality
Determines the bar code resolution for all emulations, except IPDS.
(See “IPDS Emulation” on page 197 to set the bar code quality for IPDS.)
•
•
Dark (factory default). Bar code resolution is set at 120 x 72.
Draft. Bar code resolution is set at 60 x 72.
Tear Bar Dist. (Distance)
Allows fine and course adjustment of the tear bar position. For printers using
the top paper exit, the default (7.15 inches) is used. You can specify 4.5 to
15.5 inches in .01 inch increments to accommodate variations in cover and
form design.
222
PRINTER CONTROL
Menu
Postscript/PDF
Interpreter
View Function
•
Disable (factory default for pedestal and tabletop printers). The View key
functionality is Eject only. When the View key is pressed the paper is
ejected based on the value of the currently set Tear Bar Distance. When
the key is pressed again the top of the next available form moves to the
print station. This movement can be either forward or backward
depending on the currently set form length.
•
Enable (factory default for cabinet printers). Enables the View Function in
addition to the Eject. When the key is pressed for a short period of time
(less than 1/2 second) the functionality is View. The paper moves from the
print station to the tractor area for viewing. When the key is pressed again
the paper moves back to the print station. When the key is pressed for a
longer period of time (more than 1/2 second) the functionality is Eject.
When the View key is pressed the paper is ejected based on the value of
the currently set Tear Bar Distance. When the key is pressed again the
top of the next available form is moved to the print station. This movement
can be either forward or backward depending on the currently set form
length.
NOTE: Default setting is Enable for Indian language printers.
Unidirectional
The Unidirectional feature affects both print quality and printing speed. By
setting this feature, you can configure the printer to print in both directions of
the shuttle sweep (bidirectional), or to print in one direction only
(unidirectional).
•
Disable (factory default). The printer will print all data in both directions of
the shuttle sweep (bidirectional printing). This choice produces higher
printing speed.
•
Enable. The printer will print all data in only one direction of the shuttle
sweep (unidirectional printing). Although enabling this feature reduces
print speed, it enhances the vertical alignment of dots and produces
cleaner, sharper barcodes and text.
Display Language
This parameter chooses the language that will appear on the LCD: English,
German, French, Italian, Spanish, Portuguese, Simp. Chinese,
Trad. Chinese, or Korean. The factory default is English.
NOTE: Simp. Chinese, Trad. Chinese, and/or Korean are not available on all
firmware versions.
Panel Display
This menu allows the user to customize the type of information that will
display on the panel LCD when the printer is in online mode.
•
Ribbon Life (factory default). The LCD displays the ribbon life for the
current cartridge installed.
•
Configuration. The LCD displays the configuration that was last loaded.
223
Chapter
4
PRINTER CONTROL Menu
•
IP Address. The LCD displays the printer IP Address for networked
printers.
Accented Char
Selects whether the accented characters are standard or tall. See Figure 24
for an example. Selecting tall will slow print speed and may cause the printer
to back up during printing.
Standard
Tall
Figure 24. Accented Characters
224
ADVANCED
USER
Menu
Postscript/PDF
Interpreter
ADVANCED USER Menu
* = Factory Default
If installed
2 Not available in PCL-II
3 Not available in LG or PCL-II
4
Available for OpenPrint products only.
5 For 1000 LPM models only.
6 For H-Series printers only.
7
For cabinet models, the default is 15 minutes.
1
ADVANCED
USER
(from page 73,
74, 75, 76, 77,
78, and 79)
SURE SCAN 4
PTX_SETUP
Option 2
See page 227.
Setup Parse
Enable*
Ignore
Disable
Setup SFCC
21h*
(1-FF hex)
Power
Stacker 1
Auto
Elevator 1
Enable*
Disable
Shuttle
Timeout
5 Seconds*
1-60 Seconds
Enable*
Disable
Slow Paper
Slew
Disable*
Enable
Hex Dump
Mode
Disable*
Enable
Auto
Locking
Disable*
Enable
Alarm
On*
Cont. Beep
Off
Power-up
State
Online*
Offline
Downloaded
Fonts 3
Enable*
Char Operations
Delete frm Flash Disable
Load from Flash
Save to Flash
Delete from RAM
Ld Char at Pwrup
Disable*
Enable
Set Operations
Delete frm Flash
Load from Flash
Save to Flash
Delete from RAM
Ld Set at PwrUp
Disable*
Enable
DBCS Download 6
Save to Flash
Delete DL Font.
Main File
System
Overwrite Files
Enable*
Disable
View File List
Delete Files
Flash Avail.
Flash Reclaimable
Copy to SD 1
Optimize&Reboot
Print File List
Power Saver
Time 7
PMD Fault
Set
Sharing 3
SD File
System 1
Overwrite Files
Enable*
Disable
View SD Files
Delete SD Files
SD Flash Avail.
Copy From SD
Print File List
Erase QCMC
Update QCMC
Pwr Save
Control
Enable*
Instant
Disable
5 seconds
10 seconds
15 seconds *
30 seconds
1 minute – 60 minutes
Disable*
Enable
Cancel
Key
Disable
Enable*
225
Chapter
4
ADVANCED USER Menu
* = Factory Default
1
If installed
2
Not available in PCL-II
3 Not available in LG or PCL-II
4
Available for OpenPrint products only.
5
For 1000 LPM models only.
6 For H-Series printers only.
ADVANCED
USER
(continued from
page 225)
Rcv. Status
Port
Automatic*
Serial
RBN Low
Warn @
Under 2%*
Under 5%
Under 10%
Under 20%
Under 30%
226
Ret. Status
Port
Set Lock
Key
Automatic*
Disable
E-NET Data Port
Serial
E-NET Stat Port
USB
IEEE 1284
RBN Low
Action
Warn & Continue*
Warn & Pause
Job Sel/
Typeface 6
Print
Hist. Log 6
120 DPI*
180 DPI
240 DPI
Job-Select On*
Typeface On
RBN End
Action
Ignore RBN End*
Stop At RBN End
Print
Energy 5
Standard*
PowerPrint
OCR Font
Density
Disp.
Intensity
2*
0-20
SURE SCAN Submenu
SURE SCAN Submenu
NOTE: Available for OpenPrint products only. For OpenPrint P8000
Standard Postscript/PDF and OpenPrint P8000 HD Postscript/PDF
firmware, the SURE SCAN menu is under the Advanced User menu
(see page 225).
* = Factory Default
1
1, 2
Available when Postscript/PDF is selected as the Active Emulation
on OpenPrint P8000 products.
3
Optimize
Barcode
Yes*
Test
No
Barcodes On
Page
Auto*
1, 2,...,20
Available for OpenPrint products only.
2
SURE SCAN
(from page 79)
Alignment
Left
Center*
Right
Display menu only.
Hor. Quiet
Zone
0.20 Inch*
(0.00 to 0.99 inch)
Ver. Erase
Zone
Quiet Zone
Fault
0.00 Inch*
Enable*
(0.00 to 0.99 inch) Disable
Update
PDF
Embedded Only*
Always
Bcodes
Optimized 3
xxxxxx 2
Optimize Barcode
Defines whether the barcode optimization feature is active.
•
•
•
Yes (factory default). Activates the barcode optimization feature.
No. Deactivates the barcode optimization feature.
Test. Boxes will print around all barcodes that are detected and replaced.
This provides a simple method to confirm that the software correctly
detects and replaces all the barcodes on any given form.
227
Chapter
4
ADVANCED USER Menu
Alignment
Defines how the optimized replacement barcode will be positioned with
regard to the original barcode position if no obstacles exist to this placement.
It defines the first attempted position of the replacement barcode. If the first
attempted position causes a replacement barcode to interfere with any other
form elements (text, graphics, or dots), the replacement barcode
automatically adjusts away from these interfering elements until requested
horizontal quiet zones are observed. Selections for this menu are as follows:
•
Left. The first attempted position of the leftmost bar of the replacement
barcode will be the same position as the leftmost bar of the original
barcode. For instance, if the replacement barcode is smaller than the
original barcode, it will be placed as follows:
Replacement Barcode
Original Barcode
If the replacement barcode is larger than the original barcode, the
replacement barcode will begin at the left edge of the original barcode
and expand beyond the right edge.
Replacement Barcode
Original Barcode
228
SURE SCAN Submenu
Any form elements (text, graphics, or dots) immediately to the right of the
original barcode can force this first attempted placement to be modified.
The replacement barcode will shift left to avoid obstacles on the right
provided that there are also no obstacles on the left.
Replacement Barcode
Here is
an
Quiet Zone obstacle
Distance (text)
(picket)
Original Barcode
•
Center (factory default). The first attempted position of the center bar of
the replacement barcode will be the same position as the center bar of
the original barcode.
If the replacement barcode is smaller than the original barcode, it will be
replaced as follows:
Replacement Barcode
Original Barcode
If the replacement barcode is longer than the original barcode, it will still
be centered, but it will extend beyond the end of the original barcode on
both the left and the right.
229
Chapter
4
ADVANCED USER Menu
Replacement Barcode
Original Barcode
If form elements interfere with this placement on the right or the left, the
barcode will automatically adjust away from these obstacles. Form
obstacles may force a center-aligned barcode to look left or right aligned.
For instance, in the below picture, a center-aligned barcode has text 0.2
inches away from the right edge of the original barcode. With a horizontal
quiet zone of 0.2 inches, the resulting replacement barcode position is
exactly the same regardless of whether center, right, or left alignment is
chosen. Regardless of the first attempted position, the barcode will need
to shift to the left until the horizontal quiet zone can be observed.
Replacement Barcode
Here is
an
obstacle
Quiet Zone (text)
Distance
(picket)
Original Barcode
230
SURE SCAN Submenu
•
Right. The first attempted position of the rightmost bar of the replacement
barcode will be the same position as the rightmost bar of the original
barcode.
For instance, if the replacement barcode is shorter than the original
barcode it will be placed as follows:
Replacement Barcode
Original Barcode
If the replacement barcode is larger than the original barcode, the
replacement barcode will end at the right edge of the original barcode and
extend past the left edge. Any form elements (text, graphics, or dots)
immediately to the left of the original barcode, however, can force this first
attempted placement to be modified. The replacement barcode will shift
right to avoid obstacles on the left provided that there are also no
obstacles on the right.
231
Chapter
4
ADVANCED USER Menu
Hor. Quiet Zone
This menu defines the quiet zones (empty areas) width before and after the
start/stop codes regardless of picket fence or ladder orientation. When
positioning the barcode, the quiet zone is taken into account when detecting
collisions with other elements (dots) on the form. If one of the horizontal quiet
zones is violated, the barcode will automatically shift to the left or right (for
picket fence orientation) or up or down (for ladder orientation) to remove the
quiet zone violation.
The width of the area can be defined between 0 and 0.99 inches in 0.01 inch
increments. The default is 0.20 inches. This feature ensures that the
replacement barcodes will be properly scanned.
Barcodes are
automatically adjusted
away from text (or other
Quiet Zone obstacles on the form)
distance
until the Hor. Quiet
(picket)
Zone distance is met.
Quiet Zone
distance
(ladder)
232
SURE SCAN Submenu
Ver. Erase Zone
This menu defines the area above and below the bars that will be erased,
regardless of picket fence or ladder orientation. It is used when the barcode
has extraneous data beyond the bars that need to be deleted as it is being
replaced.
The height of the area can be defined between 0 and 0.99 inches in 0.01 inch
increments. The default is 0 inches (no empty space). This feature can be
used to remove special attributes remainders of the original barcode such as
a guard bar or line that borders the top and bottom of the bars. It can also be
used to erase the original PDF if the user wants to force all PDFs to be
replaced (see Update PDF on page 234). The PDF occupies more than 1/6 of
an inch.
Vertical Erase Distance
Vertical Erase Distance
Erase
Area
(picket)
Vertical Erase Distance
Erase
Area
(ladder)
Quiet Zone Fault
This menu defines whether a fault must be reported on the front panel LCD if
the BCDOPT feature cannot print the replacement barcode without violating
the quiet zone as defined in the “Hor. Quiet Zone” menu, where the width of
the replacement barcode plus quiet zones is too large to fit the available white
space on the page.
•
Enable (factory default). If this fault occurs, reduce the quiet zone to see
if the barcode fits.
•
Disable. Quiet zone violations are not reported, but adjacent page
elements could be drawn too close to replacement barcodes and possibly
overlap.
233
Chapter
4
ADVANCED USER Menu
Update PDF
There are two distinct cases with barcode PDFs. In the first case, the PDF is
partially embedded in the barcode such that erasing the bars also erases the
PDF. In the second case, the PDF is printed entirely above or below the
barcode and is not disturbed by the barcode replacement.
Whenever the PDF is embedded in the barcode such that erasing the bars
also erases the PDF, the embedded PDF will be automatically detected and
replaced. An area surrounding the barcode will be erased to remove the
portions of the former PDF that extended beyond the bounds of the original
barcode. The erase area is shown in the figure below. Since embedded PDFs
are automatically replaced, the Update PDF menu option has no effect on this
type of PDF.
Erase
Erase
Area
Area
1/6””
1/6
1/6 ”
1/6 ”
When the PDF is printed above or below the barcode, the behavior will
depend on the Update PDF menu setting.
•
Embedded Only (factory default). Embedded PDFs will not be replaced.
This allows the user to keep the present PDF data and its font, etc.
•
Always. PDFs will always reprint. For instance, since the original PDF will
not be centered with respect to the replaced barcode, the user may want
to always replace the PDF. When set to Always, an extra 1/6” is erased to
remove the original PDF. If the original PDF is not fully erased, it is up to
the user to increase the Ver. Erase Zone setting such that the original
PDF will be completely erased prior to the replacement being printed.
Erase
Area
1/6 ”
234
SURE SCAN Submenu
Barcodes on Page
This setting defines the number of barcodes that must be detected on the
form. If the value is set to “Auto” (factory default), no particular number of
barcodes are required to be detected. If the value is set to a number between
1 to 20, then the number of barcodes set is required to be detected on each
form. If the printer detects fewer barcodes than the value set, the fault “x/y
BARCODES / Not Found” is declared. x represents the number of barcodes
not found, and y represents the Barcodes on Page value. Printing will not
continue until the user clears this fault.
Bcodes Optimized
This is a display menu that continuously counts the number of barcodes that
have been optimized since power-up. This statistic only resets to zero when
the printer is powered off. This menu can be used as a diagnostic to check the
number of barcodes optimized over a period of time or over a batch file.
PTX_SETUP Option
Selects the Special Function Control Code for the PTX_SETUP command
and functions.
•
•
Setup Parse. Disables or enables the PTX_SETUP command.
Setup SFCC. Allows you to choose the hex value of the ASCII character
you wish to use as the SFCC for the PTX_SETUP command. Valid hex
values are 01-FF. The default value is hex 21, which corresponds to the
“!” character.
Hex Dump Mode
A hex code printout (or hex dump) translates all incoming data to hexadecimal
equivalents. A hex dump lists each ASCII data character received from the
host computer, together with its corresponding two-digit hexadecimal code.
Hex dumps can be used to troubleshoot some types of printer data reception
problems. The options include:
•
•
Disable (factory default)
Enable
Figure 2 on page 293. shows a hex dump sample.
Power-Up State
•
•
Online (factory default). The printer powers up in the online state.
Offline. The printer powers up in the offline state.
NOTE: This option is not available in the PCL-II or LG emulation.
235
Chapter
4
ADVANCED USER Menu
Downloaded Fonts
Allows you to download a substitution table to replace any character in the
current character set with a different character in the same font.
The Downloaded Fonts menu applies to both LP+ Bitmaps and IGP Block
downloaded characters. For example, performing a Delete from Flash option
deletes both Bitmap and Block downloaded characters from flash memory.
•
Char Operations. Allows you to delete a character from flash, load a
character from flash, save a character to flash, and delete a character
from RAM.
•
Ld Char at Pwrup. Allows you to disable or enable loading a character at
power up.
•
Set Operations. Allows you to delete a character set from flash, load a
character set from flash, save a character set to flash, and delete a
character set from RAM.
•
Ld Set at PwrUp. Allows you to disable or enable loading a character set
at power up.
NOTE: This option is not available in the PCL-II or LG emulation.
•
DBCS Download. Allows you to save and delete downloadable DBCS
characters from flash.
•
Save to Flash. Saves the downloaded characters from the DRAM to
FLASH memory. These characters can be automatically reloaded when
the printer powers on. The saved file name is “dbcsdwn”. The characters
need to be in the DRAM prior to saving into FLASH memory by using any
download commands.
• Delete DL. Font. Deletes the “dbcsdwn” file. The downloaded
characters will no longer reside in FLASH memory on subsequent powerups.
PMD (Paper Motion Detection) Fault
CAUTION
•
Enable (factory default). In the event of a paper jam, an audible alarm
beeps, “CLEAR PAPER JAM” appears on the message display, and the
printer stops printing.
•
Disable. You should disable PMD only if special paper requires it.
Once PMD is disabled, paper motion is not monitored. If a paper jam
occurs, the printer ignores the condition and continues to print,
possibly causing damage to the printer.
Power Stacker
This parameter allows you to enable or disable the power paper stacker
(provided this option is installed).
236
SURE SCAN Submenu
Auto Elevator
This parameter exists only on printers with the power paper stacker installed.
The power stacker has a sensor which detects paper movement and raises
the stacker as the printed paper stack grows. If the printer has been printing
for three minutes continually and the sensor has not detected any growth in
the paper stack, the stacker raises itself 1/4 inch automatically.
•
Enable (factory default). The automatic elevator on the power stacker
operates normally.
•
Disable. The stacker does not raise automatically every three minutes
and is entirely dependent on the sensor. Disable is used with extremely
high-quality print jobs that take a long time to print.
Auto Locking
•
•
Disable (factory default). The ENTER key must be locked manually.
Enable. The printer automatically locks the ENTER key five minutes after
the last front panel key press.
Main File System
The Main File System refers to the flash resident on the P8000 controller.
•
Overwrite Files. Allows you to prevent flash files from being overwritten
by disabling the overwrite function.
•
View File List. Displays the list of flash files in the main file system. Press
the ENTER key to go into the submenu. Then press the UP or DOWN
keys to view the different file names and size.
•
Delete Files. Displays the list of flash files in the main file system. Press
the LEFT or RIGHT keys to select the desired file to delete. Pressing the
ENTER key deletes the file displayed on the control panel.
•
Flash Avail. The amount of flash available for the user to save or
download files into the main file system.
•
Flash Reclaimable. The amount of flash marked deleted, but cannot be
used until the Optimize&Reboot operation is performed.
•
Copy To SD. If the SD card is inserted, the section will allow the user to
copy selected files from the main file system to the SD card (root
directory).
•
Optimize&Reboot. Reclaims flash space from deleted flash files within
the main file system. After pressing ENTER, wait for the printer to reboot.
NOTE: When the Optimize&Reboot option is executed, the message,
“Optimizing Flash Files” does not display before printer rebooting
takes place.
•
IMPORTANT
Print File List. Prints a summary of the flash files stored in flash memory
and several statistics on Main File System usage.
Do not turn the printer off until it has completely rebooted and is either
back online or offline.
237
Chapter
4
ADVANCED USER Menu
SD File System
The SD File System menu appears if an SD card is inserted in the printer
before power-up. The SD File System applies only the SD card’s root
directory.
IMPORTANT
If you remove or insert the SD card after the printer is powered on, an
error will occur.
•
Overwrite Files. Prevents SD files from being overwritten by disabling
the overwrite function.
•
View SD Files. Displays the list of files on the SD card (root directory).
Press the ENTER key to go into the submenu, then press the UP or
DOWN keys to view the different SD file names and size.
•
Delete SD Files. Displays the list of SD files on the SD card (root
directory). Press the LEFT or RIGHT keys to select the desired file to
delete. Pressing the ENTER key deletes the file displayed on the control
panel.
•
SD Flash Avail. The amount of SD memory available for the user to save
or download files into the SD card.
•
Copy From SD. Copies selected files from the SD card (root directory) to
the Main File System.
•
Print File List. Prints a summary of the files stored on the SD card (root
directory) and several statistics on the SD File System usage.
•
Update QCMC. This menu can be used to update the configuration within
the QCMC image stored on the SD card (see Appendix E, “Quick Change
Memory Cartridge”).
•
Erase QCMC. This menu can be used to erase the QCMC image stored
on the SD card (see Appendix E, “Quick Change Memory Cartridge”).
Set Sharing
This option allows character sets to be shared between the active LP+
protocol and the active IGP emulation.
Changing characters sets in LP+ causes the active IGP to change to the
same character set if the selected set exists in IGP. If the active IGP has no
access to the selected set, no changes are made. Selecting a new character
set in the active IGP causes the LP+ to change to the same character set if
the selected character set exists in the active LP+ protocol. Not all sets are
shared between emulations in the Standard group of character sets. As a
result, selecting a set in the Standard group of LP+ or IGP emulation may or
may not cause the other emulation to have the same set.
NOTE: The Set Sharing front panel option has no effect on the LP+ build.
The option only applies to the builds with IGP.
This option is not available in the PCL-II or LG emulation.
Shuttle Timeout
The amount of time the shuttle continues moving after no data is received. If
your host is slow, setting the number to a higher value will prevent the printer
from spending time shuttling up and down between data bursts.
238
SURE SCAN Submenu
Slow Paper Slew
•
Disable (factory default). The paper will slew and stack paper at
maximum speed.
•
Enable. Causes the paper to stack at a slower rate. This ensures that
certain forms will stack neatly.
Alarm
•
On (factory default). An audible alarm sounds (3 beeps) when a fault
occurs, such as a paper jam.
•
Cont. Beep. A continuous audible alarm sounds when a fault occurs,
which can be stopped by pressing CLEAR.
•
Off. No audible alarm will sound.
Power Saver Time
The time interval you specify for this parameter sets the amount of idle time
before the printer goes into Power Saver mode. When Instant is chosen, the
printer goes into Power Saver mode as soon as it is able to stop the shuttle
properly. The time allotted to perform this function depends upon the shuttle
timeout value which can be set in the menu.
NOTE: Power Saver Mode will not be shown on the control panel even
though the function still exists. Sending a print job to the printer will
turn off Power Saver mode.
Pwr Save Control
Allows you to enable or disable the Power Save mode.
•
•
Enable (factory default). Allows you to enable the Power Save mode.
Disable. Allows you to disable the Power Save mode.
Cancel Key
•
•
Disable
Enable (factory default). The CANCEL key may be used to clear all data
in the print buffer without printing any of the data.
Rcv. Status Port
This option defines the interface being used to receive the emulation status
command.
•
Automatic (factory default). When selected, the status command is sent
to the printer with the print data through the active host interface.
•
Serial. When selected, the status command is sent to the printer through
the serial interface regardless of the active host interface.
239
Chapter
4
ADVANCED USER Menu
Ret. Status Port
This option selects the port for the Return Status Commands (i.e., ~STATUS
for PGL) to send the status data back to the Host.
The options are Automatic (factory default), Serial, USB, E-NET Stat Port,
IEEE 1284, Disable, and E-NET Data Port.
Set Lock Key
Normally, to lock or unlock the printer menu, the UP and DOWN keys are
pressed at the same time. The Set Lock Key parameter lets you choose
different keys to lock or unlock the printer menu. You may choose almost any
group of keys as the new lock and unlock keys. You cannot use the ENTER
key or any key combinations which are already used for another function.
There is no limit to how many keys you can select.
To set the new lock key, follow these steps:
1. Work your way through the configuration menu until the display reads
“Set Lock Key” (follow the menu structure on page 225).
2. Press ENTER. The display reads, “Select a new lock key.”
3. Press the combination of keys you want to be the new lock key. Make
sure you press all keys selected at the same time.
4. If the selection is valid, the display will read, “Enter the new lock key
again.” If the selection is invalid, the display will read, “Invalid key
selection.” Return to step 2 and start over.
5. Press the same combination of keys a second time. If the new lock key
combination is entered again correctly, the display will read, “Lock key
has been changed.” If it was entered incorrectly, the display will read
“Verification failed.” Start over at step 2.
6. After entering the new lock combination successfully, press the ONLINE
key to put the printer back online.
NOTE: The new lock combination will remain even if the printer is powered
off and back on.
Job Sel/Typeface
NOTE: For H-Series printers only.
This option allows the user to change the printer’s active configuration or
typeface in Offline mode.
•
Job-Select On (factory default). Allows the user to change the printer’s
active configuration.
•
Typeface On. Allows the user to change the printer’s typeface.
Print Hist. Log
NOTE: For H-Series printers only.
Checks the status of user downloaded font files in the build.
240
SURE SCAN Submenu
OCR Font Density
Determines the horizontal print density for OCR-A and OCR-B fonts. A higher
density will print higher quality OCR fonts at the cost of a lower print speed.
The vertical density is always 144 DPI.
•
•
•
120 DPI (Factory default)
180 DPI
240 DPI
NOTE: The maximum density for the IPDS emulation is 180 DPI.
RBN Low Warn @
This option allows the user to select the Ribbon Life value at which point the
printer will declare a ribbon low condition and display the "RIBBON UNDER
XX% / Change RBN Soon" warning message. The default is Under 2%. See
“RBN Low Action” below for details of how the printer behaves once a ribbon
low condition is reached.
The values are Under 2% (factory default), Under 5%, Under 10%, Under
20%, and Under 30%.
RBN Low Action
This menu determines how the printer behaves once a ribbon low condition is
reached.
•
Warn & Continue (factory default). Once a ribbon low condition is
reached the printer beeps and displays the "RIBBON UNDER XX% /
Change RBN Soon" warning message. Printing will continue without
interruption. The warning message can be cleared by pressing the
ONLINE/Clear button, however the message will persist again in two
minutes. This action will continue until a ribbon out (ribbon life reaches
0%) condition occurs.
•
Warn & Pause. This setting is similar to the Warn & Continue selection
with one exception. When a ribbon low condition is reached the printer will
still display the "RIBBON UNDER XX%/Change RBN Soon" warning
message, however the printer will stop printing. This is meant to get the
user’s attention. To resume printing the user must press the ONLINE/
Clear key.
NOTE: Printing will only stop on the first occurrence of a ribbon low condition.
Once the user clears the warning message, subsequent warnings will
display the warning message but printing will continue.
RBN End Action
This menu allows the user to override the normal ribbon low warning and
ribbon out conditions.
•
Stop At RBN End (factory default). When this factory default option is
selected, the printer displays a warning message when a ribbon low
condition is reached and display a ribbon out fault when ribbon life
reaches 0%.
241
Chapter
4
ADVANCED USER Menu
•
Ignore RBN End. When this menu option is selected, it overrides the
ribbon low and ribbon out conditions, i.e. no warning or fault messages is
displayed and printing continues even after ribbon life reaches 0%.
However, once the ribbon life reaches an excess wear condition as
indicated by the fault message "EXCESS RBN WEAR / Install New RBN",
printing will stop and the user must install a new ribbon before printing
can resume.
NOTE: The excess ribbon wear is set below the "Lighter -10" Ribbon End
Point setting.
Print Energy (1000 lpm only)
This menu allows the user to optimize energy or impact of the hammers when
printing single or multipart forms.
•
Standard (factory default). When this factory default option is selected,
the printing energy is optimized for normal jobs.
•
PowerPrint. When this option is enabled, printing is optimized for
multi-part forms.
Disp. Intensity
This menu controls the intensity of the LCD display. The range is 0-20 and the
default setting is 2.
242
DIAGNOSTICS
Menu
SURE SCAN Submenu
DIAGNOSTICS Menu
* = Factory Default
1
If Ethernet adapter is present
2 Not available in PCL-II or LG
3
Not available in LG
4
If a Feature File exists.
5 Values for OpenPrint P8000 HD printers.
6
If the network is enabled.
DIAGNOSTICS
(from page 73,
74, 75, 76, 77,
78 and 79.)
Printer Tests
Test
Width
Shift Recycle*
All E’s
E’s + TOF
All H’s
All Underlines
All Black
Shuttle Slow
Shuttle Fast
Shuttle Only
Phase Printer
Paperout Adj.
Burnin Test
Print Error Log 3
Clear Error Log 3
Adapter Test1
Ethernet Test 6
Acoustics 2
Demo
Dice 5
Prnt Ribbon Log
Checker
Weld Patch Log
Novram Err Log
Full Width*
80 col.
Software
Build
Feature
File 4
SW P/N + Ver
Phase
Value
50*
1-2000
Paper Out
Dots
40 dots*
(4-76)
System
Memory
128 Megabytes
76 dots *, 5
(40 - 112) 5
P/N of File
Shuttle
Type
xxxx
Auto
Dump
Disable*
Enable
Print
Statistics
On: x.x Hrs.
Print: x.x Hrs
Print Strokes:
xxxxxx
Print Lines:
xxxxxx
11 inch Pages:
xxx
Power on Pages
xxx
Printer
Mgmt
See page 247.
243
Chapter
4
DIAGNOSTICS Menu
Printer Tests
These tests are used to check the print quality and operation of the printer.
NOTE: Your authorized service representative will typically run the tests.
They are described in more detail in the Maintenance Manual.
244
•
Shift Recycle. A sliding alphanumeric pattern which identifies missing or
malformed characters, improper vertical alignment, or vertical
compression.
•
All E's. A pattern of all uppercase E's which identifies missing characters,
misplaced dots, smeared characters, improper phasing problems, or light/
dark character variations.
•
E's + TOF. A pattern of all E's followed by a form feed to the next page
top-of-form, which identifies paper motion or feeding problems.
•
All H's. A pattern of all uppercase H's used to detect missing characters,
misplaced dots, smeared characters, or improper phasing.
•
All Underlines. An underline pattern useful for identifying hammer bank
misalignment.
•
All Black. A condition where all dot positions are printed, creating a solid
black band.
•
Shuttle Slow. Verifies proper operation by exercising shuttle and ribbon
motion at low speed.
•
Shuttle Fast. Verifies proper operation by exercising shuttle and ribbon
motion at fast speed.
•
•
Shuttle Only. Exercises only the shuttle at fast speed.
•
Paperout Adj.. Verifies the current Paper Out Dots setting, which
determines where the last line of text will print when there is a paper out
condition. Setting this parameter correctly prevents printing on the platen.
•
•
Burnin Test. Reserved for factory use.
•
•
Clear Error Log. Clears entries in the error log.
•
•
•
•
Acoustics. A particular test pattern that is used to measure acoustics.
Phase Printer. Checks for wavy print. The initial phase value is set in the
factory. Run the test and check the quality. (The phase value prints on the
left margin.) If the print looks too wavy, change the Phase Value
parameter while the test is running. While the phase printer test runs,
press the DOWN key. To change the value, press the PREV or NEXT key
until the desired value displays and then press ENTER.
Print Error Log. Prints the current log of errors. Most non-routine faults
(ribbon stall, voltage faults) are stored in the error log.
Ethernet Test. Prints the Ethernet statistics stored on the Ethernet (if
present).
Demo. Demonstration of various print attributes.
Dice 5. Pattern used to measure print density.
Prnt Ribbon Log. Prints log of cartridge installed in the printer.
DIAGNOSTICS Menu
SURE SCAN Submenu
•
Checker. For factory use. This pattern helps identify marginal printhead
elements, quality of edge sharpness, and uneven print quality.
•
Weld Patch Log. Prints log times for ribbon starts, welds, and ribbon
stops.
•
Novram Err Log. Prints detailed information about the most recent
Novram related failure that has occurred. It is useful when the front panel
reports “BAD NVM” or “ILL NVM” error types. Contact the Customer
Solutions Center and provide this information if such an error occurs.
Test Width
Set this parameter to run the self-tests at full width or 80 columns.
Phase Value
During the Phasing Test, this value changes until printing is phased.
The range is between 1-2000.
Paper Out Dots
CAUTION
Only authorized service representatives should set this parameter.
This parameter is used to adjust the paper out distance from the perforation;
you can specify where the last line on the page will print when there is a paper
out condition. Setting this parameter correctly prevents printing on the platen.
System Memory
Displays the amount of RAM installed.
Print Statistics
You can view various printer statistics and refer to them for preventive
maintenance purposes. Printer statistics accumulate continuously; they do
not reset when you turn off the printer. All of the printer statistics are set to
zero at the factory after burn-in testing.
•
On. The cumulative time in hours the printer has been powered on. The
range is 0 to 2,386,092 hours.
•
Print. The cumulative time in hours the printer has actually been printing.
The range is 0 to 2,386,092 hours.
•
Print Strokes. The cumulative number of back-and-forth shuttle strokes
the printer has printed during normal printer operation. The range is 0 to
2,147,483,647 shuttle strokes.
•
Print Lines. The cumulative number of lines the printer has printed. The
range is 0 to 2,147,483,647 print lines.
•
11 inch Pages. The cumulative number of pages the printer has printed.
The range in print pages is 0 to 2,147,483,647 total inches of paper
movement divided by 11.
•
Poweron Pages. The number of pages the printer has printed since
power-up.
245
Chapter
4
DIAGNOSTICS Menu
Software Build
Displays the part number and version of the printer firmware.
Feature File
Displays the part number of the file if one has been downloaded to the printer.
Shuttle Type
Displays the type of shuttle installed, i.e. 2000s, 1500, 1000, 500, or high
definition.
Auto Dump
•
•
Disable (factory default).
Enable. When a printer get ‘E03x’ type of message on the operator panel,
a dump file will be automatically created and store in flash as file
“autodbg1.dbg” or “autodbg2.dbg” in the printer file system. This file can
be uploaded to the host using the PrintNet Enterprise Suite application.
Upon receipt of this file, it should be sent to Printronix Customer Support
for review and evaluation.
Printer Mgmt
Refer to the Printer Mgmt menu on page 247.
246
PrinterSCAN
MgmtSubmenu
Menu
SURE
Printer Mgmt Menu
Printer Mgmt
* = Factory Default
Only available if PNE Port is set to Ethernet.
(from page 243)
1
PNE Port
Ethernet*
USB
Disable
Serial
Mgmt Protocol
UCP
PXML*
PNE Port
Number 1
3001*
1025 - 65535
PNE Port
Timeout 1
100 Seconds*
1-255 Seconds
Status Port
Numb
3002*
1025 - 65535
Mgmt Port
Number
3007*
1025 - 65535
PNE Port
This menu selects which port the printer expects PNE to connect to, via
Ethernet or USB. The factory default is Ethernet. If the network is not enabled,
the default is Disable.
Mgmt Protocol
Since PXML and UCP management protocols share the same Ethernet Port,
only one can be active at a time. This menu selects the active Management
Protocol Interface, either PXML or UCP. The factory default is PXML.
PNE Port Number
This menu selects the port number the printer expects the PNE to connect
through. The factory default is 3001 and the range is from 1025 to 65535.
PNE Port Timeout
If the PNE has not communicated to the printer within a timeout period, the
PNE session closes. The factory default is 100 seconds. The range is from 1
to 255 seconds.
Status Port Numb
This menu selects the port number the printer sends the emulation status.
The factory default is 3001 and the range is from 1025 to 65535.
Mgmt Port Number
This menu selects the port number the printer expects the PXML or UCP to
connect through. The factory default is 3007 and the range is from 1025 to
65535.
247
Chapter
248
4
Printer Mgmt Menu
5
Interfaces
Overview
This chapter describes the host interfaces provided with the printer. The
printer interface is the point where the data line from the host computer plugs
into the printer. The interface processes all communications signals and data
to and from the host computer. Plus, with the Auto Switching feature, you can
configure the printer to accept several interfaces at the same time (see “Auto
Switching Submenu” on page 94).
IMPORTANT
To comply with Electromagnetic Compatibility (EMC) regulatory
requirements all electrical signal interface cables connected to this
printer must be of a minimal quality level, be of the correct length, and
be properly installed.
The RS-232 port and parallel port interface cables must meet the
following specifications:
•
The cable design must be double shielded with a copper braid over
an aluminum mylar foil and not just a conductive foil spiral wrapped
around a drain wire.
•
The shield must terminate coaxially (360 degrees) to a metal
connector housing and not be terminated by just a simple wire lead.
•
•
The cable length, including connectors, must be 3 meters or less.
The cable connector anchor screws must be securely seated into
the printer receptor hardware.
For reference purposes only, two specific Centronics parallel port
cables that have been tested and found to comply with these
requirements are Belkin® part number F2A046-10 and Primelogic® part
number PLU 2823224. Other electrically equivalent cables are
acceptable.
This chapter describes the interfaces provided with the printer.
Standard Host Interfaces:
•
•
High Speed Serial Port (RS-232)
USB 2.0 Universal Serial Bus
249
Chapter
5
Overview
Optional Host Interfaces:
•
•
•
Centronics Parallel
IEEE 1284 parallel bidirectional
Ethernet 10/100BaseT
In addition to descriptions for the multi-line interfaces, this chapter also
provides instructions for configuration of terminating resistors for the parallel
interfaces.
Optinoal
Parallel I/O
Connection
Serial Port
(RS-232)
5
4
9
3
8
2
7
1
6
Debug Port
USB 2.0
Ethernet
10/100 BaseT
Figure 1. Cabinet Model Interface Connectors
Optinoal
Parallel I/O
Connection
Serial Port (RS-232)
5
3
4
8
2
7
1
6
184951a
9
USB 2.0
Ethernet
10/100 BaseT
Debug Port
Figure 2. Pedestal Model Interface Connectors
250
RS-232 Serial Interface
NOTE: The RS-232 serial interface circuit characteristics are compatible with
the Electronic Industry Association Specifications EIA-232-E and
EIA-422-B.
The RS-232 serial interface enables the printer to operate with bit serial
devices that are compatible with an RS-232 controller. The input serial data
transfer rate (in baud) is selectable from the printer's control panel. Baud rates
of 600, 1200, 2400, 4800, 9600, 19200, 38400, 57600, and 115200 baud
rates are available.
The length of the data cable from the host computer to the printer must not
exceed 50 feet (15 meters) for RS-232.
Table 1. Standard 500, 1000, 1500, and 2000 lpm Models
RS-232 Serial Interface Connector Pin Assignments
Input Signals
Output Signals
Miscellaneous
Signal
Pin
Signal
Pin
Signal
Pin
Receive Data (RD)
3
Transmit Status & Control
Data (TD)
2
Chassis Ground
1
Clear To Send (CTS)
5
Request To Send (RTS)
4
Signal Ground
7
Data Set Ready (DSR)
6
Data Terminal Ready (DTR)
20
Data Carrier Detect (DCD)
8
Table 2. RS-232 Serial Interface Connector Pin Assignments
Input Signals
Output Signals
Miscellaneous
Signal
Pin
Signal
Pin
Signal
Pin
Receive Data (RD)
2
Transmit Status & Control
Data (TD)
3
Chassis/Signal Ground
5
Clear To Send (CTS)
8
Request To Send (RTS)
7
Data Set Ready (DSR)
6
Data Terminal Ready (DTR)
4
Data Carrier Detect (DCD)
1
251
Chapter
5
USB
Receive Data (RD). Serial data stream to the printer.
Transmit Data (TD). Serial data stream from the printer for transmitting status
and control information to the host. Subject to protocol selection.
Request To Send (RTS). Control signal from the printer. Subject to
configuration.
Clear To Send (CTS). Status signal to the printer indicating the host is ready
to receive data/status signals from the printer.
Data Set Ready (DSR). Status signal to the printer indicating the host is in a
ready condition.
Data Carrier Detect (DCD). Status signal to the printer. The ON condition is
required for the printer to receive data.
Data Terminal Ready (DTR). Control signal from the printer. Subject to
configuration.
USB
Menus
The Universal Serial Bus (USB) port is part of Auto Switching and is active
when the Host Interface menu is set to Auto Switching. It can also be selected
as the only Host Interface under the Host Interface menu by selecting USB.
A top level USB Port menu with two submenus is also available:
252
•
Buffer Size in K. The input buffer size used by the USB port. The range
is from 1 to 16. The default is 16.
•
Timeout. The Hotport Timeout value used to determine when the port is
inactive. The range is from 1 to 60 seconds. The default is 10 seconds.
Centronics Parallel Interface
Table 3. Centronics Interface Connector Pin Assignments
Input Signals
Output Signals
Miscellaneous
Signal
Pin
Signal
Pin
Signal
Pin
DATA LINE 1
Return
2
20
ACKNOWLEDGE
Return
10
28
CHASSIS GROUND
17
DATA LINE 2
Return
3
21
ONLINE
Return
13
28
GROUND
30
DATA LINE 3
Return
4
22
FAULT
Return
32
29
Spares
14
DATA LINE 4
Return
5
23
PAPER EMPTY
Return
12
28
No Connection
34,35,
36
DATA LINE 5
Return
6
24
BUSY
Return
11
29
+5 Volts
18
DATA LINE 6
Return
7
25
DATA LINE 7
Return
8
26
DATA LINE 8
Return
9
27
DATA STROBE
Return
1
19
PAPER INSTRUCTION
Return
15
29
PRIME
Return
31
30
The length of the data cable from the host computer to the printer must not
exceed 15 feet (5 meters).
253
Chapter
5
Centronics Parallel Interface
Centronics Parallel Interface Signals
Data Lines 1 through 8. Provides eight standard or inverted levels from the
host that specify character data, plot data, or a control code. Data Line 8
allows access to the extended ASCII character set. You may enable or
disable this line via the Data Bit 8 parameter on the Centronics submenu (see
page 98).
Data Strobe. Carries a low true, 100 ns minimum pulse from the host that
clocks data into the printer.
Acknowledge. A low true pulse from the printer indicating the character or
function code has been received and the printer is ready for the next data
transfer.
Online. A high true level from the printer to indicate the printer is ready for
data transfer and the ONLINE key on the control panel has been activated.
When the printer is in online mode, it may accept data from the host.
Paper Empty (PE). A high true level from the printer to indicate the printer is
in a paper empty or paper jam fault.
Busy. A high true level from the printer to indicate the printer cannot receive
data.
Prime. A high true level from the host to indicate the printer should perform a
warm start (printer is reset to the power-up configuration values).
Paper Instruction (PI). Carries a CVFU signal from the host with the same
timing and polarity as the data line.
Fault. A low true level from the printer indicates a printer fault.
254
Compatibility Mode
IEEE 1284 Parallel Interface
The 1284 supports three operating modes, which are determined by
negotiation between the printer and the host.
Compatibility Mode
This mode provides compatibility with Centronics-like host I/O (see Table 4).
Data is transferred from the host to the printer in 8-bit bytes over the data
lines.
Compatibility Mode can be combined with Nibble and Byte Modes to provide
bidirectional communication.
Nibble Mode
Eight bits equals one byte. When a byte of data is sent to the printer, the eight
bits are sent over eight data lines.
Some devices cannot send data over their eight data lines. To bypass this,
the 1284 permits data to be sent as half a byte over four status lines. (Half a
byte equals one nibble.) Two sequential four-bit nibbles are sent over the
lines.
Data is transferred from printer to host in four-bit nibbles over the status lines,
and the host controls the transmission.
Byte Mode
The printer and host send data to each other along eight data lines (one bit
per line).
If bidirectional communication is supported by the printer and the host, the
host will take control of the data transfer.
255
Chapter
5
IEEE 1284 Parallel Interface
Signals
Table 4 lists each of the signals associated with the corresponding pins on the
1284 interface. Descriptions of the signals follow.
Table 4. 1284 Signals
Type of Mode
Pin
Source of Data
Compatible
1
Host
nStrobe
2
Host/Printer
Data 1 (LSB)
3
Host/Printer
Data 2
4
Host/Printer
Data 3
5
Host/Printer
Data 4
6
Host/Printer
Data 5
7
Host/Printer
Data 6
8
Host/Printer
Data 7
9
Host/Printer
Data 8 (MSB)
10
Printer
11
Byte
HostClk
Host/Clk
nAck
PtrClk
PtrClk
Printer
Busy
PtrBusy
PtrBusy
12
Printer
PError
AckDataReq
AckDataReq
13
Printer
Select
Xflag
Xflag
14
Host
nAutoFd
Host Busy
HostAck
15
Not Defined
16
Logic Grid
17
Chassis Grid
18
256
Nibble
Printer
Peripheral Logic High
19
Signal Ground (nStrobe)
20
Signal Ground (Data 1)
21
Signal Ground (Data 2)
22
Signal Ground (Data 3)
23
Signal Ground (Data 4)
24
Signal Ground (Data 5)
25
Signal Ground (Data 6)
Signals
Table 4. 1284 Signals (continued)
Type of Mode
Pin
Source of Data
Compatible
Nibble
Byte
26
Signal Ground (Data 7)
27
Signal Ground (Data 8)
28
Signal Ground (PError, Select, nAck)
29
Signal Ground (Busy, nFault)
30
Signal Ground (nAutoFd, nSelectIn, nInit)
31
Host
nInit
32
Printer
NFault
33
Not Defined
34
Not Defined
35
Not Defined
36
Host
nSelectIn
nDataAvail
aDataAvail
1284 Active
1284 Active
NOTE: The length of the data cable from the host computer to the printer
should not exceed 32 feet (10 meters).
Host Clock / nWrite. Driven by host. Data transferred from host to printer.
When printer sends data, two types are available. If Nibble mode, signal is set
high. If Byte mode, signal is set low.
Data 1 through Data 8. These pins are host-driven in Compatibility mode and
bidirectional in Byte mode. They are not used in Nibble mode. Data 1 is the
least significant bit; Data 8 is the most significant bit.
Printer Clock / Peripheral Clock / Interrup. Driven by the printer. A signal
from the printer indicating the character or function code has been received
and the printer is ready for the next data transfer.
Printer Busy / Peripheral Acknowledge / nWait. Driven by the printer.
Indicates the printer cannot receive data. (Data bits 4 and 8 in Nibble mode.)
Acknowledge Data Request / nAcknowledge Reverse. Driven by the
printer. Indicates the printer is in a fault condition. (Data bits 3 and 7 in Nibble
mode.)
Xflag. Driven by the printer. A high true level indicating the printer is ready for
data transfer and the printer is on line. (Data bits 2 and 6 in Nibble mode.)
Host Busy / Host Acknowledge / NDStrobe. Driven by the host. Activates
auto-line feed mode.
Peripheral Logic High. Driven by the printer. When the line is high, the
printer indicates all of its signals are in a valid state. When the line is low, the
printer indicates its power is off or its signals are in an invalid state.
nReverse Request. Driven by the host. Resets the interface and forces a
return to Compatibility mode idle phase.
257
Chapter
5
Ethernet
nData Available / nPeripheral Request. Driven by the printer. Indicates the
printer has encountered an error. (Data bits 1 and 5 in Nibble mode.)
1284 Active / nAStrobe. Driven by the host. A peripheral device is selected.
Host Logic High—Driven by the host. When set to high, the host indicates all
of its signals are in a valid state. When set to low, the host indicates its power
is off or its signals are in an invalid state.
nInit —Resets init interface from the host.
Ethernet
Refer to the Integrated Network Interface User’s Manual for detailed
information on the ethernet interface.
258
6
Reprogramming the
Security Key
Reprogramming the Security Key
The security key on the PSA3 controller board can be reprogrammed with a
Software Program Exchange (SPX) module. The SPX is an intelligent module
that plugs into the debug port on the back of the P8000. The SPX is used only
once; it automatically overwrites itself after successfully reprogramming a
security key. This allows the end user or a service technician to enable
features such as new emulations without having to remove covers and install
a new security key on the controller board.
The SPX is used at power-up only and is not left in the printer during normal
operation. Because it is a single-use disposable item the user is not required
to return it to the vendor or manufacturer.
How to Program the Security Key
1. Power off the printer.
2. On cabinet models, open the rear door. On pedestal models, refer to
Figure 1 to locate the debug port at the rear of the printer.
3. Insert the SPX into the debug port as shown.
259
Chapter
6
Reprogramming the Security Key
A
A
Debug Port
184567a
SPX
Figure 1. Inserting The SPX into the Debug Port
4. Power on the printer. The printer will begin its boot-up sequence.
5. When the printer detects a valid SPX, the control panel displays:
“NEW SPX DETECTED
PRESS ENTER”
NOTE: If an error message displays, find the message in the Message List in
Chapter 8 and follow the troubleshooting instructions.
6. Press the ENTER key to activate the reprogramming sequence. The
display will read:
“PROGRAMMING. PLEASE WAIT.”
7. When the security key is reprogrammed, the display will read:
“UPGRADED - REMOVE SPX
Downld code if needed”
8. Remove the SPX from the debug port at the rear of the printer.
9. Press the ENTER key. The printer will reboot itself and you may resume
normal printing.
10. You may need to download a new program file to use the new feature.
11. You may need to set additional menu parameters for any new features
that have been added or enabled.
260
7
Downloading Firmware
There is 256 MB of FLASH memory on the controller board. The printer
firmware which includes printer control languages (the “emulations”), the
engine control, and printer operating system software are loaded into FLASH
memory at the factory, but there are occasions when you may have to load
this software:
•
•
•
Firmware upgrade to a newer level
Changing to a different firmware (emulation) type
Replacing a controller or reloading firmware if FLASH becomes corrupt.
Different firmware types may be included on a CD-ROM for printer upgrades.
The target firmware type should be copied to a computer’s hard disk. From
there, you can employ one of the various download methods presented in this
section. Downloading firmware can be accomplished through any host IO
installed on the printer, but may not be valid for all methods.
NOTE: The target firmware must be consistent with the options present in the
controller Security Key. Otherwise, the firmware download will be
prevented.
With exception to the manual two-key and manual three-key powerup sequences, downloading new firmware does not require the user
to put the printer into any special mode. Rather, most downloading
methods are employed when the printer is ONLINE and ready to
receive data. This makes the download procedure easy.
FLASH is used to store the firmware, but it also contains a file system that
holds System and User Flash Files. User Flash Files consist of downloaded
fonts, logos, forms, setup files, feature files, CST files, and files that are
specific to the user’s setup or application. These files are either preserved or
deleted based on the download method used as shown in Table 1 on
page 262.
IMPORTANT
Regardless of download method, any saved configurations will be
erased. Before starting a download procedure, be sure that you have
printed or saved configurations on your host computer so they can be
restored after the download process is complete.
261
Chapter
7
Firmware File Types (.prg) and (.exe)
Table 1. Firmware Download Methods
Firmware Download Method
File Type(s)
User FLASH
Files
Web Page (Ethernet only). User needs the network option
installed, a browser, and know the IP address.
FILENAME.prg
Preserved
Windows Driver (any host IO). When the Windows Driver
is installed, downloading firmware can be done easily
through the About/Help tab.
FILENAME.prg
Preserved
Automatic download (any host IO). Using the
FILENAME.exe, firmware can be downloaded from a
Windows Command Prompt without having to manually put
the printer into download mode.
FILENAME.exe
Preserved
Manual two-key download (any host IO). This two-key
(ADVANCE+CANCEL) power-up sequence puts the printer
into download mode. Firmware can be loaded through any
host IO port.
FILENAME.prg
FILENAME.exe
Preserved
Manual three-key download (USB or Parallel). This
three-key power-up sequence should be used in situations
in which a new controller is installed, the program in FLASH
is corrupt, or a different firmware type will be installed.
Firmware must be loaded via USB or parallel (if installed).
FILENAME.prg
FILENAME.exe
Deleted
PrintNet Enterprise (Ethernet only). User must install the
PrintNet Enterprise application from the PrintNet CD. This
is the most versatile and powerful method to upgrade
printers but requires your computer can run Java™
programs.
For a detailed description, refer
to the PrintNet Ethernet User's
Manual.
Firmware File Types (.prg) and (.exe)
Using firmware with an .exe extension FILENAME.exe is convenient.
However, firmware with the .exe extension may not be available in all
situations. Download methods described in Table 1 which require the .prg
extension, FILENAME.prg, is required (e.g., Windows Drivers and Web
Page).
The FILENAME.prg file can be extracted from the FILENAME.exe file by
executing the command in a Windows Command Prompt session:
FILENAME<Enter>
This will extract the FILENAME.prg file in the same directory where
FILENAME.exe was executed. For example, executing 123456.exe in the
directory C:\download will generate a file C:\download\123456.prg.
IMPORTANT
262
Be sure to copy the FILENAME.exe file to your computer’s local drive
before executing commands in the Windows Command Prompt.
Web Page Download
NOTE: This download method requires firmware with the .prg extension
FILENAME.prg.
1. Make sure the printer is powered up, in ONLINE mode, and that the
Ethernet cable is connected.
2. Get the IP address from the front panel (under Network Setup in the
menus).
3. Enter the printer’s IP address in your browser (e.g., http://10.224.5.21).
4. When prompted for a user name and password, enter “root” for user
name and click OK.
5. Click “System” in the Configuration box.
Figure 1. System Configuration Upgrade
6. Click the “Upgrade” button.
263
Chapter
7
Web Page Download
7. Browse to the directory or enter FILENAME.prg in the “File to upload”
field and click “Upgrade”. A Warning message opens.
Figure 2. Uploading Firmware File for Upgrade
8. Click “Ok” to continue. After a few minutes, you are prompted to reboot.
9. Click “Yes”.
Figure 3. Confirm Reboot
10. Wait until the printer is finished upgrading firmware.
Figure 4. Waiting for Firmware Upgrade Completion
11. When the Web Page is redirected, the download process in complete.
264
Windows Driver Download
NOTE: This download method requires firmware in the form FILENAME.prg.
1. Make sure the printer is powered up, in the ONLINE mode and that
desired host IO cables are connected.
2. Install the Windows Driver 2000/XP/Server 2003/Server 2008/Vista/
Windows 7/Windows 8 on the Starter Kit CD before continuing.
Alternatively, drivers can be found on the
http://www.printronix.com/products/drivers.aspx website.
3. Once the Windows Driver is installed on the PC, right-click the printer
driver and select Properties.
4. Click the About/Help tab to access the software download option.
5. Click the Firmware Update button as in Figure 5.
Figure 5. Updating Firmware
6. Enter the full path and location to the printer software.
For example, c:\download\FILENAME.prg where c:\download is the
directory where FILENAME.prg resides.
7. Click OK to send the software to the printer. To abort this operation, click
Cancel.
8. When the new software has successfully loaded into flash memory and
the printer has reset itself, the process is complete.
265
Chapter
7
Automatic Download (.exe)
Automatic Download (.exe)
NOTE: This download method requires firmware in the form FILENAME.exe.
The firmware can be downloaded without requiring the user to
manually put the printer into download mode.
1. Make sure the printer is powered up, in ONLINE mode, and that the
applicable host IO cables are connected.
2. Navigate to the directory where the target firmware resides. If the target
firmware is on the CD, insert the printer emulation software CD into your
computer’s CD drive.
NOTE: The target firmware must be in the format FILENAME.exe where the
FILENAME is a six digit number with the .exe extension
(e.g., 123456.exe).
IMPORTANT
For USB connections, the Windows Driver must be installed.
3. Install the Windows Driver 2000/XP/Server 2003/Server 2008/Vista/
Windows 7/Windows 8 on the Starter Kit CD before continuing.
Alternatively, drivers can be found on the http://www.printronix.com/
products/drivers.aspx website. During the installation, make sure to share
the printer when prompted and record the “Share name”.
Figure 6. Selecting to Share the Printer
266
IMPORTANT
For USB connections, the printer must have a “Share name”
established.
4. The “Share name” will be needed when executing the FILENAME.exe
command. This should be accomplished during installation, but can be
verified at any time. Select the driver, right-click the mouse button and
select “Printer Properties”. Click the “Sharing” tab, make sure the “Share
this printer” box is checkmarked, and enter the “Share name”.
Figure 7. Setting Printer Properties Sharing Options
5. Start a Windows Command Prompt session.
6. Navigate to the directory with the target firmware (e.g., c:\download).
267
Chapter
7
Manual Two-Key Download Sequence
7. Execute FILENAME.exe as follows:
Connection Type
IMPORTANT
Enter Command
Parallel
FILENAME –a -pb <Enter>
Serial
mode COM1:9600,N,8,1 <Enter>
mode LPT1=COM1 <Enter>
FILENAME –a -pb <Enter>
USB
FILENAME –a –pbSharedName <Enter>
where SharedName of the printer is the ‘Share
name’ entered during installation.
Ethernet
FILENAME -n xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx <Enter>
where xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx represents the IP address.
DO NOT interrupt the downloading process once it has started.
Interrupting a download will leave the flash memory on the controller
PCBA incompletely loaded, and the printer may not boot up.
8. When the new software has successfully loaded into flash memory and
the printer has reset itself, the process is complete.
Manual Two-Key Download Sequence
NOTE: This download method can be completed with firmware in the form of
FILENAME.prg or FILENAME.exe.
The following steps prepare the printer for download. When the printer is in
the download mode, any host IO can be used to download the firmware.
1. Set the printer power switch to O (Off).
2. Connect the Ethernet cable to the printer interface.
3. Press and hold down the ADVANCE and CANCEL keys on the printer’s
control panel.
4. Set the printer power switch to I (On).
5. After five seconds, release the front panel keys.
The printer must power-up so this may take to 1-2 minutes. Wait until
“PROGRAM DOWNLOAD” displays on the top line of the LCD before
proceeding.
6. Start a Windows Command Prompt session.
7. Navigate to the directory with the target firmware (e.g., c:\download).
268
8. Send the firmware to the printer as described for various host IO options:
•
•
•
•
“Sending Firmware via Ethernet (LPR)” on page 270
“Sending Firmware via USB” on page 270
“Sending Firmware via Parallel” on page 276
“Sending Firmware via Serial” on page 277
Manual Three-Key Download Sequence
NOTE: If the flash memory contains only boot code (e.g., if it is new), or if
flash memory is corrupt, or you want to delete all Flash User Files,
you must download software using the manual three-key download
method. This can be completed with firmware in the form
FILENAME.exe or FILENAME.prg. When the printer is in the
download mode, only USB or parallel can be used to download the
firmware.
1. Set the printer power switch to O (Off).
2. Connect the Ethernet cable to the printer interface.
3. USB Download:
Press and hold down the ADVANCE, CANCEL, and DOWN control panel
keys.
Parallel Download:
Press and hold down the TOF, CONFIG, and UP control panel keys.
NOTE: If the parallel option is not installed, the printer reverts to a USB
download.
4. Set the printer power switch to I (On).
5. After five seconds, release the control panel keys.
6. The printer must power-up so this may take up to 1-2 minutes. Wait until
“DOWNLOAD MODE USB” displays on the top line of the LCD before
proceeding.
7. Start a Windows Command Prompt session.
8. Navigate to the directory with the target firmware (e.g., c:\download).
9. Send the firmware to the printer as described for various host IO options:
•
•
“Sending Firmware via USB” on page 270
“Sending Firmware via Parallel” on page 276
269
Chapter
7
Sending Firmware in Download Mode
Sending Firmware in Download Mode
This section describes how to send the firmware data to the printer using the
desired host IO.
NOTE: The three-key download sequence only allows download through
USB or Parallel.
Although the program file FILENAME.prg is used in the examples, any file
with a Printronix header can be substituted in this process to download flash
files.
Sending Firmware via Ethernet (LPR)
NOTE: You will need the IP Address of the printer.
1. Enter the following to start the LPR program:
lpr -S xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx -P d1prn FILENAME.prg
where xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx is the IP Address of the printer.
IMPORTANT
DO NOT interrupt the downloading process once it has started.
Interrupting a download will leave the flash memory on the controller
PCBA and NIC incompletely loaded, and the printer may not boot up.
2. The process is complete when the new software has successfully loaded
into flash memory and the printer has reset itself.
Sending Firmware via USB
This section explains how to download firmware through USB by remapping
LPT1 to the USB port. This can be completed with firmware in the form
FILENAME.exe or FILENAME.prg.
If the PC or laptop you are using is connected to a network or the Microsoft
Loopback Adapter is installed, then proceed as shown. If not, you must first
complete the section “Installing a Microsoft Loopback Adapter” on page 271.
1. Remap the LPT1 port to USB by entering the following commands at the
command prompt:
NET USE LPT1\\Comp_Name\Shared_Name/Persistent:YES <Enter>
where
Comp_Name is the computer name found in System Properties\Computer
Name tab
Shared_Name is the printer’s shared name found in the printer’s Properties\
Sharing tab.
2. To check status of connection type, enter the following commands at the
command prompt:
Net View \\Comp_Name <Enter>
where Comp_Name is the computer name found in System Properties\
Computer Name tab.
Now the computer system is ready to send the firmware through USB.
3. Navigate to the directory with the target firmware (e.g., c:\download).
270
Installing a Microsoft Loopback Adapter
4. Copy the file to the printer by entering these commands at the command
prompt:
copy /b FILENAME.prg lpt1: <Enter>
where FILENAME.prg is the target firmware
or
FILENAME –pb <Enter>
where FILENAME.exe is the target firmware.
IMPORTANT
DO NOT interrupt the downloading process once it has started.
Interrupting a download will leave the flash memory on the controller
PCBA incompletely loaded, and the printer may not boot up.
5. The process is complete when the new software has successfully loaded
into flash memory and the printer has reset itself.
6. To unmap LPT1 from USB, enter the following in the command prompt:
NET USE LPT1 /DELETE<Enter>
Installing a Microsoft Loopback Adapter
Use this section if USB is required for the download when the laptop or PC is
not network connected. If your laptop or PC is already network connected, go
to “Sending Firmware via USB” on page 270.
1. For Windows XP:
a. Go to the “Start” menu
b. Select “Control Panel”
c.
Open the “Add Hardware Wizard”
For Windows 7:
a. Go to the “Start” menu
b. Select “Control Panel”
c.
Open the “Device Manager”
271
Chapter
7
Sending Firmware in Download Mode
d. Start the “Add legacy hardware” process from the “Action” menu as
shown Figure 8.
Figure 8. Adding Legacy Hardware
2. Click “Next” in the initial “Welcome to the Add Hardware Wizard” screen.
The second screen will ask if you have already connected the hardware
to your computer.
3. Select “Yes,...hardware” and then click “Next”.
Figure 9. Hardware Connection Options
272
Installing a Microsoft Loopback Adapter
4. Select “Add a new hardware device” (typically at the bottom of the
installed hardware list) and then click “Next”.
Figure 10. Adding a New Hardware Device
5. When asked how you would like to have the hardware installed, select the
“Advanced” option that allows you to select the hardware from a list. Then
click “Next”.
Figure 11. Selecting the Advanced Installation Method
273
Chapter
7
Sending Firmware in Download Mode
6. Select “Network adaptor”, then click “Next”.
Figure 12. Selecting Network Adapter Hardware
7. Select “Microsoft Loopback Adapter”, then click “Next”.
Figure 13. Selecting Microsoft Loopback Adapter as the Network Adapter Type
274
Installing a Microsoft Loopback Adapter
8. Click “Next” to start installation.
Figure 14. Starting the Installation
9. After installation is complete, click “Finish” to close the wizard.
Figure 15. Complete Hardware Installation
275
Chapter
7
Sending Firmware in Download Mode
10. To verify installation, go back to the Control Panel and select “System” for
WinXP. Under the “Hardware” tab, select “Device Manager”.
For Windows 7, select “Device Manager” directly from Control Panel.
11. Select the “Network Adaptors” and expand the selection if necessary. You
should see “Microsoft Loopback Adaptor” listed. Leave all default
settings.
Figure 16. Utilizing the Device Manager to Verify Installation
12. Upon verification, go to “Sending Firmware via USB” on page 270.
Sending Firmware via Parallel
This download method can be completed with firmware in the form
FILENAME.exe or FILENAME.prg.
NOTE: The parallel option must be installed.
1. Copy the firmware to the printer by issuing these commands at the
Command prompt:
copy /b FILENAME.prg lpt1: <Enter>
where FILENAME.prg is the target firmware
or
FILENAME –pb <Enter>
where FILENAME.exe is the target firmware
IMPORTANT
DO NOT interrupt the downloading process once it has started.
Interrupting a download will leave the flash memory on the controller
PCBA and NIC incompletely loaded, and the printer may not boot up.
2. The process is complete when the new software has successfully loaded
into flash memory and the printer has reset itself.
276
Sending Firmware via Serial
Sending Firmware via Serial
Downloading firmware using serial RS-232 is not recommended due to the
size of the firmware and significant wait time required to complete the
process. Downloading through serial requires firmware in the form
FILENAME.prg only.
1. Copy the firmware to the printer by issuing these commands at the
Command prompt:
mode COM1:9600,N,8,1,P <Enter>
copy /b FILENAME.prg com1 <Enter>
where FILENAME.prg is the target firmware.
NOTE: Some systems can only use the 9600 baud rate. The baud rate
information entered in the above commands must match the Baud
Rate setting saved in the Power-Up Config.
IMPORTANT
DO NOT interrupt the downloading process once it has started.
Interrupting a download will leave the flash memory on the controller
PCBA and NIC incompletely loaded, and the printer may not boot up.
2. The process is complete when the new software has successfully loaded
into flash memory and the printer has reset itself.
277
Chapter
7
Downloading Files to the Main File System
Downloading Files to the Main File System
User Files can be downloaded into the Main File System (onboard PCB
Flash) in a various ways as discussed in this section. This section does not
cover specific methods used by the emulations but rather general ways of
downloading files as shown in Table 2. Font download is discussed in a later
section.
Table 2. File Download Methods
File Download Method
File Preparation
Web Page (Ethernet only). User needs to know the IP address and
have a browser.
None required.
PTX_SETUP (any host IO). User can employ PTX_SETUP commands
around the file data to store the file into the Main File System.
Binary (raw) data of the file is
embedded within
PTX_SETUP commands.
Manual two-key download (any host IO). This two-key (ADVANCE +
CANCEL) power-up sequence puts the printer into download mode.
Files can then be downloaded.
Run cnvt2fls.exe to add the
proper header to the file
PrintNet Enterprise (Ethernet only). User must install the PrintNet
Enterprise application from the PrintNet CD. This is the most versatile
and powerful method to download files but requires your computer can
run Java™ programs.
For a detailed description,
refer to the PrintNet Ethernet
User's Manual.
NOTE: Depending on the file download method, the file itself may need to be
modified so that when it is downloaded to the printer, the printer
stores the file with the correct Main File System name and file type.
Filename Extensions Not Shown in Menus
Files with the one of the filename extensions below (upper or lower case) are
considered system files and are not shown in the View File List or Delete Files
menu.
NOTE: DO NOT download any user files with the extensions shown in
Table 3.
Table 3. Filename Extensions Not Shown In Menus
Extensions
278
*.bin
*.inf
*.ras
*.cpg
*.lfi
*.rfv
*.eng
*.map
*.sec
*.fon
*.pat
*.gz
*.qsm
Sending Firmware via Serial
File Properties Not Shown in Menus
Files with one of the properties listed below (case sensitive) are considered
system files and are not shown in the View File List within the Delete Files
menu.
NOTE: DO NOT download any user files with the one of the properties
shown in Table 4.
Table 4. File Properties Not Shown In Menus
Properties
Prot
NetC
NGif
Rmap
Rfnt
Rmnu
Rprg
Eprg
VERS
ASIC
FPGA
UMCA
Rval
XHEX
RULE
CRft
Rver
Rsec
SORT
Web Page Download
1. Make sure the printer is powered up, in ONLINE mode, and the Ethernet
cable is connected.
2. Obtain the IP address from the front panel (under Network Setup in the
menus).
3. Enter the IP address of the printer in your browser
(e.g., http://10.224.5.21).
4. Enter “root” for the user name when prompted, and click OK.
5. Click “Printer” in the Configuration box. The following webpage will
display. Click “File Management” to download the file.
279
Chapter
7
Web Page Download
Figure 17. Downloading Files using the File Management Webpage
6. Click “Browse” to navigate the directory and find the download file, then
click “Download File”.
Figure 18. Navigating to Download a File
280
Sending Firmware via Serial
A notification displays indicating that the web page will refresh upon download
completion.
Figure 19. File Download Notification
PTX_SETUP Download
Use PTX_SETUP to load files into the Main File System. Refer to the
PTX_SETUP Chapter in the PGL Programmer’s Reference Manual for
details.
Example loading a font named ARIAL.TTF:
!PTX_SETUP
FILE_IO-CAPTURE;“ARIAL.TTF”
PTX_END
Arial TrueType font binary data.
NOTE: DO NOT add LF/FF to the end of the binary data.
!PTX_SETUP
FILE_IO-CAPTURE;””
PTX_END
Manual Two-Key Download
1. Start a Windows Command Prompt session.
2. Navigate to the directory with the target file (e.g., c:\download).
3. Copy cnvt2fls.exe from your Starter Kit CD to the directory with the target
file.
4. Convert the file to a downloadable format using the following command at
the command prompt:
cnvt2fls file_name1 file_name2 file_name3 A FONT <Enter>
where
•
file_name1 is the name of the file to be converted into the downloadable
format.
•
file_name2 is the name of the file of the output file that will be downloaded
into the printer.
281
Chapter
7
Downloading Files to the SD Card
•
file_name3 is the name of the file within the Main File System.
NOTE: The FONT parameter should only be used with fonts; otherwise, omit
this parameter
Example:
cnvt2fls arial.ttf arial.dwn ARIAL.TTF A FONT <Enter>
This example creates the file “arial.dwn” that will place “ARIAL.TTF” into the
Main File System.
5. Place the printer in download mode as described in “Manual Two-Key
Download Sequence” on page 268.
6. Send the file as described in “Sending Firmware in Download Mode” on
page 270. Substitute file_name2 in place of the firmware FILENAME.prg.
The process is complete when the file successfully loads into flash memory
and the printer resets.
7. Verify that the file is recognized and downloaded, go to the ADVANCED
USER menu, in the Main File System submenu. One of the files displayed
should include file_name3.
Downloading Files to the SD Card
SD files can be utilized by the printer and certain emulations such as PGL.
Since the SD file format is an industry standard, downloading files and fonts to
the SD card does not require special facilities within the printer. This allows
the user to copy files from their PC or laptop to the SD card as well as copy
printer files on the SD card to their PC or laptop.
NOTE: The printer will only locate files stored on the root directory of the SD
card. The name of the file within the SD card root directory is the
name shown in the SD File System submenu.
Alternatively, users can copy files from the Main File System to the SD card
by using the “Copy to SD” selection within the Main File System menu. Users
can also copy files from the SD card to the Main File System by using the
“Copy from SD” selection within the SD File System menu.
PGL forms, fonts, and logos can all be read from and stored onto SD cards as
described in the PGL Programmer’s Reference Manual.
IMPORTANT
282
The SD card must be installed at the time of power-up and cannot be
removed until the printer is powered off.
Downloading TrueType Fonts
Using TrueType Fonts
TrueType fonts allow you to customize the look of your forms and labels. You
can download TrueType fonts purchased from various sources into your
printer. The fonts are available for purchase on websites such as
www.fonts.com and www.myfonts.com.
The following sections discuss how to:
•
•
•
IMPORTANT
download TrueType fonts (page 283)
select and print downloaded TrueType fonts (page 285)
use TrueType fonts to print DBCS using UTF-8 (page 285).
Line Matrix printers use bitmap fonts for smaller characters (less than or
equal to 2x2). Since TrueType fonts are scalable fonts, use these fonts
for sizes greater than 2x2.
Downloading TrueType Fonts
You can download TrueType fonts to your printer by using any of the following
methods:
•
•
•
•
•
PTX_SETUP (page 281)
Web Page (page 279)
PGL Emulation (see below)
Adding a Font Header/Manual Two-Key Download (page 284)
Labeling Applications (page 285)
Once a TrueType font is downloaded, it is stored in the Main File System or
SD File System as a resident font. Regardless of printer power cycles, the
downloaded font will stay in the printer until the user deletes it. The user can
find a list of all printer resident fonts within the Main File System or SD File
System submenus under ADVANCED USER. User downloaded fonts can be
deleted from these same submenus. If within the Main File System, the user
is recommended to perform an Optimize & Reboot function.
PGL Emulation
A TrueType font can be loaded by creating a file that appends a PGL
command to the font and then sending that file to the printer. Use the PGL
FONTLOAD command:
~FONTLOAD;FontName;FontSize;Location
where
FontName TrueType font name, e.g. arial.ttf
FontSize
TrueType font size, e.g. file size for arial.ttf
Location
The download location. By default, “DISK” represents the Main
File System (Flash), while “EMC” designates the SD card. The
PGL menu “Storage Select” can be changed to force “DISK” to
store fonts and other PGL elements to the SD card.
283
Chapter
7
Using TrueType Fonts
Example:
~FONTLOAD;arial.ttf;60548;DISK
(Insert binary data of arial.ttf here.)
END
After the file is created, it can be copied to the appropriate printer I/O port
while the printer is online, similar to other print files.
Example:
copy/b filename.ext lpt1 or LPT1
Adding a Header/Manual Two-Key Download
To download a TrueType font to the printer through the manual two-key
download mode, first add a header to the font, then place the printer in
Download mode and download the font. A TrueType font can be converted to
a downloadable format by appending a header to the font file using the
cnvt2fls.exe utility and a batch file as described in this section.
Header for Main File System
1. Start a Command prompt window.
2. Copy (or unzip) cnvt2fls.exe and addtthdr.bat from your Starter Kit CD to
your working directory (e.g., c:\download).
3. Copy the target TrueType font (.ttf) file to your working directory.
4. Start a Windows Command Prompt session.
5. Convert the TrueType font file .ttf (e.g., arial.ttf) to a downloadable format
.dwn with the following command:
addtthdr filename <Enter>
where filename is the font name without an extension
(e.g., addtthdr arial).
This creates the file arial.dwn.
6. Place the printer in download mode as described in “Manual Two-Key
Download Sequence” on page 268.
7. Send the file as described in “Sending Firmware in Download Mode” on
page 270. Substitute the file *.dwn (e.g., arial.dwn) in place of the
firmware FILENAME.prg.
The process is complete when the file has successfully loaded into flash
memory and the printer resets itself.
8. Verify that the file is recognized and downloaded under the ADVANCED
USER -> Main File System submenu. One of the files shown should
include the original true type font name (e.g., arial.ttf).
284
Select and Print Downloaded TrueType Fonts
Header for SD Card
As discussed in “Downloading Files to the SD Card” on page 282, the process
to copy TrueType fonts to the SD card can be employed from a PC or laptop
by copying the target font file (*.ttf) onto the SD card root directory. The SD
card can then be placed in the printer and used accordingly.
Labeling Applications
A TrueType font can be downloaded through several labeling applications,
such as Codesoft, Loftware, and Bartender. Contact the appropriate company
for more details.
Select and Print Downloaded TrueType Fonts
After downloading the TrueType font using any of the following methods, you
can access the downloaded TrueType font by using the command as
described in the PGL Programmer’s Reference Manual.
To Print ASCII Characters
You can print characters from your font using the currently selected character
set. You can also select a new character set using the ISET command.
Example:
~CREATE;FORM
FONT;NAME ARIAL.TTF
ALPHA
10;10;3;3;$01234$
STOP
END
~EXECUTE;FORM;1
To Print All Characters
You can print all of the characters in your font using UTF-8. You must have a
UTF-8 datastream to print.
Example:
~CREATE;FORM
ISET;’UTF8’
FONT;NAME ARIAL.TTF
ALPHA
10;10;3;3;$UTF-8 data$
STOP
END
~EXECUTE;FORM;1
285
Chapter
7
Demo Facility
Demo Facility
To exercise the function of a Printronix printer in an environment where there
is no host computer system available, you may need to execute a demo test
file from the menu system. When executed, the demo test file will run through
the emulations as if the host computer sent the file. Once completed, it will run
the file again until terminated.
This section describes how to download, configure, execute, and terminate
the demo. Demo files are treated as other User Flash Files and therefore are
preserved across downloads by default.
Downloading a Demo File
1. Start a Windows Command Prompt session.
2. Navigate to the directory with the target demo file (e.g., c:\download).
3. Copy (or unzip) demo2fls.exe from your Starter Kit CD to the directory
with the target file.
4. Convert the file to a downloadable format with the following command at
the command prompt:
demo2fls file_name <Enter>
where file_name is the name of the file to be converted into the
downloadable format.
The output file for download replaces the file_name extension with “.fls”.
Example: demo2fls demo.txt <Enter>
This creates the file “demo.fls” that will place “demo.txt” into the Main File
System when downloaded.
5. Place the printer in download mode as described in “Manual Two-Key
Download Sequence” on page 268.
6. Send the file as described in “Sending Firmware in Download Mode” on
page 270. Substitute the file *.fls (e.g., demo.fls) in place of the firmware
FILENAME.prg.
The process is complete when the file has successfully loaded into flash
memory and the printer resets itself.
7. Verify that the file is recognized and downloaded under the
DIAGNOSTICS -> Printer Tests submenu. One of the printer tests shown
should include file_name.
Configuring the Printer to Run a Demo File
This facility does not attempt to identify which emulation a particular demo file
is designed for. The user must configure the printer for the appropriate
emulation before invoking the demo. The demo will inherit all menu
configuration parameters when executed. The user is responsible to properly
configure the forms size, typeface, orientation, etc. This facility will not restore
any configuration settings when the demo file is finished printing.
286
Select and Print Downloaded TrueType Fonts
Starting a Demo File
The demo file is initiated by selecting its Flash File name and pressing
ENTER within the DIAGNOSTICS -> Printer Tests submenu. This causes the
printer to go online and print the demo file. Once the demo file starts, it will
repeat automatically until the demo file sequence is stopped.
IMPORTANT
DO NOT run a demo file if the printer is in the middle of another test or
host job. This will cause unexpected results. Similarly, do not send host
jobs when running demo tests.
Pausing a Demo File
Pause the demo by placing the printer OFFLINE (press the ONLINE button).
To resume printing, go back ONLINE.
Stopping a Demo File
Stop the demo by executing a soft reset on the printer (press the LEFT and
RIGHT keys simultaneously). This will resume normal operation.
Deleting a Demo File
Delete demo files similar to any other file in the Main File System. Once
deleted, the file will no longer appear as a selection in the Printer Tests
submenu.
287
Chapter
288
7
Demo Facility
8
Troubleshooting
Cleaning Requirements
Clean the printer every six months or after every 1000 hours of operation,
whichever occurs first. If the printer is located in a dusty area or is used for
heavy duty printing, clean it more often.
WARNING
Disconnect the power source before cleaning the printer.
Vor dem Säubern des Druckers ist die Netzverbindung zu unterbrechen.
Débranchez l’alimentation avant de nettoyer l’imprimante.
Desconecte la fuente de energía antes de limpiar la impresora.
Staccare la fonte di energia prima della pulitura della stampante.
Exterior Cleaning
Clean the outside of the cabinet with a soft, lint-free cloth and mild detergent
soap. (Dishwashing liquid works well.) Do not use abrasive powders or
chemical solvents. Clean the windows with plain water or mild window
cleaner. Always apply the cleaning solution to the cloth; never pour cleaning
solution directly onto the printer.
289
Chapter
8
Cleaning Requirements
Interior Cleaning
Over time, particles of paper and ink accumulate inside the printer. This is
normal. Paper dust and ink build-up must be periodically removed to avoid
degraded print quality. Most paper dust accumulates around the ends of the
platen and ribbon path.
Ribbon
Ribbon
Cartridge
Ribbon
Tension Knob
Tab (2)
Tractor (2)
Blue Tractor
Lock (2)
Splined Shaft
Hammer Bank
Cover and
Ribbon Mask
Paper Support (2)
Vertical
Position Knob
Tab Slot (2)
184555b
Platen Lever
Ribbon Cartridge
Interface
Platen Stop
Air Shroud
Assembly
Figure 1. Interior Printer Components
290
Interior Cleaning
To clean the interior of the printer perform the following steps.
1. Power off the printer and unplug the printer power cord.
2. Open the printer cover.
3. Fully raise the platen lever.
4. Unload the paper.
5. Remove the ribbon cartridge.
6. Lift the ribbon out of the ribbon path.
7. Brush the paper dust and ribbon lint off the tractors, shuttle cover
assembly, and base casting with a soft-bristled, non-metallic brush
(such as a toothbrush). Vacuum up the residue.
CAUTION
Vacuum carefully around the hammer bank and surrounding area to
avoid damage. To avoid corrosion damage, use only alcohol when
cleaning the printer mechanical elements. Solutions used to clean
mechanical elements must contain no water.
8. Wipe the splined shaft with a soft cloth.
9. Check the ribbon mask and hammer bank cover for bits of torn paper or
ribbon lint.
10. Remove dust and ink from the platen using a soft cloth lightly moistened
with anhydrous alcohol. (The platen is the thick silver bar behind the
hammer bank cover that rotates when the platen lever is rotated.)
CAUTION
When cleaning the platen, be very careful not to get any alcohol in the
hammer bank, because alcohol will cause severe damage to the
hammer bank. Only a trained service technician should clean the shuttle
assembly.
11. Brush and vacuum the accumulated dust or residue inside the lower
cabinet.
12. Wipe the lower cabinet interior with a clean, lint-free cloth dampened (not
wet) with water and mild detergent or window cleaning solution. Dry the
lower cabinet interior by wiping it down with a clean, lint-free cloth.
13. Install the ribbon and load paper.
291
Chapter
8
Diagnosing Problems
Diagnosing Problems
This section is designed to help you fix problems which may arise with normal
printer operation.
Bar Code Verification
The most important consideration when printing a bar code is to ensure that
the bar code will be scanned properly. Incorporating a bar code quality
procedure in the printing process is the best way to ensure that bar codes are
being printed correctly. A properly implemented verification procedure will
increase overall bar code quality, reduce waste from misprinted bar codes,
and achieve high first-time read rates. A high first-time read rate is an
increasingly important factor in newer, more efficient systems where manually
entered data is not acceptable as a backup function. Verification also
minimizes the costs of returned products due to poor reading or
unaccountable bar codes.
292
Printing a Hex Dump
Printing a Hex Dump
A hex code printout (or hex dump) is a translation of all host interface data to
its hexadecimal equivalent, listing all ASCII character data received from the
host computer with their corresponding two-digit hexadecimal codes. Hex
dumps are used to troubleshoot printer data reception problems.
Printable characters print as the assigned symbol; nonprintable characters
are indicated by a period (.).
Figure 2 shows an example of a hex dump.
Figure 2. Hex Dump Sample
293
Chapter
8
Diagnosing Problems
The CD contains a utility called hexcode.exe. This utility can be run from a
DOS window to convert an input file into a hexadecimal equivalent. The
output from this utility can then be used to compare what is received when
printing a hex dump.
Usage: hexcode <input file> <output file>
Sample output:
412068657820636F6465207072696E746F757420286F7220686578206475
6D70292069732061207472616E736C6174696F6E206F6620616C6C20686F
737420696E74657266616365206461746120746F20697473206865786164
6563696D616C206571756976616C656E742C206C697374696E6720616C6C
204153434949206368617261637465722064617461207265636569766564
2066726F6D2074686520686F737420636F6D707574657220776974682074
6865697220636F72726573706F6E64696E672074776F2D64696769742068
657861646563696D616C20636F6465732E204865782064756D7073206172
65207573656420746F2074726F75626C6573686F6F74207072696E746572
206461746120726563657074696F6E2070726F626C656D732E200D0A0D0A
5072696E7461626C652063686172616374657273207072696E7420617320
7468652061737369676E65642073796D626F6C3B206E6F6E7072696E7461
626C6520636861726163746572732061726520696E646963617465642062
79206120706572696F6420282E292E0D0A0D0A3C2050696374757265206F
66204865782044756D70203E0D0A0D0A54686520434420636F6E7461696E
732061207574696C6974792063616C6C656420686578636F64652E657865
2E2054686973207574696C6974792063616E2062652072756E2066726F6D
206120444F532077696E646F7720746F20636F6E7665727420616E20696E
7075742066696C6520696E746F20612068657861646563696D616C206571
756976616C656E742E20546865206F75747075742066726F6D2074686973
207574696C6974792063616E207468656E206265207573656420746F2063
6F6D706172652077686174206973207265636569766564207768656E2070
72696E74696E672061206865782064756D702E0D0A0D0A55736167653A20
686578636F6465203C696E7075742066696C653E203C6F75747075742066
696C653E2E0D0A
294
Most Frequent Problems
and
Solutions
Printing
a Hex
Dump
Most Frequent Problems and Solutions
Problem
Corrective Action
•
Adjust the forms thickness lever setting. Print quality
can be affected if it is too loose or too tight.
•
Adjust the paper tension horizontally by moving the
right tractor. Print quality can be affected if it is too
loose or too tight.
•
Make sure the ribbon threads between the
hammerbank cover and ribbon mask, as shown on the
ribbon path diagram on the pedestal models. Turn the
ribbon cartridge knob clockwise to ensure that the
ribbon tracks correctly in the ribbon path.
•
Be sure to use an approved ribbon.
•
•
Reset the forms thickness lever for thicker paper.
•
•
Check the paper slot for foreign material.
Loss of forms position
•
Set the forms thickness lever for thicker paper.
Lost dots (incompletely formed
characters)
•
•
Lower the forms thickness lever.
•
•
Clear the paper path of any obstructions.
Poor print quality
•
•
•
•
•
•
dark print
light print
light print on half of the page
missing dots or characters
smeared print
wavy vertical lines
Torn or damaged forms
Horizontally or vertically
misaligned character positions
Erratic character height
Vertically misaligned print
Adjust the paper tension horizontally by moving the
right tractor. Too high a paper tension can cause
tearing of the tractor feed holes.
For thick, multipart forms, set the OPEN PLATEN @
BOF to enable. Refer to the Printer Control Menu in
the Administrator’s Manual.
Adjust the paper tension horizontally by moving the
right tractor. Print quality can be affected if it is too
loose or too tight.
If problems persists, contact a service representative.
295
Chapter
8
Diagnostics for EXX, BAD NVM, or ILL NVM Errors
Diagnostics for EXX, BAD NVM, or ILL NVM Errors
If the printer displays LCD error messages such as ‘E03E DSI CXIWX”, “BAD
NVM”, or “ILL NVM”, reboot the printer (turn power on and off) and continue. If
the problem persists, then invoke a diagnostic option that will capture the
failure dump in a flash file that can be later uploaded from PrintNet Enterprise
Suite and sent to Printronix Customer Support Center for analysis
(see Appendix G, page 379).
This diagnostic option must be enabled for the printer to capture the
information. If you choose to perform this diagnostic perform the following
procedure:
1. Within the DIAGNOSTICS section, set the Auto Dump menu to Enable.
2. When the failure happens, reboot the printer and wait for it to power up
again.
3. Within the ADVANCED USER section, go to the Main File System
submenu and then to View File List.
4. Verify that files ‘autodmp1’ or ‘autodmp2’ are present in the file list.
5. If present, use PrintNet Enterprise Suite to upload these files to your host
computer.
6. Contact Printronix Customer Support Center and send them the files
along with the printer’s configuration printout. Refer to the PrintNet
Enterprise Suite User’s Manual on how to accomplish these tasks.
Fault Messages (ASCII in Alphabetical Order)
If a fault condition occurs in the printer, the status indicator on the control
panel flashes on and off, and the message display indicates the specific fault.
Fault messages are summarized in alphabetical order in Table 1. These error
messages are used in ASCII products.
Displayed faults fall into one of two categories:
•
•
Operator correctable
Field service required
For the operator-correctable faults, follow the suggested solution in Table 1.
After correcting the displayed fault, press the CANCEL key to clear the error
message and status indicator and resume printing. If the fault message
reappears, contact your authorized service representative.
NOTE: The Maintenance Manual provides more detailed information and
procedures for resolving fault conditions. However, many of the
procedures described there must be performed only by your
authorized service representative.
296
Fault Messages (ASCII inPrinting
Alphabetical
a HexOrder)
Dump
Fault Messages Requiring Field Service Attention
If a fault is not correctable by the operator, the fault message is followed by an
asterisk (*). This usually indicates that an authorized service representative is
needed. You may try two steps to clear the fault before calling your authorized
service representative:
1. Set the printer power switch to O (Off), wait 15 seconds, then turn the
printer on again. Run your print job again. If the message does not
appear, it was a false indication and no further attention is required.
2. If the message reappears, press the CANCEL key. If the message
disappears, it was a false indication and no further attention is required. If
the message reappears, call your authorized service representative.
Table 1. LCD Message Troubleshooting Table (ASCII)
Displayed Message
Can User
Correct?
Explanation
Solution
12 VOLT FAILED*
No
The power supply 12 volt
output has failed.
Contact your authorized
service representative.1
B12 ERROR: PROGRAM
MISSING*
Yes
The printer does not see
a program in flash
memory.
There is no program in printer
memory. Download printer
firmware again.
B13 ERROR: NOT
COMPATIBLE*
No
Attempting to download a
program that is not
compatible with the
printer.
Cycle power to see if the
message clears, if not, contact
your authorized service
representative.1
B20 STATUS :00%
DOWNLOAD MODE
No
Status message
informing the operator
that software is being
downloaded. Percentage
figure indicates
approximate amount
loaded into the printer.
No action is required.
B21 STATUS: PRINTER
RESET
No
Status message
informing the operator
that the printer is
undergoing a system
reset.
No action is required.
B22 ERROR:
DECOMPRESS SIZE*
No
FLASH memory has not
passed boot initialization
tests.
Cycle power to see if the
message clears, if not, contact
your authorized service
representative.1
B23 ERROR:
DECOMPRESS CKSUM*
No
FLASH memory has not
passed boot initialization
tests.
Cycle power to see if the
message clears, if not, contact
your authorized service
representative.1
297
Chapter
8
Fault Messages (ASCII in Alphabetical Order)
Table 1. LCD Message Troubleshooting Table (ASCII)
Displayed Message
Can User
Correct?
Explanation
Solution
B30 STATUS:
INITIALIZING...
N/A
Status message: the
printer is running its
initialization routines after
startup and successful
memory tests.
No action is required.
B50 STATUS:
PANEL CODE BAD
No
Saved version of Panel
Code is corrupt.
Reload released Firmware.
B51 STATUS: XX%
LOADING...
No
Status message: printer
boot-up routines are
loading printer system
software into flash
memory and SDRAM.
No action required.
Bxx ERROR: NO
DOWNLOADER FOUND
No
No Downloader was
found while downloading
a file.
Reload released Firmware.
BAD NVM CALL 1
BAD NVM CALL 2
BAD NVM CALL 3
BAD NVM CALL 4
BAD NVM CALL A
Yes
Printer firmware code
error with the Novram
module that stores
configurations and
statistics.
1.
Cycle power. Run the
print job again. If the
message appears, load
the latest emulation
software.
2. Cycle power. Run the
print job again. If the
message appears again,
record the exact display
message, follow the
instructions on page 296,
“Diagnostics for EXX,
BAD NVM, or ILL NVM
Errors”, and contact your
authorized service
representative.1
x/y BARCODES /
Not Found
298
Yes
Printer detects fewer
barcodes than the set
value for "Barcodes on
Page" menu option. x
represents the number of
barcodes not found, and
y represents the
"Barcodes on Page"
value.
Press the ONLINE key.
Fault Messages (ASCII inPrinting
Alphabetical
a HexOrder)
Dump
Table 1. LCD Message Troubleshooting Table (ASCII)
Displayed Message
Can User
Correct?
Explanation
Solution
BUFFER OVERRUN
Yes
The print buffer has
overflowed on a serial
interface. The printed
output may contain
random * (asterisk)
characters. Make a
configuration printout.
Verify that the printer matches
the host serial interface
configuration settings for Data
Protocol, Baud Rate, Data
Bits, Stop Bits, Parity, Data
Terminal Ready, and Request
to Send. Set printer serial
interface parameters to match
those of the host.
CARTRIDGE AT
END POINT
Change Cart
Yes
Integrated Print
Management System
software has determined
that the cartridge ribbon
is out of ink.
Install a new cartridge.
CLEAR PAPER JAM
Yes
No paper motion.
Clear jam and reload paper. If
this message recurs, contact
your authorized service
representative.1
CLEARING PROGRAM
FROM FLASH
No
Status message:
emulation software
successfully loaded into
printer RAM and the
checksum matched. The
old program is now being
deleted from flash
memory.
No action is required.
CLOSE PLATEN
Yes
The platen lever is open.
Close the platen lever.
COIL HOT ERR 1
COIL HOT ERR 2
No
One or more hammer
coils are overheating.
Contact your authorized
service representative.1
COIL TEMP FAIL
Yes
The coil temperature was
never set or the attempt
to set it did not result in
correct numbers.
Allow printer to cool
completely, then set coil
temperature. If message
continues to display, contact
your authorized service
representative.1
CARTRIDGE CONNECTION
ERROR
See User Manual
No
The hardware cannot
communicate properly
with the cartridge.
1.
Make sure the ribbon
cartridge is seated
properly.
2. Remove and replace the
ribbon cartridge if
necessary.
3. Contact your authorized
service representative.1
299
Chapter
8
Fault Messages (ASCII in Alphabetical Order)
Table 1. LCD Message Troubleshooting Table (ASCII)
Displayed Message
Can User
Correct?
Explanation
Solution
CARTRIDGE
INCOMPATIBLE
Use correct cart
Yes
An incompatible ribbon
cartridge was installed in
the printer.
Install a cartridge designed for
this printer.
CARTRIDGE MISSING
Install new cart
Press ONLINE
Yes
The ribbon cartridge is
missing or installed
improperly.
1.
Make sure a ribbon
cartridge is installed in the
printer.
2. Make sure the ribbon
cartridge is seated
properly.
3. Remove and replace the
cartridge if necessary.
4. Contact your authorized
customer service
representative.1
CARTRIDGE NOT SEATED
Re-install Cart
Yes
The ribbon cartridge is
not properly positioned.
1.
Make sure a ribbon
cartridge is installed in the
printer.
2. Make sure the ribbon
cartridge is seated
properly.
3. Remove and replace the
cartridge if necessary.
4. Contact your authorized
customer service
representative.1
CARTRIDGE/REGION
X MISMATCH
Use Correct Cart
Yes
The incorrect cartridge
type is being used for the
printer. “X” indicates the
region of the printer.
Install Region X ribbon
cartridge in the printer.
CARTRIDGE/ SHUTTLE
MISMATCH
Use Correct Cart
Yes
This message displays
when an Extended Life
Cartridge is mounted on
a 500 lpm printer.
Install Standard Life Cartridge.
CARTRIDGE/
TIPSIZE MISMATCH
Use Correct Cart
Yes
The incorrect cartridge
type is being used for the
printer.
Install the correct ribbon
cartridge type in the printer.
CATASTROPHIC ERROR
No
Fatal error in printer.
Contact your authorized
customer service
representative.1
300
NOTE: Specify the region of
the printer when
ordering ribbons.
Fault Messages (ASCII inPrinting
Alphabetical
a HexOrder)
Dump
Table 1. LCD Message Troubleshooting Table (ASCII)
Displayed Message
Can User
Correct?
Explanation
Solution
D50 STATUS
UPGRADING PANEL
No
Status message: The
printer is upgrading the
panel, where %XX
represents the
percentage completed.
No action is required.
D51 STATUS
PROGRAMMING DONE
No
Status message: The
printer is loading
firmware, where %XX
represents the
percentage completed.
No action is required.
DIAGNOSTIC PASSED
No
Status message: the
printer passed its
memory and hardware
initialization tests.
No action is required.
DO NOT POWER OFF
No
Status message: The
printer is performing an
operation that must be
completed before you
can cycle power.
No action is required, but do
not power off the printer until
the operation is complete.
DP FIFO Busy*
Yes
There is a timing problem
in the Engine Controller
firmware.
1.
Cycle power. Run the
print job again. If the
message appears,
download the emulation
software again.
2. Cycle power. Run the
print job again. If the
message appears again,
contact your authorized
service representative.1
301
Chapter
8
Fault Messages (ASCII in Alphabetical Order)
Table 1. LCD Message Troubleshooting Table (ASCII)
Displayed Message
E00 EXE @ ADDR0
E01A TYPE 0x40
E01B TYPE 0x60
E02 MACHINE CHK
E03A DSI HASH L
E03B DSI HASH S
E03C DSI BAT PL
E03D DSI BAT PS
E03E DSI CXIWX
E03F DSI CXOWX
E03G DSI ECXIWX
E03H DSI ECXOWX
E04A ISI NO TRA
E04B ISI DIRECT
E04C ISI PROTEC
E06 NOT ALIGNED
E07 ILLEGAL INS
E08 FLOATINGPNT
E12 SYSTEM CALL
E13 TRACE INT
E16 ITRANS MISS
E17 DLOAD MISS
E18 DSTORE MISS
E19 BREAKPOINT
E20 SYS MANAGE
E30 DEBUGGER
E31A EVENT O BP
E31B EVENT 1 BP
E31C EVENT 2 BP
E31D EVENT 3 BP
E31E EVENT 4 BP
E31F EVENT 5 BP
E31G EVENT 6 BP
E31H EVENT 7 BP
E32A CND 0 BP
E32B CND 1 BP
E32C CND 2 BP
E32D CND 3 BP
E32E CND 4 BP
E32F CND 5 BP
E32G CND 6 BP
E32H CND 7 BP
E33 WRITE BP
E34 TRACE CMPLT
E99 UNKNOWN INT
See User Manual
302
Can User
Correct?
Yes
Explanation
An illegal or unsupported
instruction was attempted
in the application
program.
Solution
1.
Cycle Power. Run the
print job again. If the
message appears, load
the latest emulation
software.
2. Cycle power. Run the
print job again. If the
message appears again,
record the exact display
message, follow the
instructions on page 296,
and contact your
authorized service
representative.1
Fault Messages (ASCII inPrinting
Alphabetical
a HexOrder)
Dump
Table 1. LCD Message Troubleshooting Table (ASCII)
Displayed Message
Can User
Correct?
Explanation
Solution
E-Net Test Unavailable
Yes
The ethernet did not
initialize correctly.
Cycle power. Wait for “E-Net
Ready” to display, then retry
operation. If it still fails, contact
your authorized service
representative.1
ERROR OCCURRED
FLUSHING QUEUES*
Yes
An interim message that
displays while the printer
discards host data it
cannot use because a
fault condition exists.
While this message
displays, the asterisk (*)
rotates.
Wait. When the asterisk (*)
stops rotating, a different fault
message will appear:
troubleshoot the final
message.
ERROR NOR FLASHED
WAS
NOT CLEARED
No
Problem programming
Boot Code.
Contact your authorized
service representative.1
ERROR: DC PROGRAM
NOT VALID
Yes
The printer cannot find
the data controller
program or the validation
checksum is corrupt.
Download the program again.
If the message appears,
contact your authorized
service representative.1
ERROR: LOCKED
SN=nnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn
n
No
nnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn
n is the serial number of
the printer’s security key.
The SPX serial number
does not match the
printer’s serial number
and cannot be used with
the printer.
Contact your authorized
service representative.1
ERROR: NVRAM FAILURE
No
The non-volatile SRAM
on the controller board
has failed.
Contact your authorized
service representative.1
ERROR: PROGRAM NOT
COMPATIBLE
Yes
The printer is not
compatible with the
downloaded program.
Use the correct emulation
software options(s) for this
printer model.
ERROR: PROGRAM NOT
VALID
Yes
The printer does not see
a program in flash
memory.
There is no program in printer
memory. Download the
emulation.
ERROR: SECURITY KEY
NOT DETECTED
No
The security key is not
present or failed.
Contact your authorized
service representative.1
ERROR: WRONG
CHECKSUM
No
The printer received the
complete program but the
checksum did not match.
The data may have been
corrupted during
downloading.
Contact your authorized
service representative.1
303
Chapter
8
Fault Messages (ASCII in Alphabetical Order)
Table 1. LCD Message Troubleshooting Table (ASCII)
Displayed Message
Can User
Correct?
Explanation
Solution
ERROR: WRONG OEM
No
The SPX inserted in the
debug port is not
intended for this model
printer or this OEM.
Contact your authorized
service representative.1
ERROR: WRONG PRINTER
TYPE
No
The SPX inserted in the
debug port is not
intended for this model
printer or this OEM.
Contact your authorized
service representative.1
ETHERNET DETECTED
N/A
Status message
indicating that the
Network Interface Card
has established
connection.
No action is required.
ETHERNET INITIALIZING
No
Status message: the
internal Network Interface
Card is processing the
boot procedure. (May
occur with older versions
of microcode.)
No action is required.
EXCEPTION ERROR
No
An EXCEPTION
INTERRUPT has
occurred.
Contact your authorized
service representative.1
EXCESS RIBBON WEAR
Install New RBN
Yes
Status message that
displays when ribbon
reaches end of life,
whether the Integrated
Print Management
System is enabled or not.
Install a new ribbon.
EXHAUST FAN FLT
(Cabinet model only)
Yes
Sensor cannot detect
current in fan circuit.
Power off the printer and
remove the paper path (see
Maintenance Manual). Check
that the fan cable connector is
connected. Check for
obstruction of vents and fan
airway, and remove any
obstructions. Check for items
beneath the printer blocking
cabinet vents. Power back on
the printer. If this message
appears again, contact your
authorized service
representative.1
304
Fault Messages (ASCII inPrinting
Alphabetical
a HexOrder)
Dump
Table 1. LCD Message Troubleshooting Table (ASCII)
Displayed Message
Can User
Correct?
Explanation
Solution
FIRMWARE ERROR*
No
Application software tried
to perform an illegal
printer function or
damaged memory
detected on the controller
board.
Contact your authorized
service representative.1
FLASH: CHECK RETURN
No
Printer encountered an
error while trying to
program Flash memory.
Contact your authorized
service representative.1
FLASH: WAS NOT
CLEARED
No
Printer encountered an
error while trying to
program Flash memory.
Contact your authorized
service representative.1
FLASH: WRITE ERROR # 2
No
Printer encountered an
error while trying to
program Flash memory.
Contact your authorized
service representative.1
FM HEADER ERROR*
No
Frame Header Error.
Application software has
violated header
parameters.
Contact your system
administrator.
FRAMING ERROR
Yes
The printed output may
contain random !
(exclamation point)
characters.
Make a configuration printout.
Set printer serial interface
parameters to match host
configuration settings for Data
Protocol, Baud Rate, Data
Bits, Stop Bits, Parity, Data
Terminal Ready, and Request
to Send.
GENERATING XX%
NAND FLASH TABLE
No
NAND FLASH is being
read and system tables
are being initialized.
No action is required.
H00: PCI SLOT ?
See User Manual
No
The controller board is
not communicating with a
PCI card. This could
indicate a bad PCI card,
poor connection, or
problem in the PCI bus.
Contact your authorized
service representative.1
H01: PCI J12
See User Manual
No
The controller board is
not communicating with
the PCI card in PCI slot
J12. This could indicate a
bad PCI card, poor
connection, or problem in
the PCI bus.
Contact your authorized
service representative.1
305
Chapter
8
Fault Messages (ASCII in Alphabetical Order)
Table 1. LCD Message Troubleshooting Table (ASCII)
Displayed Message
Can User
Correct?
Explanation
Solution
<Online, etc...>
Half Speed Mode
No
Status message: The
controller samples the
operating temperature of
key components of the
print mechanism. When
higher than normal
temperatures are sensed,
the print speed is
automatically reduced by
50% and the message
sent the LCD. When the
components cool down,
the print speed returns to
100% and the message
clears.
No action is required. If the
message appears often,
contact your authorized
service representative.1
HAMMER COIL BAD*
#, #, #, ...etc
No
Hammer coil # failed
current test at power up.
Contact your authorized
service representative.1
HAMMER DRIVER
CIRCUIT BAD*
No
Driver Circuit Bad. The
hammer coil count test
failed.
Contact your authorized
service representative.1
HAMMERBANK NOT
INSTALLED*
No
Hammer Bank Not
Installed. Self-test
routines do not detect
hammer coils at printer
start-up.
Contact your authorized
service representative.1
HMR BANK FAN FLT
Yes
Sensor cannot detect
current in fan circuit.
Check that fan cable is
connected. Check for
obstruction of vents and fan
airway; remove any
obstructions. Check for items
beneath the printer blocking
cabinet vents. Power back on
the printer. If this message
recurs, contact your
authorized service
representative.1
ILL EXT BUS ACC*
No
Illegal External Bus
Access. Firmware error
on the controller board.
Contact your authorized
service representative.1
306
Fault Messages (ASCII inPrinting
Alphabetical
a HexOrder)
Dump
Table 1. LCD Message Troubleshooting Table (ASCII)
Displayed Message
ILL NVM VALUE 5
ILL NVM VALUE 6
ILL NVM VALUE 7
Can User
Correct?
Yes
Explanation
Illegal value was stored
into the Novram module.
Solution
1.
Cycle power. Run the
print job again. If the
message appears, load
the latest emulation
software.
2. Cycle power. Run the
print job again. If the
message appears again,
record the exact display
message, follow the
instructions on page 296,
“Diagnostics for EXX,
BAD NVM, or ILL NVM
Errors”, and contact your
authorized service
representative.1
ILLGL OPR ACCSS*
No
Illegal Operand
Accessed. Firmware
error on controller board.
Contact your authorized
service representative.1
INITIALIZING...
Yes
This message indicates
the printer is beginning its
initialization process.
No action is required.
INTAKE FAN CHECK
Yes
Sensor cannot detect
current in fan circuit.
Cycle power. If the message
appears, press CLEAR. If the
message does not clear,
contact your authorized
service representative.1
INTERRUPT UNUSED
VECTOR 00
No
The controller board
receives an interrupt it
does not understand. The
problem can be created
by electrical noise, by a
software problem, or by a
hardware problem.
Cycle power. If this message
occurred once and never
again, you can ignore it. If the
message reappears or
appears consistently, contact
your authorized service
representative.1
LO DRV. SHORT *
No
Lower Driver Short.
Circuit(s) on the hammer
bank or in the hammer
bank power cable
shorted to ground.
Contact your authorized
service representative.1
LOAD PAPER
Yes
Printer is out of paper.
Load paper and press
CLEAR.
307
Chapter
8
Fault Messages (ASCII in Alphabetical Order)
Table 1. LCD Message Troubleshooting Table (ASCII)
Displayed Message
Can User
Correct?
Explanation
Solution
LOADING PROGRAM
FROM PORT XX%
No
Status message: the new
emulation program is
loading into printer RAM.
XX% indicates how much
of the program has
loaded.
No action is required.
LOADING PROGRAM INTO
FLASH
No
The printer has deleted
the previous program
from flash memory and is
loading the new program
into flash memory.
No action is required.
NEW SPX DETECTED
PRESS ENTER
No
The printer detects an
SPX installed at the
debug port and the SPX
is valid for the printer.
Contact your authorized
service representative.1
NON VOLATILE MEMORY
FAILED
No
Large emulations reduce
the amount of space
available for saving
configurations, which
means that sometimes
fewer than eight
configurations can be
saved.
Contact your authorized
service representative.1
ONLINE
N/A
Printer state message:
printer is online and in
communication with host.
No action is required.
PANEL
BAD CHECKSUM
No
Panel Code has a bad
Checksum.
Reload released firmware.
PAP BAD TABLE*
No
Paper Bad Table. The
paper feed process on
the controller board has a
corrupted table.
Contact your authorized
service representative.1
PAP FD DRVR CIR*
See Manual
No
Paper Feed Driver
Circuit. The paper feed
driver circuit on the
controller board is
drawing too much
current.
Contact your authorized
service representative.1
PAP FIFO OVERFL*
No
Paper First In First Out
Overflow. Firmware error
on controller board.
Contact your authorized
service representative.1
PAP FIFO UNDRFL*
No
Paper First In First Out
Underflow. Firmware
error on controller board.
Contact your authorized
service representative.1
308
Fault Messages (ASCII inPrinting
Alphabetical
a HexOrder)
Dump
Table 1. LCD Message Troubleshooting Table (ASCII)
Displayed Message
Can User
Correct?
Explanation
Solution
PAP ILLGL ST*
No
Paper Illegal State.
Firmware error on
controller board.
Contact your authorized
service representative.1
PAP INVLD CMD*
No
Paper Invalid Command.
Firmware error on
controller board.
Contact your authorized
service representative.1
PAP INVLD PARM*
No
Paper Invalid Parameter.
Firmware error on
controller board.
Contact your authorized
service representative.1
PAPER REQUESTED
Install A4
Yes
A paper size mismatch is
detected.
Check the paper size setting
and if necessary, load new
media and change the paper
size menu option.
PARITY ERROR
Yes
The printed output may
contain a random ?
(question mark)
characters.
Check your printer serial
interface parameter settings; if
necessary, adjust them so that
they match the settings of the
attached host.
PLAT INV CMD*
No
Platen Invalid Command.
Firmware error on
controller board.
Contact your authorized
service representative.1
PLAT INV PARM*
No
Platen Invalid Parameter.
Firmware error on
controller board.
Contact your authorized
service representative.1
PLAT INV STATE*
No
Platen Invalid State.
Firmware error on
controller board.
Contact your authorized
service representative.1
PLEASE WAIT...
RESET IN PROGRESS
N/A
Status message: the
printer finished loading
the program into flash
memory and is
automatically resetting
itself.
No action is required.
POWER SUPPLY HOT
Yes
Power supply sensors
report high temperatures.
Check printer environment. If
hot or dusty, relocate printer.
Contact your authorized
service representative if this
occurs frequently.1
PRINTER HOT
Yes
This message indicates
internal temperatures of
80° Celsius or higher
(176° Fahrenheit).
Check printer environment. If
hot or dusty, relocate printer.
Contact your authorized
service representative if this
occurs frequently.1
309
Chapter
8
Fault Messages (ASCII in Alphabetical Order)
Table 1. LCD Message Troubleshooting Table (ASCII)
Displayed Message
Can User
Correct?
Explanation
Solution
PRINTER UNDER REMOTE
CONTROL
No
Status message: The
printer is under the
control of PrintNet
Enterprise (PNE) remote
management software.
No action is required.
PROCESSOR HALTED
EC_FAULT_RTSYS2
No
Real-time System
Firmware error on
controller board.
Contact your authorized
service representative.1
PROTECTED INSTR*
No
Protected Instruction.
Firmware error on
controller board.
Contact your authorized
service representative.1
PS/PDF ERROR:
CHECK ERROR
Yes
Fault displayed when
Postscript/PDF failed to
process a job. One or
more of the following
errors were detected:
Type Check, Limit Check,
Range Check, or No
Current Point Defined.
Check the Postscript/PDF job
for syntax (Postscript) errors.
Clear the fault. Postscript/PDF
will continue with the next job.
PS/PDF ERROR:
DICTIONARY ERROR
Yes
Fault displayed when
Postscript/PDF failed to
process a job. One or
more of the following
errors were detected:
Dictionary Full, Dictionary
Stack Overflow, or
Dictionary Stack
Underflow.
Check the Postscript/PDF job
for syntax (Postscript) errors.
Clear the fault. Postscript/PDF
will continue with the next job.
PS/PDF ERROR:
INVALID ACCESS
Yes
Fault displayed when
Postscript/PDF failed to
process a job. One or
more of the following
errors were detected:
Invalid Access, Invalid
Font, or Invalid Exit.
Check the Postscript/PDF job
for syntax (Postscript) errors.
Clear the fault. Postscript/PDF
will continue with the next job.
PS/PDF ERROR:
I/O ERROR
Yes
Fault displayed when
Postscript/PDF failed to
process a job. One or
more of the following
errors were detected: I/O
Error, Invalid File Access,
Undefined File, Interrupt,
or Time Out.
Check the Postscript/PDF job
for syntax (Postscript) errors.
Clear the fault. Postscript/PDF
will continue with the next job.
310
Fault Messages (ASCII inPrinting
Alphabetical
a HexOrder)
Dump
Table 1. LCD Message Troubleshooting Table (ASCII)
Displayed Message
Can User
Correct?
Explanation
Solution
PS/PDF ERROR:
JOB ABORTED
Yes
Fault displayed when
Postscript/PDF failed to
process a job, e.g. an
unsupported command or
a large job which requires
more DRAM to process.
Clear the fault. Postscript/PDF
will continue with the next job.
PS/PDF ERROR:
STACK ERROR
Yes
Fault displayed when
Postscript/PDF failed to
process a job. One or
more of the following
errors were detected:
Stack Overflow, Stack
Underflow, Exec Stack
Overflow, or Invalid
Restore.
Check the Postscript/PDF job
for syntax (Postscript) errors.
Clear the fault. Postscript/PDF
will continue with the next job.
PS/PDF ERROR:
SYNTAX ERROR
Yes
Fault displayed when
Postscript/PDF failed to
process a job. One or
more of the following
errors were detected:
Syntax Error, Unmatched
Mark, Undefined,
Undefined Results, or
Unknown Error.
Check the Postscript/PDF job
for syntax (Postscript) errors.
Clear the fault. Postscript/PDF
will continue with the next job.
PWR SUPP VOLT *
No
Power Supply Voltage.
The power supply has
failed.
Replace power supply board.
REMOVE USED SPX
THEN PRESS ENTER
No
Status message: An SPX
is depleted because it
has successfully
reprogrammed the
security key on the
controller board.
Contact your authorized
service representative.1
RESTORING BOOT CODE
No
Normal download
initialization message.
No action is required.
RIB INVLD CMD*
See User Manual
Yes
Ribbon Invalid
Command. Firmware
error on the controller
board.
Cycle power. Run the print job
again. If the message
appears, download the
emulation software again. If
the message appears again,
contact your authorized
service representative.1
RIBBON STALL
Yes
The controller board does
not detect ribbon
movement.
Check the ribbon path for
jams. Turn the Ribbon Tension
Knob clockwise a few
rotations. If necessary, install
a new ribbon.
311
Chapter
8
Fault Messages (ASCII in Alphabetical Order)
Table 1. LCD Message Troubleshooting Table (ASCII)
Displayed Message
Can User
Correct?
Explanation
Solution
RIBBON UNDER 2%
Change RBN Soon
Yes
Status message
indicating the Integrated
Print Management
System is enabled and
ribbon ink level is 2%.
Install a new ribbon.
SD CARD ERROR
Remove SD Card
Yes
The printer has been
powered up with a card in
the SD slot, but the card
is not functioning
properly. The card could
be a compact flash card
or a non-supported card.
Power down, reseat card, and
power up again. If error
persists, power down, remove
card, and try another card.
SD FILE EXISTS
Enable Overwrite
Yes
A write operation to the
SD has failed because
the file already exists on
the SD card and the
overwriting of existing
files is disabled.
Enable overwriting of files on
the SD using the overwrite
files menu.
SD FILESYS FULL
Delete Files
Yes
The SD file system is
completely full.
Delete files on the SD card to
make space.
SD FILESYS FULL
File Too Big
Yes
A write operation to the
SD has failed because
the file is too big to fit in
the remaining space on
the SD card.
Delete files on the SD card to
make space.
SD FILESYS WRITE
Check SD
Yes
A write operation to the
SD has failed for an
unknown reason.
Ensure that the S
D card is inserted correctly
and that the SD card is a
supported SDHC card.
SD INSERTED
Reboot Printer
Yes
The SD card has been
inserted after the printer
was already powered up.
Turn off the printer and insert
the SD card only when the
printer is not powered on.
SD NOT FOUND
Insert SD Card
Pwr Off Printer
Yes
A write operation to the
SD could not be
performed because the
SD card was not
detected.
Ensure that an SD card is
inserted correctly and that the
SD card is a supported SDHC
card.
SD READING
Do not Remove
Yes
The SD card is currently
reading files.
Wait until reading completes.
SD REMOVED
Reboot Printer
Yes
The SD card has been
removed after the printer
was already powered up.
Turn off the printer and
remove the SD card only
when the printer is off.
312
Fault Messages (ASCII inPrinting
Alphabetical
a HexOrder)
Dump
Table 1. LCD Message Troubleshooting Table (ASCII)
Displayed Message
Can User
Correct?
Explanation
Solution
SD WRITE FAIL
WRITE PROTECTED
Check SD Card
Yes
A write operation to the
SD has failed because
the SD card is write
protected.
Ensure that the write protect
tab on the SD card is not
active. If the write protect tab
is not active, use another SD
card.
SD WRITING
Do not Remove
Yes
The SD card is currently
writing or erasing files.
Wait until the write or erase
operation completes.
SDSC CARD
NOT SUPPORTED
Remove SD Card
Yes
The printer has been
powered up with an
SDSC card, and SDSC
cards (< 4 GB) are not
supported.
Power down, remove SD card,
and insert an SDHC card in
the printer.
SECURITY VIOLATION*
No
Security code of PAL on
controller board does not
match code of firmware
on the controller board.
Contact your authorized
service representative.1
SECURITY KEY NOT
DETECTED
No
The security key is not
present or has failed.
Contact your authorized
service representative.1
SF ERROR
No
Structured Field Error.
Application software has
violated structured data
field parameters.
Not a printer problem. Have
the system administrator
correct applications data or
configuration.
SHUT DRVR CIR*
See User Manual
No
The shuttle driver circuit
on the controller board is
drawing too much
current.
Contact your authorized
service representative.1
SHUTL INV CMD*
No
Shuttle Invalid
Command. Firmware
error on controller board.
Contact your authorized
service representative.1
SHUTL INV PARM*
No
Shuttle Invalid
Parameter. Firmware
error on controller board.
Contact your authorized
service representative.1
SHUTL OVR SPEED*
No
The shuttle is oscillating
too rapidly.
Contact your authorized
service representative.1
SHUTTLE JAM
Yes
No shuttle movement or
shuttle moving at the
wrong speed.
Check for obstruction to
shuttle, a twisted ribbon, or
platen lever closed too tightly.
If fault source is not apparent,
contact your authorized
service representative.1
313
Chapter
8
Fault Messages (ASCII in Alphabetical Order)
Table 1. LCD Message Troubleshooting Table (ASCII)
Displayed Message
Can User
Correct?
Explanation
Solution
SHUTTLE STALL
Yes
The shuttle is not moving.
Set the platen lever to match
the thickness of paper, but not
too tightly. Check and adjust
the platen gap. Inspect the
ribbon mask for deformation
that snags and interferes with
shuttle movement. If fault
source is not apparent,
contact your authorized
service representative.1
SHUTTLE TYPE NOT
SUPPORTED*
No
The shuttle type was not
detected at power-up or
the shuttle installed in the
printer is not supported
by the firmware.
Contact your authorized
service representative.1
SOFTWARE ERROR*
CYCLE POWER
No
Application software tried
to perform illegal printer
function, or damaged
logic circuits found on
controller board.
Contact your authorized
service representative.1
SPX FOUND, ERROR:
KEY NOT DETECTED
No
The controller board does
not have a security key.
Contact your authorized
service representative.1
SPX NOT NEEDED
OPTIONS ENABLED
No
The user has attempted
to use the SPX to turn on
printer options that are
already enabled.
Contact your authorized
service representative.1
STACKER FAULT
Yes
Stacker is not functioning
correctly.
Check for obstructions in the
stacker area. If fault persists,
contact your authorized
service representative.1
STACKER FULL
Yes
Status message: the
power paper stacker is
full of paper.
Unload the stacker. If fault
persists, contact your
authorized service
representative.1
STACKER JAM
Yes
This message is
triggered if there is paper
inside the throat of the
stacker elevator, but the
elevator is not moving.
1. Open the cabinet rear door
and check for obstructions
preventing elevator
movement. Remove any
obstructions.
2. Run the print job again. If
the message appears again,
contact your authorized
service representative.1
314
Fault Messages (H-Series with
Numerical
Printing
a HexPrefix)
Dump
Table 1. LCD Message Troubleshooting Table (ASCII)
Displayed Message
Can User
Correct?
Explanation
Solution
TCB CORRUPTED*
No
Task Control Block
Corrupted. Firmware
error on controller board.
Contact your authorized
service representative.1
TCP PORT BUSY
Yes
Error message reported
by the Printer Manager
when ethernet interface
option is installed. The
network address given in
the printer properties was
reached, but the printer
port is busy.
Refer to the Printronix P8000
Maintenance Manual.
UP DRV. SHORT*
No
Upper Driver Short.
Hammer driver circuits on
the boards shorted to
ground.
Cycle power to see if the
message clears, if not, contact
your authorized service
representative.1
UPGRADED - REMOVE SPX
Downld code if needed
No
Status message: An SPX
has successfully
upgraded the
security key on the
controller board.
Remove SPX and download
code if needed.
WELD NOT DETECT
See User Manual
No
The cartridge weld was
not detected.
Contact your authorized
service representative.1
WELD SNSR ERROR
See User Manual
No
The cartridge sensor
could not be calibrated.
1.
Make sure your cartridge
is properly seated.
2. Contact your authorized
service representative. 1
WELD SNSR MISSING
See User Manual
Yes
The incorrect cartridge
type is being used for the
printer.
1.
Make sure the correct
ribbon cartridge type is
installed.
2. Make sure the cartridge is
properly seated.
3. Contact your authorized
service representative. 1
XXXX
CHECKING PATTERN
No
Running power on
memory test.
No action is required.
XXXX
MEMORY FAILURE
No
Memory in bank xxx has
failed. Power on memory
test.
Contact your authorized
service representative.1
XXXX
WRITING PATTERN
No
Running power on
memory test.
No action is required.
1
Before contacting an authorized service representative, power off the printer, wait 15 seconds, then
power it back on and rerun your print job. If the message reappears, press CLEAR. If the fault message
still displays, then contact your authorized service representative.
315
Chapter
8
Fault Messages (H-Series with Numerical Prefix)
Fault Messages (H-Series with Numerical Prefix)
If a fault condition occurs in the printer, the status indicator on the control
panel flashes on and off, and the message display indicates the specific fault.
Fault messages are summarized in Table 2. Many of the error messages for
H-Series have a numerical prefix to help the user find the description within
this manual.
Displayed faults fall into one of two categories:
•
•
Operator correctable
Field service required
For the operator correctable faults, follow the suggested solution in Table 2.
After correcting the displayed fault, press the CLEAR key to clear the error
message and status indicator, and resume printing. If the fault message
reappears, contact your authorized service representative.
NOTE: The Maintenance Manual provides more detailed information and
procedures for resolving fault conditions. However, many of the
procedures described there must be performed only by your
authorized service representative.
Fault Messages Requiring Field Service Attention
If a fault is not correctable by the operator, the fault message is followed by an
asterisk (*). This usually indicates that an authorized service representative is
needed. You may try two steps to clear the fault before calling your authorized
service representative:
1. Set the printer power switch to O (Off), wait 15 seconds, then turn the
printer on again. Run your print job again. If the message does not
appear, it was a false indication and no further attention is required.
2. If the message reappears, press the CLEAR key. If the message
disappears, it was a false indication and no further attention is required. If
the message reappears, call your authorized service representative.
316
Fault Messages (H-Series with
Numerical
Printing
a HexPrefix)
Dump
Table 2. LCD Message Troubleshooting Table (H-Series)
Displayed Message
Can User
Correct?
Explanation
Solution
000:SHUTTLE TYPE
NOT SUPPORTED*
No
The shuttle type was not
detected at power-up or the
shuttle installed in the printer
is not supported by the
firmware.
Contact your authorized service
representative.1
104:POWER SUPPLY
HOT
Yes
Power supply sensors report
high temperatures.
Check printer environment. If hot
or dusty, relocate printer.
Contact your authorized service
representative if this occurs
frequently.1
105:PRINTER HOT
Yes
This message indicates
internal temperatures of 80°
Celsius or higher (176°
Fahrenheit).
Check printer environment. If hot
or dusty, relocate printer.
Contact your authorized service
representative if this occurs
frequently.1
401:BUFFER
OVERRUN
Yes
The print buffer has
overflowed on a serial
interface. The printed output
may contain random *
(asterisk) characters. Make
a configuration printout.
Verify that the printer matches
the host serial interface
configuration settings for Data
Protocol, Baud Rate, Data Bits,
Stop Bits, Parity, Data Terminal
Ready, and Request to Send.
Set printer serial interface
parameters to match those of
the host.
402:CLEAR PAPER
JAM
Yes
No paper motion.
Clear jam and reload paper. If
this message recurs, contact
your authorized service
representative.1
403:CLOSE PLATEN
Yes
The platen lever is open.
Close the platen lever.
409:FRAMING ERROR
Yes
The printed output may
contain random !
(exclamation point)
characters.
Make a configuration printout.
Set printer serial interface
parameters to match host
configuration settings for Data
Protocol, Baud Rate, Data Bits,
Stop Bits, Parity, Data Terminal
Ready, and Request to Send.
410:LOAD PAPER
Yes
Printer is out of paper.
Load paper and press CLEAR.
411:PARITY ERROR
Yes
The printed output may
contain a random ?
(question mark) characters.
Check your printer serial
interface parameter settings; if
necessary, adjust them so that
they match the settings of the
attached host.
317
Chapter
8
Fault Messages (H-Series with Numerical Prefix)
Table 2. LCD Message Troubleshooting Table (H-Series)
Displayed Message
Can User
Correct?
414:RIBBON STALL
Yes
The controller board does
not detect ribbon movement.
Check the ribbon path for jams.
Turn the Ribbon Tension Knob
clockwise a few rotations. If
necessary, install a new ribbon.
415:SHUTTLE JAM
Yes
No shuttle movement or
shuttle moving at the wrong
speed.
Check for obstruction to shuttle,
a twisted ribbon, or platen lever
closed too tightly. If fault source
is not apparent, contact your
authorized service
representative.1
416:STACKER FULL
Yes
Status message: the power
paper stacker is full of paper.
Unload the stacker. If fault
persists, contact your authorized
service representative.1
417:STACKER JAM
Yes
This message is triggered if
there is paper inside the
throat of the stacker
elevator, but the elevator is
not moving.
1.
Explanation
Solution
Open the cabinet rear door
and check for obstructions
preventing elevator
movement. Remove any
obstructions.
2. Run the print job again. If
the message appears
again, contact your
authorized service
representative.1
418:RBN INK LOW
Change RBN Soon
Yes
Status message indicating
the Integrated Print
Management System is
enabled and ribbon ink level
is 2%.
Install a new ribbon cartridge.
419:RBN INK OUT*
Install New RBN
Yes
Integrated Print
Management System
software has determined
that the ribbon is out of ink.
Install a new ribbon cartridge.
420:EXC RBN WEAR
Install New RBN
Yes
Status message that
displays when ribbon
reaches end of life, whether
the Integrated Print
Management System is
enabled or not.
Install a new ribbon cartridge.
423:OLD RIBBON
Install New RBN
Yes
The sensor detects a ribbon
that was previously declared
to be at the end of its service
life.
Install a new ribbon cartridge.
425:UNKNOWN RBN2
Install New RBN
Yes
The sensor detects a bar
code, but the region code
does not match the printer.
Install a new ribbon cartridge.
318
Fault Messages (H-Series with
Numerical
Printing
a HexPrefix)
Dump
Table 2. LCD Message Troubleshooting Table (H-Series)
Displayed Message
427:CRTG MISSING
Install new cart
Press ONLINE
Can User
Correct?
Yes
Explanation
The ribbon cartridge is
missing or installed
improperly.
Solution
1.
Make sure a ribbon
cartridge is installed in the
printer.
2. Make sure the ribbon
cartridge is seated properly.
3. Remove and replace the
cartridge if necessary.
4. Contact your authorized
customer service
representative.1
428:CRTG COMM ER
See User Manual
No
The hardware cannot
communicate properly with
the cartridge.
1.
Make sure the ribbon
cartridge is seated properly.
2. Remove and replace the
ribbon cartridge if
necessary.
3. Contact your authorized
service representative.1
432:CRT NOT SET
Yes
The ribbon cartridge is not
correctly positioned.
1.
Make sure a ribbon
cartridge is installed in the
printer.
2. Make sure the ribbon
cartridge is seated properly.
3. Remove and replace the
cartridge if necessary.
4. Contact your authorized
customer service
representative.1
435:NO WELD
See User Manual
No
The cartridge weld was not
detected.
Contact your authorized service
representative.1
437:REG MISSING
Use Correct RBN
Yes
The incorrect cartridge type
is being used for the printer.
Install region X ribbon cartridge
in the printer.
NOTE: Specify the region of
the printer when
ordering ribbons.
438:TIP MISMATCH
Use Correct RBN
Yes
The incorrect cartridge type
is being used for the printer.
Install the correct ribbon
cartridge type in the printer.
439:SHTL MISMATCH
Use Correct RBN
Yes
This message displays when
an Extended Life Ribbon is
mounted on a 500 lpm
printer.
Install Standard Life Ribbon.
445:SD INSERTED
Reboot Printer
Yes
The SD card has been
inserted after the printer was
already powered up.
Turn off the printer and insert the
SD card only when the printer is
not powered on.
319
Chapter
8
Fault Messages (H-Series with Numerical Prefix)
Table 2. LCD Message Troubleshooting Table (H-Series)
Displayed Message
Can User
Correct?
Explanation
Solution
446:SD REMOVED
Reboot Printer
Yes
The SD card has been
removed after the printer
was already powered up.
Turn off the printer and remove
the SD card only when the
printer is off.
447:SD FL EXIST
Enable Overwrite
Yes
A write operation to the SD
has failed because the file
already exists on the SD
card and the overwriting of
existing files is disabled.
Enable overwriting of files on the
SD using the overwrite files
menu.
448:SD WRT. FAIL
WRITE PROTECTED
Check SD Card
Yes
A write operation to the SD
has failed because the SD
card is write protected.
Ensure that the write protect tab
on the SD card is not active. If
the write protect tab is not active,
use another SD card.
449:SD FILE WRITE
Check SD
Yes
A write operation to the SD
has failed for an unknown
reason.
Ensure that the SD card is
inserted correctly and that the
SD card is a supported SDHC
card.
450:SD FILE FULL
File Too Big
Yes
A write operation to the SD
has failed because the file is
too big to fit in the remaining
space on the SD card.
Delete files on the SD card to
make space.
451:SD NOT FOUND
Insert SD Card
Pwr Off Printer
Yes
A write operation to the SD
could not be performed
because the SD card was
not detected.
Ensure that an SD card is
inserted correctly and that the
SD card is a supported SDHC
card.
452:SD FILE FULL
Delete Files
Yes
The SD file system is
completely full.
Delete files on the SD card to
make space.
453:SD READING
Do not Remove
Yes
The SD card is currently
reading files.
Wait until reading completes.
454:SD WRITING
Do not Remove
Yes
The SD card is currently
writing or erasing files.
Wait until the write or erase
operation completes.
607:CTL VOLT FAIL*
No
Controller Voltage Failure.
15 V failure on the controller
board.
Contact your authorized service
representative.1
608:DRIVER CIRCUIT
BAD
No
Driver Circuit Bad. The
hammer coil count test
failed.
Contact your authorized service
representative.1
320
Fault Messages (H-Series with
Numerical
Printing
a HexPrefix)
Dump
Table 2. LCD Message Troubleshooting Table (H-Series)
Displayed Message
Can User
Correct?
Explanation
Solution
609:EXHAUST FAN
CHECK
(Cabinet model only)
Yes
Sensor cannot detect current
in fan circuit.
Power off the printer and remove
the paper path (see
Maintenance Manual). Check
that the fan cable connector is
connected. Check for
obstruction of vents and fan
airway, and remove any
obstructions. Check for items
beneath the printer blocking
cabinet vents. Power back on
the printer. If this message
appears again, contact your
authorized service
representative.1
613: HAM. COIL BAD
#, #, #, ...etc
No
Hammer coil # failed current
test at power up.
Contact your authorized service
representative.1
614:HAMMER BANK*
NOT INSTALLED
No
Hammer Bank Not Installed.
Self-test routines do not
detect hammer coils at
printer start-up.
Contact your authorized service
representative.1
615:HAMMER FAN
CHECK
Yes
Sensor cannot detect current
in fan circuit.
Check that fan cable is
connected. Check for
obstruction of vents and fan
airway; remove any
obstructions. Check for items
beneath the printer blocking
cabinet vents. Power back on
the printer. If this message
recurs, contact your authorized
service representative.1
617:LOWER DRIVER
SHORT*
No
Lower Driver Short.
Circuit(s) on the hammer
bank or in the hammer bank
power cable shorted to
ground.
Contact your authorized service
representative.1
619:PAPER FEED
DRIVER CIRCUIT*
See Manual
No
Paper Feed Driver Circuit.
The paper feed driver circuit
on the controller board is
drawing too much current.
Contact your authorized service
representative.1
620:POWER VOLT
CHECK*
No
Power Supply Voltage. The
power supply has failed.
Replace power supply board.
622:SHUTTLE
DRIVER CRCUIT*
No
The shuttle driver circuit on
the controller board is
drawing too much current.
Contact your authorized service
representative.1
321
Chapter
8
Fault Messages (H-Series with Numerical Prefix)
Table 2. LCD Message Troubleshooting Table (H-Series)
Displayed Message
Can User
Correct?
623:STACKER FAULT
Yes
Stacker is not functioning
correctly.
Check for obstructions in the
stacker area. If fault persists,
contact your authorized service
representative.1
624:UPPER DRIVER
SHORT*
No
Upper Driver Short. Hammer
driver circuits on the boards
shorted to ground.
Cycle power to see if the
message clears, if not, contact
your authorized service
representative.1
702:FIRMWARE
ERROR*
No
Application software tried to
perform an illegal printer
function or damaged
memory detected on the
controller board.
Contact your authorized service
representative.1
703:ILLEGAL
EXTERNAL BUS ACC*
No
Illegal External Bus Access.
Firmware error on the
controller board.
Contact your authorized service
representative.1
704:ILLEGAL
INSTRUCTION ACC*
No
Illegal Instruction Accessed.
Firmware error on the
controller board.
Contact your authorized service
representative.1
705:ILLEGAL
OPERAND ACCESS*
No
Illegal Operand Accessed.
Firmware error on controller
board.
Contact your authorized service
representative.1
706:PAP BAD TABLE*
No
Paper Bad Table. The paper
feed process on the
controller board has a
corrupted table.
Contact your authorized service
representative.1
708:PAPER FIFO
OVERFLOW*
No
Paper First In First Out
Overflow. Firmware error on
controller board.
Contact your authorized service
representative.1
709:PAPER FIFO
UNDERFLOW*
No
Paper First In First Out
Underflow. Firmware error
on controller board.
Contact your authorized service
representative.1
710:PAP ILLGL ST*
No
Paper Illegal State. Firmware
error on controller board.
Contact your authorized service
representative.1
712:PAP INVLD CMD*
No
Paper Invalid Command.
Firmware error on controller
board.
Contact your authorized service
representative.1
713:PAP INVLD
PARM*
No
Paper Invalid Parameter.
Firmware error on controller
board.
Contact your authorized service
representative.1
322
Explanation
Solution
Fault Messages (H-Series with
Numerical
Printing
a HexPrefix)
Dump
Table 2. LCD Message Troubleshooting Table (H-Series)
Displayed Message
Can User
Correct?
717:PLAT INV CMD*
Explanation
Solution
No
Platen Invalid Command.
Firmware error on controller
board.
Contact your authorized service
representative.1
718:PLAT INV PARM*
No
Platen Invalid Parameter.
Firmware error on controller
board.
Contact your authorized service
representative.1
719:PLAT INV STATE*
No
Platen Invalid State.
Firmware error on controller
board.
Contact your authorized service
representative.1
720:PROTECTED
INSTRUCTION*
No
Protected Instruction.
Firmware error on controller
board.
Contact your authorized service
representative.1
721:RIB INVLD CMD*
See User Manual
Yes
Ribbon Invalid Command.
Firmware error on the
controller board.
Cycle power. Run the print job
again. If the message appears,
download the emulation
software again. If the message
appears again, contact your
authorized service
representative.1
723:SHUTL INV CMD*
No
Shuttle Invalid Command.
Firmware error on controller
board.
Contact your authorized service
representative.1
724 SHUTL INV
PARM*
No
Shuttle Invalid Parameter.
Firmware error on controller
board.
Contact your authorized service
representative.1
725:SHUTL OVER
SPEED*
No
The shuttle is oscillating too
rapidly.
Contact your authorized service
representative.1
727:SOFTWARE
ERROR*
No
Application software tried to
perform illegal printer
function, or damaged logic
circuits found on controller
board.
Contact your authorized service
representative.1
730:TCB
CORRUPTED*
No
Task Control Block
Corrupted. Firmware error
on controller board.
Contact your authorized service
representative.1
733 DP FIFO Busy*
Yes
There is a timing problem in
the Engine Controller
firmware.
1.
Cycle power. Run the print
job again. If the message
reappears, download the
emulation software again.
2. Cycle power. Run the print
job again. If the message
reappears, contact your
authorized service
representative. 1
323
Chapter
8
Fault Messages (H-Series with Numerical Prefix)
Table 2. LCD Message Troubleshooting Table (H-Series)
Displayed Message
Can User
Correct?
Explanation
Solution
B12 ERROR:
PROGRAM MISSING*
Yes
The printer does not see a
program in flash memory.
There is no program in printer
memory. Download printer
firmware again.
B13 ERROR: NOT
COMPATIBLE*
No
Attempting to download a
program that is not
compatible with the printer.
Cycle power to see if the
message clears, if not, contact
your authorized service
representative.1
B20 STATUS :00%
DOWNLOAD MODE
No
Status message informing
the operator that software is
being downloaded.
Percentage figure indicates
approximate amount loaded
into the printer.
No action is required.
B21 STATUS:
PRINTER RESET
No
Status message informing
the operator that the printer
is undergoing a system
reset.
No action is required.
B22 ERROR:
DECOMPRESS SIZE*
No
FLASH memory has not
passed boot initialization
tests.
Cycle power to see if the
message clears, if not, contact
your authorized service
representative.1
B23 ERROR:
DECOMPRESS
CKSUM*
No
FLASH memory has not
passed boot initialization
tests.
Cycle power to see if the
message clears, if not, contact
your authorized service
representative.1
B30 STATUS:
INITIALIZING...
N/A
Status message: the printer
is running its initialization
routines after startup and
successful memory tests.
No action is required.
B50 STATUS:
PANEL CODE BAD
No
Saved version of Panel
Code is corrupt.
Reload released Firmware.
B51 STATUS: XX%
LOADING...
No
Status message: printer
boot-up routines are loading
printer system software into
flash memory and SDRAM.
No action required.
324
Fault Messages (H-Series with
Numerical
Printing
a HexPrefix)
Dump
Table 2. LCD Message Troubleshooting Table (H-Series)
Displayed Message
BAD NVM CALL 1
BAD NVM CALL 2
BAD NVM CALL 3
BAD NVM CALL 4
BAD NVM CALL A
Can User
Correct?
Yes
Explanation
Printer firmware code error
with the Novram module that
stores configurations and
statistics.
Solution
1.
Cycle power. Run the print
job again. If the message
appears, load the latest
emulation software.
2. Cycle power. Run the print
job again. If the message
appears again, record the
exact display message and
follow the instructions on
page 296, “Diagnostics for
EXX, BAD NVM, or ILL
NVM Errors”, and contact
your authorized service
representative.1
Bxx ERROR: NO
DOWNLOADER
FOUND
No
No Downloader was found
while downloading a file.
Reload released Firmware.
CATASTROPHIC
ERROR
No
Fatal error in printer.
Contact your authorized
customer service
representative.1
CLEARING
PROGRAM FROM
FLASH
No
Status message: emulation
software successfully loaded
into printer RAM and the
checksum matched. The old
program is now being
deleted from flash memory.
No action is required.
D50 Status
UPGRADING PANEL
No
Status message: The printer
is upgrading the panel,
where %XX represents the
percentage completed.
No action is required.
D51 Status %XX
Programming...
No
Status message: The printer
is loading firmware, where
%XX represents the
percentage completed.
No action is required.
DIAGNOSTIC
PASSED
No
Status message: the printer
passed its memory and
hardware initialization tests.
No action is required.
DO NOT POWER OFF
No
Status message: The printer
is performing an operation
that must be completed
before you can cycle power.
No action is required, but do not
power off the printer until the
operation is complete.
325
Chapter
8
Fault Messages (H-Series with Numerical Prefix)
Table 2. LCD Message Troubleshooting Table (H-Series)
Displayed Message
E00 EXE @ ADDR0
E01A TYPE 0x40
E01B TYPE 0x60
E02 MACHINE CHK
E03A DSI HASH L
E03B DSI HASH S
E03C DSI BAT PL
E03D DSI BAT PS
E03E DSI CXIWX
E03F DSI CXOWX
E03G DSI ECXIWX
E03H DSI ECXOWX
E04A ISI NO TRA
E04B ISI DIRECT
E04C ISI PROTEC
E06 NOT ALIGNED
E07 ILLEGAL INS
E08 FLOATINGPNT
E12 SYSTEM CALL
E13 TRACE INT
E16 ITRANS MISS
E17 DLOAD MISS
E18 DSTORE MISS
E19 BREAKPOINT
E20 SYS MANAGE
E30 DEBUGGER
E31A EVENT 0 BP
E31B EVENT 1 BP
E31C EVENT 2 BP
E31D EVENT 3 BP
E31E EVENT 4 BP
E31F EVENT 5 BP
E31G EVENT 6 BP
E31H EVENT 7 BP
E32A CND 0 BP
E32B CND 1 BP
E32C CND 2 BP
E32D CND 3 BP
E32E CND 4 BP
E32F CND 5 BP
E32G CND 6 BP
E32H CND 7 BP
E33 WRITE BP
E34 TRACE CMPLT
E99 UNKNOWN INT
See User Manual
326
Can User
Correct?
Yes
Explanation
An illegal or unsupported
instruction was attempted in
the application program.
Solution
1.
Cycle power. Run the print
job again. If the message
appears, load the latest
emulation software.
2. Cycle power. Run the print
job again. If the message
appears again, record the
exact display message,
follow the instructions on
page 296, “Diagnostics for
EXX, BAD NVM, or ILL
NVM Errors”, and contact
your authorized service
representative.1
3. Power off the printer.
Provide this fault message
and the messages you
recorded from the exception
menu to your next higher
support facility.
Fault Messages (H-Series with
Numerical
Printing
a HexPrefix)
Dump
Table 2. LCD Message Troubleshooting Table (H-Series)
Displayed Message
Can User
Correct?
E-Net Test Unavailable
Yes
The ethernet PCBA did not
initialize correctly.
Cycle power. Wait for “E-Net
Ready” to display, then retry
operation. If it still fails, contact
your authorized service
representative.1
ERROR NOR
FLASHED WAS
NOT CLEARED
No
Problem programming Boot
Code.
Contact your authorized service
representative.1
ERROR: DC
PROGRAM NOT
VALID
Yes
The printer cannot find the
data controller program or
the validation checksum is
corrupt.
Download the program again. If
the message appears, contact
your authorized service
representative.1
ERROR: LOCKED
SN=nnnnnnnnnnnnnnn
nnnnnn
No
nnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn is
the serial number of the
printer’s security key. The
SPX serial number does not
match the printer’s serial
number and cannot be used
with the printer.
Contact your authorized service
representative.1
ERROR: NVRAM
FAILURE
No
The non-volatile SRAM on
the controller board has
failed.
Contact your authorized service
representative.1
ERROR: PROGRAM
NOT COMPATIBLE
Yes
The printer is not compatible
with the downloaded
program.
Use the correct emulation
software options(s) for this
printer model.
ERROR: PROGRAM
NOT VALID
Yes
The printer does not see a
program in flash memory.
There is no program in printer
memory. Download the
emulation.
ERROR: SECURITY
KEY NOT DETECTED
No
The security key is not
present or failed.
Contact your authorized service
representative.1
ERROR: WRONG
CHECKSUM
No
The printer received the
complete program but the
checksum did not match.
The data may have been
corrupted during
downloading.
Contact your authorized service
representative.1
ERROR: WRONG
OEM
No
The SPX inserted in the
debug port is not intended
for this model printer or this
OEM.
Contact your authorized service
representative.1
ERROR: WRONG
PRINTER TYPE
No
The SPX inserted in the
debug port is not intended
for this model printer or this
OEM.
Contact your authorized service
representative.1
Explanation
Solution
327
Chapter
8
Fault Messages (H-Series with Numerical Prefix)
Table 2. LCD Message Troubleshooting Table (H-Series)
Displayed Message
Can User
Correct?
Explanation
Solution
ETHERNET
DETECTED
N/A
Status message indicating
that the Network Interface
Card has established
connection.
No action is required.
ETHERNET
INITIALIZING
No
Status message: the internal
Network Interface Card is
processing the boot
procedure. (May occur with
older versions of microcode.)
No action is required.
EXCEPTION ERROR
No
An EXCEPTION
INTERRUPT has occurred.
Contact your authorized service
representative.1
FLASH: CHECK
RETURN
No
Printer encountered an error
while trying to program Flash
memory.
Contact your authorized service
representative.1
FLASH: WAS NOT
CLEARED
No
Printer encountered an error
while trying to program Flash
memory.
Contact your authorized service
representative.1
FLASH: WRITE
ERROR # 2
No
Printer encountered an error
while trying to program Flash
memory.
Contact your authorized service
representative.1
GENERATING XX%
NAND FLASH TABLE
No
NAND FLASH is being read
and system tables are being
initialized.
No action is required.
H00: PCI SLOT ?
See User Manual
No
The controller board is not
communicating with a PCI
card. This could indicate a
bad PCI card, poor
connection, or problem in
the PCI bus.
Contact your authorized service
representative.1
H01: PCI J12
See User Manual
No
The controller board is not
communicating with the PCI
card in PCI slot J12. This
could indicate a bad PCI
card, poor connection, or
problem in the PCI bus.
Contact your authorized service
representative.1
328
Fault Messages (H-Series with
Numerical
Printing
a HexPrefix)
Dump
Table 2. LCD Message Troubleshooting Table (H-Series)
Displayed Message
Can User
Correct?
Explanation
Solution
<Online, etc...>
Half Speed Mode
No
Status message: The
controller samples the
operating temperature of key
components of the print
mechanism. When higher
than normal temperatures
are sensed, the print speed
is automatically reduced by
50% and the message sent
the LCD. When the
components cool down, the
print speed returns to 100%
and the message clears.
No action is required. If the
message appears often, contact
your authorized service
representative.1
ILL NVM VALUE 5
ILL NVM VALUE 6
ILL NVM VALUE 7
Yes
Illegal value was stored into
the Novram module.
1.
Cycle power. Run the print
job again. If the message
appears, load the latest
emulation software.
2. Cycle power. Run the print
job again. If the message
appears again, record the
exact display message,
follow the instructions on
page 296, “Diagnostics for
EXX, BAD NVM, or ILL
NVM Errors”, and contact
your authorized service
representative.1
INITIALIZING...
Yes
This message indicates the
printer is beginning its
initialization process.
No action is required.
INTAKE FAN CHECK
Yes
Sensors cannot detect
current in fan circuit.
Cycle power. If the message
appears, press CLEAR. If the
message does not clear, contact
your authorized service
representative.1
INTERRUPT UNUSED
VECTOR 00
No
The controller board
receives an interrupt it does
not understand. The problem
can be created by electrical
noise, by a software
problem, or by a hardware
problem.
Cycle power. If this message
occurred once and never again,
you can ignore it. If the message
reappears or appears
consistently, contact your
authorized service
representative.1
LOADING PROGRAM
FROM PORT XX%
No
Status message: the new
emulation program is loading
into printer RAM. XX%
indicates how much of the
program has loaded.
No action is required.
329
Chapter
8
Fault Messages (H-Series with Numerical Prefix)
Table 2. LCD Message Troubleshooting Table (H-Series)
Displayed Message
Can User
Correct?
Explanation
Solution
LOADING PROGRAM
INTO FLASH
No
The printer has deleted the
previous program from flash
memory and is loading the
new program into flash
memory.
No action is required.
NEW SPX DETECTED
PRESS ENTER
No
The printer detects an SPX
installed at the debug port
and the SPX is valid for the
printer.
Contact your authorized service
representative.1
NON VOLATILE
MEMORY FAILED
No
Large emulations reduce the
amount of space available
for saving configurations,
which means that
sometimes fewer than eight
configurations can be saved.
Contact your authorized service
representative.1
ONLINE
N/A
Printer state message:
printer is online and in
communication with host.
No action is required.
PANEL
BAD CHECKSUM
No
Panel Code has a bad
Checksum.
Reload released firmware.
PARAMETER ERROR*
No
Illegal parameter value
received in command code
over a TN emulation.
Contact your authorized service
representative.1
PLAT DRVR CIR
No
Platen driver circuit
malfunction.
Contact your authorized service
representative.1
PLEASE WAIT...
RESET IN
PROGRESS
N/A
Status message: the printer
finished loading the program
into flash memory and is
automatically resetting itself.
No action is required.
PRINTER UNDER
REMOTE CONTROL
No
Status message: The printer
is under the control of
PrintNet Enterprise (PNE)
remote management
software.
No action is required.
PROCESSOR
HALTED
EC_FAULT_RTSYS2
No
Real-time System Firmware
error on controller board.
Contact your authorized service
representative.1
REMOVE USED SPX
THEN PRESS ENTER
No
Status message: An SPX is
depleted because it has
successfully reprogrammed
the security key on the
controller board.
Contact your authorized service
representative.1
RESTORING BOOT
CODE
No
Normal download
initialization message.
No action is required.
330
Printing a Hex Dump
Table 2. LCD Message Troubleshooting Table (H-Series)
Displayed Message
Can User
Correct?
Explanation
Solution
SCS COMMAND
ERROR*
No
In the TN emulation, the
printer received undefined
control character (hex 40).
Contact your system
administrator.
SD CARD ERROR
Remove SD Card
Yes
The printer has been
powered up with a card in
the SD slot, but the card is
not functioning properly. The
card could be a compact
flash card or a nonsupported card.
Power down, reseat card, and
power up again. If error persists,
power down, remove card, and
try another card.
SDSC CARD
NOT SUPPORTED
Remove SD Card
Yes
The printer has been
powered up with an SDSC
card, and SDSC cards (< 4
GB) are not supported.
Power down, remove SD card,
and insert an SDHC card in the
printer.
SECURITY
VIOLATION*
No
Security code of PAL on
controller board does not
match code of firmware on
the controller board.
Contact your authorized service
representative.1
SECURITY KEY NOT
DETECTED
No
The security key is not
present or has failed.
Contact your authorized service
representative.1
SF ERROR
No
Structured Field Error.
Application software has
violated structured data field
parameters.
Not a printer problem. Have the
system administrator correct
applications data or
configuration.
SHUTTLE STALL
Yes
The shuttle is not moving.
Set the platen lever to match the
thickness of paper, but not too
tightly. Check and adjust the
platen gap. Inspect the ribbon
mask for deformation that snags
and interferes with shuttle
movement. If fault source is not
apparent, contact your
authorized service
representative.1
SPX FOUND, ERROR:
KEY NOT DETECTED
No
The controller board does
not have a security key.
Contact your authorized service
representative.1
SPX NOT NEEDED
OPTIONS ENABLED
No
The user has attempted to
use the SPX to turn on
printer options that are
already enabled.
Contact your authorized service
representative.1
SYS R/T ERROR
No
Software issue.
Contact your authorized service
representative.1
331
Chapter
8
Fault Messages (H-Series with Numerical Prefix)
Table 2. LCD Message Troubleshooting Table (H-Series)
Displayed Message
Can User
Correct?
TCP PORT BUSY
Yes
1
Explanation
Error message reported by
the Printer Manager when
ethernet interface option is
installed. The network
address given in the printer
properties was reached, but
the printer port is busy.
Solution
Refer to the Printronix P8000
Maintenance Manual.
Before contacting an authorized service representative, power off the printer, wait 15 seconds, then
power it back on and rerun your print job. If the message reappears, press CLEAR. If the fault message still
displays, then contact your authorized service representative.
332
A
Printer Specifications
Ribbon Cartridge Specifications
ASCII
P/N
Europe,
Middle East,
& Africa
North America,
Latin America
(excludes
Brazil), Canada
Asia Pacific
(excludes
China and
India)
India and
Brazil
Extended Life, 1 Pack
Extended Life, 4 Pack
-101
-401
-102
-402
-103
-403
-104
-104
Standard Life, 1 Pack
-101
-102
-103
-104
P/N
Europe,
Middle East,
& Africa
North America,
Latin America
(excludes
Brazil), Canada
Asia Pacific
(excludes
China and
India)
India and
Brazil
Extended Life, 1 Pack
Extended Life, 4 Pack
-101
-401
-102
-402
-103
-403
-104
-404
Standard Life, 1 Pack
Standard Life, 4 Pack
N/A
N/A
-103
-403
-104
-404
HD and H-Series
333
Appendix A
Paper Specifications
Paper Specifications
Type:
Edge-perforated, fan-fold, 3 to 17 inches (7.62 to 43.18 cm)
wide, 2 to 12 inches (5.08 to 30.48 cm) long.
SureStak Power Stacker option works with forms 5 to 12 inches
(12.7 to 30.48 cm) long and up to 16 inches (41 cm) wide without the paper tent or 15.5 inches (39.5 cm) wide with the paper
tent installed.
Thickness:
Single-part: 15 to 100 pound (56 to 163 g/m2) stock;
Multi-part: 1- to 6-part forms
Sheet Thickness:
0.025 inch (0.064 cm) maximum
Drive:
Adjustable tractors (6-pin engagement)
Labels
On Backing:
One-part continuous perforated fanfold back form. Labels must be placed at
least 1/6 inch (0.42 cm) from the fan-fold perforation. Backing adhesive must not
be squeezed out during printing.
Sheet Size:
3 to 17 inches (7.62 to 43.18 cm) wide, including the two standard perforated
tractor feed strips. A maximum sheet length of 16 inches (40.64 cm) between
top and bottom perforations.
NOTE: A 16 inch rear door is needed for the cabinet model. Power Paper
Stacker option is 5 to 12 inches (12.7 to 30.48 cm) long.
Thickness:
334
Not to exceed 0.025 inch (0.064 cm) (including backing sheet)
Printer Weight HD
andand
Dimensions
H-Series
Printer Weight and Dimensions
Cabinet Type
Dimensions
Weight
Height
(inches)
Width
(inches)
Depth
(inches)
Unpacked
(pounds)
Packaged
(pounds)
Tabletop (with riser)
18.25
25.75
19.48
100
124
Cabinet
42.5
27
29
200
260
Open Pedestal
35
24.5
27
115
153
Enclosed Pedestal
36
25.75
19.5
140
185
NOTE: For cabinet models
with a power stacker, the
weight increases by 21 lbs.
and the depth increases by
4.75 inches for a deeper
rear door.
Environmental Characteristics
Temperature:
Operating:
50° to 104° F (10° to 40° C) up to 5000 feet (1524 meters)
50° to 90° F (10° to 32° C) up to 6560 feet (2000 meters)
Storage:
-40° to 158° F (- 40° to 70° C)
Relative Humidity
Operating:
15% to 80% (noncondensing)
Storage:
15% to 90% (noncondensing)
335
Appendix A
Acoustic Noise Level
Acoustic Noise Level
Table 1. Acoustic Noise Levels per ISO 9296
Printer Models
Printing
Standby
Tabletop
65 dB (300 lpm, 500 lpm)
70 dB (600 lpm, 1000 lpm))
50 dB
Cabinet
50 dB (ASCII 500 lpm/1000 lpm)
52 dB (300 lpm, 1500 lpm)
55 dB (600 lpm, 800 lpm, 2000 lpm)
48 dB
Pedestal
62 dB (300 lpm, 500 lpm)
65 dB (600 lpm, 1000 lpm)
50 dB
Enclosed Pedestal
58 dB (300 lpm, 500 lpm)
60 dB (600 lpm, 1000 lpm)
48 dB
Zero Tear
66 dB (300 lpm, 500 lpm)
70 dB (600 lpm, 1000 lpm)
50 dB
336
Input Voltage (ASCII Models)
Electrical Characteristics
Input Voltage (ASCII Models)
Printer
Type
Configuration
Voltage
(+/-10%)
Freq
(+/-10%)
Amps
(Max)
Watts
(Typical)
BTU/Hr
(Typical)
Tabletop
P8005
AC 100-240V
50/60 Hz
5A
320W
1093
Tabletop
P8010
AC 100-240V
50/60 Hz
5A
320W
1093
Cabinet
P8205
AC 100-240V
50/60 Hz
5A
320W
1093
Cabinet
P8210
AC 100-240V
50/60 Hz
5A
320W
1093
Cabinet
P8215
AC 100-240V
50/60 Hz
9A
475W
1622
Cabinet
P8220
AC 100-240V
50/60 Hz
9A
475W
1622
Pedestal
P8005
AC 100-240V
50/60 Hz
5A
320W
1093
Pedestal
P8010
AC 100-240V
50/60 Hz
5A
320W
1093
Enclosed
Pedestal
P8005
AC 100-240V
50/60 Hz
5A
320W
1093
Enclosed
Pedestal
P8010
AC 100-240V
50/60 Hz
5A
320W
1093
Zero Tear
Pedestal
P8005ZT
AC 100-240V
50/60 Hz
5A
320W
1093
Zero Tear
Pedestal
P8010ZT
AC 100-240V
50/60 Hz
5A
320W
1093
The above values are calculated while printing 136 column, all upper case
high speed “E’s”. The stand-by (Energy Saver mode) wattage is 5W
(17 BTU/Hr) for all models.
337
Appendix A
Interfaces
Input Voltage (H-Series Models)
Printer
Type
Model
Voltage
(+/-10%)
Freq
(+/-10%)
Amps
(Max)
Watts
(Typical)
BTU/Hr
(Typical)
Tabletop
P8003H
AC 100-240V
50/60 Hz
5A
320W
1093
Tabletop
P8006H
AC 100-240V
50/60 Hz
9A
475W
1622
Tabletop
P8000HD
AC 100-240V
50/60 Hz
9A
475W
1622
Cabinet
P8203H
AC 100-240V
50/60 Hz
5A
320W
1622
Cabinet
P8206H
AC 100-240V
50/60 Hz
9A
475W
1622
Cabinet
P8208H
AC 100-240V
50/60 Hz
9A
475W
1622
Cabinet
P8200HD
AC 100-240V
50/60 Hz
9A
475W
1622
Pedestal
P8003H
AC 100-240V
50/60 Hz
5A
320W
2053
Pedestal
P8006H
AC 100-240V
50/60 Hz
9A
475W
2053
Enclosed
Pedestal
P8003H
AC 100-240V
50/60 Hz
5A
320W
1093
Enclosed
Pedestal
P8006H
AC 100-240V
50/60 Hz
9A
475W
1622
Zero Tear
Pedestal
P8003HZT
AC 100-240V
50/60 Hz
5A
320W
1622
Zero Tear
Pedestal
P8006HZT
AC 100-240V
50/60 Hz
9A
475W
1622
Zero Tear
Pedestal
P8000HDZT
AC 100-240V
50/60 Hz
9A
475W
1622
Interfaces
Type:
338
Standard:
USB 2.0 Universal Serial Bus
RS-232 serial
Optional:
IEEE 1284 Parallel
Centronics Parallel
Ethernet 10/100Base-T
Logic Levels:
TTL/EIA®-232E/EIA-422B
Transfer Rates:
Up to 200 Kilobytes on parallel interface.
Up to 115.2K baud on RS-232 serial interface.
PrintingModels)
Speed
Input Voltage (H-Series
Printing Speed
The printing speed of text is measured in lines per minute (lpm) and is a
function of the selected font and the vertical dot density. Printing speed is
independent of the number of characters configured in the character set
repertoire. Print rates for lines containing attributes such as bold or
emphasized printing, superscripts, subscripts, or elongated attributes will
decrease to not less than half the rates of the font without such attributes. The
exact print rate of lines containing these attributes depends on the specific
print job, but software maximizes the throughput by dynamically determining
which dot rows contain adjacent dots and must be printed in two strokes.
The reverse paper feed capability allows the printing of multiple densities on a
single line. This is useful in printing forms and text together or in mixing
different fonts on a print line. Use of multiple densities and reverse paper feed
also affects throughput.
339
Appendix A
340
Printing Speed
B
ASCII Character Set
KEY
B7 B6
B5
BITS
B4 B3B2 B1
0
1 0 1 1
ESC
0
1
33
27
1B
OCTAL equivalent
DECIMAL equivalent
HEX equivalent
ASCII Character Name
B7
BITS
B6
0
B5
0
0
0
COLUMN
B4 B3 B2 B1 ROW
0
00 0 0
0
NUL
00 0 1
1
SOH
00 1 0
2
STX
00 1 1
3
ETX
01 0 0
4
EOT
01 0 1
5
ENQ
01 1 0
6
ACK
01 1 1
7
BEL
10 0 0
8
BS
10 0 1
9
HT
10 1 0
10
LF
10 1 1
11
VT
11 0 0
12
FF
11 0 1
13
CR
11 1 0
14
SO
11 1 1
15
SI
0
0
1
1
1
0
20
0
DLE 16
0
10
1
21
DC1
1
17
1 (XON) 11
2
22
2
DC2 18
2
12
3
23
DC3
3
19
3 (XOFF) 13
4
24
DC4 20
4
4
14
5
25
NAK 21
5
5
15
6
26
SYN 22
6
6
16
7
27
ETB 23
7
7
17
10
30
CAN 24
8
18
8
31
11
EM
25
9
19
9
32
12
SUB 26
10
1A
0A
33
13
ESC 27
11
1B
0B
34
14
FS
28
12
1C
0C
35
15
29
13
GS
1D
0D
36
16
RS
30
14
1E
0E
37
17
31
15
US
1F
0F
0
1
0
2
SP
!
"
#
$
%
&
'
(
)
*
+
,
-
.
/
1
0
1
3
40
32
20
41
33
21
42
34
22
43
35
23
44
36
24
45
37
25
46
38
26
47
39
27
50
40
28
51
41
29
52
42
2A
53
43
2B
54
44
2C
55
45
2D
56
46
2E
57
47
2F
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
:
;
<
=
>
?
1
0
0
4
60
48
30
61
49
31
62
50
32
63
51
33
64
52
34
65
53
35
66
54
36
67
55
37
70
56
38
71
57
39
72
58
3A
73
59
3B
74
60
3C
75
61
3D
76
62
3E
77
63
3F
@
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
N
O
1
1
5
100
64
40
101
65
41
102
66
42
103
67
43
104
68
44
105
69
45
106
70
46
107
71
47
110
72
48
111
73
49
112
74
4A
113
75
4B
114
76
4C
115
77
4D
116
78
4E
117
79
4F
P
Q
R
S
T
U
V
W
X
Y
Z
[
\
]
^
_
1
1
6
120
80
50
121
81
51
122
82
52
123
83
53
124
84
54
125
85
55
126
86
56
127
87
57
130
88
58
131
89
59
132
90
5A
133
91
5B
134
92
5C
135
93
5D
136
94
5E
137
95
5F
a
b
c
d
e
f
g
h
i
j
k
l
m
n
o
1
0
1
7
140
96
60
141
97
61
142
98
62
143
99
63
144
100
64
145
101
65
146
102
66
147
103
67
150
104
68
151
105
69
152
106
6A
153
107
6B
154
108
6C
155
109
6D
156
110
6E
157
111
6F
p
q
r
s
t
u
v
w
x
y
z
{
|
}
~
DEL
160
112
70
161
113
71
162
114
72
163
115
73
164
116
74
165
117
75
166
118
76
167
119
77
170
120
78
171
121
79
172
122
7A
173
123
7B
174
124
7C
175
125
7D
176
126
7E
177
127
7F
341
Appendix B
342
ASCII Character Set
C
SureStak™ Power Stacker
Introduction
The SureStak Power Stacker is a factory-installed option that augments the
paper feed system of cabinet model printers. It is designed to work with forms
5 to 12 inches long (12.7 to 30.5 cm) and up to 16 inches (41 cm) wide without
the paper tent installed or up to 15.5 inches (39.5 cm) wide with the paper tent
installed. (See Figure 1.) Using longer or shorter paper can cause error
messages and unpredictable operation of the stacker.
Because most of the stacker assembly is inside the cabinet, you must remove
the stacker from the printer to service it or replace most of its components.
Stacker Operation
The power stacker mechanically directs the paper from the printer to the
paper stack. It is mounted in the rear of the cabinet and has its own control
panel. Its main components are shown in Figure 1.
Paper Throat
Rear Control
Panel
Elevator
Disable Switch
Paper Length
Indicator
Bearing Bracket
Pinch Rollers
184109a
Elevator Lift
Handle
Paper Tent
Figure 1. Power Stacker Component Locations
343
Appendix C
Stacker Operation
Setting Up the Power Stacker
1. Set the printer power switch to | (On).
2. If necessary, press the ONLINE key on the front panel or rear control
panel to take the printer offline. (Figure 2.)
3. Press the ELEVATOR UP key and wait for the elevator assembly to
reach the top of its travel. (Figure 2.)
A
/OF
ON
ON
F
LIN
E
A
ON LINE
PAPER ADVANCE
ELEVATOR UP
Figure 2. The Rear Control Panel
344
184108a
ELEVATOR DOWN
Stacker Operation
4. If the paper you will use is not wider than 15.5 inches (39.5 cm) pull out
the paper tray and install the wireform paper tent. (Figure 3.) If the paper
is wider than 15.5 inches (39.5 cm) leave the paper tent out of the printer.
A
Paper Tent
Paper Tray
A
184120a
Note the positions of
alignment tab and the
paper fence.
Figure 3. The Paper Tent
345
Appendix C
Stacker Operation
5. Push or pull the paddle shaft toward the front or the rear of the printer to
set the desired paper length. Align the indicator notch on the bearing
bracket with the paper length indicator. The power stacker can handle
paper or forms from 5 to 12 inches (12.7 to 30.5 cm) long. (Figure 4.)
A
Paddle Shaft
Paper Length Indicator
A
184114a
Bearing Bracket
Figure 4. The Paper Length Indicator
346
Stacker Operation
Loading and Starting the Power Stacker
1. Press the PAPER ADVANCE key and hand feed the paper down into the
paper throat of the stacker. Continue to advance the paper until it reaches
the paper tent (if installed) and feed three to five extra sheets into the
stacker. Make sure the paper passes through the paper throat of the
stacker. (Figure 5.)
2. Stack the extra pages on top of the wire paper tent (if installed), making
sure the paper bends with the natural fold. (Figure 5.)
3. Press the ONLINE key to put the printer in the online state. The stacker
elevator will return to the correct position for printing.
4. Check that the paper is still centered between the sides of the paper tent
(if installed).
5. Close the cabinet rear door.
6. If necessary, set Top Of Form.
A
ON LINE
PAPER
ADVANCE
A
184044a
Figure 5. Stacking Paper on the Wire Paper Tent
347
Appendix C
348
Stacker Operation
D
Zero Tear Pedestal Printer
Overview
The P8000 Zero Tear Pedestal (ZTP) printer can print a form and present it
for tear off without losing a form between print jobs. The printer automatically
presents the current print line to the tear bar when it finishes printing and no
data are being sent to the printer. When it receives more data from the host
computer, the printer pulls the form down to the print station and resumes
printing.
The ZTP printer is available as follows:
•
•
•
ASCII – 500 and 1000 line per minute models
H-Series – 300 and 600 line per minute models
OpenPrint HD models.
349
Appendix D
Operation
Operation
Position the Paper Input and Adjust the Paper Guides
Outer Paper
Guide Leaf (2)
Center Paper
Guide Leaf
A
184568a
Front Paper
Guide Leaf (3)
184569a
A
Note: Paper guides
located underneath.
Paper Guide
Knob (3)
Figure 1. Adjusting the Paper Guides
NOTE: This operation is typically done during initial setup. Before beginning
the procedure, ensure that the paper guides are not damaged.
1. Remove the left paper guide knob and the left, front paper guide leaf.
(See Figure 1.)
2. Remove the right paper guide knob and the right, front paper guide leaf.
3. Remove the center paper guide knob and the center, front paper guide
leaf.
350
Position the Paper Input and Adjust the Paper Guides
Center Paper
Guide Leaf
.5 ''
.5 ''
Outer Paper
Guide Leaf (2)
Paper
Tractor (2)
183485b
Outboard Mount
Block (2)
Center Mount
Block
Figure 2. Adjusting Paper Guide Leaves
4. Slide the left outboard mount block so that the left outer paper guide leaf
is .5 inches from the left tractor. (See Figure 2).
5. Slide the right outboard mount block so that the right outer paper guide
leaf is .5 inches from the right tractor.
6. Slide the center mount block so that the center paper guide leaf is
centered between the left and right outer paper guide leaves.
7. Install the paper guide knobs and front paper guide leaves.
(See Figure 1.)
351
Appendix D
Operation
Load Paper
Outer Paper
Guide Leaf (2)
Center Paper
Guide Leaf
Tractor Door
Front Paper
Guide Leaf (3)
Paper
Paper
184570a
A
A
Edge
of
Paper
Box
Paper Out
Sensor
Label
183487b
Paper Supply
Box
Figure 3. Loading Paper onto the Printer
1. Align the paper supply box with the label on the left side of the floor.
(See Figure 3 on page 352.)
2.
Unlock and open the tractor doors and slide the paper from below,
through the black paper out sensor slot on the left side, and up between
all front and rear paper guides.
3. Load the paper on the left tractor sprockets and close the tractor door.
4. Load the paper onto the right tractor sprockets and close the tractor door.
352
Load Paper
Paper
Tractor (2)
Tractor
Lock (2)
184572a
Figure 4. Adjusting the Horizontal Paper Tension
5. Adjust the paper web tightness by sliding the right tractor to remove slack
or to adjust for various paper widths. (See Figure 4.)
6. Lock the tractors in position by pressing down on the tractor locks.
Paper
Tear Bar
184573a
Figure 5. Paper Exiting the Top of the Printer
353
Appendix D
Operation
183490c
Position the Paper Out Sensor
At least 2 inches
Sensor Knob
Paper Out Sensor
Paper
Figure 6. The Paper Out Sensor
The paper out sensor indicates when the printer runs out of paper. (The
sensor does not work with black backed forms.) Unlike the standard pedestal
printer, the ZT printer requires you to load the paper through the paper out
sensor slot (Figure 3 and Figure 6). Correct positioning of the paper out
sensor ensures that the last form the printer prints will be properly presented
to the tear bar. To position the paper out sensor, do the following:
1. Position the paper properly at the tear bar (page 356).
2. Loosen the paper out sensor by turning the sensor knob
counterclockwise.
3. Position the paper out sensor so that there are at least 2 inches between
the bottom of the aluminum extrusion bar and the top of the paper out
sensor.
IMPORTANT
For optimal performance, 2 inches is recommended for 11 inch forms.
For shorter forms, position the paper out sensor so that there are at
least 2 inches between a perforation and the top of the paper out sensor.
4. Tighten the paper out sensor by turning the sensor knobs clockwise.
5. Press ONLINE. When the first print job is sent to the printer, the paper is
drawn into the printer, the top of form aligns with the print station, and the
print job begins.
354
Set the Tear Bar Distance
Set the Tear Bar Distance
To set the tear bar distance, do the following steps:
1. Make sure the printer is offline.
2. Press ENTER key to enter Menu mode.
3. Press the right arrow Z until the PRINTER CONTROL icon is highlighted.
4. Press ENTER to go into PRINTER CONTROL.
5. Press the down arrow V until “ZTP SETTINGS” is highlighted.
6. Press ENTER to go into the “ZTP SETTINGS” submenu.
7. Press the down arrow V until “ZTP TearDistance” is highlighted.
8. Press the left arrow Y or right arrow Z to decrease or increase the tear
bar distance in increments of 1/144th of an inch.
9. Press ENTER to select the desired value. An asterisk appears next the
selected value and a scale prints to indicate the tear bar distance in
relation to the tear bar. For correct tear bar distance, the zero should align
with the tear bar. See Figure 7.
NOTE: The Tear Distance value must be changed to print the scale.
+50
0
Physical TearBar
Position
-50
Correct
TearBar
Distance
Print Station
Figure 7. Correct Tear Bar Distance
NOTE: When a new ZTP Tear Bar Dist value is selected, the printer will lose
the current print position until you reset the top of form to
automatically save the new value.
10. Reset the top of form using the procedure on page 356.
355
Appendix D
Operation
Set the Top of Form
Paper
Tear Bar
Form Advance
Knob
184574a
Figure 8. Setting The Tear Off Position
The ZT printer uses the tear bar as the reference point for setting the tear off
position. To set the position of the forms perforation to the tear bar, use the
SET TOF button as follows:
1. Make sure the paper guides are adjusted correctly and the paper is
properly loaded.
2. Press the TOF button on the control panel. The printer LCD will display
“Align at TearBar/Then Press TOF”.
3. Use the form advance knob to move the top of the form to the tear off bar.
4. Position the perforation so it aligns with the tear off bar.
NOTE: This is easily done by advancing one complete sheet above the tear
off bar and folding it over at the perforation.
5. Position the fold exactly at the tear bar.
6. Tear the sheet off to ensure proper positioning.
NOTE: If you do not want to lose a form, position the top of the form at the
tear bar. Run a finger along the back of the form along the tear bar to
ensure the perforation is presented at the tear off point.
7. Press the TOF button again. The printer LCD will display “Top Of Form
Set/Press ONLINE”. The printer will then be brought OFFLINE and the
top of form will be set.
NOTE: Unlike the non-ZTP models, the paper will not move.
8. Press the ONLINE key to bring the printer online.
356
Set the Top of Form
ZTP SETTINGS Menu
The ZTP SETTINGS menu includes the ability to enable and disable features
unique to the Zero Tear printer (ZTP), set the tear bar distance, set the auto
present data time, and set the auto present wait time. This section defines
these options.
ZTP
SETTINGS 1
(from page 73,
74, 75, 76, 77,
78, and 79)
ZTP
Data Time
.5 Sec*
1.0 - 15.0 Sec
* = Factory Default
Available for Zero Tear Pedestal printers only.
1
ZTP
Wait Time
2 Sec*
3 - 10 Sec
1 Sec
ZTP
TearDistance
1060/144 Inch*
ZTP
Platen Open
Enable*
Disable
ZTP
Function
Enable*
Disable
ZTP Data Time
This option sets the pause time in the data stream that the ZTP requires
before moving the form to the tear bar once a print job is completed. The
values range from .5 to 15 seconds. The default is .5 seconds.
ZTP Wait Time
This option sets the minimum amount of time that the form stays at the tear
bar. This allows you time to remove the form before the form is retracted to
print the next form. The adjustable values range from 1 to 10 seconds in
increments of 1 second. The default value is 2 seconds.
ZTP TearDistance
This option sets the tear off distance from the current print position to the tear
bar. Adjustable values in increments of 1/144th of an inch range from 200 to
2880. The left and right arrows adjust the display value. When you press the
ENTER key, the selected value is stored and a scale is printed to indicate the
current tear off position. The default value is 1060.
NOTE: When a new value is selected, the printer will lose the current print
position. You must reset the top of form to automatically save the new
value.
ZTP Platen Open
This option allows the user to have the platen open whenever forms are
reversed. Enabled is the default, used for most papers and labels. The feature
can be disabled as required by some multi-part forms.
357
Appendix D
Performance Limitations
ZTP Function
This option enables or disables all unique ZTP functions. The default is
Enable.
NOTE: When the ZTP Function is enabled, the VIEW key is disabled and
Slow Paper Slew is enabled.
Performance Limitations
Forms Type
The paper feed tractors on the ZT printer push the paper up through the print
station instead of pulling it through, as in the standard pedestal printer. This
limits the variety of forms the ZT printer can use. If the forms do not fall within
the range specified in Table 1, dot compression and line separation may
occur. The user should match the media to the application to ensure
acceptable print quality. Also, because paper is pushed from below the print
station, the last form in the tractors may not print fully or may not be presented
to the printer exit for retrieval.
All paper used in the ZT printer requires standard half inch spaced tractor
feed holes. Cut sheet and continuous friction fed paper is not supported. The
forms specified in Table 1 can have no more than one form per page
horizontally.
Table 1. Forms Type
Description
Length
Width
(edge to edge)
One to three part, continuous, with carbon, fan-folded,
edge-perforated paper forms
3 to 12 inches
7 to 16.5 inches
One to four part, continuous, with carbon, fan-folded,
edge-perforated paper forms
3 to 12 inches
7 to 12 inches
One to four part, continuous, carbonless,
fan-folded, edge-perforated paper forms
3 to 12 inches
7 to 16.5 inches
One to six part, continuous, carbonless, fan-folded, edgeperforated paper forms
3 to 12 inches
7 to 12 inches
Forms with a paper weight of 20 to 100 pounds and a maximum thickness of 0.025 inches
3 to 12 inches
7 to 16.5 inches
Forms with a paper weight of 18 to 100 pounds and a maximum thickness of 0.025 inches
3 to 12 inches
7 to 12 inches
Forms with all approved types of interleaf edge attachment
except those using metallic or other hard devices
3 to 12 inches
7 to 12 inches
NOTE: If you use forms outside these limits, the print quality may not be
optimum, the printer may lose top-of-form, or the frequency of paper
jams will increase.
358
Set the Top of Form
Paper Jams
Printer jams can occur if you tear off the form incorrectly. If you experience
two or more paper jams per box of forms, follow these guidelines to help
reduce jams:
•
•
•
•
•
Position the lower paper guides properly
Align the paper web tightness properly
Position the form perforation against the tear bar
Time the tear, while the paper is not moving
Direct the tear force toward the user and across the tear bar, not upward.
To Clear Paper Jams
1.
Raise the platen lever to open the platen.
2.
Open the left and right tractor doors.
3.
Pull the paper upward through the top of the printer.
NOTE: DO NOT pull the paper downwards from the bottom. This could cause
the paper guides to bend.
4. Reload the paper (see page 352).
359
Appendix D
360
Performance Limitations
E
Quick Change Memory
Cartridge (QCMC)
Overview
The QCMC provides the ability to duplicate an entire printer’s firmware, saved
configurations, and custom files quickly through the printer’s control panel
with a user friendly interface. No external host or files are needed to transfer
this information to the QCMC. A “snapshot image” is saved of the printer’s
firmware, configuration settings, and custom files. The saved image can be
copied to any number of printers using the same QCMC so that the printers
will be identically configured (assumes same printer hardware and options are
present).
The QCMC has its own resident network MAC address that will be used in
place of the printer’s LAN/WLAN MAC address when the cartridge is left
installed in a printer. This allows a mission critical printer to be exchanged
quickly with a spare printer that will be identically configured, including the
network MAC address.
The following are examples of how the QCMC may make printer management
more convenient:
•
A site has 10 printers to install that should all be configured identically.
Rather than inputting the information through the control panel
individually to each printer, insert the QCMC into the first printer, capture
the changes, then easily share the image with the other nine printers.
•
A site is adding additional printers and wants them configured the same
as the printers already installed, but is unsure what changes were
originally made. By using the QCMC to capture the exact image of the
older printers, no custom settings will be missed.
•
A printer is set up on a network that is configured to only allow recognized
MAC addresses to access the network. If the printer with the QCMC
installed needs repair and must be removed from the network, the MAC
that resides on the QCMC can be easily transferred to the replacement
printer, along with all the configuration information and any other files
stored as the “snapshot image” on the QCMC, making the replacement
printer an exact duplicate for the downed printer. By using the MAC
address that resides on the QCMC, the replacement printer can be
installed without notifying the network administrator, thereby simplifying
the exchange.
361
Appendix E
Installing the QCMC
Installing the QCMC
CAUTION
You must power off the printer before you install or remove the QCMC,
or you may damage the QCMC and the printer. If you remove the QCMC
after powering on the printer with the QCMC installed, the fault message
“SD REMOVED Reboot Printer” will display. You cannot clear this
message by reinserting the QCMC. You must cycle power.
1. Set the printer power switch to O (Off).
2. Insert the SD card into the QCMC slot on the back of the printer.
5
4
9
3
8
2
7
1
6
QCMC Slot
Figure 1. QCMC Slot on Back of Cabinet Model
5
3
4
8
2
7
1
6
184951a
9
QCMC Slot
Figure 2. QCMC Slot on Back of Pedestal
362
Saving the Printer’s Configuration to the QCMC
NOTE: The MAC address residing on the QCMC will be used in place of the
MAC assigned to the printer’s own network card whenever the QCMC
is installed. If you do not want to identify the printer with this MAC
address, make sure the QCMC is removed from the printer before
attaching the printer to the network.
When the printer software detects the presence of a QCMC at power-up, a
check of the QCMC will be performed to determine if there is already a saved
flash image available. If no printer flash image exists on the QCMC, the
software will then check to see if there are any saved configurations in the
printer’s NVRAM memory. If the QCMC is blank (no flash image) and saved
configurations are detected in the printer’s NVRAM then you will be prompted
with a message on the front panel to save the printer’s configuration to the
QCMC.
QMC DETECTED
Save to QCMC?
Continue Press <ENTER>
Skip Press <CANCEL>
NOTE: This screen will appear every time at power-up until the printer’s flash
is saved to the QCMC.
If the <CANCEL> key is pressed, the printer will reboot into normal operation
and not save any information to the QCMC. On subsequent power-ups the
Save message on page 363 will display again.
When the <ENTER> key is pressed, the printer will not go online, but instead
will copy the printer’s entire flash image to the QCMC, creating a snapshot of
the printer’s memory.
Below is a list of items that will be saved to the QCMC:
•
•
•
•
•
•
Printer Program File (software)
Custom configurations (1–8)
Feature files or CST’s that have been downloaded on the printer.
All variable settings from the printer’s NVRAM
Network settings (if LAN/WLAN is installed), including IP Address
Other user files, such as fonts, bitmaps, or graphics files downloaded to
the printer.
While the printer is saving its QCMC settings to the EMC, the following
message will display. Do not interrupt the process.
363
Appendix E
Saving the Printer’s Configuration to the QCMC
DO NOT PWR OFF
Saving Setup
To QCMC...
XX%
Upon successful completion of saving a flash image to the QCMC, the printer
will display a message indicating the operation is complete. The printer will
then reboot into normal operation.
Save Complete
Printer Will Now
Reboot...
If there is not enough space on the SD to save the entire flash image, you will
be prompted with the following message.
NOT ENOUGH
SPACE ON SD
Delete SD File
This is a fatal error and requires user intervention. Cycle power on the printer,
when prompted to save the QCMC select <CANCEL> to skip. The printer will
boot online and allow access to the EMC file menus located under the Printer
Control menu. Delete unnecessary SD files then try the QCMC Save
operation again.
364
Copying the QCMC “Snapshot” Image to a Second Printer
Always power off the printer before removing or inserting the QCMC. Place
the QCMC into the second printer’s memory slot. Upon power up, the printer
software detects the presence of a QCMC and a check of the QCMC will be
performed to determine if there is already a saved flash image from this
QCMC on the printer. If no, the following message will display:
QCMC DETECTED
Copy to Printer?
Yes...Press <ENTER>
No...Press <CANCEL>
NOTE: This message will appear every time at power-up until the QCMC
settings are copied to the printer.
If the <CANCEL> key is pressed, the printer will reboot into normal operation
and not copy any information to the printer. On subsequent power-ups the
Copy message above will display again if the QCMC remains installed in the
printer.
NOTE: If the QCMC remains installed in the printer, the MAC address
onboard will be used in place of the resident MAC address to the
printer’s LAN/WAN interface card.
When the <ENTER> key is pressed, the printer will not go online immediately,
but will copy the contents of the QCMC to the printer’s flash, creating a clone
of the original printer. Before the copy process is allowed to continue, checks
of the printer configuration will be made. If either of the checks fail, a message
will display on the front panel (in the hierarchy shown on page 365) and the
printer will not copy any settings.
INVALID SD
Power Off Printer
Remove Cartridge
This means that the QCMC is not compatible with the printer’s software. A
software upgrade is required, or a different configured QCMC will be needed.
365
Appendix E
Copying the QCMC “Snapshot” Image to a Second Printer
A QCMC validation check will be performed to ensure the data stored on the
SD is not corrupted. If the test fails the following fault message will display.
QCMC DATA ERROR
ON SD
Delete & Resave
QCMC Data
This means that the data on the QCMC was not saved properly, and must be
deleted then resaved. Follow the instructions for deleting files, then repeat the
copying process.
If all the checks pass, then the printer will copy the files from the QCMC to the
target printer.
DO NOT PWR OFF
Copying QCMC To
Printer...
XX%
Upon successful completion, the printer will display the following message on
the front panel and reboot into normal operation.
Copy Complete
366
Updating the QCMC Image
This option should only be used when a QCMC has already been stored and
when that QCMC already contains the printer build and files on the printer. If
only some configuration settings have been altered, the menu “Update
QCMC” can be used to update the configuration settings in the image stored
on the QCMC.
To utilize this option, navigate to the menu “Update QCMC” and press the
ENTER key.
Below is a list of items that will be updated on the QCMC by the “Update
QCMC” operation:
•
Custom configurations (1–8)
•
All variable settings from the printer’s NVRAM
•
Network settings (if LAN/WLAN is installed), including IP Address
Below is a list of items that will NOT be updated on the QCMC by the “Update
QCMC” operation:
•
Printer Program File (software)
•
Feature files or CST’s that have been downloaded on the printer.
•
Other user files, such as fonts, bitmaps, or graphics files downloaded
to the printer.
While the printer is updating the QCMC configuration, the following message
will display. Do not interrupt the process.
DO NOT PWR OFF
Saving Setup
To QCMC...
XX%
Upon successful completion of saving a flash image to the QCMC, the printer
will display a message indicating the operation is complete. The printer will
then reboot into normal operation.
367
Appendix E
Erasing the QCMC Image
Erasing the QCMC Image
This option should only be used when a QCMC has already been stored and
when the user desires to start fresh with a new image.
To utilize this option, navigate to the menu “Erase QCMC” and press the
ENTER key.
When this option is activated, all QCMC files and configurations will be
deleted from the SD card.
While the printer is erasing the QCMC configuration, the following message
will display. Do not interrupt the process.
DO NOT PWR OFF
Erasing Files
On QCMC...
XX%
Upon successful completion of saving a flash image to the QCMC, the printer
will display a message indicating the operation is complete. The printer will
then reboot into normal operation.
368
F
PTX_SETUP Commands
Overview
The PTX_SETUP commands are a superset of commands which allow the
printer to perform several tasks by parsing commands either stored in flash or
sent to the printer by the host. Commands range from re-routing debug
statements to downloading complete printer configurations.
This appendix describes the PTX_SETUP commands available to line matrix
printers.
The PTX_SETUP Commands
The PTX_SETUP commands were originally designed for the disk-based
laser and thermal printers with IGPs. However, line matrix printers can still
benefit from general functionalities provided by the PTX_SETUP commands.
Some concepts to keep in mind are as follows:
1. PTX_SETUP commands are not emulation specific. In a system with an
IGP, the IGP level emulation will process the PTX_SETUP commands. In
a system without an IGP, the PTX_SETUP commands will be processed
by the base emulation.
2. Since there is no disk on a flash-based printer, DISK_IO commands are
now called FILE_IO. However, for backwards compatibility DISK_IO and
FILE_IO are synonymous.
3. The PTX_SETUP command set is case sensitive; all PTX_SETUP
commands are in upper case characters only.
4. The white space separating commands may be any number of spaces
and tabs. This allows a PTX_SETUP file to be formatted for easier
readability.
5. The PTX_SETUP and PTX_END command should be followed by a new
line character.
6. Any unknown command will terminate the PTX_SETUP processing. The
offending command will be the first line of printed text.
7. Although the original implementation of PTX_SETUP allowed for only a
single parameter, separated from the sub-command by a single
semicolon (;) character, the new PTX_SETUP command set allows for
multiple parameters separated by commas, semicolons, spaces or tabs.
369
Appendix F
The PTX_SETUP Commands
General Commands
The original PTX_SETUP commands were implemented on the disk-based
legacy laser printers; however, many commands are general and are also
supported on line matrix printers. This section describes the existing
commands which work across all platforms, and provides a general
description of how commands are formed.
Each emulation has modes in which the PTX_SETUP commands could get
missed. For this reason, it is highly recommended that all PTX_SETUP
commands be placed between print jobs, rather than attempting to imbed
them within jobs.
PTX_SETUP commands have the following format:
(SFCC)PTX_SETUP
Command–Sub Command;Value
PTX_END
For example, if the SFCC assigned to PTX_SETUP is the default value of the
exclamation mark (!, hex 21), and you wanted to load configuration number 4
and capture all incoming data to a file named “BIN”, you would use the
following command:
!PTX_SETUP
CONFIG–LOAD;4 FILE_IO–CAPTURE;BIN
PTX_END
Table 1 lists all the command, sub-command, and parameter combinations
and gives a brief description of the command. This section documents the
existence of PTX_SETUP commands which work across all platforms. The
following sections document commands which are specific to line matrix.
NOTE: When a file system error occurs, a message will be displayed on the
front panel indicating the error, and the action needed to take to
correct the error.
370
General Commands
Table 1. PTX_SETUP Commands (Non-Platform Specific)
Command
CONFIG
Sub-Command
Parameter
Description
LOAD
Cfg
Cfg can be 0-8. The PTX_SETUP
will load configuration Cfg. If
configuration Cfg was not previously
saved, the operator panel will
display an error message and the
current configuration will be kept.
SAVE
Cfg
Cfg must be 1-8. This command will
save the current configuration as
configuration Cfg. If Cfg is not in the
range of 1-8, the command is
ignored.
SETMENU
Value;Menu_tag
Menu_tag is the name of the menu
as defined in the menu file. Value is
the value to which the menu is to be
set.
POWERUP
Cfg
Sets the power-up configuration to
Cfg and loads Configuration Cfg.
Cfg can be any value from 0-8,
where 0 is the factory default.
PRINT
Cfg
Print Configuration Cfg. Cfg can be
a number 1-8, or one of four predefined configurations. The four
non-numeric configurations are
requested using the first character
for the CURRENT, FACTORY,
POWERUP, or ALL configuration(s).
DELETE
Cfg
Deletes Configuration number Cfg.
Cfg must be in the range of 1-8.
UPLOAD
Port;Cfg
This command uploads the
configuration stored in location Cfg
to the port specified by Port. Port
must either be 1284 or SERIAL. Cfg
may be 1-8 or ALL.
DOWNLOAD
Cfg
This command saves the
configuration data that follows as
configuration Cfg. Cfg must be 1-8
or END.
371
Appendix F
The PTX_SETUP Commands
Table 1. PTX_SETUP Commands (Non-Platform Specific) (continued)
Command
CONFIG
Sub-Command
OVERLAY
Parameter
Cfg
RESET
Description
This command overlays the
configuration data that follows on
existing configuration Cfg. Cfg must
be 1-8 (or END). If Cfg does not
exist then command is treated the
same as DOWNLOAD.
Reboots the printer.
GET_NAMES
“Port”
This command uploads the names
of the configurations to the port
specified by Port. Port must either
be “1284” or “SERIAL”.
SET_NAME
Cfg
This command downloads a name
for the configuration specified by
Cfg. Cfg must be 1-8.
CLEAR_NAMES
This command resets all of the
configuration names to their default
values.
MPI_SELECT
MPI
This command selects the active
Management Protocol Interface
(MPI). Currently there are two
selections “UCP” and “PXML”.
PNE_PORT
Port
This command selects the port that
the PNE will use to communicate to
the printer.
The valid ports are:
•
•
•
DISABLE
ETHERNET
USB
NOTE: If ETHERNET is selected
but not enabled, the
selection will revert to
DISABLE.
372
General Commands
Table 1. PTX_SETUP Commands (Non-Platform Specific) (continued)
Command
CONFIG
LP MODE
Sub-Command
PANEL
Parameter
Description
LOCK
This command locks the operator
out of the printer’s configuration
menu.
UNLOCK
This command unlocks the printer’s
configuration menu and allows the
operator access to the menus. By
default, the menu is unlocked.
PNE_PORT_NUM
Port Number
This command sets the Port
Number the PNE uses to
communicate to the printer if the
PNE Port was set to Ethernet. This
command causes the printer to
automatically reboot.
PXML_PORT_NUM
Port Number
This command sets the Port
Number the PXML and UCP will use
to communicate to the printer if the
PXML Port is set to Ethernet. This
command causes the printer to
automatically reboot.
n/a
Protocol
Protocol must be 0-4. This
command resets the software
protocol, and is selected as follows:
0 - P-Series
1 - P-Series XQ
2 - Serial Matrix
3 - Proprinter III XL
4 - Epson FX-1050
373
Appendix F
The PTX_SETUP Commands
Table 1. PTX_SETUP Commands (Non-Platform Specific) (continued)
Command
FILE_IO
(DISK_IO)
374
Sub-Command
Parameter
Description
CAPTURE
Filename
Captures all incoming data into a file
named Filename. Receipt of a
FILE_IO–CAPTURE command
without the Filename parameter will
force the file data to be written to
flash, and will end the file capture.
DRIVE
Letter
This command is parsed for
backwards compatibility. However,
since the flash file system is a single
device, the drive letter will be
ignored.
PROPS
File;Prop
The PROPS command will set the
file properties of a given file. The file
properties are a four letter, case
sensitive file descriptor. The
properties field can be used to
ensure that a file is used for its
intended purpose. Once properties
have been associated with a file,
they cannot be changed.
DEL
Filename
The DEL command will mark a file
as deleted. The space the file
occupied will be freed the next time
the printer is powered up.
General Commands
Table 1. PTX_SETUP Commands (Non-Platform Specific) (continued)
Command
FILE_IO
(DISK_IO)
PTX_END
Sub-Command
Parameter
Description
RUNFILE
File;Prop
The RUNFILE command will open
the file named File for printing. After
the PTX_END command is
processed, the contents of File will
get printed before any more data is
read from the host. If the Prop field
is present, RUNFILE will verify that
Prop matches the saved file
properties. Any mismatch will cause
the command to be ignored.
UPLOAD
File;Port
Reads the file named File out of the
flash file system and sends it to a
host computer via the Port I/O port.
Port is either 1284 (for reverse
nibble or byte mode transfer using
the parallel port), or SERIAL.
NOTE: if the Ethernet option is
installed, 1284 is used to upload
across the network.
MAXSIZE
Kb
For backwards compatibility.
MINSIZE
Kb
For backwards compatibility.
OPTIMIZE
(none)
Causes the printer to optimize the
Flash File System. The printer
automatically reboots during this
process.
(none)
(none)
Exits the PTX_SETUP.
375
Appendix F
The PTX_SETUP Commands
Summary of the CONFIG Command
The UPLOAD and DOWNLOAD command can be used for uploading and
downloading complete printer configurations. If a customer needs to configure
50 printers identically, the customer needs only configure one printer and
UPLOAD the configurations. The UPLOADed configurations may then be
DOWNLOADed to other printers eliminating the necessity for the operator to
configure each printer manually.
The UPLOAD command will always place a header and a footer into the
uploaded data. This header will be the DOWNLOAD command followed by
the configuration number. The footer will be the DOWNLOAD END command.
The operator should be aware that the UPLOAD and DOWNLOAD
commands use a secondary copy of the menu structure which does not affect
the printer's active configuration. This allows the UPLOAD and DOWNLOAD
commands to operate without affecting the printer's current configuration. If
the operator intends to use one of the DOWNLOADed configurations, the
operator should reboot the printer to ensure proper operation. This can be
accomplished by adding the RESET command as the last command in your
setup file. This is necessary because the printer caches the active
configuration. Rebooting the printer ensures that the desired configuration is
correctly read from FLASH.
NOTE: While an upload or download is in progress, the Front Panel will be
unavailable.
The Configuration Save and Delete commands from the front panel can be
blocked by using the Protect Configurations feature. This is intended to
prevent someone from inadvertently reconfiguring a printer. The PTX_SETUP
commands, however, will override the protect configurations feature. All
PTX_SETUP commands will be honored regardless of the value of the
Protect Configurations feature.
Operation of the FILE_IO Command
When a file is opened for writing with the FILE_IO–CAPTURE;filename
command, the system will allocate RAM for file control blocks and 1 Kbyte for
data. If the file already exists on the Flash File System and the Overwrite
Enable feature in the Flash File System menu is set to disable, a warning will
be displayed on the front panel. After clearing the warning, the file data will be
printed. To overwrite the existing file, set the Overwrite Files option to enable.
Due to the nature of writing to flash, any data intended to be stored
permanently in flash must first be copied into RAM. As a result, the ability to
manipulate files in the Flash File System is dependent upon the printer having
sufficient RAM. None of the captured file data will be committed to flash until
the entire file is loaded. The PTX_SETUP parser will interpret the command
“FILE_IO–CAPTURE<lf>” as an end of file marker. Receipt of the command
will cause all file data to be written to flash. The file system allocates RAM for
temporary data storage in 1 Kbyte blocks. If at any time during the file
download the printer runs out of RAM, a warning will be displayed on the front
panel and as much of the file as possible will be saved in flash.
376
Line Matrix Commands
Three things can limit the ability to save a file: insufficient RAM, insufficient
Flash, and lack of empty file system entries. Flash can only be written once
before it needs to be “optimized”. As a result, the maximum file size is limited
to the largest unwritten block of Flash. If any of these problems occur, the
printer will display an error message and will attempt to provide the operator
with a description of what steps to take to correct the error. Normally, the
solution will involve optimizing the Flash File System. This can be
accomplished by selecting the Optimize & Reboot function in the Flash File
System menu under the ADVANCED USER menu, “Main File System.”
NOTE: After selecting the Optimize & Reboot function, do not shut off the
printer's power until after the printer returns to the power-on state.
Loss of power during the optimize process may corrupt the printer's
program. If this occurs, first attempt to repeat the downloading
process. If that fails, contact an authorized service representative.
Line Matrix Commands
Table 2 lists PTX_SETUP commands which apply to line matrix printers only.
Table 2. Line Matrix PTX_SETUP Commands
Command
ENGINE
Sub-Command
EJECT
Parameter
Description
Performs a page eject.
377
Appendix F
378
The PTX_SETUP Commands
G
Customer Support
Printronix Customer Support Center
IMPORTANT
Please have the following information available prior to calling the
Printronix Customer Support Center:
•
•
•
•
Model number
•
•
•
Is the problem with a new install or an existing printer?
Serial number (located on the back of the printer)
Installed options (i.e., interface and host type if applicable to the problem)
Configuration printout:
Press CONFIG on the control panel, then press the ENTER (↵ ) key.
Description of the problem (be specific)
Good and bad samples that clearly show the problem (faxing or emailing
these samples may be required)
Americas
(714) 368-2686
Europe, Middle East, and Africa
(31) 24 6489 311
Asia Pacific
(65) 6548 4114
China
(86) 800-999-6836
http://www.printronix.com/support.aspx
Printronix Supplies Department
Contact the Printronix Supplies Department for genuine Printronix supplies.
Americas
(800) 733-1900
Europe, Middle East, and Africa
(33) 1 46 25 19 07
Asia Pacific
(65) 6548 4116
or (65) 6548 4132
China
(86) 400-886-5598
India
(800) 102-7869
http://www.printronix.com/supplies-parts.aspx
379
Appendix G
Corporate Offices
Corporate Offices
Printronix, Inc.
15345 Barranca Parkway
Irvine, CA 92618
U.S.A.
Phone: (714) 368-2300
Fax: (714) 368-2600
Printronix Inc.
c/o Printronix Nederland BV
Bijsterhuizen 11-38
6546 AS Nijmegen
The Netherlands
Phone: (31) 24 6489489
Fax: (31) 24 6489499
Printronix Schweiz GmbH
42 Changi South Street 1
Changi South Industrial Estate
Singapore 486763
Phone: (65) 6542 0110
Fax: (65) 6546 1588
Printronix Commercial (Shanghai) Co. Ltd
22F, Eton Building East
No.555, Pudong Av.
Shanghai City, 200120, P R China
Phone: (86) 400 886 5598
Fax: (86-21) 5138 0564
Visit the Printronix web site at www.printronix.com
380
H
Communication Notices
Notices
This information was developed for products and services offered in the
U.S.A.
Printronix may not offer the products, services, or features discussed in this
document in other countries. Consult your Printronix representative for
information on the products and services currently available in your area. Any
reference to an Printronix product, program, or service is not intended to state
or imply that only that Printronix product, program, or service may be used.
Any functionally equivalent product, program, or service that does not infringe
any Printronix intellectual property rights may be used instead. However, it is
the user’s responsibility to evaluate and verify the operation of any nonPrintronix product, program, or service.
Printronix may have patents or pending patent applications covering subject
matter described in this document. The furnishing of this document does not
give you any license to these patents. You can send license inquires, in
writing, to:
Printronix, Inc.
15345 Barranca Parkway
Irvine, CA 92618
U.S.A.
The following paragraph does not apply to the United Kingdom or any
other country where such provisions are inconsistent with local law:
PRINTRONIX PROVIDES THIS PUBLICATION “AS IS” WITHOUT
WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EITHER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING,
BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF NONINFRINGEMENT, MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR
PURPOSE. Some states do not allow disclaimer of express or implied
warranties in certain transactions, therefore, this statement may not apply to
you.
This information could include technical inaccuracies or typographical errors.
Changes are periodically made to the information herein; these changes will
be incorporated in new editions of the publication. Printronix may make
improvements and/or changes in the product(s) described in this publication
at any time without notice.
Any references in this information to non-Printronix Web sites are provided for
convenience only and do not in any manner serve as an endorsement of
those Web sites. The materials at those Web sites are not part of the
materials for this Printronix product and use of those Web sites is at your own
risk.
381
Appendix H
Notices
Any performance data contained herein was determined in a controlled
environment. Therefore, the results obtained in other operating environments
may vary significantly. Some measurements may have been made on
development-level systems and there is no guarantee that these
measurements will be the same on generally available systems. Furthermore,
some measurement may have been estimated through extrapolation. Actual
results may vary. Users of this document should verify the applicable data for
their specific environment.
Information concerning non-Printronix products was obtained from the
suppliers of those products, their published announcements or other publicly
available sources. Printronix has not tested those products and cannot
confirm the accuracy of performance, compatibility or any other claims related
to non-Printronix products. Questions on the capabilities of non-Printronix
products should be addressed to the suppliers of those products.
Printronix encourages owners of information technology (IT) equipment to
responsibly recycle their equipment when it is no longer needed. Printronix
offers a variety of programs and services to assist equipment owners in
recycling their IT products. Information on these product recycling offerings
can be found on Printronix’s Internet site at http://www.printronix.com.
Note!
Before using this information and the product it supports, read the information and
Communication Statements on page 383.
If you are viewing this information softcopy, the photographs and color
illustrations may not appear.
For online versions of this book, we authorize you to:
•
Copy, modify, and print the documentation contained on the media, for
use within your enterprise, provided you reproduce the copyright notice,
all warning statements, and other required statements on each copy or
partial copy.
•
Transfer the original unaltered copy of the documentation when you
transfer the related Printronix product (which may be either machines you
own, or programs, if the program’s license terms permit a transfer). You
must, at the same time, destroy all other copies of the documentation.
You are responsible for payment of any taxes, including personal property
taxes, resulting from this authorization.
Your failure to comply with the terms above terminates this authorization.
Upon termination, you must destroy your machine readable documentation.
382
Communication Statements
Federal Communications Commission (FCC) Statement
This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a
Class A digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are
designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference when
the equipment is operated in a commercial environment. This equipment
generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed
and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful interference
to radio communications. Operation of this equipment in a residential area is
likely to cause harmful interference in which case the user will be required to
correct the interference at his own expense.
Properly shielded and grounded cables and connectors must be used in order
to meet FCC emission limits. Printronix is not responsible for any radio or
television interference caused by using other than recommended cables and
connectors or by unauthorized changes or modifications to this equipment.
Unauthorized changes or modifications could void the user’s authority to
operate the equipment.
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Fules. Operation is subject to
the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause harmful
interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired operation.
European Union Conformity
This product is in compliance with the EU
directives for safety, EMC, ROHS,
REACH, and WEEE. Please refer to the
Service and Support section at our web
site (www.printronix.com) for the most up
to Declarations of Conformity.
Printronix cannot accept responsibility for any failure to satisfy the protection
requirements resulting from a non-recommended modification of the product,
including the fitting of non-Printronix option cards.
This product has been tested and found to comply with the limits for Class A
Information Technology Equipment according to European standard EN
55022. The limits for Class A equipment were derived for commercial and
industrial environments to provide reasonable protection against interference
with licensed communication devices.
WARNING
This is a Class A product. In a domestic environment this product may cause radio
interference in which case the user may be required to take adequate measures.
383
Appendix H
Communication Statements
Properly shielded and grounded cables and connectors must be used in order
to reduce the potential for causing interference to radio and TV
communications and to other electrical or electronic equipment. Printronix
cannot accept responsibility for any interference caused by using other than
recommended cables and connectors.
Industry Canada Compliance Statement
This Class A digital apparatus complies with Canadian ICES-003.
Cet appareil numérique de la classe A conform á la norme NMB-003 du
Canada.
Statement of CISPR 22 Compliance
Attention: This is a Class A Product. In a domestic environment this product
may cause radio interference in which case the user may be required to take
adequate measures.
Japanese VCCI Class A
German Conformity Statement
Handbuchtexte: FCC class A entspricht: EMVG Klasse A
Text Für alle in Deutschland vertriebenen EN 55022 Klasse A Geräte:
Zulassungsbescheinigung laut dem Deutschen Gesetz über die
elektromagnetische Verträglichkeit von Geräten (EMVG) vom 18. September
1998 (bzw. der EMC EG Richtlinie 89/336):
Dieses Gerät ist berechtigt in Übereinstimmung mit dem Deutschen EMVG
das EG-Konformitätszeichen - CE - zu führen. Verantwortlich für die
Konformitätserklärung nach Paragraph 5 des EMVG ist die:
Printronix GmbH
Goethering 56
D-63067 Offenbach Germany
Informationen in Hinsicht EMVG Paragraph 4 Abs. (1) 4:
Das Gerät erfüllt die Schutzanforderungen nach EN 55024 und EN 55022
Klasse A.
EN 55022 Klasse A Geräte müssen mit folgendem Warnhinweis versehen
werden: “Warnung: dies ist eine Einrichtung der Klasse A. Diese Einrichtung
kann im Wohnbereich Funkstörungen verursachen; in diesem Fall kann vom
Betreiber verlangt werden, angemessene Maßnahmen durchzuführen und
dafür aufzukommen.”
384
EN 55024 Hinweis:
Wird dieses Gerät in einer industriellen Umgebung betrieben (wie in EN
55024 festgelegt), dann kann es dabei eventuell gestört werden. In solch
einem Fall ist der Abstand bzw. die Abschirmung zu der industriellen
Störquelle zu öergrvßern.
Anmerkung:
Um die Einhaltung des EMVG sicherzustellen sind die Geräte, wie in den
Printronix Handbüchern angegeben, zu installieren und zu betreiben.
China
Declaration:
This is a Class A product. In a domestic environment this product may cause
radio interference in which case the user may need to perform practical
actions.
海拔高度和非热带性气候声明
仅适用于海拔 2000M 以下地区安全使用
仅适用于非热带气候条件下安全使用
385
Appendix H
Communication Statements
LMPPLS, LMPPHS, LMPCLS, LMPCHS 系列
行列式打印機安全注意事項說明
為保護您的安全,使用本設備時,請遵循下列安全注意事項:
386
•
•
•
請依照設備上所有的警告與說明進行操作。
•
不要對本設備進行機械或電氣修改。對經過修改的產品的安全與法規符合
性,不負任何責任。
•
不要阻礙或覆蓋產品的開口。永遠不要將產品放在靠近輻射來源或熱源的
地方。未能依照這些指引,將可能導致過熱情況,影響產品的可靠性。
•
產品是設計來配合有中性地線的電源系統使用。為降低電擊風險,請不要
將產品插入任何其他類型的電源系統。如果您不確定建物提供的電源類
型,請向建物管理員或合格電氣技師尋求協助。
•
不是所有的電源線都有相同的電流等級,請千萬不要將隨附於您設備的電
源線用在其他產品上。請勿在產品上使用家用延長電源線。對於那些有多
條電源線的產品,請確認您將所有的電源線拔下後,才算將系統電源完全
中斷。
•
甲類警語 :
請確定電源的電壓與頻率符合設備的電氣等級標籤上指定的電壓與頻率。
請不要將任何物件塞入設備的開口。導電的異物可能會導致短路,引起火
災、電擊、或設備損傷。
Taiwan
Warning:
This is a Class A product. In a domestic environment this product may cause
radio interference in which case the user will be required to take adequate
measures.
Korea
Class A
(Broadcasting Communication Equipment for Office Use)
As an electromagnetic wave equipment for office use (Class A), this
equipment is intended to use in other than home area. Sellers or users need
to take note of this.
A 급 기기
( 업무용 방송통신기자재 )
이 기기는 업무용 (A 급 ) 전자파적합기기로서 판매자 또는 사용자는
이 점을 주의하시기 바라며 , 가정외의 지역에서 사용하는 것을
목적으로 합니다 .
Class B
(Broadcasting Communication Equipment for Home Use)
As an electromagnetic wave equipment for home use (Class B), this
equipment is intended to use mainly for home use and may be used in all
areas.
B 급 기기
( 가정용 방송통신기자재 )
이 기기는 가정용 (B 급 ) 전자파적합기기로서 주로 가정에서 사용하는
것을 목적으로 하며 , 모든 지역에서 사용할 수 있습니다 .
CAUTION:
This product is equipped with a 3-wire power cord and plug for the user’s
safety. Use this power cord in conjunction with a properly grounded electrical
outlet to avoid electrical shock.
387
Appendix H
Software License Agreement
Software License Agreement
Your printer contains, among other software, Printronix operating software
including, but not limited to the Embedded Configurable Operating System
(the “eCos Software”) as embedded software. The terms of this Agreement
apply only to the eCos Software, and all other embedded software supplied
with the printer. You accept the terms of this Agreement by your initial use of
your printer.
eCos License
This file is part of eCos, the Embedded Configurable Operating System.
Copyright (C) 1998, 1999, 2000, 2001, 2002 Red Hat, Inc.
eCos is free software; you can redistribute it and/or modify it under the terms
of the GNU General Public License as published by the Free Software
Foundation; either version 2 or (at your option) any later version.
You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public License along
with eCos; if not, write to the Free Software Foundation, Inc., 59 Temple
Place, Suite 330, Boston, MA 02111-1307 USA.
eCos is distributed in the hope that it will be useful, but WITHOUT ANY
WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of MERCHANTABILITY or
FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the GNU General Public
License for more details.
As a special exception, if other files instantiate templates or use macros or
inline functions from this file, or you compile this file and link it with other
works to produce a work based on this file, this file does not by itself cause
the resulting work to be covered by the GNU General Public License.
However the source code for this file must still be made available in
accordance with section (3) of the GNU General Public License.
This exception does not invalidate any other reasons why a work based on
this file might be covered by the GNU General Public License.
Alternative licenses for eCos may be arranged by contacting Red Hat, Inc. at
http://sources.redhat.com/ecos/ecos-license/
388
GNU GENERAL PUBLIC LICENSE
Version 2, June 1991
Copyright (C) 1989, 1991 Free Software Foundation, Inc., 51 Franklin Street,
Fifth Floor, Boston, MA 02110-1301 USA Everyone is permitted to copy and
distribute verbatim copies of this license document, but changing it is not
allowed.
Preamble
The licenses for most software are designed to take away your freedom to
share and change it. By contrast, the GNU General Public License is intended
to guarantee your freedom to share and change free software--to make sure
the software is free for all its users. This General Public License applies to
most of the Free Software Foundation's software and to any other program
whose authors commit to using it. (Some other Free Software Foundation
software is covered by the GNU Lesser General Public License instead.) You
can apply it to your programs, too.
When we speak of free software, we are referring to freedom, not price. Our
General Public Licenses are designed to make sure that you have the
freedom to distribute copies of free software (and charge for this service if you
wish), that you receive source code or can get it if you want it, that you can
change the software or use pieces of it in new free programs; and that you
know you can do these things.
To protect your rights, we need to make restrictions that forbid anyone to deny
you these rights or to ask you to surrender the rights. These restrictions
translate to certain responsibilities for you if you distribute copies of the
software, or if you modify it.
For example, if you distribute copies of such a program, whether gratis or for
a fee, you must give the recipients all the rights that you have. You must make
sure that they, too, receive or can get the source code. And you must show
them these terms so they know their rights.
We protect your rights with two steps: (1) copyright the software, and (2) offer
you this license which gives you legal permission to copy, distribute and/or
modify the software.
Also, for each author's protection and ours, we want to make certain that
everyone understands that there is no warranty for this free software. If the
software is modified by someone else and passed on, we want its recipients
to know that what they have is not the original, so that any problems
introduced by others will not reflect on the original authors' reputation.
Finally, any free program is threatened constantly by software patents. We
wish to avoid the danger that redistributors of a free program will individually
obtain patent licenses, in effect making the program proprietary. To prevent
this, we have made it clear that any patent must be licensed for everyone's
free use or not licensed at all.
389
Appendix H
Software License Agreement
The precise terms and conditions for copying, distribution, and modification
follow.
GNU GENERAL PUBLIC LICENSE
TERMS AND CONDITIONS FOR COPYING, DISTRIBUTION, AND
MODIFICATION
This License applies to any program or other work which contains a notice
placed by the copyright holder saying it may be distributed under the terms of
this General Public License. The "Program", below, refers to any such
program or work, and a "work based on the Program" means either the
Program or any derivative work under copyright law: that is to say, a work
containing the Program or a portion of it, either verbatim or with modifications
and/or translated into another language. (Hereinafter, translation is included
without limitation in the term "modification".) Each licensee is addressed as
"you".
Activities other than copying, distribution and modification are not covered by
this License; they are outside its scope. The act of running the Program is not
restricted, and the output from the Program is covered only if its contents
constitute a work based on the Program (independent of having been made
by running the Program). Whether that is true depends on what the Program
does.
1. You may copy and distribute verbatim copies of the Program's source
code as you receive it, in any medium, provided that you conspicuously
and appropriately publish on each copy an appropriate copyright notice
and disclaimer of warranty; keep intact all the notices that refer to this
License and to the absence of any warranty; and give any other recipients
of the Program a copy of this License along with the Program.
You may charge a fee for the physical act of transferring a copy, and you
may at your option offer warranty protection in exchange for a fee.
2. You may modify your copy or copies of the Program or any portion of it,
thus forming a work based on the Program, and copy and distribute such
modifications or work under the terms of Section 1 above, provided that
you also meet all of these conditions:
a. You must cause the modified files to carry prominent notices
stating that you changed the files and the date of any change.
b. You must cause any work that you distribute or publish, that in
whole or in part contains or is derived from the Program or any part
thereof, to be licensed as a whole at no charge to all third parties
under the terms of this License.
c.
390
If the modified program normally reads commands interactively
when run, you must cause it, when started running for such
interactive use in the most ordinary way, to print or display an
announcement including an appropriate copyright notice and a notice
that there is no warranty (or else, saying that you provide a warranty)
and that users may redistribute the program under these conditions,
and telling the user how to view a copy of this License. (Exception: if
the Program itself is interactive but does not normally print such an
announcement, your work based on the Program is not required to
print an announcement.)
These requirements apply to the modified work as a whole. If identifiable
sections of that work are not derived from the Program, and can be
reasonably considered independent and separate works in themselves,
then this License, and its terms, do not apply to those sections when you
distribute them as separate works. But when you distribute the same
sections as part of a whole which is a work based on the Program, the
distribution of the whole must be on the terms of this License, whose
permissions for other licensees extend to the entire whole, and thus to
each and every part regardless of who wrote it.
Thus, it is not the intent of this section to claim rights or contest your rights
to work written entirely by you; rather, the intent is to exercise the right to
control the distribution of derivative or collective works based on the
Program.
In addition, mere aggregation of another work not based on the Program
with the Program (or with a work based on the Program) on a volume of a
storage or distribution medium does not bring the other work under the
scope of this License.
3. You may copy and distribute the Program (or a work based on it, under
Section 2) in object code or executable form under the terms of Sections
1 and 2 above provided that you also do one of the following:
a. Accompany it with the complete corresponding machine-readable
source code, which must be distributed under the terms of Sections 1
and 2 above on a medium customarily used for software interchange;
or,
b. Accompany it with a written offer, valid for at least three years, to give
any third party, for a charge no more than your cost of physically
performing source distribution, a complete machine-readable copy of
the corresponding source code, to be distributed under the terms of
Sections 1 and 2 above on a medium customarily used for software
interchange; or,
c.
Accompany it with the information you received as to the offer to
distribute corresponding source code. (This alternative is allowed
only for noncommercial distribution and only if you received the
program in object code or executable form with such an offer, in
accord with Subsection b above.)
The source code for a work means the preferred form of the work for
making modifications to it. For an executable work, complete source
code means all the source code for all modules it contains, plus any
associated interface definition files, plus the scripts used to control
compilation and installation of the executable. However, as a special
exception, the source code distributed need not include anything that
is normally distributed (in either source or binary form) with the major
components (compiler, kernel, and so on) of the operating system on
which the executable runs, unless that component itself accompanies
the executable.
391
Appendix H
Software License Agreement
If distribution of executable or object code is made by offering access
to copy from a designated place, then offering equivalent access to
copy the source code from the same place counts as distribution of
the source code, even though third parties are not compelled to copy
the source along with the object code.
4. You may not copy, modify, sublicense, or distribute the Program except
as expressly provided under this License. Any attempt otherwise to copy,
modify, sublicense or distribute the Program is void, and will automatically
terminate your rights under this License. However, parties who have
received copies, or rights, from you under this License will not have their
licenses terminated so long as such parties remain in full compliance.
5. You are not required to accept this License, since you have not signed it.
However, nothing else grants you permission to modify or distribute the
Program or its derivative works. These actions are prohibited by law if you
do not accept this License. Therefore, by modifying or distributing the
Program (or any work based on the Program), you indicate your
acceptance of this License to do so, and all its terms and conditions for
copying, distributing or modifying the Program or works based on it.
6. Each time you redistribute the Program (or any work based on the
Program), the recipient automatically receives a license from the original
licensor to copy, distribute or modify the Program subject to these terms
and conditions. You may not impose any further restrictions on the
recipients' exercise of the rights granted herein. You are not responsible
for enforcing compliance by third parties to this License.
7. If, as a consequence of a court judgment or allegation of patent
infringement or for any other reason (not limited to patent issues),
conditions are imposed on you (whether by court order, agreement or
otherwise) that contradict the conditions of this License, they do not
excuse you from the conditions of this License. If you cannot distribute so
as to satisfy simultaneously your obligations under this License and any
other pertinent obligations, then as a consequence you may not distribute
the Program at all. For example, if a patent license would not permit
royalty-free redistribution of the Program by all those who receive copies
directly or indirectly through you, then the only way you could satisfy both
it and this License would be to refrain entirely from distribution of the
Program.
If any portion of this section is held invalid or unenforceable under any
particular circumstance, the balance of the section is intended to apply
and the section as a whole is intended to apply in other circumstances.
It is not the purpose of this section to induce you to infringe any patents or
other property right claims or to contest validity of any such claims; this
section has the sole purpose of protecting the integrity of the free
software distribution system, which is implemented by public license
practices. Many people have made generous contributions to the wide
range of software distributed through that system in reliance on consistent
application of that system; it is up to the author/donor to decide if he or
she is willing to distribute software through any other system and a
licensee cannot impose that choice.
This section is intended to make thoroughly clear what is believed to be a
consequence of the rest of this License.
392
8. If the distribution and/or use of the Program is restricted in certain
countries either by patents or by copyrighted interfaces, the original
copyright holder who places the Program under this License may add an
explicit geographical distribution limitation excluding those countries, so
that distribution is permitted only in or among countries not thus excluded.
In such case, this License incorporates the limitation as if written in the
body of this License.
9. The Free Software Foundation may publish revised and/or new versions
of the General Public License from time to time. Such new versions will
be similar in spirit to the present version, but may differ in detail to
address new problems or concerns.
Each version is given a distinguishing version number. If the Program
specifies a version number of this License which applies to it and "any
later version", you have the option of following the terms and conditions
either of that version or of any later version published by the Free
Software Foundation. If the Program does not specify a version number
of this License, you may choose any version ever published by the Free
Software Foundation.
10. If you wish to incorporate parts of the Program into other free programs
whose distribution conditions are different, write to the author to ask for
permission. For software which is copyrighted by the Free Software
Foundation, write to the Free Software Foundation; we sometimes make
exceptions for this. Our decision will be guided by the two goals of
preserving the free status of all derivatives of our free software and of
promoting the sharing and reuse of software generally.
NO WARRANTY
11. BECAUSE THE PROGRAM IS LICENSED FREE OF CHARGE, THERE
IS NO WARRANTY FOR THE PROGRAM, TO THE EXTENT
PERMITTED BY APPLICABLE LAW. EXCEPT WHEN OTHERWISE
STATED IN WRITING THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND/OR OTHER
PARTIES PROVIDE THE PROGRAM "AS IS" WITHOUT WARRANTY
OF ANY KIND, EITHER EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING, BUT
NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF
MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE.
THE ENTIRE RISK AS TO THE QUALITY AND PERFORMANCE OF
THE PROGRAM IS WITH YOU. SHOULD THE PROGRAM PROVE
DEFECTIVE, YOU ASSUME THE COST OF ALL NECESSARY
SERVICING,
393
Appendix H
Software License Agreement
REPAIR OR CORRECTION
12. IN NO EVENT UNLESS REQUIRED BY APPLICABLE LAW OR
AGREED TO IN WRITING WILL ANY COPYRIGHT HOLDER, OR ANY
OTHER PARTY WHO MAY MODIFY AND/OR REDISTRIBUTE THE
PROGRAM AS PERMITTED ABOVE, BE LIABLE TO YOU FOR
DAMAGES, INCLUDING ANY GENERAL, SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL OR
CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES ARISING OUT OF THE USE OR
INABILITY TO USE THE PROGRAM (INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED
TO LOSS OF DATA OR DATA BEING RENDERED INACCURATE OR
LOSSES SUSTAINED BY YOU OR THIRD PARTIES OR A FAILURE OF
THE PROGRAM TO OPERATE WITH ANY OTHER PROGRAMS),
EVEN IF SUCH HOLDER OR OTHER PARTY HAS BEEN ADVISED OF
THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES.
END OF TERMS AND CONDITIONS
Artifex Portions Software Copyright Notices
Portions Copyright © 2001/2009 Artifex Software Inc.
This software is based in part on the work of the Independent JPEG Group.
Portions Copyright © 1998 Soft Horizons.
All Rights Reserved.
BSD License
Portions of this software may have been derived from OpenBSD, FreeBSD or
other sources, and are covered by the appropriate copyright disclaimers
included herein.
Portions created by Red Hat are Copyright (C) 2002 Red Hat, Inc. All Rights
Reserved.
Copyright (c) 1982, 1986, 1988, 1990, 1993, 1994, 1995
The Regents of the University of California. All rights reserved.
Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without
modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions are met:
1. Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice,
this list of conditions and the following disclaimer.
2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice,
this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation
and/or other materials provided with the distribution.
3. All advertising materials mentioning features or use of this software must
display the following acknowledgement: This product includes software
developed by the University of California, Berkeley and its contributors.
4. Neither the name of the University nor the names of its contributors may
be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software
without specific prior written permission.
394
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE REGENTS AND
CONTRIBUTORS “AS IS'' AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED
WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED
WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A
PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE
REGENTS OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT,
INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL
DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF
SUBSTITUTE GOODSOR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR
PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON
ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT
LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE)
ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF
ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.
395
Appendix H
396
Software License Agreement
Index
A
Print Energy, 242
Print Hist.Log, 240
Absorb After ^PN, 191
PTX_SETUP Option, 235
Absorb After ^PY, 189
Pwr Save Control, 239
Accented Char, PRINTER CONTROL, 224
RBN End Action, 241
Acknowledge, Centronics Parallel Interface
RBN Low Action, 241
Signals, 254
RBN Low Warn @, 241
Acoustic noise level, 336
Rcv. Status Port, 239
Active Char Set
Ret. Status Port, 240
3270 Params menu, 114
SD File System, 238
5250 Params menu, 121
Set Lock Key, 240
Active Emulation, 83
Set Sharing, 238
Active Host, 82
Shuttle Timeout, 238
Active IGP Emulation, 83
Slow Paper Slew, 239
Active Protocol, 84
AI 00 Spaces, 179, 191
Adapter, Microsoft Loopback, 271
Alarm, ADVANCED USER Menu, 239
Add
Alignment, 228
header two-key download, 284
Alt. Char Set, Proprinter XL Emulation, 161
manual two key-download, 284
Alt. Set 80-9F, 131, 136, 149
ADVANCE key, 29
Epson FX Emulation, 164
ADVANCED USER Menu, 225
Serial Matrix Emulation, 157
Alarm, 239
Alt.. Set 80-9F, 134
Auto Elevator, 237
ANSI Emulation menu, 166
Auto Locking, 237
Autowrap, 170
Cancel Key, 239
Barcode Darkmode, 172
Disp. Intensity, 242
BC Check Digit, 172
Downloaded Fonts, 236
Character Set, 171
Hex Dump Mode, 235
CPI/LPI Select, 168
Job Sel/Typeface, 240
Define CR Code, 170
Main File System, 237
Define LF Code, 171
OCR Font Density, 241
ESC c Sequence, 171
PMD (Paper Motion Detection) Fault, 236
ETX/ACK, 173
Power Saver Time, 239
Font Attributes, 168
Power Stacker, 236
Page Format, 169
Power-Up State, 235
397
B
Pos. on BC/OvrSz, 172
Printer Select, 171
Private Mode, 172
BAD NVM CALL A, 298, 325
PUM Default, 172
BAD NVM CALL 1, 298, 325
Received CR, 171
BAD NVM CALL 2, 298, 325
Received DEL, 172
BAD NVM CALL 3, 298, 325
Reset Cmd CFG Ld, 171
BAD NVM CALL 4, 298, 325
Truncate PI Slew, 172
BAD NVM Errors, Diagnostics, 296
Append Rotated, 188
Bar Code Quality, PRINTER CONTROL, 222
AR3240, 131
Bar Code Verification, 292
ASCII Character Set, 341
Barcode Darkmode, ANSI Emulation menu, 172
ASCII data port, Ethernet Parameters Menu, 107
Barcode Errors, 193
ASCII Fault Messages, 296
Barcode Options, 178
ASCII Ribbon Cartridge Specifications, 333
AI 00 Spaces, 179
Auto Dump, DIAGNOSTICS, 246
C39 Compatbl., 180
Auto Elevator, ADVANCED USER Menu, 238
I 2/5 Selection, 179
Auto FF at ^PN, 192
Optimized Ratio, 179
Auto Locking, ADVANCED USER Menu, 238
Select SO Char, 179
Auto Save Configuration, 62
UPC Descenders, 178
Auto Save CONFIG. CONTROL menu
User-Def Ratio, 179
Auto Save, 92
Barcode Quality, IPDS Emulation, 199
Auto Skip At End, 117
Barcode Speed, IPDS Emulation, 199
Auto Switching submenu, 94
Barcodes on Page, 235
Port Type, 94
Baud Rate, Serial submenu, 102
Report Status, 95
BC Check Digit, ANSI Emulation menu, 172
Switch Out On, 95
BCD OPTIMIZATION menu
Timeout, 95
Trickle Time, 95
Auto Trickle
Centronics (Parallel) submenu, 99
IEEE 1284 Parallel (Bidirectional) Submenu, 97
Quiet Zone Fault, 233
Bcodes Optimized, 235
BUFFER OVERRUN message, 299
Buffer Size in K
Centronics (Parallel) submenu, 99
Auto Uppercase, 177
IEEE 1284 Parallel (Bidirectional) Submenu, 96
Automatic Download, 266
Serial submenu, 104
Autowrap, 130, 134, 136, 148, 176
Busy On Strobe, Centronics (Parallel) submenu, 99
ANSI Emulation menu, 170
Busy, Centronics Parallel Interface Signals, 254
Epson FX Emulation, 163
Bxx ERROR
Proprinter XL Emulation, 160
NO DOWNLOADER FOUND, 298, 325
P-Series XQ Emulation, 153
Byte Mode, IEEE 1284 Parallel Interface, 255
Serial Matrix Emulation, 156
B12 ERROR PROGRAM MISSING*
Autowrap, LG Emulation, 209
message, 297, 324
B13 ERROR NOT COMPATIBLE*
message, 297, 324
B20 STATUS 00% DOWNLOAD MODE
398
message, 297, 324
Data Polarity, 98
B21 STATUS PRINTER RESET
Latch Data On, 99
message, 297, 324
PI Ignored, 98
B22 ERROR DECOMPRESS SIZE*
Prime Signal, 99
message, 297, 324
Resp. Polarity, 99
B23 ERROR DECOMPRESS CKSUM*
TOF Action, 99
message, 297, 324
Trickle Time, 100
B30 STATUS INITIALIZING, 298, 324
Change Case, 3270 Params menu, 115
B50 STATUS PANEL CODE BAD, 298, 324
Changing parameter settings, 54
B51 XX% LOADING, 298, 324
Changing parameters, example, 58
C
Changing Ribbon Cartridge, 50
Character Set, 130, 149
Cancel a print job, 33
ANSI Emulation menu, 171
CANCEL key, 30
ASCII, 335
Cancel Key, ADVANCED USER Menu, 239
Epson FX Emulation, 164
CARTRIDGE, 299
Proprinter XL Emulation, 161
CARTRIDGE AT END POINT message, 299
Serial Matrix Emulation, 157
CARTRIDGE INCOMPATIBLE message, 300
Character Sets, 135
CARTRIDGE MISSING message, 300
Characteristics, environmental, 335
CARTRIDGE NOT SEATED message, 300
Cleaning
Cartridge Ribbon System (CRS), 48
exterior, 289
CARTRIDGE/REGION X MISMATCH
interior, 290
message, 300
Cleaning requirements, 289
CARTRIDGE/SHUTTLE MISMATCH
CLEAR PAPER JAM message, 299
message, 300
Clear to Send (CTS), RS-232, 252
CARTRIDGE/TIPSIZE MISMATCH message, 300
CLEARING PROGRAM FROM FLASH
CATASTROPHIC ERROR message, 300, 325
message, 299, 325
Centronics Parallel Interface, 253
Clip Page, 219
Centronics Parallel Interface Signals, 254
CLOSE PLATEN message, 299
Acknowledge, 254
Code Page Subset, IPDS Emulation, 200
Busy, 254
COIL HOT ERR 1 message, 299
Data Lines 1 through 8, 254
COIL HOT ERR 2 message, 299
Data Strobe, 254
COIL TEMP FAIL message, 299
Fault, 254
Command
Online, 254
Paper Empty (PE), 254
operation of FILE_IO, 376
Commands
Paper Instruction (PI), 254
line matrix, 377
Prime, 254
PTX_SETUP, 369
Centronics (Parallel) submenu, 98
Compatbl. Mode, 181
Auto Trickle, 99
Compatibility Mode, IEEE 1284 Parallel
Buffer Size in K, 99
Interface, 255
Busy On Strobe, 99
Compatibility Op
Data Bit 8, 98
399
Auto Skip At End, 117
Control panel keys
CR at MPP+1, 116
ADVANCE, 29
CR, EM, and NL (3287 only), 117
CANCEL, 30
FF After Job, 117
CONFIG, 30
FF Validity, 117
ENTER, 31
Last Char = FF, 116
ONLINE, 29
NL At MPP+1, 116
PREV or NEXT, 32
Null Suppression, 116
PREV + NEXT, 32
Position Aft FF (4234 only), 116
SELECT, 30
Compatibility Op, 3270 Params menu, 116
TOF, 30
Compliance, 336
UP or DOWN, 31
Component locations, printer, 26
UP + DOWN, 31
Compressed CPI, 180
VIEW key, 29
Compressed Print, P-Series XQ Emulation, 154
Conventions, manual, 15
CONFIG command, summary, 376
Copying QCMC snapshot image, Quick Change
CONFIG key, 30
Memory Cartridge (QCMC), 365
Config Print, PCL-II Emulation, 206
CPI/LPI Select, 137
Configuration
ANSI Emulation menu, 168
Main Menu, 53
CR at MPP+1, 116
overview, 53
CR Bold Select, 133, 135
Configurations
CR Edit, 176
custom, 54
CR, EM, and NL (3287 only), 117
default, 54
CR, LG Emulation, 209
saving, 63
Currency Sign, 131
Configuration, Auto Save, 62
Custom configurations, 54
Configure Printer, Run Demo File, 286
Customer Support Center, 17, 371
CONFIG. CONTROL Menu, 91
C128 Mode Comp, 192
CONFIG. CONTROL menu
C39 Compatbl., 180, 192
D
Delete Config., 92
Load Config., 91
Name Configs, 92
Darker print, Integrated Print Management
Power-Up Config., 92
System, 49
Print Config., 91
Data Bit 8, 194
Protect Configs., 92
Reset Cfg Names, 92
Data Carrier Detect (DCD), RS-232, 252
Save Config., 91
Data Lines 1 through 8
Contact information, 17
Control Code 06, 147
P-Series XQ Emulation, 153
Serial Matrix Emulation, 156
Control Control Code 08, 147
Control panel, 28
400
Centronics (Parallel) submenu, 98
Centronics Parallel Interface Signals, 254
Data Polarity
Centronics (Parallel) submenu, 98
Data Protocol, Serial submenu, 101
Data Set Ready (DSR), RS-232, 252
Data Strobe
Centronics Parallel Interface Signals, 254
DIAGNOSTICS Menu, 243
Auto Dump, 246
Data Term Ready, Serial submenu, 103
Feature File, 246
Data Terminal Ready (DTR), RS-232, 252
Paper Out Dots, 245
DBCS ASCII Mode, 83
Phase Value, 245
DBCS ASCII Style, 83
Print Statistics, 245
DBCS CPI, 82
Printer Mgmt, 246
Default Code Page, IPDS Emulation, 200
Printer Tests, 244
Default configurations, 54
Shuttle Type, 246
Default Font, IPDS Emulation, 200
Software Build, 246
Define CR Code, 130, 133, 135, 147, 176
System Memory, 245
ANSI Emulation menu, 170
Test Width, 245
Epson FX Emulation, 163
Dimensions, printer, 21, 335
Proprinter XL Emulation, 160
Display Functions, PCL-II Emulation, 205
P-Series XQ Emulation, 153
Display Language, PRINTER CONTROL, 223
Serial Matrix Emulation, 156
Disp. Intensity, ADVANCED USER Menu, 242
Define LF Code, 130, 134, 136, 148, 176
DO NOT POWER OFF message, 301, 325
ANSI Emulation menu, 171
Documentation list, 16
Epson FX Emulation, 163
Download
Proprinter XL Emulation, 160
automatic, 266
P-Series XQ Emulation, 154
demo facility file, 286
Serial Matrix Emulation, 156
files to Main File System, 278
Delete Config., 92
files to SD Card, 282
Delete Demo File, 287
manual three-key sequence, 269
Demo Facility, 286
manual two-key sequence, 268
configure printer to run demo file, 286
PTX_SETUP, 281
delete demo file, 287
TrueType Fonts, 283
download demo file, 286
web page, 263, 279
pause demo file, 287
windows driver, 265
start demo file, 287
Download Mode, Sending Firmware, 270
stop demo file, 287
Downloaded Fonts, ADVANCED USER Menu, 236
Demo File, Delete, 287
Downloaded TrueType Fonts
Demo File, Pause, 287
print, 285
Demo File, Start, 287
select, 285
Demo File, Stop, 287
DP FIFO Busy* message, 301
DIAGNOSTIC PASSED message, 301, 325
D50 STATUS PROGRAMMING DONE, 301
Diagnostics
D50 STATUS UPGRADING PANEL
BAD NVM Errors, 296
message, 301, 325
EXX Errors, 296
D50 STATUS%XX Programming, 325
ILL NVM Errors, 296
401
E
ERROR OCCURRED FLUSHING QUEUES*
message, 303
Early Print Cmpl
3270 Params menu, 114
ERROR PROGRAM NOT COMPATIBLE
message, 303, 327
Early Print Comp (Complete), IPDS Emulation, 199
ERROR PROGRAM NOT VALID
Electrical Characteristics
message, 303, 327
ASCII, 337
Error Report, 183
H-Series, 338
ERROR SECURITY KEY NOT DETECTED
Elong/Alt. Font, P-Series XQ Emulation, 154
message, 303, 327
Emulation Extend, 134
ERROR WRONG CHECKSUM message, 303, 327
EMULATION Menu, 111
ERROR WRONG OEM message, 303,327
EMULATION menu
ERROR WRONG PRINTER TYPE
Postscript/PDF, 217, 218, 219, 220
message, 304, 327
Emulation, IGP/PGL, 173
ESC c Sequence, ANSI Emulation menu, 171
Emulation Mode, IPDS Emulation, 201
ESC d command, Serial Matrix Emulation, 157
Emulation, PGL, 283
ETHERNET ADDRESS Menu
E-Net Test Unavailable message, 303, 327
Gateway address, 106
ENTER key, 31
IP address, 106
Environmental characteristics, 335
IP Assignment, 106
Epson FX Character Set menu, 165
MAC address, 106
Epson FX Emulation, 163
Subnet mask, 106
Alt. Set 80-9F, 164
Ethernet Address Menu, 105
Autowrap, 163
ETHERNET DETECTED message, 304, 328
Character Set, 164
ETHERNET INITIALIZING message, 304, 328
Define CR Code, 163
Ethernet Interface, 263
Define LF Code, 163
ETHERNET PARAMETERS Menu
Printer Select, 164
Ethernet speed, 108
20 CPI Condensed, 164
IPDS Data Port, 107
ERROR DC PROGRAM NOT VALID
Job Control, 108
message, 303, 327
Keep alive timer, 107
Error Handling, 193
Barcode Errors, 193
Error Markers, 193
Offline Process, 108
ETHERNET PARAMETERSMmenu
ASCII data port, 107
Error Msgs, 193
Ethernet Params Menu, 107
Offpage Errors, 193
Ethernet speed, Ethernet Parameters Menu, 108
ERROR LOCKED SN=nnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn
Ethernet (LPR), Sending Firmware, 270
message, 303, 327
ETX/ACK, ANSI Emulation menu, 173
Error Markers, 193
EXCEPTION ERROR message, 304, 328
Error Msgs, 193
EXCESS RIBBON WEAR message, 304
ERROR NOR FLASHED WAS NOT CLEARED
EXHAUST FAN FLT message, 304
message, 303, 327
Expanded Font, 181, 190
ERROR NVRAM FAILURE message, 303, 327
Ext Execute Copy, 178
402
Exterior cleaning, 289
E32G CND 6 BP message, 302, 326
EXX Errors, Diagnostics, 296
E32H CND 7 BP message, 302, 326
E00 EXE @ ADDR0 message, 302, 326
E33 WRITE BP message, 302, 326
E01A TYPE 0x40 message, 302, 326
E34 TRACE CMPLT message, 302, 326
E01B TYPE 0x60 message, 302, 326
E99 UNKNOWN INT message, 302, 326
F
E02 MACHINE CHK message, 302, 326
E03A DSI HASH L message, 302, 326
E03B DSI HASH S message, 302, 326
Face CPI Delay, PCL-II Emulation, 204
E03C DSI BAT PL message, 302, 326
Fault messages
E03D DSI BAT PS message, 302, 326
ASCII, 290
E03E DSI CXIWX message, 302, 326
BAD NVM CALL A, 298, 325
E03F DSI CXOWX message, 302, 326
BAD NVM CALL 1, 298, 325
E03G DSI ECXIWX message, 302, 326
BAD NVM CALL 2, 298, 325
E03H DSI ECXOWX message, 302, 326
BAD NVM CALL 3, 298, 325
E04A ISI NO TRA message, 302, 326
BAD NVM CALL 4, 298, 325
E04B ISI DIRECT message, 302, 326
BUFFER OVERRUN, 299
E04C ISI PROTEC message, 302, 326
Bxx ERROR
E06 NOT ALIGNED message, 302, 326
NO DOWNLOADER FOUND, 298, 325
E07 ILLEGAL INS message, 302, 326
B12 ERROR PROGRAM MISSING*, 297, 324
E08 FLOATINGPNT message, 302, 326
B13 ERROR NOT COMPATIBLE*, 297, 324
E12 SYSTEM CALL message, 302, 326
B20 STATUS 00% DOWNLOAD
E13 TRACE INT message, 302, 326
MODE, 297, 324
E16 ITRANS MISS message, 302, 326
B21 STATUS PRINTER RESET, 297, 324
E17 DLOAD MISS message, 302, 326
B22 ERROR DECOMPRESS SIZE*, 297, 324
E18 DSTORE MISS message, 302, 326
B23 ERROR DECOMPRESS
E19 BREAKPOINT message, 302, 326
CKSUM*, 297, 324
E20 SYS MANAGE message, 302, 326
B30 STATUS INITIALZING, 298, 324
E30 DEBUGGER message, 302, 326
B50 STATUS PANEL CODE BAD, 298, 324
E31A EVENT O BP message, 302, 326
B51 XX% LOADING, 298, 324
E31B EVENT 1 BP message, 302, 326
CARTRIDGE, 299
E31C EVENT 2 BP message, 302, 326
CARTRIDGE AT END POINT, 299
E31D EVENT 3 BP message, 302, 326
CARTRIDGE INCOMPATIBLE, 300
E31E EVENT 4 BP message, 302, 326
CARTRIDGE MISSING, 300
E31F EVENT 5 BP message, 302, 326
CARTRIDGE NOT SEATED, 300
E31G EVENT 6 BP message, 302, 326
CARTRIDGE/REGION X MISMATCH, 300
E31H EVENT 7 BP message, 302, 326
CARTRIDGE/SHUTTLE MISMATCH, 300
E32A CND 0 BP message, 302, 326
CARTRIDGE/TIPSIZE MISMATCH, 300
E32B CND 1 BP message, 302, 326
CATASTROPHIC ERROR, 300, 325
E32C CND 2 BP message, 302, 326
CLEAR PAPER JAM, 299
E32D CND 3 BP message, 302, 326
CLEARING PROGRAM FROM
E32E CND 4 BP message, 302, 326
E32F CND 5 BP message, 302, 326
FLASH, 299, 325
CLOSE PLATEN, 299
COIL HOT ERR 1, 299
403
COIL HOT ERR 2, 293
E03H DSI ECXOWX, 296, 320
COIL TEMP FAIL, 293
E04A ISI NO TRA, 296, 320
DIAGNOSTIC PASSED, 295, 319
E04B ISI DIRECT, 296, 320
DO NOT POWER OFF, 295, 319
E04C ISI PROTEC, 296, 320
DP FIFO Busy*, 295
E06 NOT ALIGNED, 296, 320
D50 STATUS UPGRADING PANEL, 295, 319
E07 ILLEGAL INS, 296, 320
D51 STATUS PROGRAMMING DONE, 295
E08 FLOATINGPNT, 296, 320
D51 STATUS%XX Programming, 319
E12 SYSTEM CALL, 296, 320
E-Net Test Unavailable, 297, 321
E13 TRACE INT, 296, 320
ERROR DC PROGRAM NOT VALID, 297, 321
E16 ITRANS MISS, 296, 320
ERROR LOCKED
E17 DLOAD MISS, 296, 320
SN=nnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn, 297,
E18 DSTORE MISS, 296, 320
321
E19 BREAKPOINT, 296, 320
ERROR NOR FLASHED WAS NOT
CLEARED, 297, 321
E30 DEBUGGER, 296, 320
ERROR NVRAM FAILURE, 297, 321
E31A EVENT O BP, 296, 320
ERROR OCCURRED FLUSHING
E31B EVENT 1 BP, 296, 320
QUEUES*, 297
E31C EVENT 2 BP, 296, 320
ERROR PRINTER TYPE, 298, 321
E31D EVENT 3 BP, 296, 320
ERROR PROGRAM NOT
E31E EVENT 4 BP, 296, 320
COMPATIBLE, 297, 321
E31F EVENT 5 BP, 296, 320
ERROR PROGRAM NOT VALID, 297, 321
E31G EVENT 6 BP, 296, 320
ERROR SECURITY KEY NOT
E31H EVENT 7 BP, 296, 320
DETECTED, 297, 321
E32A CND 0 BP, 296, 320
ERROR WRONG CHECKSUM, 297, 321
E32B CND 1 BP, 296, 320
ERROR WRONG OEM, 298, 321
E32C CND 2 BP, 296, 320
ETHERNET DETECTED, 298, 322
E32D CND 3 BP, 296, 320
ETHERNET INITIALIZING, 298, 322
E32E CND 4 BP, 296, 320
EXCEPTION ERROR, 298, 322
E32F CND 5 BP, 296, 320
EXCESS RIBBON WEAR, 298
E32G CND 6 BP, 296, 320
EXHAUST FAN FLT, 298
E32H CND 7 BP, 296, 320
E00 EXE @ ADDR0, 296, 320
E33 WRITE BP, 296, 320
E01A TYPE 0x40, 296, 320
E34 TRACE CMPLT, 296, 320
E01B TYPE 0x60, 296, 320
E99 UNKNOWN INT, 296, 320
E02 MACHINE CHK, 296, 320
FIRMWARE ERROR, 299
E03A DSI HASH L, 296, 320
FLASH CHECK RETURN, 299, 322
E03B DSI HASH S, 296, 320
FLASH WAS NOT CLEARED, 299, 322
E03C DSI BAT PL, 296, 320
FLASH WRITE ERROR # 2, 299, 322
E03D DSI BAT PS, 296, 320
FM HEADER ERROR, 299
E03E DSI CXIWX, 296, 320
FRAMING ERROR, 299
E03F DSI CXOWX, 296, 320
GENERATING XX% NAND FLASH
E03G DSI ECXIWX, 296, 320
404
E20 SYS MANAGE, 296, 320
TABLE, 299, 322
HAMMER COIL BAD, ###, 300
HAMMER DRIVER CIRCUIT BAD*, 300
HAMMERBANK NOT INSTALLED*, 300
HMR BANK FAN FLT, 300
PRINTER UNDER REMOTE
CONTROL, 304, 324
PROCESSOR HALTED
EC_FAULT_RTSYS2, 304, 324
H-Series, 310
PROTECTED INSTR *, 304
H00: PCI SLOT ?, 299, 322
PS/PDF ERROR CHECK ERROR, 304
H01: PCI J12, 299, 322
PS/PDF ERROR DICTIONARY ERROR, 304
ILL EXT BUS ACC *, 300
PS/PDF ERROR INVALID ACCESS, 304
ILL NVM VALUE 5, 301, 323
PS/PDF ERROR I/O ERROR, 304
ILL NVM VALUE 6, 301, 323
PS/PDF ERROR JOB ABORTED, 305
ILL NVM VALUE 7, 301, 323
PS/PDF ERROR STACK ERROR, 305
ILLGL OPR ACCSS *, 301
PS/PDF ERROR SYNTAX ERROR, 305
INITIALIZING.., 301, 323
PWRSUPP VOLT *, 305
INTAKE FAN CHECK, 301, 323
REMOVE USED SPX, 305, 324
INTERRUPT UNUSED VECTOR 00, 301, 323
RESTORING BOOT CODE, 305, 324
LO DRV. SHORT *, 301
RIB INVLD CMD*, 305
LOAD PAPER, 301
RIBBON STALL, 305
LOADING PROGRAM FROM
RIBBON UNDER 2%, 306
PORT XX%, 302, 323
SCS COMMAND ERROR, 325
LOADING PROGRAM INTO FLASH, 302, 324
SD CARD ERROR, 306, 325
NEW SPX DETECTED, 302, 324
SD FILE EXISTS, 306
NON VOLATILE MEMORY FAILED, 302, 324
SD FILESYS FULL Delete Files, 306
ONLINE, 302, 324
SD FILESYS FULL File Too Big, 306
PANEL BAD CHECKSUM, 302, 324
SD FILESYS WRITE, 306
PAP BAD TABLE *, 302
SD INSERTED, 306
PAP FIFO OVERFL *, 302
SD NOT FOUND, 306
PAP FIFO UNDRFL *, 302
SD READING, 306
PAP ILLGL ST *, 303
SD REMOVED, 306
PAP INVLD CMD *, 303
SD WRITE FAIL WRITE PROTECTED, 307
PAP INVLD PARM *, 303
SD WRITING, 307
PAPER REQUESTED, 303
SDSC CARD NOT SUPPORTED, 307, 325
PARAMETER ERROR*, 324
SECURITY KEY NOT DETECTED, 307, 325
PARITY ERROR, 303
SECURITY VIOLATION, 307, 325
PLAT DRVR CIR, 324
SF ERROR, 307, 325
PLAT INV CMD *, 303
SHUTL INV CMD *, 307
PLAT INV PARM *, 303
SHUTL INV PARM *, 307
PLAT INV STATE *, 303
SHUTL OVR SPEED*, 307
PLEASE WAIT...RESET IN
SHUTTLE JAM, 307
PROGRESS, 303, 324
SHUTTLE STALL, 308, 325
POWERSUPPLY HOT *, 303
SHUTTLE TYPE NOT SUPPORTED*, 308
PRINTER HOT *, 303
SOFTWARE ERROR* CYCLE POWER, 308
405
SPX FOUND, ERROR KEY NOT
DETECTED, 308, 325
SPX NOT NEEDED OPTIONS
ENABLED, 308, 325
406
437 REG MISSING, 313
438 TIP MISMATCH, 313
439 SHTL MISMATCH, 313
445 SD INSERTED, 313
SSTACKER JAM, 308
446 SD REMOVED, 314
STACKER FAULT, 308
447 SD FL EXIST, 314
STACKER FULL, 308
448 SD WRT. FAIL WRITE PROTECTED, 314
SYS R/T ERROR, 325
449 SD FILE WRITE, 314
TCB CORRUPTED*, 309
450 SD FILE FULL File Too Big, 314
TCP PORT BUSY, 309, 326
451 SD NOT FOUND, 314
UP DRV. SHORT*, 309
452 SD FILE FULL Delete Files, 314
UPGRADED - REMOVE SPX*, 309
453 SD READING, 314
WELD NOT DETECT, 309
454 SD WRITING, 314
WELD SNSR ERROR, 309
607 CTL VOLT FAIL *, 314
WELD SNSR MISSING, 309
608 DRIVER CIRCUIT BAD, 314
XXXX CHECKING PATTERN, 309
609 EXHAUST FAN CHECK, 315
XXXX MEMORY FAILURE, 309
613 HAM. COIL BAD, 315
XXXX WRITING PATTERN, 309
614 HAMMER BANK* NOT INSTALLED, 315
x/y BARCODES / Not Found, 292
615 HAMMER FAN CHECK, 315
000 SHUTTLE TYPE NOT SUPPORTED*, 311
617 LOWER DRIVER SHORT*, 315
104 POWERSUPPLY HOT*, 311
619 PAPER FEED DRIVER CIRCUIT*, 315
105 PRINTER HOT*, 311
620 POWER VOLT CHECK*, 315
12 VOLT FAILED*, 291
622 SHUTTLE DRIVER CRCUIT*, 315
401 BUFFER OVERRUN, 311
623 STACKER FAULT, 316
402 CLEAR PAPER JAM, 311
624 UPPER DRIVER SHORT*, 316
403 CLOSE PLATEN, 311
702 FIRMWARE ERROR, 316
409 FRAMING ERROR, 311
703 ILLEGAL EXTERNAL BUS ACC *, 316
410 LOAD PAPER, 311
704 ILLEGAL INSTRUCTION ACC*, 316
411 PARITY ERROR, 311
705 ILLEGAL OPERAND ACCESS *, 316
414 RIBBON STALL, 312
706 PAP BAD TABLE*, 316
415 SHUTTLE JAM, 312
708 PAPER FIFO OVERFLOW*, 316
416 STACKER FULL, 312
709 PAPER FIFO UNDERFLOW*, 316
417 STACKER JAM, 312
710 PAP ILLGL ST*, 316
418 RBN INK LOW, 312
712 PAP INVLD CMD*, 316
419 RBN INK OUT*, 312
713 PAP INVLD PARM*, 316
420 EXC RBN WEAR, 312
717 PLAT INV CMD*, 317
423 OLD RIBBON, 312
718 PLAT INV PARM*, 317
425 UNKNOWN RBN2, 312
719 PLAT INV STATE*, 317
427 CRTG MISSING, 313
720 PROTECTED INSTRUCTION*, 317
428 CRTG COMM ER, 313
721 RIB INVLD CMD*, 317
432 CRT NOT SET, 313
723 SHUTL INV CMD*, 317
435 NO WELD, 313
724 SHUTL INV PARM*, 317
725 SHUTL OVER SPEED*, 317
Graphic Chek Cod, 5250 Params menu, 122
727 SOFTWARE ERROR*, 317
Graphic Chek Err, 5250 Params menu, 122
730 TCB CORRUPTED*, 317
Graphics Density, PCL-II Emulation, 204
733 DP FIFO Busy*, 317
Graphics enhancement, 15
Fault, Centronics Parallel Interface Signals, 248
Graphics Options, 188
Feature File, DIAGNOSTICS, 241
Absorb After ^PN, 191
Features, printer, 11
Absorb After ^PY, 189
FF After Job, 117
AI 00 Spaces, 191
FF Valid at TOF, Proprinter XL Emulation, 161
Append Rotated, 188
FF Validity, 117
Auto FF at ^PN, 192
FF, LG Emulation, 210
C128 Mode Comp, 192
File Properties Not Shown in Menus, 273
C39 Compatbl., 192
File Types, firmware, 256
Expanded Font, 190
Filename Extensions Not Shown in Menus, 272
Ignore Dots, 188
FIRMWARE ERROR message, 299
Ignore Spaces, 189
Firmware File Types, 256
Ignore ^Lxx Cmd., 192
FLASH CHECK RETURN message, 299, 322
IGP110 Compatbl., 192
FLASH WAS NOT CLEARED message, 299, 322
I25 Selection, 190
FLASH WRITE ERROR # 2 message, 299, 322
LP+ Font, 190
FM HEADER ERROR message, 299
Midline PY (includes ^PN), 190
Font Attributes, 138
MSI Check Digit, 190
ANSI Emulation menu, 168
PDF Size Comp., 192
Font Set, 194
Print Quality, 190
Font Size, IPDS Emulation, 198
Rot. Char Size, 189
Fonts, TrueType, 277
Slash 0, 188
Font, LG Emulation, 208
True Vert 1/10, 189
Form Length, 84, 85
Truncate Alpha, 189
Form Width, 84, 85
UPC Descenders, 189
Format Control
Width Limit, 191
3270 Params menu, 118
Graphics Print, IPDS Emulation, 198
5250 Params menu, 123
Graphics Quality, IPDS Emulation, 199
Forms Handling, 177
Graphics Scaling, IPDS Emulation, 200
FRAMING ERROR message, 299
Graphics Spd-Up, 83
Framing Errors, Serial submenu, 105
Gray Adjust, 215
Frequent Problems, Solutions, 289
G
Gateway address
Ethernet Address Menu, 106
H
HAMMER COIL BAD, ### Message, 300
HAMMER DRIVER CIRCUIT BAD* message, 300
HAMMERBANK NOT INSTALLED* message, 300
General PTX_SETUP commands, 362
HD Ribbon Cartridge Specifications, 327
GENERATING XX% NAND FLASH TABLE
Header Two Key-Download, 278
message, 299, 322
Hex Dump Mode, ADVANCED USER Menu, 230
Hex Dump, printing, 287
407
Hexdump Mode, IPDS Emulation, 201
IEEE 1284 Parallel (Bidirectional) Submenu, 96
HMR BANK FAN FLT Message, 300
Auto Trickle, 97
Horiz Forms, 86
Buffer Size in K, 96
Horiz Forms, LG Emulation, 209
Offline Process, 97
Hor. Quiet Zone, 227
Prime Signal, 96
Host Command, 137
TOF Action, 96
Host Form Length, 180
Trickle Time, 97
HOST INTERFACE Menu, 93
Ignore Char, 181
Auto Switching, 94
Ignore Chars, 193
Centronics (Parallel), 98
Ignore CH#1, 194
IEEE 1284 Parallel (Bidirectional), 96
Ignore CH#2, 194
Serial, 100
Ignore Dots, 188
Host Override
Ignore Spaces, 189
3270 Params menu, 118
Ignore ^Lxx Cmd., 192
5250 Params menu, 122
Ignore/DB8 Setup, 193
Host PI, 194
Data Bit 8, 194
HS Print (High Speed Print), P-Series XQ
Ignore Chars, 193
Emulation, 154
Ignore CH#1, 194
H-Series Fault Messages, 310
H-Series Firmware, Main Menu, 80
H-Series Hangul
Ignore CH#2, 194
IGP/PGL Emulation, 173
configuring with the control panel, 174
KS Emulation, 133
IGP/PGL submenu, 175
KSSM Emulation, 135
H-Series Hanzi Big5
Auto Uppercase, 177
Autowrap, 176
LQ-1600K, 129
Barcode Options, 178
H-Series Hanzi GB
Compatbl. Mode, 181
LQ-1600K, 129
Compressed CPI, 180
H-Series Kanji
CR Edit, 176
LQ-1600K, 129
Define CR (Carriage Return) Code, 176
H-Series Ribbon Cartridge Specifications, 327
Define LF (Line Feed) Code, 176
H00: PCI SLOT ? message, 299, 322
Error Report, 183
H01: PCI J12 message, 299, 322
Expanded Font, 181
I
Ext Execute Copy, 178
Forms Handling, 177
I 2/5 Selection, 179
Host Form Length, 180
Idle Response, Serial submenu, 104
Ignore Char, 181
IEEE 1284 Parallel Interface, 249
PGL SFCC, 176
Byte Mode, 249
PI Slew Range, 176
Compatibility Mode, 249
Power On IGP/PGL, 178
Nibble Mode, 249
Power on S-Mode, 182
Signals, 250
Print Quality, 182
Printer PI Line, 182
408
Scalable Size, 181
Select Font, 177, 183
Select LPI, 177
Interfaces
printer, 243
specifications, 332
Skip Cmd Prefix, 177
Interior cleaning, 284
Slash 0, 177
INTERRUPT UNUSED VECTOR 00
True Form Slew, 182
message, 301, 323
Trunc Dyn Data, 183
Intervention Req, 3270 Params menu, 115
Var Form Adjust, 180
IP address
Var Form Type, 180
IGP/PGL, Font Set menu, 184
IGP/VGL Emulation, 185
configuring with the control panel, 186
IGP/VGL Font Set Menu, 196
Ethernet Address Menu, 106
IP Assignment
Ethernet Address Menu, 106
IPDS Data Port, Ethernet Parameters Menu, 107
IPDS Emulation, 197
IGP/VGL submenu, 186
Barcode Quality, 199
Error Handling, 193
Barcode Speed, 199
Font Set, 194
Code Page Subset, 200
Graphics Options, 188
Default Code Page, 200
Ignore/DB8 Setup, 193
Default Font, 200
LPI, 188
Early Print Comp (Complete), 199
PI Control, 194
Emulation Mode, 201
Prt to Emulate, 195
Font Size, 198
SFCC & Pwrup, 187
Graphics Quality, 199
IGP110 Compatbl., 192
Graphics Scaling, 200
ILL EXT BUS ACC * message, 300
Hexdump Mode, 201
ILL NVM Errors, Diagnostics, 290
I2/5 Checksum, 200
ILL NVM VALUE 5 message, 301, 323
Print IPDS Fonts, 201
ILL NVM VALUE 6 message, 301, 323
Print Quality, 198
ILL NVM VALUE 7 message, 301, 323
Undef Char Subst, 201
ILLGL OPR ACCSS * message, 301
VPA Check, 200
Indian Option, 144
I2/5 Checksum, IPDS Emulation, 200
Indian Option (Indian Language), 88
I-2/5 Guard Bars, LG Emulation, 210
INITIALIZING... message, 301, 323
I25 Selection, 190
Installing Quick Change Memory Cartridge
J
(QCMC), 356
Install, Microsoft Loopback Adapter, 265
Job Control, Ethernet Parameters Menu, 108
INTAKE FAN CHECK message, 301, 323
Job Sel/Typeface, ADVANCED USER Menu, 235
Integrated Print Management System, 48
Darker Print, 49
Lighter Print, 49
409
K
Barcode Height, 146
Barcode x-offset, 146
Keep alive timer, Ethernet Parameters Menu, 107
CPI/LPI Select, 137
KS Emulation, 133
Error Handling, 146
Alt. Set 80-9F, 134
Font Attributes, 138
Autowrap, 134
Host Command, 137
CR Bold Select, 133
H-Series Hangul, 132
Define CR Code, 133
H-Series Hanzi Big5, 127
Define LF Code, 134
H-Series Hanzi GB, 126
Emulation Extend, 134
H-Series Kanji, 128
Printer Select, 134
Indian Option, 144
KSSM Emulation, 135
Page Format, 143
Alt. Set 80-9F, 136
Print Char. Set, 144
Autowrap, 136
Printer Protocol, 137
Character Sets, 135
Reset Cmd CFG Ld, 145
CR Bold Select, 135
Set Substitution, 146
Define CR Code, 135
LinePrinter Plus Emulation (ASCII Indian
Define LF Code, 136
Language) submenu, 124
Printer Select, 136
LO DRV. SHORT * message, 301
20 CPI Condensed, 136
Load Config., 90, 91
L
Label specifications, 328
Last Char = FF, 116
Latch Data On
Centronics (Parallel) submenu, 99
LG Emulation
Autowrap, 209
CR, 209
FF, 210
Font, 208
Horiz Forms, 209
I-2/5 Guard Bars, 210
LP, 209
Plot Mode Opt, 210
Print Mode Opt, 210
Unsolicited Rpt, 210
Vert Forms, 208
Lighter print, Integrated Print Management
System, 49
Line Matrix Commands, 369
Line Terminator, PCL-II Emulation, 205
LinePrinter Plus Emulation submenu
410
LOAD PAPER message, 301
LOADING PROGRAM FROM PORT XX%
message, 302, 323
LOADING PROGRAM INTO FLASH
message, 302, 324
Loading Used Ribbon, 49
LPI, 188
LPI Adjust, 86
LPI Adjust, PCL-II Emulation, 205
LP, LG Emulation, 209
LP+ Font, 190
LQ-1600K
Alt. Set 80-9F, 131
AR3240, 131
Autowrap, 130
Character Set, 130
Currency Sign, 131
Define CR Code, 130
Define LF Code, 130
H-Series Hanzi Big5, 129
H-Series Hanzi GB, 129
H-Series Kanji, 129
Printer Select, 130
OpenPrint SURE SCAN, 222
20 CPI Condensed, 131
PRINTER CONTROL, 216
M
Printer Mgmt, 242
Menus
MAC address
Ethernet Address Menu, 106
file properties not shown, 273
Mgmt Port Number, PRINTER MGMT Menu, 242
Main File System, ADVANCED USER Menu, 232
Mgmt Protocol, PRINTER MGMT Menu, 242
Main File System, Download Files, 272
Microsoft Loopback Adapter, 265
Main Menu
Midline PY (includes ^PN), 190
H-Series Firmware, 80
Move to TOF, 215
OpenPrint P8000 HD Postscript/PDF
MSI Check Digit, 190
Firmware, 79
N
OpenPrint P8000 Standard Postscript PDF, 78
P8000 ANSI Firmware, 77
Name Configs, 92
P8000 Indian Language Firmware, 81
Navigating the menus, 55
P8000 LG Firmware, 76
NETWORK SETUP Menu, 105
P8000 PCL-II Firmware, 75
Ethernet Address, 105
P8000 STD Firmware, 73
Ethernet Params, 107
P8000 TN Firmware, 74
NEW SPX DETECTED message, 302, 324
Maintenance, 15
Nibble Mode, IEEE 1284 Parallel Interface, 249
Manual
NL At MPP+1, 116
conventions, 15
noise level, acoustic, 330
related documents, 16
NON VOLATILE MEMORY FAILED message, 302,
special information, 16
324
warnings, 16
Not Shown in Menus, Filename Extensions, 272
Manual Three-Key Download Sequence, 263
Null Suppression, 116
O
Manual Two-Key Download, 278
Manual Two-Key Download Sequence, 262
Margins, 85
OCR Font Density, ADVANCED USER Menu, 241
Max Line Width, 86
ffline Process
Max Line Width, PCL-II Emulation, 204
IEEE 1284 Parallel (Bidirectional) Submenu, 97
Max PI 16, 195
Offline Process, Ethernet Parameters Menu, 108
Max. Print Width
Offline Process, Serial submenu, 105
3270 Params menu, 118
Offpage Errors, 193
5250 Params menu, 123
One Char Enquiry, Serial submenu, 104
Menu
ADVANCED USER, 220
Online
Centronics Parallel Interface Signals, 248
CONFIG. CONTROL, 91
ONLINE key, 29
DIAGNOSTICS, 238
ONLINE message, 302, 324
EMULATION, 111
Open Platen @ BOF, 90
IGP/PGL Font Set, 184
Open Platen @ BOF (Bottom of Form)
navigating, 55
PRINTER CONTROL, 217
NETWORK SETUP, 105
411
OpenPrint P8000 HD Postscript/PDF Firmware,
Paper
Main Menu, 79
reload, 34
OpenPrint P8000 Standard Postscript PDF, Main
stacker, power, 337
Menu, 78
unload, 45
OpenPrint SURE SCAN menu, 222
Alignment, 223
Paper Empty (PE)
Centronics Parallel Interface Signals, 248
Barcodes on Page, 230
Bcodes Optimized, 230
Paper Instruction (PI)
Centronics Parallel Interface Signals, 248
Hor. Quiet Zone, 227
Paper Out Dots, DIAGNOSTICS, 240
Optimize Barcode, 222
PAPER REQUESTED message, 303
Update PDF, 229
Paper Size, 87, 213
Ver. Erase Zone, 228
Paper Size Fault, 214
Operating modes, 27
Paper specifications, 328
Operation of FILE_IO command, 368
Parallel Interface
Operational procedures
Centronics, 247
cancel a print job, 33
Parallel, Sending Firmware, 270
reload paper, 34
PARAMETER ERROR* message, 324
unload paper, 45
Parameter settings
Optimize Barcode, 222
changing, 54
Optimized Ratio, 179
saving, 54
Optimizing print quality, 68
Parameters, changing, example, 58
Optimizing print speed, 69
PARITY ERROR message, 303
Output Darkness, 48
Parity, Serial submenu, 103
Overstrike, 148
Pause Demo File, 281
Serial Matrix Emulation, 156
PCL-II Emulation, 202
Overview, Main Menu, 53
Config Print, 206
Overview, printer models, 11
Display Functions, 205
P
Face CPI Delay, 204
Graphics Density, 204
Page Format, 143
ANSI Emulation menu, 169
Line Terminator, 205
LPI Adjust, 205
Page Length Rep, 86
Max Line Width, 204
Page Length Rep, PCL-II Emulation, 204
Page Length Rep, 204
Page L./Inches, PCL-II Emulation, 205
Page L./Inches, 205
Page L./Lines, PCL-II Emulation, 205
Page L./Lines, 205
PANEL BAD CHECKSUM message, 302, 324
Perforation Skip, 204
Panel Display, PRINTER CONTROL, 218
Primary Char. Set, 204
PAP BAD TABLE * message, 302
PTX Linefeed, 205
PAP FIFO OVERFL * message, 302
Reset Cmd CFG Ld, 206
PAP FIFO UNDRFL * message, 302
Second Char. Set, 204
PAP ILLGL ST * message, 303
Symbol Set Print, 206
PAP INVLD CMD * message, 303
PAP INVLD PARM * message, 303
412
PDF Size Comp., 192
Perforation Skip, PCL-II Emulation, 204
POWER SUPPLY HOT * message, 303
PGL Emulation, 277
Power Up ^ F, 188
PGL SFCC, 84, 176
Power Up ^ X, 188
Phase Value, DIAGNOSTICS, 240
Power Up ^PY, 188
PI Control, 194
Powering on the printer, 27
Host PI, 194
Power-on S-Mode, 182
Max PI 16, 195
Power-Up Config, 90
Printer PI, 194
Power-Up Config., 92
PI Ignored
Centronics (Parallel) submenu, 98
Power-Up State, ADVANCED USER Menu, 230
PREV or NEXT key, 32
PI Slew Range, 176
PREV + NEXT key, 32
PLAT DRVR CIR message, 324
Primary Char. Set, PCL-II Emulation, 204
PLAT INV CMD * message, 303
Prime Signal
PLAT INV PARM * message, 303
PLAT INV STATE * message, 303
Centronics (Parallel) submenu, 99
IEEE 1284 Parallel (Bidirectional) Submenu, 96
PLEASE WAIT...RESET IN PROGRESS
Prime, Centronics Parallel Interface Signals, 248
message, 303, 324
Print Char. Set, 144
Plot Mode Opt, LG Emulation, 210
Print Config., 91
PMD (Paper Motion Detection) Fault, ADVANCED
Print Downloaded TrueType Fonts, 279
USER, 231
Print Energy, ADVANCED USER Menu, 237
PNE Port Number, PRINTER MGMT Menu, 242
Print Hist. Log, ADVANCED USER Menu, 235
PNE Port Timeout, PRINTER MGMT Menu, 242
Print IPDS Fonts, IPDS Emulation, 201
PNE Port, PRINTER MGMT Menu, 242
Print job, cancel, 33
Poll Character, Serial submenu, 104
Print Mode Opt, LG Emulation, 210
Poll Response, Serial submenu, 104
Print Quality, 182, 190
Port Type, Auto Switching submenu, 94
optimizing, 68
Position Aft FF (4234 only), 116
Print speed, optimizing, 69
Postscript/PDF submenu
Print Statistics, DIAGNOSTICS, 240
Clip Page, 214
Printer
Gray Adjust, 215
component locations, 26
Move to TOF, 215
control panel, 28
Paper Size, 213
dimensions, 21, 329
Paper Size Fault, 214
exterior cleaning, 283
Resolution, 212
features, 11
Pos. on BC/OvrSz, ANSI Emulation menu, 172
interior cleaning, 284
Power Consumption
maintenance, 15
ASCII, 331
models, 11
H-Series, 332
operating modes, 27
Power On IGP/PGL, 178
power paper stacker, 337
Power requirements, 19
powering on, 27
Power Saver Time, ADVANCED USER, 234
run demo file, 280
Power Stacker, ADVANCED USER Menu, 231
413
site requirements, 19
Proprinter XL Character Set menu, 162
weight, 329
Proprinter XL Emulation, 160
PRINTER CONTROL Menu, 216
Alt. Char Set, 161
Accented Char, 219
Autowrap, 160
Bar Code Quality, 217
Character Set, 161
Display Language, 218
Define CR Code, 160
Open Platen @ BOF (Bottom of Form), 217
Define LF Code, 160
Panel Display, 218
FF Valid at TOF, 161
Ribbon End Point, 217
20 CPI Condensed, 161
Tear Bar Dist. (Distance), 217
Protect Configs., 92
Unidirectional, 218
PROTECTED INSTR * message, 304
View Function, 218
Prt Partial Line
ZTP SETTINGS, 217
PRINTER HOT * message, 303
3270 Params menu, 114
5250 Params menu, 121
Printer interfaces, 243
Prt to Emulate, 195
PRINTER MGMT Menu
P-Series Character Set menu, 150
Mgmt Port Number, 242
PSeries Dbl High, 149
Mgmt Protocol, 242
P-Series Emulation, 147
PNE Port, 242
Alt. Set 80-9F, 149
PNE Port Number, 242
Autowrap, 148
PNE Port Timeout, 242
Character Set, 149
Status Port Numb, 242
Control Code 06, 147
Printer Mgmt Menu, 242
Control Code 08, 147
Printer Mgmt, DIAGNOSTICS, 241
Define CR Code, 147
Printer PI, 194
Define LF Code, 148
Printer PI Line, 182
FF Valid at TOF, 149
Printer Protocol, 137
Overstrike, 148
Printer Select, 130, 134, 136
PSeries Dbl High, 149
ANSI Emulation menu, 171
P-Series SFCC, 148
Epson FX Emulation, 164
SFCC d Command, 149
Serial Matrix Emulation, 156
VFU Select, 149
Printer Tests, DIAGNOSTICS, 239
P-Series SFCC, 85, 148
PRINTER UNDER REMOTE CONTROL
P-Series XQ Emulation, 153
message, 304, 324
Autowrap, 153
Printing speed, 333
Compressed Print, 154
Printing, Hex Dump, 287
Control Code 06, 153
PrintNet Enterprise, consumable monitoring, 14
Define CR Code, 153
Printronix_SETUP Option, overview, 361
Define LF Code, 154
Private Mode, ANSI Emulation menu, 172
Elong/Alt. Font, 154
Problems, frequent, 289
HS Print (High Speed Print), 154
PROCESSOR HALTED EC_FAULT_RTSYS2
Slew Relative, 155
message, 304, 324
414
Upr. Case Select, 155
Form Length, 84, 85
VFU Select, 154
Form Width, 84, 85
PS/PDF ERROR CHECK ERROR message, 304
Graphics Spd-Up, 83
PS/PDF ERROR DICTIONARY ERROR
Horiz Forms, 86
message, 304
Indian Option (Indian Language), 88
PS/PDF ERROR INVALID ACCESS message, 304
Load Config., 90
PS/PDF ERROR I/O ERROR message, 304
LPI Adjust, 86
PS/PDF ERROR JOB ABORTED message, 305
Margins, 85
PS/PDF ERROR STACK ERROR message, 305
Max Line Width, 86
PS/PDF ERROR SYNTAX ERROR message, 305
Open Platen @ BOF, 90
PTX Linefeed, PCL-II Emulation, 205
Page Length Rep, 86
PTX Transparent
Paper Size, 87
3270 Params menu, 114
PGL SFCC, 84
5250 Params menu, 121
Power-Up Config, 90
PTX _SETUP Option, ADVANCED USER
P-Series SFCC, 85
Menu, 230
Resolution, 87
PTX_SETUP commands, 361
Ribbon End Point, 90
general, 362
Save Config, 90
PTX_SETUP Download, 275
Select CPI, 84
PUM Default, ANSI Emulation menu, 172
Select LPI, 84
Pwr Save Control, ADVANCED USER, 234
Slow Paper Slew, 90
PWRSUPP VOLT * message, 305
Typeface, 83
P8000 ANSI Firmware, Main Menu, 77
Vert Forms, 86
P8000 Indian Language Firmware, Main Menu, 81
ZTP Data Time, 82
P8000 LG Firmware, Main Menu, 76
ZTP TearDistance, 82
P8000 PCL-II Firmware, Main Menu, 75
ZTP Wait Time, 82
P8000 STD Firmware, Main Menu, 73
Quiet Zone Fault, 228
R
P8000 TN Firmware, Main Menu, 74
Q
RBN End Action, ADVANCED USER Menu, 236
QCMC, 355
RBN Low Action, ADVANCED USER Menu, 236
Quick Change Memory Cartridge (QCMC), 355
RBN Low Warn @, ADVANCED USER Menu, 236
copying QCMC snapshot image, 359
Rcv. Status Port, ADVANCED USER Menu, 234
installation, 356
Receive Data (RD), RS-232, 246
saving printer’s configuration, 357
Received CR, ANSI Emulation menu, 171
QUICK SETUP menu
Received DEL, ANSI Emulation menu, 172
Active Emulation, 83
Reload paper, 34
Active Host, 82
REMOVE USED SPX message, 305, 324
Active IGP Emulation, 83
Report Status, Auto Switching submenu, 95
Active Protocol, 84
Request to Send
DBCS ASCII Mode, 83
RS-232, 246
DBCS ASCII Style, 83
Serial submenu, 103
DBCS CPI, 82
415
Requirements
SD CARD ERROR message, 306, 325
power, 19
SD Card, download files to, 276
printer site, 19
SD FILE EXISTS message, 306
Reset Cfg Names, 92
SD File System, ADVANCED USER Menu, 233
Reset Cmd CFG Ld, 145
SD FILESYS FULL Delete Files message, 306
ANSI Emulation menu, 171
SD FILESYS FULL File Too Big message, 306
Reset Cmd CFG Ld, PCL-II Emulation, 206
SD FILESYS WRITE message, 306
Resolution, 87, 212
SD INSERTED message, 306
Resp. Polarity
SD NOT FOUND message, 306
Centronics (Parallel) submenu, 99
SD READING message, 306
RESTORING BOOT CODE message, 305, 324
SD REMOVED message, 306
Ret. Status Port, ADVANCED USER Menu, 235
SD WRITE FAIL WRITE PROTECTED
RIB INVLD CMD* message, 305
message, 307
Ribbon Cartridge Specifications
SD WRITING message, 307
ASCII, 327
SDSC CARD NOT SUPPORTED
HD, 327
message, 307, 325
H-Series, 327
Second Char. Set, PCL-II Emulation, 204
Ribbon Cartridge, changing, 50
SECURITY KEY NOT DETECTED
Ribbon End Point, 90
message, 307, 325
Ribbon End Point, PRINTER CONTROL, 217
SECURITY VIOLATION message, 307, 325
RIBBON STALL message, 305
Select CPI, 84
RIBBON UNDER 2% message, 306
Select Downloaded TrueType Fonts, 279
Rot. Char Size, 189
Select Font, 177, 183
RS-232
SELECT key, 30
Clear to Send (CTS), 246
Select LPI, 84, 177
Data Carrier Detect (DCD), 246
Select SO Char, 179
Data Set Ready (DSR), 246
Sending Firmware in Download Mode, 264
Data Terminal Ready (DTR), 246
ethernet (LPR), 264
Receive Data (RD), 246
Parallel, 270
Request to Send (RTS), 246
Serial, 271
Transmit Data (TD), 246
USB, 264
RS-232 Serial Interface, 245
Serial Interface, RS-232, 245
Run Demo File, 280
Serial Matrix Character Set menu, 158
S
Serial Matrix Emulation, 155
Alt. Set 80-9F, 157
Save Config, 90, 91
Autowrap, 156
Save, Auto, 62
Character Set, 157
Saving new configurations, 63
Control Code 06, 156
Saving parameter settings, 54
Define CR Code, 156
Saving Printer’s Configuration, Quick Change
Define LF Code, 156
Memory Cartridge (QCMC), 357
ESC d command, 157
Scalable Size, 181
SCS COMMAND ERROR message, 325
416
Overstrike, 156
Printer Select, 156
Serial submenu, 100
Signals
Centronics Parallel Interface, 248
IEEE 1284 Parallel Interface, 250
Baud Rate, 102
Site requirements, 19
Buffer Size in K, 104
Skip Cmd Prefix, 177
Data Protocol, 101
Slash 0, 177, 188
Data Term Ready, 103
Slew Relative, P-Series XQ Emulation, 155
Framing Errors, 105
Slow Paper Slew, 90
Idle Response, 104
Slow Paper Slew, ADVANCED USER Menu, 234
Offline Process, 105
Software Build, DIAGNOSTICS, 241
One Char Enquiry, 104
SOFTWARE ERROR* CYCLE POWER
Parity, 103
message, 308
Poll Character, 104
Solutions, Frequent Problems, 289
Poll Response, 104
Special information, 16
Request to Send, 103
Specifications
Stop Bits 1, 103
interfaces, 332
Word Length, 103
label, 328
Serial, Sending Firmware, 271
paper, 328
Set Lock Key, ADVANCED USER Menu, 235
Speed print, 333
Set Sharing, ADVANCED USER Menu, 233
SPX FOUND, ERROR KEY NOT DETECTED
Set Text Orientn
message, 308, 325
3270 Params menu, 115
SPX NOT NEEDED OPTIONS ENABLED
5250 Params menu, 122
message, 308, 325
Setup, SureStak Power Paper Stacker, 338
STACK FAULT message, 308
SF ERROR message, 307, 325
STACKER FULL message, 308
SFCC d Command, 149
STACKER JAM message, 308
SFCC & Pwrup, 187
Stacker, power, 337
Power Up ^ F, 188
operation, 337
Power Up ^ PY, 188
Start Demo File, 281
Power Up ^ X, 188
Status Port Numb, PRINTER MGMT Menu, 242
VGL SFCC, 187
Stop Bits 1, Serial submenu, 103
SHUTL INV CMD * message, 307
Stop Demo File, 281
SHUTL INV PARM * message, 307
Submenu
SHUTL OVR SPEED* message, 307
SHUTTLE JAM message, 307
SHUTTLE STALL message, 308, 325
Shuttle Timeout, ADVANCED USER Menu, 233
IGP/PGL, 175
IGP/VGL, 186
Subnet mask
Ethernet Address Menu, 106
SHUTTLE TYPE NOT SUPPORTED*
Summary, CONFIG command, 368
message, 308
Supplies Department, 17, 371
Shuttle Type , DIAGNOSTICS, 241
417
U
SureStak Power Paper Stacker
loading, 341
setup, 338
Undef Char Subst, IPDS Emulations, 201
starting, 341
Unidirectional, PRINTER CONTROL, 218
Switch Out On, Auto Switching submenu, 95
Unload paper, 45
Symbol Set Print, PCL-II Emulation, 206
Unsolicited Rpt, LG Emulation, 210
SYS R/T ERROR message, 325
UP DRV. SHORT* message, 309
System Memory, DIAGNOSTICS, 240
UP or DOWN key, 31
T
UP + DOWN key, 31
UPC Descenders, 178, 189
TCB CORRUPTED* message, 309
Update PDF, 229
TCP PORT BUSY message, 309, 326
UPGRADED - REMOVE SPX* message, 309
Tear Bar Dist. (Distance), PRINTER
Upr. Case Select, P-Series XQ Emulation, 155
CONTROL, 217
USB Port, 246
Test Width, DIAGNOSTICS, 240
USB, Sending Firmware, 264
Three-Key Download Sequence, 263
User-Def Ratio, 179
V
Timeout, Auto Switching submenu, 95
TOF Action
Centronics (Parallel) submenu, 99
Var Form Adjust, 180
IEEE 1284 Parallel (Bidirectional) Submenu, 96
Var Form Type, 180
TOF key, 30
Vert Forms, 86
Translation Tbl
Vert Forms, LG Emulation, 208
3270 Params menu, 114
Ver. Erase Zone, 228
5250 Params menu, 121
VFU Select, 149
Transmit Data (TD), RS-232, 246
VFU Select, P-Series XQ Emulation, 154
Trickle Time
VGL SFCC, 187
Centronics (Parallel) submenu, 100
View Function, PRINTER CONTROL, 218
IEEE 1284 Parallel (Bidirectional) Submenu, 97
VIEW key, 29
Trickle Time, Auto Switching submenu, 95
Troubleshooting
frequent problems, 289
True Form Slew, 182
Voltage
ASCII, 331
H-Series, 332
VPA Check, IPDS Emulation, 200
W
True Vert 1/10, 189
TrueType Fonts, 277
print, 279
select, 279
TrueType Fonts, download, 277
Trunc Dyn Data, 183
Truncate Alpha, 189
Truncate PI Slew, ANSI Emulation menu, 172
Two-Key Download Sequence, 262
Typeface, 83
418
Warnings, 16
Web Page Download, 257, 273
Weight, printer, 329
WELD NOT DETECT message, 309
WELD SNSR ERROR message, 309
WELD SNSR MISSING message, 309
Width Limit, 191
Windows Driver Download, 259
Word Length, Serial submenu, 103
X
Compatibility Op, 116
Early Print Cmpl, 114
XXXX CHECKING PATTERN message, 309
Format Control, 118
XXXX MEMORY FAILURE message, 309
Host Override, 118
XXXX WRITING PATTERN message, 309
Intervention Req, 115
x/y BARCODES / Not Found message, 292
Max. Print Width, 118
Z
Zero Tear Pedestal (ZTP)
adjust paper guides, 344
clear paper jams, 353
forms type, 352
load paper, 346
menu, 351
overview, 343
paper jams, 353
position paper, 344
position paper out sensor, 348
set tear bar distance, 349
set top of form, 350
ZTP Data Time, 351
ZTP Function, 352
ZTP Platen Open, 351
ZTP TearDistance, 351
ZTP Wait Time, 351
ZTP Data Time, 82, 351
ZTP Function, 352
ZTP Platen Open, 351
ZTP SETTINGS, PRINTER CONTROL, 217
ZTP TearDistance, 82, 351
ZTP Wait Time, 82, 351
000 SHUTTLE TYPE NOT SUPPORTED*
message, 311
104 POWER SUPPLY HOT* message, 311
105 PRINTER HOT* message, 311
12 VOLT FAILED* message, 291
20 CPI Condensed, 131, 136
Epson FX Emulation, 164
Proprinter XL Emulation, 161
3270 Params, 112
3270 Params menu
Active Char Set, 114
Change Case, 115
Prt Partial Line, 114
PTX Transparent, 114
Set Text Orientn, 115
Translation Tbl, 114
401 BUFFER OVERRUN message, 311
402 CLEAR PAPER JAM message, 311
403 CLOSE PLATEN message, 311
409 FRAMING ERROR message, 311
410 LOAD PAPER message, 311
411 PARITY ERROR message, 311
414 RIBBON STALL message, 312
415 SHUTTLE JAM message, 312
416 STACKER FULL message, 312
417 STACKER JAM message, 312
418 RBN INK LOW message, 312
419 RBN INK OUT* message, 312
420 EXC RBN WEAR message, 312
423 OLD RIBBON message, 312
425 UNKNOWN RBN2 message, 312
427 CRTG MISSING message, 313
428 CRTG COMM ER message, 313
432 CRT NOT SET message, 313
435 NO WELD message, 313
437 REG MISSING message, 313
438 TIP MISMATCH message, 313
439 SHTL MISMATCH message, 313
445 SD INSERTED message, 313
446 SD REMOVED message, 314
447 SD FL EXIST message, 314
448 SD WRT. FAIL WRITE PROTECTED
message, 314
449 SD FILE WRITE message, 314
450 SD FILE FULL File Too Big message, 314
451 SD NOT FOUND message, 314
452 SD FILE FULL Delete Files message, 314
453 SD READING message, 314
419
454 SD WRITING message, 314
721 RIB INVLD CMD* message, 317
5250 Params, 119
723 SHUTL INV CMD* message, 317
5250 Params menu
724 SHUTL INV PARM* message, 317
Active Char Set, 121
725 SHUTL OVER SPEED* message, 317
Format Control, 123
727 SOFTWARE ERROR* message, 317
Graphic Chek Cod, 122
730 TCB CORRUPTED* message, 317
Graphic Chek Err, 122
733 DP FIFO Busy* message, 317
Host Override, 122
Max. Print Width, 123
Prt Partial Line, 121
PTX Transparent, 121
Set Text Orientn, 122
Translation Tbl, 121
607 CTL VOLT FAIL * message, 314
608 DRIVER CIRCUIT BAD message, 314
609 EXHAUST FAN CHECK message, 315
613 HAM. COIL BAD Message, 315
614 HAMMER BANK NOT INSTALLED
message, 315
615 HAMMER BANK CHECK Message, 315
617 LOWER DRIVER SHORT* message, 315
619 PAPER FEED DRIVER CIRCUIT*
message, 315
620 POWER VOLT CHECK* message, 315
622 SHUTTLE DRIVER CRCUIT* message, 315
623 STACK FAULT message, 316
624 UPPER DRIVER SHORT* message, 316
702 FIRMWARE ERROR message, 316
703 ILLEGAL EXTERNAL BUS ACC *
message, 316
704 ILLEGAL INSTRUCTION ACC* message, 316
705 ILLEGAL OPERAND ACCESS * message, 316
706 PAP BAD TABLE* message, 316
708 PAPER FIFO OVERFLOW* message, 316
709 PAPER FIFO UNDERFLOW* message, 316
710 PAP ILLGL ST* message, 316
712 PAP INVLD CMD* message, 316
713 PAP INVLD PARM* message, 316
717 PLAT INV CMD* message, 317
718 PLAT INV PARM* message, 317
719 PLAT INV STATE* message, 317
720 PROTECTED INSTRUCTION* message, 317
420
*256381-001*
256381-001D